Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
CAG2019-195 - Original - Maxon Furniture, Inc. - Office Cubicle Furniture for New Public Works Operations Modular Building - 04/05/2019
`�- Records Management Document CONTRACT COVER SHEET This is to be completed by the Contract Manager prior to submission to the City Clerk's Office. All portions are to be completed. If you have questions, please contact the City Clerks Office at 253-86-5725. Vendor Name: Maxon Furniture, Inc. Vendor Number (JDE): !3L(oY�3 Contract Number (City Clerk): Category: -Contract Agreement Sub-Category (if applicable): None Project Name: Office Cubicle Furniture for new PWO Modular Building 03/29/19 12/31/19 Contract Execution Date: Termination Date: Contract Manager: Nancy Clary Department: Parks Contract Amount: $29, 178.26 Budgeted: Fv-(] Grant? Part of NEW Budget: Local: ❑ State: ❑ Federal: Related to a New Position: Notice required prior to public disclosure? Basis for Selection of Contractor? Cooperative Purchase Approval Authority: ❑ Director 17 Mayor City Council Other Details: KIENT W.411!N OT Q1 GOODS & SERVICES AGREEMENT between the City of Kent and Maxon Furniture, Inc, THIS AGREEMENT is made by and between the City of Kent, a Washington municipal corporation (hereinafter the "City"), and Maxon Furniture, Inc, organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, located and doing business at 408 East Second Street, Muscatine, IA 52761, Sherry Hunt, 563 271-0871, Hunts@maxonmail.com (hereinafter the "Vendor"). AGREEMENT I. DESCRIPTION OF WORK. Vendor shall provide the following goods and materials and/or perform the following services for the City: Vendor will provide and install office r.tihicle furniture for the new Public Works modular building located at the PW Shops location at 5821 S. 240th Street in Kent, in accordance with the space configuration and parts identification provided for in Space Planning No. MSP-14334, dated February 18, 2019, and attached and incorporated as Exhibit A. Vendor will provide the City with all contract discounts, terms, and conditions offered under Vendor's contract with the United States General Services Administration, which are attached and incorporated as Exhibit B. Under the pricing provided for by Exhibit B, the total cost of the parts, shipping, and installation of the PW modular building furniture is as provided for in the attached and incorporated Exhibit C. Vendor acknowledges and understands that it is not the City's exclusive provider of these goods, materials, or services and that the City maintains its unqualified right to obtain these goods, materials, and services through other sources. II. TIME OF COMPLETION. Upon the effective date of this Agreement, Vendor shall complete the work and provide all goods, materials, and services by May 31, 2019. III. COMPENSATION. The City shall pay the Vendor an amount not to exceed $29,178.26, including applicable Washington State Sales Tax, for the goods, materials, and services contemplated in this Agreement. The City shall pay the Vendor the following amounts according to the following schedule: GOODS &SERVICES AGREEMENT - 1 (Over$20,000, including WSST) Full payment is due within 30 days from the date of the invoice. If the City objects to all or any portion of an invoice, it shall notify Vendor and reserves the option to only pay that portion of the invoice not in dispute. In that event, the parties will immediately make every effort to settle the disputed portion. A. Defectiye or Unauthorized Work. The City reserves its right to withhold payment from Vendor for any defective or unauthorized goods, materials or services. If Vendor is unable, for any reason, to complete any part of this Agreement, the City may obtain the goods, materials or services from other sources, and Vendor shall be liable to the City for any additional costs incurred by the City. "Additional costs" shall mean all reasonable costs, including legal costs and attorney fees, incurred by the City beyond the maximum Agreement price specified above. The City further reserves its right to deduct these additional costs incurred to complete this Agreement with other sources, from any and all amounts due or to become due the Vendor. B. Final Payment: Waiver of Claims. VENDOR'S ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT SHALL CONSTITUTE A WAIVER OF CLAIMS, EXCEPT THOSE PREVIOUSLY AND PROPERLY MADE AND IDENTIFIED BY VENDOR AS UNSETTLED AT THE TIME REQUEST FOR FINAL PAYMENT IS MADE. IV. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. The parties intend that an Independent Contractor- Employer Relationship will be created by this Agreement. By their execution of this Agreement, and in accordance with Ch. 51.08 RCW, the parties make the following representations: A. The Vendor has the ability to control and direct the performance and details of its work, the City being interested only in the results obtained under this Agreement. B. The Vendor maintains and pays for its own place of business from which Vendor's services under this Agreement will be performed. C. The Vendor has an established and independent business that is eligible for a business deduction for federal income tax purposes that existed before the City retained Vendor's services, or the Vendor is engaged in an independently established trade, occupation, profession, or business of the same nature as that involved under this Agreement. D. The Vendor is responsible for filing as they become due all necessary tax documents with appropriate federal and state agencies, including the Internal Revenue Service and the state Department of Revenue. E. The Vendor has registered its business and established an account with the state Department of Revenue and other state agencies as may be required by Vendor's business, and has obtained a Unified Business Identifier (UBI) number from the State of Washington. F. The Vendor maintains a set of books dedicated to the expenses and earnings of its business. GOODS & SERVICES AGREEMENT - 2 (Over$20,000, including WSST) V. TERMINATION. Either party may terminate this Agreement, with or without cause, upon providing the other party thirty (30) days written notice at its address set forth on the signature block of this Agreement. VI. CHANGES. The City may issue a written amendment for any change in the goods, materials or services to be provided during the performance of this Agreement. If the Vendor determines, for any reason, that an amendment is necessary, Vendor must submit a written amendment request to the person listed in the notice provision section of this Agreement, section XIV(D), within fourteen (14) calendar days of the date Vendor knew or should have known of the facts and events giving rise to the requested change. If the City determines that the change increases or decreases the Vendor's costs or time for performance, the City will make an equitable adjustment. The City will attempt, in good faith, to reach agreement with the Vendor on all equitable adjustments. However, if the parties are unable to agree, the City will determine the equitable adjustment as it deems appropriate. The Vendor shall proceed with the amended work upon receiving either a written amendment from the City or an oral order from the City before actually receiving the written amendment. If the Vendor fails to require an amendment within the time allowed, the Vendor waives its right to make any claim or submit subsequent amendment requests for that portion of the contract work. If the Vendor disagrees with the equitable adjustment, the Vendor must complete the amended work; however, the Vendor may elect to protest the adjustment as provided in subsections A through E of Section VII, Claims, below. The Vendor accepts all requirements of an amendment by: (1) endorsing it, (2) writing a separate acceptance, or (3) not protesting in the way this section provides. An amendment that is accepted by Vendor as provided in this section shall constitute full payment and final settlement of all claims for contract time and for direct, indirect and consequential costs, including costs of delays related to any work, either covered or affected by the change. VII. CLAIMS. If the Vendor disagrees with anything required by an amendment, another written order, or an oral order from the City, including any direction, instruction, interpretation, or determination by the City, the Vendor may file a claim as provided in this section. The Vendor shall give written notice to the City of all claims within fourteen (14) calendar days of the occurrence of the events giving rise to the claims, or within fourteen (14) calendar days of the date the Vendor knew or should have known of the facts or events giving rise to the claim, whichever occurs first . Any claim for damages, additional payment for any reason, or extension of time, whether under this Agreement or otherwise, shall be conclusively deemed to have been waived by the Vendor unless a timely written claim is made in strict accordance with the applicable provisions of this Agreement. At a minimum, a Vendor's written claim shall include the information set forth in subsections A, items 1 through 5 below. FAILURE TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE, WRITTEN NOTIFICATION OF CLAIM WITHIN THE TIME ALLOWED SHALL BE AN ABSOLUTE WAIVER OF ANY CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THE FACTS OR EVENTS SURROUNDING THAT CLAIM OR CAUSED BY THAT DELAY. A. Notice of Claim. Provide a signed written notice of claim that provides the following information: 1. The date of the Vendor's claim; 2. The nature and circumstances that caused the claim; 3. The provisions in this Agreement that support the claim; 4. The estimated dollar cost, if any, of the claimed work and how that estimate was determined; and 5. An analysis of the progress schedule showing the schedule change or disruption if the Vendor is asserting a schedule change or disruption. B. Records. The Vendor shall keep complete records of extra costs and time incurred as a result of the asserted events giving rise to the claim. The City shall have access to any of the Vendor's records needed for evaluating the protest. GOODS & SERVICES AGREEMENT - 3 (Over$20,000, including WSST) The City will evaluate all claims, provided the procedures in this section are followed. If the City determines that a claim is valid, the City will adjust payment for work or time by an equitable adjustment. No adjustment will be made for an invalid protest. C. Vendor's Duty to Complete Protested Work. In spite of any claim, the Vendor shall proceed promptly to provide the goods, materials and services required by the City under this Agreement. D. Failure to Protest Constitutes Waiver. By not protesting as this section provides, the Vendor also waives any additional entitlement and accepts from the City any written or oral order (including directions, instructions, interpretations, and determination). E. Failure to Follow Procedures Constitutes Waiver. By failing to follow the procedures of this section, the Vendor completely waives any claims for protested work and accepts from the City any written or oral order (including directions, instructions, interpretations, and determination). VIII. LIMITATION OF ACTIONS. VENDOR MUST, IN ANY EVENT, FILE ANY LAWSUIT ARISING FROM OR CONNECTED WITH THIS AGREEMENT WITHIN 120 CALENDAR DAYS FROM THE DATE THE CONTRACT WORK IS COMPLETE OR VENDOR'S ABILITY TO FILE THAT SUIT SHALL BE FOREVER BARRED. THIS SECTION FURTHER LIMITS ANY APPLICABLE STATUTORY LIMITATIONS PERIOD. IX. WARRANTY. Vendor warrants that it will faithfully and satisfactorily perform all work provided under this Agreement in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. In addition to any other warranty provided for at law or herein, this Agreement is additionally subject to all warranty provisions established under the Uniform Commercial Code, Title 62A, Revised Code of Washington. Vendor warrants goods are merchantable, are fit for the particular purpose for which they were obtained, and will perform in accordance with their specifications and Vendor's representations to City. The Vendor shall promptly correct all defects in workmanship and materials: (1) when Vendor knows or should have known of the defect, or (2) upon Vendor's receipt of notification from the City of the existence or discovery of the defect. In the event any part of the goods are repaired, only original replacement parts shall be used—rebuilt or used parts will not be acceptable. When defects are corrected, the warranty for that portion of the work shall extend for an additional year beyond the original warranty period applicable to the overall work. The Vendor shall begin to correct any defects within seven (7) calendar days of its receipt of notice from the City of the defect. If the Vendor does not accomplish the corrections within a reasonable time as determined by the City, the City may complete the corrections and the Vendor shall pay all costs incurred by the City in order to accomplish the correction. X. DISCRIMINATION. In the hiring of employees for the performance of work under this Agreement or any sub-contract, the Vendor, its sub-contractors, or any person acting on behalf of the Vendor or sub-contractor shall not, by reason of race, religion, color, sex, age, sexual orientation, national origin, or the presence of any sensory, mental, or physical disability, discriminate against any person who is qualified and available to perform the work to which the employment relates. Vendor shall execute the attached City of Kent Equal Employment Opportunity Policy Declaration, Comply with City Administrative Policy 1.2, and upon completion of the contract work, file the attached Compliance Statement. XI. INDEMNIFICATION. Vendor shall defend, indemnify and hold the City, its officers, officials, employees, agents and volunteers harmless from any and all claims, injuries, damages, losses or suits, including all legal costs and attorney fees, arising out of or in connection with the Vendor's performance of this Agreement, except for that portion of the injuries and damages caused by the City's negligence. The City's inspection or acceptance of any of Vendor's work when completed shall not be grounds to avoid any of these covenants of indemnification. GOODS & SERVICES AGREEMENT - 4 (Over$20,000, including WSST) IT IS FURTHER SPECIFICALLY AND EXPRESSLY UNDERSTOOD THAT THE INDEMNIFICATION PROVIDED HEREIN CONSTITUTES THE VENDOR'S WAIVER OF IMMUNITY UNDER INDUSTRIAL INSURANCI , TITLE 51 RCW, SOLELY FOR THE PURPOSES OF THIS INDEMNIFICATION. THE PARTIES FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THEY HAVE MUTUALLY NEGOTIATED THIS WAIVER. In the event Vendor refuses tender of defense in any suit or any claim, if that tender was made pursuant to this indemnification clause, and if that refusal is subsequently determined by a court having jurisdiction (or other agreed tribunal) to have been a wrongful refusal on the Vendor's part, then Vendor shall pay all the City's costs for defense, including all reasonable expert witness fees and reasonable attorneys' fees, plus the City's legal costs and fees incurred because there was a wrongful refusal on the Vendor's part. The provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement. XII. INSURANCE. The Vendor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the Agreement, insurance of the types and in the amounts described in Exhibit D attached and incorporated by this reference. XIII. WORK PERFORMED AT VENDOR'S RISK. Vendor shall take all necessary precautions and shall be responsible for the safety of its employees, agents, and subcontractors in the performance of the contract work and shall utilize all protection necessary for that purpose. All work shall be done at Vendor's own risk, and Vendor shad be responsible for any loss of or damage to materials, tools, or other articles used or held for use in connection with the work. XIV. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS. A. Recyclable Materials. Pursuant to Chapter 3.80 of the Kent City Code, the City requires its contractors and consultants to use recycled and recyclable products whenever practicable. A price preference may be available for any designated recycled product. B. Non-Waiver of Breach. The failure of the City to insist upon strict performance of any of the covenants and agreements contained in this Agreement, or to exercise any option conferred by this Agreement in one or more instances shall not be construed to be a waiver or relinquishment of those covenants, agreements or options, and the same shall be and remain in full force and effect. C. Resolution of Disputes and Governing Law, This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Washington. If the parties are unable to settle any dispute, difference or claim arising from the parties' performance of this Agreement, the exclusive means of resolving that dispute, difference or claim, shall only be by filing suit exclusively under the venue, rules and jurisdiction of the King County Superior Court, King County, Washington, unless the parties agree in writing to an alternative dispute resolution process. In any claim or lawsuit for damages arising from the parties' performance of this Agreement, each party shall pay all its legal costs and attorney's fees incurred in defending or bringing such claim or lawsuit, including all appeals, in addition to any other recovery or award provided by law; provided, however, nothing in this paragraph shall be construed to limit the City's right to indemnification under Section XI of this Agreement. D. Written Notiigg. All communications regarding this Agreement shall be sent to the parties at the addresses listed on the signature page of the Agreement, unless notified to the contrary. Any written notice hereunder shall become effective three (3) business days after the date of mailing by registered or certified mail, and shall be deemed sufficiently given if sent to the addressee at the address stated in this Agreement or such other address as may be hereafter specified in writing. E. Assignment. Any assignment of this Agreement by either party without the written consent of the non-assigning party shall be void. If the non-assigning party gives its consent to any assignment, the terms of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect and no further assignment shall be made without additional written consent. GOODS & SERVICES AGREEMENT - 5 (Over$20,000, including WSST) F. Modifiotion. No waiver, alteration, or modification of any of the provisions of this Agreement shall be binding unless in writing and signed by a duly authorized representative of the City and Vendor. G. Entire Agreement. The written provisions and terms of this Agreement, together with any Exhibits attached hereto, shall supersede all prior verbal statements of any officer or other representative of the City, and such statements shall not be effective or be construed as entering into or forming a part of or altering in any manner this Agreement. All of the above documents are hereby made a part of this Agreement. However, should any language in any of the Exhibits to this Agreement conflict with any language contained in this Agreement, the terms of this Agreement shall prevail. H. C7C1 aUnce with Laws. The Vendor agrees to comply with all federal, state, and municipal laws, rules, and regulations that are now effective or in the future become applicable to Vendor's business, equipment, and personnel engaged in operations covered by this Agreement or accruing out of the performance of those operations. I. Public Records Act. The Vendor acknowledges that the City is a public agency subject to the Public Records Act codified in Chapter 42.56 of the Revised Code of Washington and documents, notes, emails, and other records prepared or gathered by the Vendor in its performance of this Agreement may be subject to public review and disclosure, even if those records are not produced to or possessed by the City of Kent. As such, the Vendor agrees to cooperate fully with the City in satisfying the City's duties and obligations under the Public Records Act. J. City Business License Required. Prior to commencing the tasks described in Section I, Contractor agrees to provide proof of a current city of Kent business license pursuant to Chapter 5.01 of the Kent City Code. K. Cpunterparts and Signatures by Fax or Email. This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall constitute an original, and all of which will together constitute this one Agreement. Further, upon executing this Agreement, either party may deliver the signature page to the other by fax or email and that signature shall have the same force and effect as if the Agreement bearing the original signature was received in person. IN WITNESS, the parties below execute this Agreement, which shall become effective on the last date entered below. All acts consistent with the authority of this Agreement and prior to its effective date are ratified and affirmed, and the terms of the Agreement shall be deemed to have applied. VENDOR: CITY OF KENT: (signature) (signature Print Name: Sherri Hint Print Name: D ( w Its Manager of Sales Operatioxt&___._.__....__ (title) n DATE: 3/29/1,9 DATE: NOTICES TO BE SENT TO: NOTICES TO BE SENT TO: VENDOR: CITY OF KENT: Sherry Hunt Nancy Clary Maxon Furniture, Inc. City of Kent 2210 Second Avenue 220 Fourth Avenue South Muscatine, IA 52761 Kent, WA 98032 GOODS & SERVICES AGREEMENT - 6 (Over$20,000, including WSST) [253 740-0383 (telephone) 563-271-0871 (facsimile) (253) 856-5084 (telephone) 253 856-6080 facsimile APPROVED AS FORM: Kent aw ment ATT Kent City Clerk GOODS &SERVICES AGREEMENT - 7 (Over$20,000, Including WSST) DECLARATION CITY OF KENT EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY POLICY The City of Kent is committed to conform to Federal and State laws regarding equal opportunity. As such all contractors, subcontractors and suppliers who perform work with relation to this Agreement shall comply with the regulations of the City's equal employment opportunity policies. The following questions specifically identify the requirements the City deems necessary for any contractor, subcontractor or supplier on this specific Agreement to adhere to. An affirmative response is required on all of the following questions for this Agreement to be valid and binding. If any contractor, subcontractor or supplier willfully misrepresents themselves with regard to the directives outlines, it will be considered a breach of contract and it will be at the City's sole determination regarding suspension or termination for all or part of the Agreement; The questions are as follows: 1. I have read the attached City of Kent administrative policy number 1.2. 2. During the time of this Agreement I will not discriminate in employment on the basis of sex, race, color, national origin, age, or the presence of all sensory, mental or physical disability. 3. During the time of this Agreement the prime contractor will provide a written statement to all new employees and subcontractors indicating commitment as an equal opportunity employer. 4. During the time of the Agreement I, the prime contractor, will actively consider hiring and promotion of women and minorities. 5. Before acceptance of this Agreement, an adherence statement will be signed by me, the Prime Contractor, that the Prime Contractor complied with the requirements as set forth above. By signing below, I agree to fulfill the five requirements referenced above. y: For: Maxon Furniture Inc Title: Manager,of Sales Operations Date: 3/29/19 EEO COMPLIANCE DOCUMENTS - 1 of 3 CITY OF KENT ADMINISTRATIVE POLICY NUMBER: 1.2 EFFECTIVE DATE: January 1, 1998 SUBJECT: MINORITY AND WOMEN SUPERSEDES: April 1, 1996 CONTRACTORS APPROVED BY Jim White, Mayor POLICY: Equal employment opportunity requirements for the City of Kent will conform to federal and state laws. All contractors, subcontractors, consultants and suppliers of the City must guarantee equal employment opportunity within their organization and, if holding Agreements with the City amounting to $10,000 or more within any given year, must take the following affirmative steps: 1. Provide a written statement to all new employees and subcontractors indicating commitment as an equal opportunity employer. 2. Actively consider for promotion and advancement available minorities and women. Any contractor, subcontractor, consultant or supplier who willfully disregards the City's nondiscrimination and equal opportunity requirements shall be considered in breach of contract and subject to suspension or termination for all or part of the Agreement. Contract Compliance Officers will be appointed by the Directors of Planning, Parks, and Public Works Departments to assume the following duties for their respective departments. 1. Ensuring that contractors, subcontractors, consultants, and suppliers subject to these regulations are familiar with the regulations and the City's equal employment opportunity policy. 2. Monitoring to assure adherence to federal, state and local laws, policies and guidelines. EEO COMPLIANCE DOCUMENTS - 2 of 3 CITY OF KENT EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY COMPLIANCE STATEMENT This form shall be filled out AFTER COMPLETION of this project by the Contractor awarded the Agreement. I, the undersigned, a duly represented agent of Company, hereby acknowledge and declare that the before-mentioned company was the prime contractor for the Agreement known as that was entered into on the (date), between the firm I represent and the City of Kent. I declare that I complied fully with all of the requirements and obligations as outlined in the City of Kent Administrative Policy 1.2 and the Declaration City of Kent Equal Employment Opportunity Policy that was part of the before-mentioned Agreement. By: For: Title: Date: EEO COMPLIANCE DOCUMENTS - 3 of 3 � ox Sx �� y yf"� Izi�a!c"a STATE OF WASHITO DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES Prevailing Wage Policy Memorandum Date: April 6,2015 To: All interested parties From: Jim Christensen,Industrial Statistician &Program Manager Subject: Office cubicles and furniture Policy Disclaimer This policy is designed to provide general information in regard to the current opinions of the Department of Labor&Industries on the subject matter covered.This policy is intended as a guide in the interpretation and application of the relevant statutes,regulations,and policies,and may not be applicable to all situations.This policy does not replace applicable RCW or WAC standards.If additional clarification is required, the Program Manager for Prevailing Wage should be consulted. This document is effective as of the date of print and supersedes all previous interpretations and guidelines.Changes may occur after the date of print due to subsequent legislation,administrative rule,or judicial proceedings.The user is encouraged to notify the Program Manager to provide or receive updated information.This document will remain in effect until rescinded,modified,or withdrawn by the Director or his or her designee. Work upon a public work requires prevailing wages.For purposes of Washington State prevailing wage regulations, chapter 39.12 RCW and chapter 296-127 WAC, some work on office cubicles for state or municipal agencies does not amount to work upon a public work(and therefore would not require prevailing wages). This policy addresses prevailing wage requirements for the assembly, installation,disassembly and delivery of cubicles,furniture,modular furniture systems,partitions or a similar product. The moving,transport, delivery, assembly and placement of furniture(chairs,tables, cabinets,modular work stations, etc.)does not require the payment of prevailing wages with the following three exceptions: 1. Attachment to a building or other structure requires the payment of prevailing wages. Electrical work(including connecting electricity between modular work station panels),plumbing work and attachment of furniture(work station panels,stadium seats, etc.)are examples of attaching furniture to a structure. 2. Disassembly, moving and reassembly necessitated by a public works contract. For example, furniture sometimes must be moved in order to accomplish work such as painting, floor covering, ceiling work, etc. This furniture-handling must be paid at prevailing wage rates. 3. The transport and delivery of nonstandard items to be installed as fixtures including custom- fabricated furniture made and installed to contract specifications must be paid at prevailing wage rates. 04/06/2015 Pagel EXHIBIT A City of Kent Modular Bldg Space Planning#: MSP-14334 Position to Win. Date: 2/19/2019 Notes: "Seating not included in quote** Pricing only valid for January 2019 Price Book Grade A sceen fabric-CORE/1-1 laminate-CORE paint K Beeler 1.25%Surcharge Not Applied Line # Part Number Part Description Qty Purchase Ext Purchase 1 M-BS72 Bookcase-72H 5-Shelf 5 $ 218.15 $ 1,090.75 $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 2 M-LF336-A Ridgeline Lateral-3-Dwr 36W A-P 1 $ 381.98 $ 381.98 ull $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 3 M-LFW71836E Lateral File Worktop 18Dx36W 1 $79.23 $79.23 Edgeband $(L1STD) L1 standard Lam Opts Undecided LAMINATE Option Undecided EDGE Option 4 M-MDCRK29 Maxon Desking Return Bracket 6 $ 21.80 $ 130.80 $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 5 M-MDDS2024F Maxon Desk Screen 20Hx24W 28 $ 100.51 $ 2,814.28 Fabric $(A) Grd A Fab Undecided FABRIC Option $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Not intended for installation or construction.Dealer has ultimate responsibility for accuracy and correctness of component counts&measurements.Dealer shall verify and confirm all site dimensions and suitability of products and applications consistent with published guidelines and applicable codes.All plans,drawings and specifications are property of Maxon Furniture,Inc.and may not be reproduced without written consent. MSP-14334 City of Kent Modular Bldg Page 1 of 6 Line # Part Number Part Description Qty Purchase Ext Purchase Undecided PAINT Option 6 M-MDDS2036F Maxon Desk Screen 20Hx36W 2 $ 113.32 $ 226.64 Fabric $(A) Grd A Fab Undecided FABRIC Option $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 7 M-MDDS2054F Maxon Desk Screen 20Hx54W 4 $ 120.75 $483.00 Fabric $(A) Grd A Fab Undecided FABRIC Option $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 8 M-MDDS2060F Maxon Desk Screen 20Hx60W 2 $ 123.18 $246.36 Fabric $(A) Grd A Fab Undecided FABRIC Option $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 9 M-MDEP24 Maxon Desking End Panel Leg 24" 30 $41.87 $ 1,256.10 $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 10 M-MDEP24 Maxon Desking End Panel Leg 24" 32 $41.87 $ 1,339.84 $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 11 M-MDMP30HP Maxon Desking Modesty Panel30 2 $25.95 $ 51.90 " Half Mod Not intended for installation or construction.Dealer has ultimate responsibility for accuracy and correctness of component counts&measurements.Dealer shall verify and confirm all site dimensions and suitability of products and applications consistent with published guidelines and applicable codes.All plans,drawings and specifications are property of Maxon Furniture,Inc.and may not be reproduced without written consent. 00 MSP-14334 City of Kent Modular Bldg Page 2 of 6 EXHIBIT A Line # Part Number Part Description Qty Purchase Ext Purchase $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 12 M-MDMP36HP Maxon Desking Modesty Panel36 2 $ 28.89 $ 57.78 " Half Mod $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 13 M-MDMP36FP Maxon Desking Modesty Panel36 4 $30.97 $ 123.88 " Full Mod. $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 14 M-MDMP54FP Maxon Desking Modesty Panel54 8 $ 34.60 $ 276.80 " Full Mod. $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 15 M-MDMP54HP Maxon Desking Modesty Panel 54 18 $32.70 $ 588.60 " Half Mod $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 16 M-MDMP60HP Maxon Desking Modesty Panel60 2 $ 33.74 $ 67.48 " Half Mod $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 17 M-MDMP60FP Maxon Desking Modesty Panel 60 4 $35.98 $ 143.92 " Full Mod. $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 18 M-MDRS2024F Maxon Desk Return Screen 20Hx2 8 $ 100.51 $ 804.08 2W Fabric $(A) Grd A Fab Not intended for installation or construction.Dealer has ultimate responsibility for accuracy and correctness of component counts&measurements.Dealer shall verify and confirm all site dimensions and suitability of products and applications consistent with published guidelines and applicable codes.All plans,drawings and specifications are property of Maxon Furniture,Inc.and may not be reproduced without written consent. MSP-14334 City of Kent Modular Bldg Page 3 of 6 EXHIBIT A Line # Part Number Part Description Qty Purchase Ext Purchase Undecided FABRIC Option $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 19 M-MDSL29 Universal Shared C-Leg 6 $ 57.78 $346.68 $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 20 M-PP4860RE Prepare RECTT48Dx60W No 2 $ 146.01 $292.02 Power Caddy $(L1STD) L1 Standard Lam Opts Undecided LAMINATE Option Undecided EDGE Option 21 M-PPBAR50 Prepare T Bas Stretcher Bar-50" 2 $43.25 $86.50 $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 22 M-PPSC60 Prepare External Table Top Sup 2 $43.25 $ 86.50 Chn148" 23 M-PPT34FG Prepare Large T Seated Height w/ 2 $ 130.96 $261.92 Glides(pair) $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 24 M-SYP20B-A Sys&Desk Univ Pedestal20Dx15 28 $ 117.81 $3,298.68 Wx28H BBF A-Pull $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 25 M-URW2424 Univ Rec WS 24 x 24 2 $ 56.92 $ 113.84 $(L1STD) L1 Standard Lam Opts Not intended for installation or construction.Dealer has ultimate responsibility for accuracy and correctness of component counts&measurements.Dealer shall verify and confirm all site dimensions and suitability of products and applications consistent with published guidelines and applicable codes.All plans,drawings and specifications are property of Maxon Furniture,Inc.and may not be reproduced without written consent. 00 MSP-14334 City of Kent Modular Bldg Page 4 of 6 EXHIBIT A Line # Part Number Part Description Qty Purchase Ext Purchase Undecided LAMINATE Option Undecided EDGE Option 26 M-URW2436 Univ Rec WS 24 x 36 6 $ 64.01 $384.06 $(L1STD) L1Standard Lam Opts Undecided LAMINATE Option Undecided EDGE Option 27 M-URW2448 Univ Rec WS 24 x 48 4 $72.66 $290.64 $(L1STD) L1 Standard Lam Opts Undecided LAMINATE Option Undecided EDGE Option 28 M-URW2454 Univ Rec WS 24 x 54 22 $ 75.77 $ 1,666.94 $(L1STD) L1Standard Lam Opts Undecided LAMINATE Option Undecided EDGE Option 29 M-URW2460 Univ Rec WS 24 x 60 6 $79.58 $477.48 $(L1STD) L1Standard Lam Opts Undecided LAMINATE Option Undecided EDGE Option 30 M-UWMSOH1524F Univ Wall MT OH Cab 15Hx24W 2 $ 106.22 $212.44 Flipper Pnt Door $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 31 M-UWMSOH1530F Univ Wall MT OH Cab 15Hx30W 12 $ 110.37 $ 1,324.44 Flipper Pnt Door $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Not intended for installation or construction.Dealer has ultimate responsibility for accuracy and correctness of component counts&measurements.Dealer shall verify and confirm all site dimensions and suitability of products and applications consistent with published guidelines and applicable codes.All plans,drawings and specifications are property of Maxon Furniture,Inc.and may not be reproduced without written consent. MSP-14334 City of Kent Modular Bldg Page 5 of 6 EXHIBIT A Line# Part Number Part Description Qty Purchase Ext Purchase Undecided PAINT Option 32 M-UWMSOH1536F Univ Wall MT OH Cab 151-106W 11 $ 116.95 $ 1,286.45 Flipper Pnt Door $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option Group Total Purchase: $20,292.01 Ext Volume: 1,059.50 Project Total Purchase: $20,292.01 Ext. Weight: 7,931.20 Not intended for installation or construction.Dealer has ultimate responsibility for accuracy and correctness of component counts&measurements.Dealer shall verify and confirm all site dimensions and suitability of products and applications consistent with published guidelines and applicable codes.All plans,drawings and specifications are property of Maxon Furniture,Inc.and may not be reproduced without written consent. opw MSP-14334 City of Kent Modular Bldg Page 6 of 6 Cb �;4k Em a�E03 N rno LLNoEd m a oz� mZ'o rvg g E U) c 0D a"`EE c Z mY N a.1 c`E°od n - m &d d 0 8 � a N c� `o E - t M� m W 2 „0•,9 y ® H ®� F W FEP io 20x24Fa i < 5t 0 -v 0 0 -v YLxOi JIzvz 9t- „E Z L '°drexaz m d31 H ® s V56 HtL VBS HLL „0-,9 i2H san �2H ssn 2z�san r"iro N 20x24F eq 20x24F 2ox24Fr W ;r V mn ® ''. o e e � L L Q d 3J > g p a 0 'a °o d o o d o 98F Ci 60F ' ® BOF ®dgm vtae[ 6C%9� ,A-,B .0-2 3 �n 3 M N � <A EcE��cy 10"�av`oco'o Q O L H o w u n ryt N J N X N G X O xi d N`;N u a a o rY (� « 29dcg o�..caa d f o m E C 2 Gl a N a°$'o m1. .1mI �M d O O ❑ VV1 it c� M o f 2 .Z4 M It Ag, n OF Mo— WMMd W �t a b r o � N. .0,4 N C N iG Z ,a Lk I a o � ; a o a b � m � b 4 e N N oil d Ov U. f n b i IN Lv 3 °w zmxa F.LL I� a y a m4 i I ° o � _ e a 6b LL e a x o LLLL '•q.. b in o � g E � let LL ,AL•,LL ,AL•dL „9•,8 Q � U Y $O m �. �$ �myDo ua cd« � W m 3 N cg m M N m to cSe 2Sa'E 5' a�v c�.. e""� o g'� �i2 E 7 CO m 3E!z4 tv�'�o�' ' Q o LL NNE m F pNLo��u cmc3An xE3= o u�i a�io O E d y a z �'cotn lad o m N a ? a 2 umE z m3 Y o N a'��amo��=c°c �0�'u8 dE m W x0 W 0 0 0 i 0 0 / o0 0 v � 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ° o o ° o ° \ o 0 1 o o � o i 0 0 0 0 0] m c y p E m aa wm �2��Nmd=3�A�8��NEa; co � cE��cm6��nnwyoco-, Q c u N d G H (o cli° O m 0 mN o a cl wI au L=ao o".o` dmR`,o` umE E a 'a Ti vi m ' Y O N vcQ$AE�.�c —uia '_�u u Znu'rn�10ocv c 0 Wo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 � 0 0 0 i\ 0 0 0 0 0 0 r 0 0 0 � 0 0 \ 0 0 0 EXHIBIT A City of Kent Modular Bldg f 6"- 0 Position to Win. Space Planning#: MSP-14334 Date: 2/19/2019 Notes: **Seating not included in quote** Pricing only valid for January 2019 Price Book Grade A sceen fabric-CORE/1-1 laminate-CORE paint K Beeler 1.25%Surcharge Not Applied Line # Part Number Part Description Qty List Ext List 1 M-BS72 Bookcase-72H 5-Shelf 5 $ 1,261.00 $6,305.00 $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 2 M-LF336-A Ridgeline Lateral-3-Dwr 36W A-P 1 $ 2,208.00 $2,208.00 ull $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 3 M-LFW71836E Lateral File Worktop 18Dx36W 1 $ 458.00 $458.00 Edgeband $(L1STD) L1Standard Lam Opts Undecided LAMINATE Option Undecided EDGE Option 4 M-MDCRK29 Maxon Desking Return Bracket 6 $ 126.00 $756.00 $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 5 M-MDDS2024F Maxon Desk Screen 20Hx24W 28 $ 581.00 $16,268.00 Fabric $(A) Grd A Fab Undecided FABRIC Option $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Not intended for installation or construction.Dealer has ultimate responsibility for accuracy and correctness of component counts&measurements.Dealer shall verify and confirm all site dimensions and suitability of products and applications consistent with published guidelines and applicable codes.All plans,drawings and specifications are property of Maxon Furniture,Inc.and may not be reproduced without written consent. MSP-14334 City of Kent Modular Bldg Page 1 of 6 EXHIBIT A Line # Part Number Part Description Qty List Ext List Undecided PAINT Option 6 M-MDDS2036F Maxon Desk Screen 20Hx36W 2 $ 655.00 $1,310.00 Fabric $(A) Grd A Fab Undecided FABRIC Option $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 7 M-MDDS2054F Maxon Desk Screen 20Hx54W 4 $ 698.00 $2,792.00 Fabric $(A) Grd A Fab Undecided FABRIC Option $(CORE) MAX Core Or Opts Undecided PAINT Option 8 M-MDDS2060F Maxon Desk Screen 20Hx60W 2 $ 712.00 $1,424.00 Fabric $(A) Grd A Fab Undecided FABRIC Option $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 9 M-MDEP24 Maxon Desking End Panel Leg 24" 30 $ 242.00 $7,260.00 $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 10 M-MDEP24 Maxon Desking End Panel Leg 24" 32 $ 242.00 $7,744.00 $(CORE) MAX Core Or Opts Undecided PAINT Option 11 M-MDMP30HP Maxon Desking Modesty Panel 30 2 $ 150.00 $300.00 " Half Mod Not intended for installation or construction.Dealer has ultimate responsibility for accuracy and correctness of component counts&measurements.Dealer shall verify and confirm all site dimensions and suitability of products and applications consistent with published guidelines and applicable codes.All plans,drawings and specifications are property of Maxon Furniture,Inc.and may not be reproduced without written consent. MSP-14334 City of Kent Modular Bldg Page 2 of 6 EXHIBIT A Line # Part Number Part Description Qty List Ext List $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 12 M-MDMP36HP Maxon Desking Modesty Panel36 2 $ 167.00 $334.00 " Half Mod $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 13 M-MDMP36FP Maxon Desking Modesty Panel 36 4 $ 179.00 $716.00 " Full Mod. $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 14 M-MDMP54FP Maxon Desking Modesty Panel54 8 $ 200.00 $1,600.00 " Full Mod. $(CORE) MAX Core Or Opts Undecided PAINT Option 15 M-MDMP54HP Maxon Desking Modesty Panel 54 18 $ 189.00 $3,402.00 " Half Mod $(CORE) MAX Core Or Opts Undecided PAINT Option 16 M-MDMP60HP Maxon Desking Modesty Panel60 2 $ 195.00 $390.00 " Half Mod $(CORE) MAX Core Or Opts Undecided PAINT Option 17 M-MDMP60FP Maxon Desking Modesty Panel 60 4 $ 208.00 $832.00 " Full Mod. $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 18 M-MDRS2024F Maxon Desk Return Screen 20Hx2 8 $ 581.00 $4,648.00 2W Fabric $(A) Grd A Fab Not intended for installation or construction.Dealer has ultimate responsibility for accuracy and correctness of component counts&measurements.Dealer shall verify and confirm all site dimensions and suitability of products and applications consistent with published guidelines and applicable codes.All plans,drawings and specifications are property of Maxon FW Furniture,Inc.and may not be reproduced without written consent. MSP-14334 City of Kent Modular Bldg Page 3 of 6 EXHIBIT A Line # Part Number Part Description Qty List Ext List Undecided FABRIC Option $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 19 M-MDSL29 Universal Shared C-Leg 6 $ 334.00 $2,004.00 $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 20 M-PP4860RE Prepare RECTT48Dx60W No 2 $ 844.00 $1,688.00 Power Caddy $(L1STD) L1 Standard Lam Opts Undecided LAMINATE Option Undecided EDGE Option 21 M-PPBAR50 Prepare T Bas Stretcher Bar-50" 2 $ 250.00 $500.00 $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 22 M-PPSC60 Prepare External Table Top Sup 2 $ 250.00 $500.00 Chnl 48" 23 M-PPT34FG Prepare Large T Seated Height w/ 2 $ 757.00 $1,514.00 Glides(paid $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 24 M-SYP20B-A Sys&Desk Univ Pedestal20Dx15 28 $ 681.00 $19,068.00 Wx28H BBF A-Pull $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option 25 M-URW2424 Univ Rec WS 24 x 24 2 $ 329.00 $658.00 $(L1STD) L1 Standard Lam Opts Not intended for installation or construction.Dealer has ultimate responsibility for accuracy and correctness of component counts&measurements.Dealer shall verify and confirm all site dimensions and suitability of products and applications • consistent with published guidelines and applicable codes.All plans,drawings and specifications are property of Maxon Furniture,Inc.and may not be reproduced without written consent. MSP-14334 City of Kent Modular Bldg Page 4 of 6 EXHIBIT A Line # Part Number Part Description MY List Ext List Undecided LAMINATE Option Undecided EDGE Option 26 M-URW2436 Univ Rec WS 24 x 36 6 $ 370.00 $2,220.00 $(L1STD) L1Standard Lam Opts Undecided LAMINATE Option Undecided EDGE Option 27 M-URW2448 Univ Rec WS 24 x 48 4 $ 420.00 $1,680.00 $(L1STD) L1 Standard Lam Opts Undecided LAMINATE Option Undecided EDGE Option 28 M-URW2454 Univ Rec WS 24 x 54 22 $ 438.00 $9,636.00 $(L1STD) L1 Standard Lam Opts Undecided LAMINATE Option Undecided EDGE Option 29 M-URW2460 Univ Rec WS 24 x 60 6 $ 460.00 $2,760.00 $(L1STD) L1 Standard Lam Opts Undecided LAMINATE Option Undecided EDGE Option 30 M-UWMSOH1524F Univ Wall MT OH Cab 15Hx24W 2 $ 614.00 $1,228.00 Flipper Pnt Door $(CORE) MAX Core Cir Opts Undecided PAINT Option 31 M-UWMSOH1530F Univ Wall MT OH Cab 15Hx30W 12 $ 638.00 $7,656.00 Flipper Pnt Door $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Not intended for installation or construction.Dealer has ultimate responsibility for accuracy and correctness of component counts&measurements.Dealer shall verify and confirm all site dimensions and suitability of products and applications consistent with published guidelines and applicable codes.All plans,drawings and specifications are property of Maxon Furniture,Inc.and may not be reproduced without written consent. ow MSP-14334 City of Kent Modular Bldg Page 5 of 6 EXHIBIT A Line# Part Number Part Description Qty List Ext List Undecided PAINT Option 32 M-UWMSOH1536F Univ Wall MT OH Cab 15Hx36W 11 $ 676.00 $7,436.00 Flipper Pnt Door $(CORE) MAX Core Clr Opts Undecided PAINT Option Group Total List: $117,295.00 Ext. Volume: 1,059.50 Project Total List: $117,295.00 Ext. Weight: 7,931.20 Not intended for installation or construction.Dealer has ultimate responsibility for accuracy and correctness of component counts&measurements.Dealer shall verify and confirm all site dimensions and suitability of products and applications consistent with published guidelines and applicable codes.All plans,drawings and specifications are property of Maxon Furniture,Inc.and may not be reproduced without written consent. 00 MSP-14334 City of Kent Modular Bldg Page 6 of 6 EXHIBIT B April 4, 2016 City of Kent Parks, Recreation& Community Services 400 West Gowe Kent, WA 98032 Attn: Alex Ackley, Facilities Superintendent Dear Mr. Ackley, Maxon Furniture Inc. offers its General Services Administration (GSA) contract discounts,terms and conditions to state and local government agencies that are publicly funded. In addition to these agencies, Maxon will offer its GSA contract discounts to publicly funded education institutions and select federally funded non-profit agencies. Examples of these include, but are not limited to, state and city government agencies,public K-12 and higher education institutions, federally funded non-profit organizations, etc... Offering GSA contract discounts are not direct purchases from the federal contract, rather an offer of the same discounts offered and approved by GSA. The discounts offered to the federal government are the best pricing that Maxon, or any other manufacturer with the same Most Favored Customer, offer to federal agencies. Maxon has disclosed this practice to its Contracting Officer in the past and most recently during negotiation and award of our GSA furniture contract for years 16-20, this has been, and is, an accepted longstanding practice. Since Maxon's GSA contract is a negotiated and awarded contract with the federal government, many agencies see fit to use the contract discounts in lieu of releasing projects for public bid. With state and local government agency budgets stretched to critical limits,this saves agency funds not only in terms of product costs, but many labor hours preparing, collecting, evaluating and awarding bids when released publicly. As taxpayers it is our right and responsibility to scrutinize the manner in which tax dollars are utilized. Offering GSA contract discounts to state and local government agencies is one of many ways that Maxon is confident and proud to reflect the HNI Vision of being a Responsible Global Citizen. Please feel free to contact me if you have any questions. Sincerely, /i Abran Soria Government Sales Manager soriaanmaxonmail.com 360-625-8053 EXHIBIT B Maxon Furniture Inc. GSA Customer Information Sheet a Maxon Furniture Inc. Schedule 71 Office Furniture Multiple Award Schedule GS-28F-0013K GSA Customer Information Sheet For use in conjunction with the GSA approved Maxon Furniture Inc. Pricebook dated July 2018 FSC Class 7110 Contract Period-April 7, 2010-April 6, 2020 Contract Number GS-28F-0013K NAICS Code 337214 Advantage!"" For more information on ordering from Federal Supply Schedules, click on the FSS button at http://www.fss. sg a. ov Contractor Information: www.maxon sa.com Maxon Furniture Inc. 200 Oak Street Muscatine, IA 52761 Phone: 800-876-4274 Fax: 800-257-2635 Contract Administration: 800-876-4274 Business Size: Large CCR Information Tax ID Number: 42-1295118 DUNS Number: 067694315 CAGE Code: 1QKD6 (Contractor Location) 1 EXHIBIT B Maxon Furniture Inc. GSA Customer Information Sheet Version 1�7. a2 1a. Special Item Numbers(SIN) SIN# Item Type Pricebook Page Numbers 711-1 Furniture Systems Refer to pages 23-116 711-2 Computer Furniture Refer to pages 117-204, 253-266 711-3 Filing and Storage Cabinets Refer to pages 221-252 711-11 Conference Tables Refer to pages 204-220 711-18 Seating Refer to pages 267-272 711-93 Reconfiguration Services Not to exceed $65.00 per hour 711-94 Design/Layout Services Not to exceed $65.00 per hour 711-95 Installation Services Standard Installation Conditions-Not to exceed $55.00 per hour (Min. $165.00) Non-Standard Installation Conditions-Not to exceed $65.00 per hour(Min.$165.00) See page 6 for Standard/Non-Standard Condition definition.The Maxon Government Services Checklist is required to be submitted with all quotes and orders. 711-99 New item Introduction As implemented 1b. Lowest Priced Models SIN# Model Standard Lead Time 60 Days ARO 711-1 M-FTSB24 $2.24 711-2 M-DAB1 $3.88 711-3 M-ICCAHR12 $3.26 711-11 M-PPGNB $10.40 711-18 M-SEMUGB $30.60 711-93 1 Hour Not to exceed $65.00 per hour 711-94 1 Hour Not to exceed $65.00 per hour 711-95 1 Hour Not to exceed $55.00 Standard Conditions/Not to exceed $65.00 Non-Standard Conditions 1c. Hourly Rates Not Applicable 2. Maximum Order $500,000 Net 3. Minimum Order $50 Net 4. Geographic Coverage 48 Contiguous States and the District of Columbia (CONUS, POE) 5. Point of Production Muscatine, Iowa 6. *Discounts From List *Discount from list prices or statement of net price: *Maxon Furniture reserves the right to negotiate deeper discounts at any tier based on competitive situations;contact your Maxon Representative for more information. List Value Standard Lead Time 60 Days ARO 0-$30,000 79.6% $30,001-$300,000 82.7% $300,001-$600,000 84.0% $600,001> 85.2% 2 D����~ �� �����nn��nu �� Maxon Furniture Inc. GSA Customer information Sheet Version 7.1 ,71017 R 7. Quantity Discounts Refer toitem 6 (Volume Tiers) 8. Prompt Payment Terms 1%20, Net3U Days from date of invoice, excludes credit card transactions 9a. Credit Cards Accepted below micropurchasethreshold 9b. Credit Cards Accepted above micropurchasethreshold 10. Foreign Terms None llo. Time ofDelivery 60 days ARO, orders conforming to routine commercial criteria may be accorded shorter lead times. Orders which require delivery dates in excess of3O days shall specify a "do not ship prior to...... instruction" Ilb. Expedited Products may be available for expedited delivery subject to published program limitations. 11o. Overnight and 2 Day Delivery Selected items may be available for Overnight or2 day delivery; subject to applicable charges lld. Urgent Requirements Available per|'FSS'l4O'8, please contact Maxon Customer Support I2. F.O.B. Point Destination: *Standard freight charge of$120.DD for orders less than $U,0DO list shall beincluded l]a. OrderingAddreo 2OO Oak Street Muscatine, |ASI76l 13b. Ordering Procedures Orders may be placed via electronic ordering. Refer toFAR 8.405'3 for further information 14. Payment Address (Remit To) l337l Collections Center Drive Chicago, |L60693 15. Warranty Provision Commercial warranty in GSA approved pricebookapplies 26. Export Packing Charges Available upon request, contact Maxon Customer Support 17. Credit Card Terms None lD. Rental, Maintenance & Repair N/A 19. Installation Negotiated on a project bads by the ordering activity involved, inclusive of |FF. A line item shall reflect installation charges on awarded contract. Not to exceed $55.00 per hour Standard Installation; Not to exceed $65.00 per hour Non-Standard Installation, see page 6. 20. Repair Parts Available upon request per standard commercial practice. Contact Maxon Customer Support. 20a. OtherSen/ices Design and/or reconfiguration services are available; Hourly rates are not to exceed $65.0O per hour for each service. 21. Service and Distribution Contact Customer Support Servicing Dealer/Participating Representative list, 80O'O76-4274 22. Participating Representatives Contact Customer Support for Servicing Dealer/Participating Representative list, 80O'O76-4Z74 3 EXHIBIT B Maxon Furniture Inc. GSA Customer Information Sheet $ e i-s iot"1 7, , . 23. Preventative Maintenance N/A 24a. Environmental Attributes Systems,Storage and Freestanding product lines are SCS Indoor Advantage Gold and BIFMA Level 11 Certified 24b. Section 508 Compliance N/A 25. DUNS Number 067694315 26. SAM Notification SAM registration is current 27. Uncompensated Overtime N/A 28. Changes or Cancellation All cancellations must be submitted to Maxon Customer Support in writing. Changes or cancellations may be made on standard lead-time orders up to 24 hours after acknowledgement has been sent at no charge to the customer. After production has begun, only costs incurred will be billed to the customer if merchandise is not resold within a reasonable period of time (3 months). Any changes or cancellations after that time must be submitted to Customer Support for approval. If approved, customer will be held responsible for all labor and material costs incurred prior to the change and/or cancellation. There is no financial penalty for additions to orders, however, any change may cause the order to be re-scheduled. All order changes must be submitted in writing, regardless of the dollar value. Order changes are not binding upon the Contractor until a new acknowledgement is issued. 29. Restocking All products are custom manufactured for the customer. The Contractor maintains no finished goods inventory. If the customer orders products in error,the Contractor will work with the customer to suggest the most cost-effective solution. If the Contractor approves a product return, a minimum 25% handling and recycling fee based on the invoice amount will apply to all returns for customer convenience. All products are subject to return only if authorized by the Contractor on a Return Goods Authorization (RGA) form furnished by the Contractor. Merchandise must be returned in original shipping cartons with proper inner packing. Acceptance of returned merchandise is subject to inspection and credit will be issued only if merchandise is received in saleable condition. No credit will be issued for products that have been assembled. Returned merchandise should be forwarded with transportation charges prepaid. Returns must be made within 30 days after authorization is issued. 30. Freight Handling In the unfortunate event that freight damage or loss occurs on shipments, the Contractor provides a service for filing freight claims with our carrier if proper procedures are followed. Call 4 EXHIBIT B Maxon Furniture Inc. GSA Customer Information Sheet Version 7._ .. 11 Maxon Customer Support immediately to initiate the replacement and claim process. Consignee is responsible for inspecting deliveries and verifying carton counts; noting any visible damage or shortages on delivery receipt before signing. Signing "subject to inspection" does not qualify as signed damage. If noted on the delivery receipt, damaged items can be refused and returned with the carrier or the item can be accepted. If accepted, the damaged merchandise must be held until the claim is settled. Concealed damage claims: the Contractor is not responsible for claims if Customer Support has not been notified within 10 days of receipt of goods. Customer may make no deduction under any circumstances resulting from freight claims when settling invoices with the Contractor. Call Freight Claims to check claim status if consignee has not been contacted by carrier after 30 days. 5 Maxon Furniture Inc. GSA Customer Information Sheet version 7. .20 8 Standard vs.Non-Standard Rate Definition Standard installation services will be performed on a project by project basis by a servicing dealer not to exceed the standard hourly rate. Non-standard installation services will be performed on a project by project basis by a servicing dealer not to exceed the non-standard hourly rate. Any non-standard conditions below will deem the entire project as non-standard and based on the non-standard hourly rate listed above. The minimum order for installation shall be$165.00. Rates will be calculated on whole hours for installations above the minimum installation order amount($165.00); 0-30 minutes will be rounded to the previous whole hour and 31-60 minutes will be rounded to the following whole hour. Standard installation services shall include the following: Monday through Friday 8:00 A.M.to 4:00 P.M. local time; ground floor of the facility, for other than ground floors a working elevator that will accommodate all products must be available free of charge; loading dock must be available and able to accommodate vehicles up to a 53' tractor/trailer when applicable; within a 50 mile radius of the servicing dealer; area will be free of all other trade personnel; adequate facilities for delivery, unloading, moving and staging/storing the product during the installation process shall be provided; installation area shall be free from debris before installation commences. Non-Standard installation services shall include the following: Overtime(more than 8 daily working hours), nights, weekends or holidays; on any non-ground floor or requiring product to be stair carried; outside trades for install completion(i.e. electricians); in a clinical or medical environment; subject to unique restrictions or limits established by local laws,statutes and/or ordinances, including,but not limited to,restrictions on transportation of materials and/or access to job site/dock facilities; payment of prevailing wage and/or union labor rates; acquisition of permits; delays greater than one hour outside the control of the contractor due to security requirements and/or otherwise impeded or delayed by outside agents or conditions; delays due to construction completion or facility access; changes outside the awarded scope of work directed by an authority authorized to make changes to the awarded contract. All quotes will be required to identify the standard or non-standard rate;non-standard quotes will require a brief description of justification for the non-standard rate. Upon award and submission to Maxon Furniture for processing a copy of the original agency quote is required for all service rates(in whole hours only)itemized services rates are required either on the purchase order or servicing dealer quote in the following(or similar) formatted examples: • Standard Installation-5 installers @$55 per hour for 10 hours-$2,750.00 • Non-Standard Installation-2 installers @$65 per hour for 5 hours-$650.00 with a brief justification for the non-standard rate quoted • Design-10 hours @$65 per hour-$650.00 • Reconfiguration-5 installers @$65 per hour for 5 hours-$1,625.00 6 EXHIBIT B e m ,mot ,r m i Ln Ln c„ r Grp � h C A D V) 2019 Maxon Pricebook :E O ;:a 7q C m D n m V) M rn D z m L, --I O z D G1 m L,) Z Ll D n P m N O ;a Prices effective January 1,2019. Information in this pricebook is accurate as of January 1,2019. The pricebook is updated quarterly.Go to www.MaxonEdge.com to find the most current pricing information in the electronic pricebook. _ Information is updated monthly in CAD and GIZA. Maxon recommends updating 20-20 Technologies software every month. z 0 rn X maxon• I 1 Table of Contents EXHIBIT B Reference Worksurfaces...................................................................197 Table of Contents.........................................................................2 Statement of Line ....................................................................198 Launches and Discontinuations ................................................3-4 Specification Guide ...........................................................198-204 Textiles and Finishes ...............................................................5-11 Worksurfaces Special Ordering and COM Program .....................................12-14 Rectangular.................................,.................................205-206 w Maxon Limited Lifetime Warranty..............................................15 Wedge .................................................................................207 Design Services ..........................................................................16 Corner Worksurfaces ...................................................208-210 wL-Returns .............................................................................211 W Emerge"' 17 Radius End Peninsula Worksurfaces ....................................212 .............................................................................. Statement of Line ......................................................................19 Peninsulas.....................................,...............................213-214 Specification Guide ...............................................................18-29 Half Rounds and Radius Connecting Tops............................215 Frames ..................................................................................30-31 Countertops and Supports ...............................................216-217 X Frame Stiffener and Floor Bracket .............................................32 Worksurface Supports ......................................................218-225 U_ LuDoors ....................................................................................33-34 nTiles ......................................................................................35-43 Prepare"M.............................................................................227 Connection Posts ..................................................................44-47 Height-Adjustable Statement of Line .......................................229 Electrical ...............................................................................48-61 Height-Adjustable Tables Specification Guide ..................228-232 Overhead Storage .................................................................62-69 Height-Adjustable Table Tops and Legs.............................233-235 Accessories ...........................................................................70-77 Tables Statement of Line .........................................................236 Tables Specification Guide ................................................237-241 QPrefix°......................................................................................79 Table Tops .........................................................................242-246 Statement of Line ......................................................................81 Bases.................................................... 247-248 ........................ SpecificationGuide ...............................................................80-87 Accessories .....,.................................................................249-250 Panels ...................................................................................88-89 LnStackers.................................................................................90-91 Storage..................................................................................251 a Frameless Glass .........................................................................92 Universal Specification Guide ...........................................252-255 D Doors ....................................................................................93-94 Universal Statement of Line ....................................................253 Panel Connectors ................................................................95-100 Universal Electrical ...........................................................................101-112 Pedestal Files .......................................................................256 WOverhead Storage .............................................................113-120 Storage Cabinets..................................................................257 aAccessories .......................................................................121-128 Lateral Files ...................................................................258-259 Bookcases ............................................................................260 Y SmartspaceTM 129 Storage Accessories ......................................................261-263 ................................................................... CrWork Tops.............................................................................264 0 Smartspace Finishes ................................................................131 Statement of Line ....................................................................132 Include® Specification Guide ...........................................................130-134 Include Statement of Line....................................................265 u, Worksurfaces ....................................................................135-136 Include Storage Specification Information....................265-274 Cr � Legs ..................................................................................137-140 Include Pedestals...........................................................275-282 w Support Beams ........................................................................141 Include Low Credenzas and Accessories.......................283-286 Troughs .............................................................................142 143 Include Personal Files and Lateral Files ........................287-289 Screens .............................................................................144-148 Include Storage Tower ...............,..................................290-297 Electrical ...........................................................................149-159 Include Box and File Drawer Accessories......................298-300 � ® Seating .301 ¢ Surpass 161 ................................................................................ . CrStatement of Line ....................................................................163 COM Program ............ ......................................................302-303 v, Specification Guide ............................ ............................... Adept Statement of Line................................................... ......304 Worksurfaces Adept Specification...........................................................305-309 Rectangular Worksurfaces ...................................................169 Adept Seating ...................................................................310-314 Wedge Worksurfaces ...........................................................170 MXMO Statement of Line.........................................................315 Corner Worksurfaces ....................................................171-172 MXMO Specifications .......................................................316-317 zz L-Return Worksurfaces ........................................................173 MXMO Seating..................................................................318-319 v� Radius End Peninsula Worksurfaces ....................................174 Peninsula Worksurfaces................................................175-176 Accessories........................................................................321 Worksurface Support Legs................................................177-178 Specification Guide ...........................................................322-325 Ln w External Table Top Support Channel ........................................179 Monitor Arms ...................................................................326-327 7:;: Peninsula Modesty Panels and Leg..........................................180 Keyboard Trays,Computer Storage .................................328-330 0 Brackets ............................................................................181-182 Lighting .............................................................................331-334 Ln v Modesty Panels ................................................................183-184 Electrical 336 u Hutches and Accessories ..................................................185-187 Accessories ..............................................................335,337,339 Screens .............................................................................188-190 Touch-Up Paints ......................................................................338 Accessories .......................................................................191-193 Electrical ...........................................................................194-195 Index X wIndex .................................................................................341-346 0 z 2 I maxon• Launching January EXHIBIT B New Product Fabric: Prepare: Apex Upholstery M-PPHA4824N REC HA No Grommet 48Wx24W M-PPHA6024N REC HA No Grommet 60Wx24W Laminate: M-PPHA7224N REC HA No Grommet 72Wx24W ce Walnut,Ll M-PPHA7224SN REC HA No Grommet 72Wx24W Florence ood Walnut,Ll M-PPHA4830N REC HA No Grommet 48Wx30W KingswM-PPHA6030N REC HA No Grommet 60Wx30W r^ Lowell Ash,L2 M-PPHA7230N REC HA No Grommet 72Wx30W Natural Recon,L2 M-PPHA7230SN REC HA No Grommet 72Wx30W A Portico Teak,L2 M-PPHAHR2450N Half Round HA No Grommet 50Wx24W m Smartspace IHAB: M-PPHAHR3062N Half Round HA No Grommet 62Wx30W M-PPHA4824N REC HA No Grommet 48Wx24W M-SSHA132S4C Height-adjustable bases for back to back workstation M-SSHAB2S2C Height-adjustable base w/2 columns and 1 crossbeam MXMO Seating: D M-SSHAEOR Height-adjustable end of run kit m M-SSHABEORKIT End of run retrofit kit for HAS M-SEMO201 Maxon Mesh Mid-Back Task Chair .n M-SSFSS4213 42"Wx13"H single-sided fabric screen M-SEMX101 Maxon Mesh Mid-Back Black Task Chair X M-SSFSS5413 54"Wx13"H single-sided fabric screen Include Storage: M-SSFSS4220 42"Wx20"H single-sided fabric screen M-SSFSS5420 54"Wx20"H single-sided fabric screen M-ICFCBX283018BBFMA 28Hx30Wx18D B/B/F Personal File,A-Pull Ln M-SSINSF5413 54"Wx13"H fabric insert M-ICFCBX283018BBFMR 28Hx30Wx18D B/B/F Personal File,R-Pull D M-SSINSF5420 54"WX20"H fabric insert M-ICFCSF283018BBFMA 28Hx3OWx18D Footed B/B/F Personal File, �O M-SSINSF4213 42"Wx13"H fabric insert A-Pull N M-SSINSF4220 42"Wx20"H fabric insert M-ICFCSF283018BBFMR 28Hx30Wx18D Footed B/B/F Personal File, M-SSFGS4213 42"Wx13"H single-sided frosted glass screen R-Pull m M-SSFGS5413 54"Wx13"H single-sided frosted glass screen M-ICFCBX283018BBFLA 28Hx30Wx18D B/B/F Personal File Laminate M-SSFGS4220 42"Wx20"H single-sided frosted glass screen Front,A-Pull M-SSFGS5420 54"Wx20"H single-sided frosted glass screen M-ICFCSF283018BBFLA 28Hx30Wx18D Footed B/B/F Personal File M-SSINSG5413 54"Wx 13"H frosted glass insert Laminate Front,A-Pull �o M-SSINSG5420 54"Wx 20"H frosted glass insert M-ICLBX283018FFMA 28Hx30Wx18D 2 Drawer Lateral,A-Pull D M-SSINSG4213 42"Wx 13"H frosted glass insert M-ICLBX283618FFMA 28Hx36Wx18D 2 Drawer Lateral,A-Pull "' M-SSINSG4220 42"Wx 20"H frosted glass insert M-ICLBX283018FFMR 28Hx3OWx18D 2 Drawer Lateral,R-Pull M-SSSSBRKT42 42"W Single-sided bracket M-ICLBX283618FFMR 28Hx36Wx18D 2 Drawer Lateral,R-Pull M-SSSSBRKT54 54"W Single-sided bracket M-ICLBX283018FFLA 28Hx30Wx18D 2 Drawer Lateral Laminate Front, M-SSGPB Gallery panel attachment bracket A-Pull :;o M-SSLGP5048 48"W x 50"H Double end-of-run laminate M-ICLBX283618FFLA 28Hx36Wx18D 2 Drawer Lateral Laminate Front, vim, gallery panel for HAS A-Pull z M-SSLGP5060 60"W x 50"H Double end-of-run laminate M-ICLSF283018FFMA 28Hx30Wx18D Footed 2 Drawer Lateral, D gallery panel for HAB A-Pull N M-SSINSLEGP4850 48"W x 50"H Laminate Gallery Panels for end-of-run M-ICLSF283618FFMA 28Hx36Wx18D Footed 2 Drawer Lateral, workstations(single) A-Pull M-SSINSLEGP6050 60"W x 50"H Laminate Gallery Panels for end-of-run M-ICLSF283018FFMR 28Hx30Wx18D Footed 2 Drawer Lateral, z workstations(single) R-Pull m M-SSHAWTWML HA Wire Manager for WS to Trough M-ICLSF283618FFMR 28Hx36Wx18D Footed 2 Drawer Lateral, D M-SSHATFWML HA Wire management skin from trough to floor R-Pull „A M-SSJUMP Jumper for end-of-run HAS M-ICLSF283018FFLA 28Hx30Wx18D Footed 2 Drawer Lateral M-SSHATROUGH48 48"W shared Trough for HAS Laminate Front,A-Pull M-SSHATROUGH60 60"W shared Trough for HAS M-ICLSF283618FFLA 28Hx36Wx18D Footed 2 Drawer Lateral M-SSHATROUGH72 72"W shared Trough for HAS Laminate Front,A-Pull M-SSHATROUGH20 20"W Trough for end of run HAS M-ICCAHR15 15"D Hangrail Kit(Front to Back)18"D Lateral O M-SSHASLID48 Single-sided trough lid to span HAB 48"trough M-ICLACW50 Include Lateral 50 lb Counterweight Kit D M-SSHASLID60 Single-sided trough lid to span HAS 60"trough M-ICLACW57 Include Lateral 57 lb Counterweight Kit m M-SSHASLID72 Single-sided trough lid to span HAB 72"trough M-SSHASLID20 Single-sided trough lid to span HAB 20"end-of-run Touch up Paint: trough M-ACC-TUB Touch-Up Paint.6oz Bottle M-ACC-TUS Touch-Up Paint 12oz Spray Ln Z G) D n n m Ln Ln m V1 Z O m X maxon• 3 Discontinued Products 2019 EXHIBIT Systems Accessories Universal Electrical M-ACC-TUPMPBL Touch-Up Paint Pen Black M-EJ108 Jumper Cable 108w M-ACC-TUPMPCH Touch-Up Paint Pen Charcoal M-EPF3RA Power In-Feed Right Angle(Ceiling) M-ACC-TUPMPGY Touch-Up Paint Pen Mist Gray M-SIJRJ11 Snap In Jack RJ11 Cat 3 M-ACC-TUPMPHZ Touch-Up Paint Pen Haze M-QPBLANK Blank Faceplate Insert M-ACC-TUPMPSH Touch-Up Paint Pen Shadow M-EH24G 24"Harness-8 Wire-(3+1) UJ M-ACC-TUPMPT3 Touch-Up Paint Pen Muslin M-EH30G 30"Harness-8 Wire-(3+1) cc M-ACC-TUPMP02 Touch-Up Paint Pen Flint M-EH36G 36"Harness-8 Wire-(3+1) 2 M-ACC-TUPMP7B Touch-Up Paint Pen Loft M-EH42G 42"Harness-8 Wire-(3+1) w M-ACC-TUPMPTS Touch-Up Paint Pen Greige M-EH48G 48"Harness-8 Wire-(3+1) M-ACC-TUPMP7D Touch-Up Paint Pen Brownstone M-EH60G 60"Harness-8 Wire-(3+1) M-ACC-TUPMPR3 Touch-Up Paint Pen Gunmetal M-EH72G 72"Harness-8 Wire-(3+1) M-ACC-TUPMPR5 Touch-Up Paint Pen Champagne X M-ACC-TUBMPPL Touch-Up Paint Bottle Platinum Surpass Electrical w M-ACC TUBMPWT Touch-Up Paint Bottle White M-MDEJ6 Maxon Desk Male/Male Electrical Jumper-6" M-ACC-TUBMPSH Touch-Up Paint Bottle Shadow M-MDEJ12 Maxon Desk Male/Male Electrical Jumper-12" ° M-ACC-TUBMPTS Touch-Up Paint Bottle Muslin M-MDEJ18 Maxon Desk Male/Male Electrical Jumper-18" M-ACC-TUBMP02 Touch-Up Paint Bottle Flint M-MDEJ24 Maxon Desk Male/Male Electrical Jumper-24" M-ACC-TUBMP7B Touch-Up Paint Bottle Loft M-MDEJ30 Maxon Desk Male/Male Electrical Jumper-30" LLJ M-ACC-TUBMPTS Touch-Up Paint Bottle Greige M-MDEJ36 Maxon Desk Male/Male Electrical Jumper-36" M-ACC-TUBMP7D Touch-Up Paint Bottle Brownstone M-MDEJ42 Maxon Desk Male/Male Electrical Jumper-42" M-ACC-TUBMPR3 Touch-Up Paint Bottle Gunmetal M-MDEJ48 Maxon Desk Male/Male Electrical Jumper-48" M-ACC-TUBMPR5 Touch-Up Paint Bottle Champagne M-MDEJ54 Maxon Desk Male/Male Electrical Jumper-54" Q M-ACC-TUSMPBL Touch-Up Paint Spray Platinum M-MDEJ60 Maxon Desk Male/Male Electrical Jumper-60" vi M-ACC-TUSMPT3 Touch-Up Paint Spray White M-MDEJ66 Maxon Desk Male/Male Electrical Jumper-66" M-ACC-TUSMP02 Touch-Up Paint Spray Shadow Paint 4-1/2oz can M-MDEJ72 Maxon Desk Male/Male Electrical Jumper-72" M-ACC-TUSMPBB Touch-Up Paint Spray Muslin Paint 4-1/2oz can M-MDEJ78 Maxon Desk Male/Male Electrical Jumper-78" N M-ACC-TUBMPTS Touch-Up Paint Spray Flint M-MDEJ84 Maxon Desk Male/Male Electrical Jumper-84" a M-ACC-TUSMP7D Touch-Up Paint Spray Loft M-MDEJ90 Maxon Desk Male/Male Electrical Jumper-90" M-ACC-TUBMPPL Touch-Up Paint Spray Greige M-MDEPF36 Maxon Desk Electrical Power Feed-36" LA M-ACC-TUSMPWT Touch-Up Paint Spray Brownstone M-MDEPF48 Maxon Desk Electrical Power Feed-48" M-ACC-TUSMPR3 Touch-Up Paint Spray Gunmetal M-MDEPF60 Maxon Desk Electrical Power Feed-60" N M-ACC-TUSMPR5 Touch-Up Paint Spray Champagne M-MDEPF72 Maxon Desk Electrical Power Feed-72" LU M ACC FR3 Adjustable Footrest M-MDEPF96 Maxon Desk Electrical Power Feed-90" ;5 M-MDEPF144 Maxon Desk Electrical Power Feed-144" Storage M-MDER1 Maxon Desk Electrical Power Receptacle Circuit 1 Ln M-PSCBBF-R Personal Storage Center,BBF,R-pull M-MDER2 Maxon Desk Electrical Power Receptacle Circuit 2 O M-PSCBBF-A Personal Storage Center,BBF,A-pull M-MDEC Maxon Desk Electrical Power Clip for receptacle 3: M-LFOF2730-N Overfile Cabinet,30"W,N-pull M-MDEC4 Maxon Desk Electrical Power 4-way female"H" M-LFOF2736-N Overfile Cabinet,36"W,N-pull connector LU M-LFOF2742-N Overfile Cabinet,42"W,N-pull M-MDA8TC4C0N 8 Wire to 4 Wire Connector M-MDMAINFEED72 72"Power In Feed(Metal Conduit) nQ Seating M-MDMAINFEED156 156"Power In Feed(Metal Conduit) M-MDMADCON Duplex to Duplex 0"jumper °C M-SENP352 Executive Task Chair Hi-Bk Mesh a M-SENP252 Executive Hi-Back,360 Swiv,Tilt,Width-Adj Arms Duplex Finish M-SENP452 Exec Hi-Back,360 Swiv,Tilt,Width-Adj POL Arms, POL base Greige MPT5 w M-SENP101 Task Mid Back Mesh w/Fixed arms Champagne MPR5 Q M-SENP201 Task HI-Back Mesh 360 Deg Swiv Gunmetal MPR3 cc� M-SENP105 Stool Mid-Back w/Fixed arms Platinum MPPL O M-SENP108 Guest Multi-Purp Stacking Leg Base Arm Brilliant White MPWT M-SENP103 MOB Nesting Worksurface Supports M-UWSKR2 Rectangular Worksurface Support Kit z M-UWSKR2-20 Rectangular 20 Deep Worksurface Support Kit Q ,U M-UWSKR3 Rectangular Worksurface Support Kit>63 Long `^ M-UWSKR3-20 Rectangular 20 Deep Worksurface Support Kit> 63 Long M-UWSKC Corner Worksurface Support Kit w M-UWSKL L-Return Worksurface Support Kit it M-UWSKP Peninsula Worksurface Support Kit ON M-UWSKHF Half-Round Extn-Fixed-Worksurface Support Kit w M-UWSKCT Connecting Top/120deg Bridge Support Kit U v Q X w Z 4 maxon• EXHIBIT B Textiles and Finishes Paint Finish Options Maxon Furniture Inc.offers durable paint finish options to meet your pricing,timeline,and design needs. Core paint finish options include Black, Flint, Loft,Greige,Brownstone,and Muslin. Premium paint finish options include Gunmetal,Champagne,Platinum and White on the Maxon standard leadtime program. Painted Metal Electrical and Data Electrical and Data rn Finishes Storage Pulls Components(Duplex) Components Plastic Grommets Locks M Black MPBL Satin Black E4 Black E4 Black E4 Chrome:M-MC and M-1-C1S G) m Flint MP02 Brownstone EY Brownstone EY Loft MP7B Flint E9 Flint E9 Grei e MPTS Designer White DW Designer White DW Brownstone MP7D Loft EV Loft EV Muslin MPT3 Muslin EU Muslin EU A Gunmetal MPR3 Titanium Ti Titanium TI M T_ Champagne MPRS X Platinum MPPL White MPWT Smartspace HAT Prepare cn Bases T-Leg D (M-SSHAB2S4C, HAT Legs ' > Smartspace Trough, MSSHAB252C, (M-PPBT2S2L, N Adept Guest/Cafe Trough Lid,and Wire 'MSSHAEOR, M-PPT3SG, D Frame finishes Duplex Color Management MSSHAEORKIT) Prepare C Base M-PPT3S3LG) Include Storage Feet n m Textured Silver PR8 Black E4 Silver MPR6 Nickel P8L Black,MPBL Nickel P8L Platinum MPPL Textured Black BLCK Flint E9 White P8D Silver MPR6 White P8D Loft EV n Muslin EU C Brownstone EY D Designer White DW Titanium Ti Premium Paint is available on standard lead time. • Premium Paint finishes are subject to an upcharge calculated on the above schedule. o C Glass Options v Maxon Furniture Inc.offers clear glass and frosted glass options for the Emerge,Prefix and Surpass panel systems to meet your pricing, N privacy and aesthetic needs. Clear glass option is included in the base price. Frosted glass is available with an upcharge to the list price. Glass Option Finish Code m v Clear Glass Clear C A rn Frosted Glass* Frosted FT *Refer to Product Sections for frosted glass upcharge pricing O D Gl m cn rn Z D n M m N O Fn Ln Z O m X maxon• 5 Textiles and Finishes EXHIBIT B Grade A Fabric Options Grade A Grade A Continued Grade A Continued Railroad Railroad Railroad Family Color Code Family Color Code Family Color Code � Artichoke APN11 Aquatint ECH01❑o Artesian RFG96 w Blackberry APN32 Axis ECH13 Dune RFG92 Bronze APN22 Blend ECH14 Eclipse I RFG90 Carbon APN28 Cast ECH12 Frost RFG93 Chai APN12 Crosshatch ECH04 Refuge Glacier RFG91 X Cherry APN30 Engrave ECH02❑o Hemp RFG97❑o w Copper APN18 Highlight ECH10 Mineral RFG98 Dark Pewter APN17 Intaglio ECH06❑o Sandbar RFG95❑o Dune APN15 Etch Lithograph ECH03 ff Tidal RFG94 w Espresso APN23 Mezzotint ECH07❑o Ash SRT88 Q Framboise APN31 Midtone ECH11 Desert SRT33 10 Appoint Frost APN34 Outline ECH08 Fog SRT14 o: < Hummus APN14 Shade ECH09 Lemongrass SRT49 Jet APN27 Tonal ECH16 Meadow SRT250 Lawn APN25 Vanish ECH15 Sarto Mist SRT45 Mandarin APN29 Woodcut ECH05 E Mushroom SRT76 V) a Morel APN09 Azure LN55 Oyster SRT18 Nimbus APN16 Cornsilk LN15 Reef SRT64 V) Platinum APN24 Drift LN05 Sesame SRT93 n Turmeric APN10 Khaki LN20 Shale SRT52 Q Turquoise APN26 Maize LN40 Wheat SRT13 0 � Walnut APN13 Landscape Sheen LN17 Dragonfly TP30 Ln Y Apricot CU47 Slate LN35 Frost TP15 c1fO Bark CU25 Tangelo LN50 Full Stream TP80 Black CU10 Tide LN45❑o Ginger TP25❑o w Espresso CU49 Umber LN25❑E Gold Rush TP10 a Fog CU03 Urban LN30 Tempest Sandstorm TP50[E LLj Frost CU22 Aspen LC32 Slate TP45 Goldenrod CU27 Cornsilk LC30 Tumbleweed TP70 Indigo CU06 Dusk LC22 Wind Chill TP40 w Centurion Iris CU50 Fawn LC33 Zebra TP35 O < Iron Ore CU19 Lucy Graphite LC34 O Jade CU83 Mist LC20 F-- Marsala CU63 Neutra LC24 Morel CU24 Pewter LC35 Navy CU98 Snowdrop LC28 z Peacock CU97 Galvanized REF29 Lu Pear CU84 Ice REF20 Ruby CU67 Loggia REF21 Flint GN65M Mistral REP28 w Indigo GN67El Reflections Moonstone REF23 O Latte GN73 0 Pewter REF22 w Element Millet GN72[a Stainless REF24 Q Parchment GN53[3 Vanilla REF25 Veil GN1313 Winter REF27 Warm Beige GN55 0 o • New Fabric Option 0 Discontinued December 31,2019 z ❑o Discontinued June 30,2019 6 I maxon• EXHIBIT B Textiles and Finishes Grade B Fabric Options Grade B Family Color Railroad Code Anthracite MCA11 m Breeze MCA18 Bronze MCA13 m Buff MCA14 Cremini MCA17 Crystal MCAWIT z Mica M Dew MCA20 T' X Dove MCA12 Fresh MCA16 Mineral MCA15 D Nectar MCA19 Ln Shale MCA10 D n Alabaster SPIN02 r Cavern SPIN03 Ln Cobblestone SPIN04 C Ember SPIN06 D Flame SPIN07 Heron SPIN13 Oat 5PIN01 O 70 Spin N Ocean SPIN12 C Plum SPIN15 D Pool SPIN11 Raven SPIN10 Rhubarb SPIN14 m Tropic SPIN08 7> 70 Willow SPIN05 Bay TRRN05 Bayou TRRN35 Canyon TRRN30 0 D Cliff TRRN45 O m Terrain Crest TRRN25 Delta TRRN10 Plateau TRRN15 m Ridge TRRN20 Z Valley TRRN40 D n n m Ln Ln Ln • New Fabric Option M Discontinued December 31,2019 p m X maxon• 7 Textiles and Finishes EXHIBIT B Grade 1 Seating/Upholstery Options Upholstery for Storage Cushions and Adept Seating Grade 1 Upholstery Grade 1 Upholstery Grade 1 Upholstery w Family Color Code Family Color Code Family Color Code Uj Basalt APX25 Baltic UR94 Amethyst NR61 Beet APX12 Beach UR23 Calypso NR98 Blackberry APX20 Black UR10 Cherry NR66 Chive APXOS Bordeaux UR63 Cobalt NR91 X Iris APX03 Buff UR22 ,L Coffee NR49 w Kiwi APX06 Cloud UR18 Fog NR19 Lemonade APX08 Coffee Bean UR49 Fuchsia NR63 Apex Navy APX13 Crater UR51 Gecko NR76 Q Papaya APX09 Flame UR62 Glow NR27 a Pumice APX23 Graphite UR19 Leaf NR75 Q Rain APX19 Iron UR20 Inertia Lime NR82 v' Resort APX15 Luggage UR26 Loft NR22 Royal APX14 */**Contourett Marine UR92 Mandarin NR47 V) `" Tiki APX29 Navy UR95 Meteor NR30 Q a Tomato APX11 Nimbus UR93 Mustard NR26 D V) Ocean UR96 Nickel NR23 N Grade 1 Upholstery Pumpkin UR42 Onyx NR10 Q Family Color Code Quarry UR24 Regatta NR90 N Apricot CU47 Red UR64 Shadow NR20 0 O Bark CU25 Safari UR27 Surf NR96 Black CU10 Sage UR82 Tangelo NLU R46 Espresso CU49 Steel UR21 Q Fog CU03 Storm UR19 a. CC Frost CU22 Taupe UR28 a Goldenrod CU27 Trunk UR50 Indigo CU06 LU Iris CU50 Q *Centurion Iron Ore CU19 O Ln Jade CU83 Marsala CU63 Morel CU24 C7 z Navy CU98 I— w Peacock CU97 Pear CU84 N Ruby CU67 w � Sapphire CU09 O V) Lo w V V Q X w *Available on M-SEMO201 z **Not Available on Adept Upholstered Back 8 I maxon• EXHIBIT B Textiles and Finishes Grade 2 Seating/Upholstery Textile Options Upholstery for Storage Cushions and Adept Seating Grade 2 Upholstery Grade 2 Upholstery Family Color Code Family Color Code M Blackberry PNS012 Apple SED11 M Bronze PNS002 Ash SED15 M Carbon PNS008 Cardinal SED09 Cherry PNS010 Cinder SED17 Espresso PNS003 Cream SED12 Seed r"r, Appoint Framboise PNS011 Driftwood SED13 X Seating Jet PNS007 Harbor SED10 Lawn PNS005 Onyx SED18 Mandarin PNS009 Smoke SED16 D Morel PNS001 Truffle SED14 v Platinum PNS004 D n m Turquoise I PNS006 Grade 2 Upholstery Family Color Code „ C Grade 2 Upholstery Alabaster SPNN02 D Family Color Code Cavern SPNN03 V) Candy DOT63 Cobblestone SPNN04 Gelato DOT34 Ember SPNN06 0 Indigo DOT31 Flame SPNN07 Onyx DOT35 Heron SPNN13 C Park DOT83 Spin Oat SPNNO1 m Peat DOT24 Seating Ocean SPNN12 *Dotty Peony DOT32 Plum SPNN15 Suit DOT20 Pool SPNN11 M v D Sunflower DOT33 Raven SPNN10 M Tailor DOT21 Rhubarb SPNN14 Tide DOT90 Tropic SPNN08 Velum DOT29 Willow SPNN05 Q Violet DOT30 �a D G) m U) m Z Gl D n n m 70 m V) *Available on M-SEMP201 0 m X maxon• 9 Textiles and Finishes EXHIBIT B Laminate Finish Options (HPL) Worksurface Edge Colors Grade L3 Color Edgeband Type Description Code Sheer Mesh* LT88 Black E4 LU Pattern Brownstone EY Silver Mesh* LT8D Designer White DW LU Designer White* LDW1 Flint E9 75 Solid LLJ Solid Flint* LM16 Greige R Loft* LM11 Loft EV Bourbon Cherry* H Muslin EU X Platinum K Cognac*/*** COGN w Amber Cherry DA a Florence Walnut* LFW1 "--- --"' Beigewood DE Harvest*/*** C Bourbon Cherry H w Woodgrain Kingswood Walnut* LKI1 Cognac COGN Q Mocha*/*** MOCH Columbian Walnut DZ Ln Natural Maple*/*** D Florence Walnut FW C Harvest C Pinnacle*/*** PINC v Woodgrain Kingswood Walnut KI Shaker Cherry*/*** F Lowell Ash DL N Mocha MOCH a Grade L2** Natural Maple D � Natural Recon NR Ln Type Description Code Pinnacle PINC Amber Cherry LWAC Portico Teak DP Beigewood LWBE Shaker Cherry F Q Columbian Walnut LWZ Woodgrain Y Lowell Ash*/*** LLA1 Grommet Colors o Natural Recon*/*** LNR1 Grommet colors are pre-selected based on the specified Portico Teak*/*** LPT1 e Edg color per the table below. Edge Color Code Grommet Color w Q DA(Amber Cherry) Black w� Grey cells represent Directional Laminate Pattern DE(Beigewood) Muslin E4(Black) Black *Smartspace'"-Laminates available for End-of-Run Laminate H(Bourbon Cherry) Black Screens and Modesty models.All other laminates unavailable. EX(Bungalow) Bungalow LU ***Include°Storage-Laminates available for Include Storage COGN(Cognac) Black < Units with Laminate Fronts Storage models.All other laminates Dz(Columbian walnut) Black O unavailable. v~, **Refer to Product Sections for L2 Laminate upcharge pricing. DW(Designer White) White E9(Flint) Flint FW(Florence Walnut) Black C(Harvest) Bungalow Z Adept Guest/Cafe Frame Finishes � KI(Kingswood Walnut) Brownstone w Paint Finishes EV(Loft) Loft Q0 Color Code DL(Lowell Ash) Black Ln Frame Paint Textured Silver PR8 MOCH(Mocha) Black w Finishes EU(Muslin) Muslin Textured Black BLCK O DF(Natural Maple) Muslin wNR(Natural Recon) Muslin PINC(Pinnacle) Brownstone Q K(Platinum) Loft DP(Portico Teak) Fossil X F(Shaker Cherry) Black w 0 Z 10 I maxon• EXHIBIT Textiles and Finishes Smartspace'" Finishes Chart T U v = Vf—_ aV. f0 m v v l7 = = in m M �° m E C ` of of in fa to N N rn jCU = N K •N '0 Q L Q a v v v m to a 3 c 0 o m r 0 = en v v o o 3 � w whom S SF= 3 a a Ll LAMINATES CODES v Bourbon Cherry H T Cognac COGN x Harvest C Mocha MOCH Un oNatural Maple D o Pinnacle PINC D Shaker Cherry F • m Florence Walnut LFW1 Kingswood Walnut LKI1 Ln C Designer White LDW1 D N o Flint LM16 Ln Loft LOFT E Sheer Mesh* LTBB O a Silver Mesh* LTBD Ln m L2 LAMINATES CODES D n m Amber Cherry LWAC Beigewood LWBE C � Columbian Walnut LWZ m C D 0 Lowell Ash LLA1 m Natural Recon LNR1 Portico Teak LPT1 PAINTS CODES Black MPBL D Brownstone MP7D O m v Flint MP02 `o Greige MPTS Loft MP7B D Muslin MPT3 z Gl Champagne MPRS G Gunmetal MPR3 2 D E Platinum MPPL m White MPWT O Silver PR6 E2 rn m White PD8 Ln Q = Nickel P81- End-of-Run Screens and Modesties come with matching Edgeband. z *Sheer Mesh has Muslin Edgeband. *Silver Mesh has Loft Edgeband. x Maxon* 11 Reference EXHIBIT B COM Program Maxon understands that customers may at times want to specify 2.If your fabric is not listed as approved,and it is not a Partnership fabrics outside of Maxon's standard fabric offering.Our COM program fabric you may request a"Dealer to Supply"code,Select the was designed to make specifying COMB on Maxon products a simpler, "Request COM Test"link on the COM Search website.Your name, friendlier,and hassle-free process.This process is simple and easy company name and email will be prepopulated fields.The secondary to use,and is described below under"Maxon to Supply(MTS)"If email,project name,and bid/contract number are optional a Dealer wishes to manage the COM process themselves,they can information.The supplier,pattern,and color will show a list by w do so by following guidelines under"Dealer to Supply(DTS)".MTS clicking in the box and entering the first letter of the name and these W2 is the preferred method for all COM fabrics.With MTS,Company are free form text boxes.Once that information is entered click add. will provide acknowledgment based upon planned date of receipt of (Multiple series can be added to the same request if they are the COM fabric and manage the entire process.DTS is allowed if it is not a same supplier,pattern,and color.)Then click submit. partnership fabric or if Company does not have access to the supplier. 3.An email will be sent to the to the requestor stating the COM DTS may cause order delays and is strongly discouraged.Find out x Request was successfully submitted.Up to four emails could be a: more about Maxon's COM process by emailing our COM Department at LU maxoncomteam@maxonmail.com. received:Testing materials requested,in testing,and final approval/ a denial with price grade and fabric code.It's rare actual test yardage Maxon to Supply(MTS): is required.Testing is mainly done by reviewing the attributes of the 1.Select the fabric you wish to use and check the COM Search fabric.The testing process takes approximately 48 hours. UJ u on maxonfurniture.com at:www.maxonfurniture.com/design- 4.Make sure to use a"Dealer to Supply"COM code(e.g.,S216426ZP) A< resources/textiles-and-finishes/com-search.Or Call Maxon Customer and place your order directly with Maxon Customer Support. Ln F- Service to see if the fabric you have chosen has already been tested S.All"Dealer to Supply"orders will be charged Grade 4 pricing for and approved on the product you are interested in.You will need to seating,and Grade D pricing for panels.Dealers will pay for the COM V) have the COM supplier's name,fabric pattern name,and color name to search for approved fabrics. fabric separately. 2.If your fabric is listed as an approved fabric,you may place your 6.All"Dealer to Supply"fabric must be sent on a fabric roll.Estimate N order directly with Maxon Customer Service.Please use the fabric the yardage required by using the yardage requirements listed in the <. code(e.g.,S216426XP)from the COM Test Request on your order in price list by model.For questions please contact Maxon Customer the place of the standard fabric code. Service. Ln 7.Place your fabric order directly with the COM Supplier with If your fabric is not listed as approved,you will need to select the instructions for the fabric to be sent on a fabric roll to: w "Request COM Test"link on the COM Search website.Your name, company name and email will be prepopulated fields.The secondary HNI Textile Distribution Center email,project name,and bid/contract number are optional COM Production Yardage—PO Number information.The supplier,pattern,and color will show a list by Docks 20 22 oclicking in the box and entering the first letter of the name and these 301 Mulberry Avenue 3 are free form text boxes.Once that information is entered click add. Muscatine,IA 52761 (Multiple series can be added to the same request if they are the same supplier,pattern,and color.)Then click submit. Information that MUST be included in the packing slip attached to U,, the fabric: Q 3.An email will be sent to the to the requestor stating the COM a 1.Dealer's Purchase Order number to Maxon w Request was successfully submitted. Up to four emails could be a received:Testing materials requested,in testing,and final approval/ 2.Dealer s Tracking number for the COM fabric D denial with price grade and fabric code.It's rare actual test yardage 3.Dealer Name 4.Yards of Fabric is required.Testing is mainly done by reviewing the attributes of theLU fabric.The testing process takes approximately 48 hours.Written If the fabric shipment does not match the correct fabric and yardage, Q COM price quotes hold pricing for 90 days after issue date. Maxon will notify the Dealer for resolution. 0 4.once the fabric has been approved by Maxon,enter your order If Maxon receives fabric with incorrect labeling that cannot be linked N directly with Maxon Customer Service.Maxon will purchase all COM to an Maxon furniture order,Maxon will hold the fabric for up to fabric directly from the COM suppliers and schedule for production. 7 days,while the COM Expeditor attempts to identify the order. In the event that the Dealer decides to cancel a COM fabric order, After 7 days,Maxon will return the fabric to sender.There are no the Dealer is responsible for the cost of the fabric plus a handling exceptions to this policy. Z charge that is equal to 10%of the fabric cost. Any canceled orders are subject to cancellation charges up to the Q N ler to Supply(DTS):Dea full value of the Maxon product canceled. Maxon will determine the actual cancellation charge at the time the cancellation is requested. 1.Select the fabric you wish to use and check the COM Search on maxonfurniture.com at:www.maxonfurniture.com/design- 8. For additional details on"Dealer to Supply"fabric refer to your w_ resources/textiles-and-finishes/com-search.Or call Maxon Customer Maxon terms and conditions. O Support to see if the fabric you have chosen has already been tested Ln and approved on the product you are interested in. w u You will need to have the COM supplier's name,fabric pattern name, Q and color name for this inquiry. x w Z 12 maxon* EXHIBIT B Reference Additional Policy Information: Extended lead times will apply on orders containing special The company assumes no responsibility for the overall appearance, laminates. flammability,normal durability,colorfastness,or any other quality Due to manufacturing techniques,and quality issues,some standards.The Company reserves the right to reject a COM if the product exclusions will apply and some requests may be quality of the COM is not satisfactory for the product.Should this declined. occur,the customer will be notified with an explanation within Maxon will contact vendor to verify availability and lead times. m 7 working days of receipt of test materials. If the request is approved,Customer Support will contact you K with pricing and leadtimes. m The company is not responsible for fabric that has become If the request is denied,work with your Sales Representative 0 obsolete at the COM supplier,that is of poor quality,or that is for alternatives. delivered late to the manufacturer from the COM supplier.Excess Edgeband(COM) yardage will be disposed of at Maxon's discretion. • Custom edge treatments are not available. All cancellations or changes to COM orders are subject to Company T approval. Because of the nature of COM,special fabrics,finishes, Special Product/Component Request x and structural modifications,products ordered as specials and then Due to Maxon's flexible manufacturing,we are able to provide canceled prior to shipment are subject to cancellation costs up to specially sized products.The feasibility of the requests depends on the full value of the product canceled.The company determines the degree of changes needed in design,testing, materials Ln the actual cancellation charge at the time the cancellation is and tooling. requested. Upon approval,a cancellation number is issued to the Contact your Maxon representative with the special component Customer. request. • Your Maxon representative will review the request.Maxon will Purchase orders will not be accepted or entered unless the testing determine if it is an established special and if so provide pricing. M process is complete with positive results. Your Maxon representative will submit a special for internal approval and pricing. Most internal reviews will be completed If all testing has been previously completed,re-testing is only within 3 business days of submittal. c necessary if fabric is to be used on a different product,or pattern If the special request is denied,your Maxon representative will D direction has changed from that previously approved. notify the customer and suggest other alternatives. N • Customer will be notified of approved products with a special Previous test results can be obtained by a customer on the COM request#for ordering.This number must be referenced on Search on maxonfurniture.com or by calling Maxon Customer purchase orders. 0 Support. Special request quotes are valid for 6 months only. • Standard lead time for all special requests is at least 15 business c All COM fabric will be applied to seating and panel systems Pattern days. T Cut unless Railroad Cut is requested and approved on the COM All special orders require a written purchase order. Test Request.Any fabrics approved as a width pass,the dealer is These orders cannot be cancelled,nor will Maxon accept a N responsible for clarifying Railroad Cut on orders containing items product return. that are too large to support the Pattern Cut of a fabric application (any items larger than 48"high or wide). Modifications to Standard Productrri • Requests for special modifications to standard products require D engineering evaluations and product safety review prior to M FOR SEATING: FOR PANELS: FOR TACKBOARDS AND TILES: g g p Y m Railroaded Pattern Cut Railroaded Pa"ernC., I Railroaded PatternCW approval. Contact your Maxon representative or Customer 7. Fg Support with the specific requirements. ®D �• F 3 Obsolete Product 0 • Obsolete products are no longer available for order.Requests for production of obsolete product should be investigated Fire Retardant through Customer Support.Customer Support will coordinate IM with the appropriate Maxon departments to determine if The Dealer is responsible for ensuring that the COM fabric is the request can be met and will communicate applicable certified to meet all flame retardant requirements. upcharges.Special orders of obsolete product cannot be L„ cancelled or returned. Requests for service parts and warranty D For more information,please contact Maxon Customer Support. > Textiles:maxontextiles@maxonmail.com on obsolete products should be directed to Customer Support. Z Laminates(COML) Maxon Furniture Inc.must approve all COML requests for specialty D laminates.The order process is as follows: • Maxon at its own discretion may modify its standard products Ln with non-standard laminates to meet specific needs. 0 • Contact the Maxon Tailored Products Group for pre-approved ,A Wilson Art laminates and pricing for special laminates. Ln • When requesting a special laminate please supply manufacturer,along with name and pattern number of laminate. Z • The evaluation of requests will take no longer than 3 business 0 days. x maxon• 13 Reference EXHIBIT B Custom Warranty Exclusions CARB Compliance Notice If Maxon Furniture Inc.agrees to use the COM or build a custom Overview product: The California Air Resources Board(CARE)has established limits • Maxon shall have no responsibility for the condition,quality, on the emissions of formaldehyde from hardwood plywood, value,performance, physical properties,or any other particle board,medium density fiberboard,thin medium density W aspect of the COM,regardless of whether or not Maxon has fiberboard,and finished goods containing these materials. tested the COM,and whether or not the COM has passed w any Manufacturing Feasibility testing.Maxon disclaims all Effective January 1,2009,hardwood plywood,particle board, ,LU warranties,express,implied or statutory,with respect to the medium density fiberboard,thin medium density fiberboard,and COM,including,without limitation,any implied warranties of finished goods containing these materials must meet emissions MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,or limits given in title 17,California Code of Regulations section NON-INFRINGEMENT. 93120.2. (refer to note below*) X Maxon shall have no responsibility for the condition,quality, value, performance,physical properties,or any other aspect All hardwood plywood,particle board,medium density fiberboard, z thin medium density fiberboard,and finished goods containing of a custom-built product,regardless of whether or not MaLU xon has tested the product,and whether or not the product has these materials supplied to Maxon Furniture Inc.comply with the passed any Manufacturing Feasibility testing.Maxon disclaims current requirements of the CARB regulation. all warranties,express,implied or statutory,with respect to the product,including,without limitation,any implied warranties Note V) of MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,or CARB's rule includes a"sell-through provision",which allows for a Q NON-INFRINGEMENT. timely clearing of existing inventories following the effective dates g Maxon shall have no liability for any damages,injuries,or losses for Phase I and Phase II standards. For manufacturers of hardwood `" to the Customer or to any third party that shall be caused by plywood,particleboard,medium density fiberboard,and thin any COM or custom built product,and the Customer shall hold density fiberboard 3 months sell-through period is provided. For N Maxon harmless from all liability. distributors,a 5 month,and for importers a 3 month sell-through a period is provided for hardwood plywood,particleboard,and Special Paint Policy medium density fiberboard,and thin medium density fiberboard N Maxon at its own discretion may modify its standard products manufactured before the Phase I and Phase II effective dates. with non-standard paint colors to meet specific needs. Dealer is An 18 month sell-through period is provided for distributors required to submit a special paint request via the Tailored Solutions and importers of finished goods containing hardwood plywood, Application on maxonfurniture.com.Asample of the non-standard particleboard,medium density fiberboard,and thin medium 5 paint color desired will be required for matching.Pricing,lead time, density fiberboard. and order information will be provided at the time of approval. Y For each new requested paint,there will be a$500 net fee to Please see official information available from this link provided p cover supplier costs to match the special item. below: For existing,previously-approved paints,there is no$500 matching fee, however,there is a sample chip fee of$100 net http://www.arb.ca.gov/regact/2007/compwood07/compwood07.htm w for paints. Q Samples,preferably at least 3"x 5"chips,of the exact color w desired should be sent to the Maxon Tailored Products Group. a Paint matches require(3)sample chips.Please mail these sample chips to the address below and reference the Special Item Request Number from Tailored Solutions. LU Maxon Furniture Inc. Q Attn:COM Department 0 200 Oak Street Muscatine,IA 52761 • Maxon will color match the sample and send control samples to the address provided in the request.Dealer will review Maxon's color match and approve by signing the back of the sample z chip.Send the signed sample back to the Maxon COM Team. WSpecial paints will be assigned a paint price grade. • Orders will not be accepted until Maxon receives the Dealer's written approval on the color match. N Extended lead times will apply on orders containing special w paints. 0 Due to manufacturing techniques,materials,and quality issues, wsome exclusions will apply and some matches may be declined. v V Q X w 0 z 14I maxon• EXHIBIT B Reference Maxon® Limited lifetime Warranty Why the Maxon Limited Lifetime Warranty? Maxon Furniture Inc. is dedicated to providing products and services that make doing business with us easy.We also strive to put our customers in a position to win with the performance products we produce,most of which are manufactured right here in the United States of America.We use manufacturing materials, recycling habits, lean processes and indoor air quality methodologies that reaffirm our say-do commitment to your environment.We a proud to say many of Maxon's product lines(Emerge,Prefix,Smartspace,Surpass, Prepare and Include)are SCS Indoor Advantage Gold certified as well as Level certified by BIFMA's Sustainability Program. c� Best of all,Maxon Furniture Inc.fully stands behind our products and have a vested interest in your success.The Maxon Limited Lifetime m Warranty is our assurance to you that the Maxon Furniture Inc.panel systems,frame and tile systems,worksurfaces,benching,desks, seating,tables,and storage you purchase will be free from defective material or workmanship for as long as you,the original purchaser, own it.In the unlikely occurrence any Maxon Furniture Inc.product covered by the Maxon Limited Lifetime Warranty shall fail,we will D repair or replace any Maxon product or component that fails under normal commercial office use,free of charge.This warranty contains m your sole and exclusive remedy for any warranty claim and is subject to the limitations,exclusions and other provisions set forth below. x What is covered by the Maxon Limited Lifetime Warranty? All Maxon Furniture Inc.product lines,materials,and components are covered by the Maxon Limited Lifetime Warranty except for the items described below.The specific product lines listed below are covered under Maxon's 12-Year Limited Warranty and 5-Year Limited Warranties from the date of purchase. > Ln -n Maxon 12-Year Limited Warranty y • Electrical components(lamps and ballasts are not covered). m • Adept seating controls. • Adept pneumatic cylinders • Accessories. `^ c • Laminate surfaces. Ln Maxon 5-Year Limited Warranty • Northport seating. • Panel and seating textiles. • Prepare and Smartspace Height-Adjustable Bases. 0 What is Not Covered? This warranty does not apply to: • Normal wear-and-tear,which is to be expected over the course of ownership. m • Damage caused by carrier in-transit,which will be handled under separate terms. `^ • Modifications or attachments to the product that are not approved by Maxon Furniture Inc. • Products not installed,used or maintained in accordance with product instructions and warnings. • Products used for personal or household use or for rental purposes. v • Customer's Own Material(COM)selected by and used at the request of the owner. • Prepare and Smartspace Height-Adjustable Bases when not used with Maxon worksurfaces. M Seating Usage Normal commercial office usage for seating is defined as the equivalent of a single shift,40-hour workweek.To the extent that a seating Ln product is used in a manner exceeding this,the applicable warranty period will be reduced in a pro-rata manner. o To Obtain Service Under This Warranty Your Maxon Dealer is our partner in supporting your warranty requests. Follow the procedures outlined below for the best level of M service: Contact your Dealer from whom the product was purchased within 30 days of discovery of the defect.Be prepared to affirm you are the Ln m original purchaser of the product and to provide the serial numbers(s)from the product in question. M z Your Dealer will gather all pertinent information regarding the claim,inspect the product and contact Maxon Furniture Inc.Customer Support representative.(Please allow a reasonable amount of time for inspection and review.) If Maxon Furniture Inc.affirms that the product in question is eligible under the conditions of the warranty as stated above,the Customer n Support representative or other representative of Maxon Furniture Inc.will determine whether to provide replacement parts,authorize m repairs,or replace the product. L^ 0 A m This warranty applies only to products sold within the United States of America and the Commonwealth of Canada. z 0 m X maxom 15 w" W 1 U — a maxon° l a 31. a a"a y"C PROMPT DESIGN SUPPORT: NIGH QUALITY RENDERINGS wga Find personalized service with our Maxon design Our designers create 36renderings to bring your services team.We provide quick solutions by working projects to life.Simply provide the preferred textiles with you directly to understand your customers'needs and finishes with the request or utilize our designers' v and to help design dynamic work environments on expertise to create the perfect palette for your your schedule. customer. ` a SPECIFICATION TRAINING: Our design team is available to provide you with the services you need to include Maxon solutions in your next project.We provide comprehensive product specification trainings as well as support via webinar,phone,or face-to-face for any additional needs. GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge" Frame and Tile System z m m I x X � „� y� �t I7 V • 41 a D � m Ln C EmergeTM Frame and Tile System V) Some people work best through collaboration and others require a more focused approach.Emerge frame and tile solution offers extreme flexibility,making it easy to provide both types of work environments.With its refined design details,you can keep it basic or dress it up. O The lower panels and frameless glass provide an open,naturally lit workspace that inspires.Emerge is built to last with steel panels that N stand up to years of use and numerous reconfigurations.It can also be paired with other Maxon products to create beautiful,functional C spaces that look as good as they work. v P m Once you've selected the furniture for your space,a variety of material options are available to give it a personality all its own.Create a "' bright look with panels and storage in light fabrics,or make a bold statement with woodgrain laminate and contrasting trim and panel fabric. It's your palette to complement your brand or style. m D z m Ln O z D M m Ln m —Di Z G) D n m Ln m Ln Z M m x maxon• 117 Emerge'" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w U W Typicals LU wPlease refer to our typicals gallery for all Maxon systems.www.maxonfurniture.com/design-resources/typicals.Here you can download Cad files,BOM's with current pricing and PDF's of each drawing.Each month we add new ideas to support industry trends. Use the Maxon Typicals Gallery to find the components in Emerge workstations: J LL A-FTFB4236R M-FTFB4236R 42L �6 N �W X =k O-v ro w 24x72 3orz•A A p n' ----------- m a w N Q Ln Ln v-dae o w N _l D 0908 ° LLI �Zt a���a�ifw atiaa�a�»w atiaa�e�i�w N Y =E9 M-FTFB506OR 50L 0 yLLJ <�N o a � 24z60 a w M CD C- J W LL < .I sf H � J w Iz— �II w 1' N 0 I � O] N O ° V) w N 09x4i Q of N C LID x 0 109 aosos6��w 18 I maxorr GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge'" Frame and Tile System M m Base Frames Stacking Frames m Z C7 m rA 35"H 42'/2"H 50"H 65"H 15"H 30"H Doors Frameless Glass Top Trim M m T X Sliding 95"H Hinged 50"H/65"H/80"H D z V) 124"W 30"W 36"W 42"W 48"W 6011W D 15"H II II II II II II I(I�u m Illl 30"HF] F] F] � I� Ln IIII Illl v D 24"W 30"W 36"W 42"W 48"W 60"W L^ 35"H :E O Ln Ln C D 42Yz"H mn M m D M m 50"H O D M m 65"H N Z Lj Ll Connector Kits — Emerge L T X S V Y W E n m 90°Connector Kit "V" 2-way 120"(V) L/IO "T" 3-way Connector Kit Connector Kit 1 :0 "X" 4-way Connector Kit "Y" 3-way 120°(Y) 1P Extended Straight Connector Kit 3 rl f Connector Kit "W" Wall Mount Kit w "E" End Trim Kit i Z v m x maxon• 119 Emerge TMFrame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w U w Working with Frames w w w Lay-in top pathway accepts data cables. Panels(frames and tiles)are 3"nominal thick, actual dimension is 21/8"thick(use 21A"to Flat top trim is specified calculate intersections in length of panel runs). separately for all panel frames. 0 Stacking frames are available in 15"and 30"H. X u. Lu Beltline area accommodates electrical a power and provides desktop access to data and communication cables on 421/2"H, 50"H,and 65"H base frames. Steel horizontal members have vertical cable and electrical routing capacity. w Q 0 a �^ Opening in the side of uprights Q accommodate a large volume of data cabling and electrical. Structural panel frames are available in 35", 421/2",50",and 65"nominal heights. v) N a Lay-in base pathway accepts voice, Q data and fiber optic cable,as well as Base pathway cover has outlet openings that electrical system. accept duplex receptacles or commercially N o available modular data faceplates. w U 5 Leveling glides are accessible Dfrom the interior of raceway U) cover frames. I Leveling glides provide 21/4"of adjustment on frames cc L with raceway covers. O w a a or Frame Dimensions(Actual) a Depth:21/s"(use 21/4"to calculate intersections in length of panel run) Widths:24",30",36",42",48",60" Lu Heights:343/8",411/s",491/a", 643/a(with levelers fully retracted) Stacking Frames:15"H,30"H O v~i Leveling Glides:21/4"range Frameless Glass:71/4"H,143/4"H (D Z Q w N Ln w O v) Ln w v Q X w 0 Z 201 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge" Frame and Tile System M n r- Building Vertically with Emerge Frames m 110"H Z n m 95"H ls^ O o 80"H 15" o. 15" 15" 15" 0 0' 0 15" a 0 0 O � O o o T X 35"H 50"H 65"H Order top cap,tiles,and segment In-Line Connections Stacking Frame Connection bars separately. Ln Panel Frames Segment Bars K • Specifications:formed,steel vertical members,with tubular Segment bars are horizontal steel cross steel horizontal members are welded into a sturdy,structural members required between tile segments. ,,, panel frame. Must be specified on each side of frame. • Panels are shipped with base pathway covers installed. Black only. m • Top trim, monolithic or segmented tiles,and segment bars are ordered separately with choice of application. Horizontal Stiffener Supports • Direct connections between same height frames in a Ordered separately. continuous run are accomplished with provided hardware. Optional horizontal stiffener supports can be There is no incremental increase in dimension along the run. used to increase the stiffness of interior on N • For adequate stability,one of two methods of stabilization panel when acoustical tiles are on both sides "' shown on page 22 must be adhered to. or acoustic tile one side and tool tile on other side. • Base raceway panel frames include:frame,base pathway Includes attaching hardware. 0 covers,attaching hardware,and bottom segment clip. Gray only. Ln Stacking Frames Top Trim • When adding stacking frames,remove the top trim from the Use to finish top on base panel frames. v structural frame,and install it on top of uppermost stacking It is possible to span multiple frames when N frame. the combined frame width is equal to the top i • Stacking connection provides a solid metal-to-metal trim width. connection,allowing the stacking frame to accept hang-on Available in flat painted finish. components,per Maxon configuration guidelines, D • Includes attachment hardware and uses specified top trim.Add Variable Height Frameless Glass m appropriate connectors. Frameless Glass insert integrated into the base • Stacking frames-can be added to the top of a 35"H base panel panel frame top trim. frame up to 80"H,added to 421/2"H and SON base panel frames Replaces top trim on structural or stacking in any combination up to 95"H,and added to the top of 65"H frame. structural panel frames up to 110"H. It is possible to span multiple frames when the O • Slot modularity will be lost when stacking frame is used with combined frame width is equal to the panel D 421/2"H base panel frames. mounted screen width. rm • To maintain modularity on 35"H,SON,and 65"H base panel Taller adjacent frames require"FC"grooved end trim. frames use 15"H or 30"H stacking frames. Frameless Glass is non-structural.Do not hang or stack on top • If panel mounting slots are not being used,any stacking frame of Frameless Glass. L/) can be used on any base panel frame. Available in 1/8"thick clear or frosted glass. mD • Do not combine differing frame widths in a single stack or span ={ multiple base panel frames with stacking frames. czi • Stacking frames cannot be used as base frames. • Guidelines for using overhead storage with stacking frames are given on pages 62-63. > n m Ln m N Z M X x maxon• 121 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w U w Building Horizontally with Emerge Frames W Important planning guidelines:For adequate stability,one of two methods of stabilization must be adhered to: w Definitions: Parent Panel Run(Spine)—Panels(or a single panel)configured in a straight line intended to divide space.It is usually longer than the panels used to stabilize it. Return Panels—Panels attached to a parent run for the purpose of stabilizing it.Return panels may also have the effect of dividing space. Note:Return panels must be no more than 30"lower than the maximum height of the parent panel run. x �etutoQy�e\s pare\'L Amyx. LLJ ���Pa�e�tRA�myx p8'mn'i LL q8� w U a et��pyoe\Snh Y Q S�oRetui�PyPe\s 60 �comb1�ea�e W k Return panels must have combined length 60%of parent runi' �^ Method 1—Opposing returns Method 2—Single-sided returns a < A parent run must be a minimum of 48"and a maximum of Use chart below for minimum return panel lengths for Single- N 144" between return panels.The parent run must have a Sided Returns in 90°and 120°applications. minimum of two return panels running in opposing directions Return panels must not be more than 30"shorter in height than N on each end of run. the parent run. v Return panels must not be no more than 30" lower than the Supports other than return panels can be wall mount brackets, Q maximum height of the parent panel run. peninsulas,worksurface end panel supports or stationary file Supports other than return panels can be wall mount brackets, supported worksurface. peninsulas,worksurface end panel supports or stationary file 0 supported worksurface. • When using 120'connections, 12"must be added to length of Method 2 return panels as determined by methods 1 and 2. Uj Method 1 Parent Run: 90•connector: 120°connector: w Minimum Return Parent Run Length Minimum Return Panel Widths with 48"-100" 72"total 84"total Panels Stack-Ons 110"-132" 84"tota1 96"total w Q 48"-144" 24" 24" 134"-144" 96"tota1 108"total z O F— (D Door Panel Frame Sliding Doors and Mounting Kits w The 95"H door panel includes frame, Frosted Translucent Acrylic door. `" 42"W door, hinges and attaching Sliding doors are available in 50"H,65"H, hardware. and 80"H. Specify 8.5"fabric tile for top tiles Sliding doors are 42"wide to cover a • Doors available in laminate. 36"wide opening. ON c Flat top cap ordered separately. Must connect to a panel of equal or taller LU Lockset with lever ordered separately. height. No segment kit needed. See illustration and specification information on page"Working with Sliding Doors"on next page. x w Z 22 I Maxon, GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge" Frame and Tile System M m M Working with Sliding Doors Sliding doors for Emerge are a great addition to any new or existing installations.The sliding door can be specified with specific mounting Z kits for each door ordered.With a Frosted Translucent insert and your choice of Core or Select paint,the sliding door will create a m unique look for any office environment. The sliding doors are available in 50",65",and 80"H models and can mount to 30",36",42",and 48"W panels.They accommodate a 36"W opening and are 42"W, nominally.The door ships from the factory non-handed and can be installed in either right or left handed applications.The handle pulls located on each side of the door are non-locking and are color matched to the trim to create a uniform style.And with the threshold free design,the sliding door offers better aesthetics and safety by eliminating the potential for tripping. General Guidelines for Use of Sliding Door • The system requires the ordering of both a door and a mounting bracket kit. • All doors are 42"wide to accommodate a 36"W opening and are non-handed.Door leveling is dependant on floor being level. rM • A mounting bracket kit must be ordered for each door corresponding to the mounting panels width(30",36",42",or 48"W). X • Mounting bracket kits are system specific and for Emerge. General Guidelines for Layout Planning of Sliding Door • Stability guidelines must be followed when specifying a sliding door.The sliding door system was designed to close an opening in a run of lateral panels.Doors mounted to long runs of panels without floor support,ties to worksurfaces,or return panels may seem z less stable. Ln Ln D n D rn If the door is used to close an If the door is mounted to a panel opening(A)where the panelE run that is positioned adjacent to opposite the door is at 90°,therea wall(E)inside a 90°angle,there cA will be a gap equal to the panelmust be 42"clearance between the. zthickness between the door and the11 track stop and the wall/inside 90° �panel end when closed. Ln 0 OR The door is attached at the base of the panel at any end position with If back-to-back doors are mounted FEPO P D a wrap around bracket.Bracket kits on panels(C)that are less than are ordered in conjunction with N 42"W they will interfere with each 1 appropriate end trim profiles.The other if both are open at the same slots at the base of the panel must time. �j be clear(D)and cannot be utilized m 9 am by worksurface supports or panel D ^ hung components. m c When planning the layout,care must be taken if the plan includes a door mounted on a panel that is 3 less than 42"W.If the panel is at a " "S " corner(B),the door will protrude If a door is closing an opening of D e into the aisle or next workstation a workstation that includes a T" G) connector in the opposite wall,an M when in the open position. extended straight connector may need to be used to maintain the 36" required opening. cn m ».en un D to ni_s r riss Z The slide door is designed to be attached to an end of run panel only.The slide door should not be ZYS9 D specified to a panel that is WBP.3 connected on both ends,regardless ® F v if one of those ends is connecting To provide additional panel stability Ln to a connector kit.Failure to abide when sliding doors are specified, 22 " by this rule will result in a failure to ® worksurface support in the form of Ln install the door. ----. A worksurface bracket kits or spanner "ears"aeaw" 'ssr�s�uw �, arm rails are suggested. � 3 m 0 is siuri is ss�uri X X maxon• 1 23 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w U w Hinged Door LU W W F Best placement of a door is at an zMn Door frame is 42"W. R � L,T,X connector or wall starter , Laminate Door Opening is 38"W. connector for rigidity. 3 —2 F 0ti 3, 611 X Ml. U- W a w U Q � wmsa w�+u� c�saon wntpec wfsx� wn!xee � un-sra w,rr� t Q MTfF 2 Use of spanning top caps at Wall starts should be used if V) an inline will also help add panels are not required along Q additional rigidity. the wall. D Fi � w U Q W ]C 0 W d W O. W Q 0 Ln Ln Z a w Ln w 0 V) V) W U Q x w Z 241 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge'" Frame and Tile System m T m Connectors and Trim m Intersecting Connectors High-Low Connectors Finish Connectors m— End Trim Kits Top View End vertical trim cover(includes top cap— adds 3/8"to run). Frame Frame Order to finish the end of every panel run(except when attaching frame to 2a� permanent walls). Multiple-Height Connections . Multiple-height connections also utilize Frame standard"C',"T","X",and"S"connectors, in the height of the tallest panel.(See Extended Straight Connector Kit"S" / examples 1-4). "S",Connector Kits �I Wall Mount Kits X • Extended straight connector kit"S" High-Low"Fv"End Trim Wall mount kits provide a means to affix a can be used to keep continuous runs panel run to a permanent building wall. dimensionally consistent with opposing High-Low End Trim Kits Includes top cap.(Color must be rn panel runs which incorporate"T"or"X' High-low"W"covers the exposed end of specified). intersections. a frame when joining frames of differing Connector adds 11/16"to length of panel D • Add 21/4"to the total length of the panel height in certain configurations—profile run. N run for each intersection,whether located adds 3/8"to length of panel run.See Anchor devices are not supplied with D in the middle or at the end of the run. illustration at above and examples 5-6. the wall mount kit.Refer to Emerge • At the end of a panel run use"E"model Installation Instructions for appropriate M suffix end trim kit. hardware. Grooved High-Low Trim C c • Grooved High-Low"FC"for use when a panel with frameless glass is adjacent to 1D„ an inline taller panel.Taller adjacent inline �^ "L'90• panel cannot have a panel mounted screen. Example 1 Example 4 65"H Connectors required: Connectors required: O 1-15'11"S' 1-15'H"FV" PO N 1-35"H„T;; 1-7]/1 H L' 5011H C "T"3-Way So"H 1-71/2 H'T' � 1-35"H"X" D M Ln v 35'H m i,X„4-Way ; D 4214„H 35"H m "V"120.2-Way '' Example 2 Connectors required: Example 5 so'H 1 15'H"V" Connectors required: cn 1-50'H"Y" 6s'H 1-15"H"FV" O 1-35'H„y 35"H 70 35"H ail 65"H m "Y"120.3-Way 'T"," "T",' " " rr " X , V'r and Y Connector Kits "L","T",and"X"connector kits are used D when connecting panels at intersecting =i z runs. Example 6 C) • For"L","T",and"X"connector kits,add Example 3 Connectors required: Connectors required: 23/4' to the total length of the panel run for 1_30'H"C' 1-50"H T' each intersection,whether located in the 1-35"H' ' 1-15"H"W" D middle or at the end of the run. "L","T",and"S"connector kits includes 6s'" M • In top cap transition,connectors,vertical 30'H Ln 30"cover,light gap extrusion,and attaching Tile Frame O Tile Frame M hardware. cmir • "X"connector kits includes top cap Tile saH Tile transition and connectors. 30"H • 2-Way 120°(V)Connector Kits and 3-Way Tile 120°(Y)Connector Kits includes top cap z transition,connectors,vertical cover and 6s H 3s;H o Frame BaseFrame m attaching hardware. x maxon• 125 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 W W Overview of Tiles Uj W LLJ Pass-thru Tile Clear and Frosted Glass Tile Laminate Tile Whiteboard Tile X ORM aL %l % i. W a Fabric Tile Technology Tile Accessories Tool Tile Steel Tile aTiles—Tackable Acoustical and Hard Surface* N 24"W 30"W 36"W 42"W 48"W 60"W 7W'H 0 0 0 0 15"H 30 H F� *Not available in 7%"H D Data/Electrical Port(port tiles available as acoustical only) LI) 24"W 30"W 36"W 42"W 48"W 60"W LLI C> 15 H LL N 30"HF7 Y 0 42'h"H v a e e e e o e W K na For 42.5"H-65"H base frames.Can use 15"H Tiles at beltline Segment. W a Monolithic Tiles—Tackable Acoustical 24"W 30"W 36"W 42"W 48'W 60"W LU Q 42/z"H 0 N 50"H Z Q to 65"H Ln W_ 0C o Glass Tile Kits V) W 24"W 3011W 36"W 42"W 48"W 60"W Q 15 H X 30 H o Not used on base segment. z 26 1 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge" Frame and Tile System M m Emerge tiles come in a variety of styles.Select the aesthetic*and functional combination that meets your specific requirements. z Additional tiles not shown below include Monolithic,Monolithic Port,and Custom. z n m Flat painted trim. Fabric tackable acoustical tiles are available in hundreds of fabrics and colors,ported or non-ported. Steel surface tiles allow you to choose from a range of materials and colors. v z m T X N D D n m Ln C D V 0 O 0 Ln C i t I I �I�i f7 m 000 I ! I Single pane glass tile kits provide access to (L I natural light,and connect office workers visually. I Available in single-pane. V) O 444 G) l Marker board tiles are excellent for m conference areas and offices where informal meetings are held frequently. 65"H frame shown. U) m -i-I Z Tile design requires segment Laminate tiles are available to provide the bars(ordered separately) warmth of wood. between all tiles which D provides a V16'reveal n between tiles. m O m V) *Aesthetics of opposing tile surface and/or frame interior should be considered when selecting perforated or light colored sheer materials. Z 0 m x maxon• 127 Emerge'" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w U W Working with Tiles W w Ll- Tile Heights 60"H 45"H 37Yz"H 30"H 15"H 7112 � '—: Typical Tile Height Configurations Uj Middle segment bars are required between any two tiles—order separately based on tile configuration on each side of frame. 15"H Ui 30"H U stacking 16"H 1s"" To calculate the total height of tiles(s) required,deduct 5"(height of base/top trim)from the total nominal panel height. < 1s"H Example:65"H Frame takes 2 30"H tiles. N 35"H 3o"H 1s°H 65-5=2 x 30 N N d 7Yz H N 421/2"H 37Yz"H 30"H cN LU U Q 15"H 15"H D 30"H Y 50"H 15"H 45"H 30„H o O 15"H 15"H Tiles and segment bars for between tiles ordered separately w 15"H 15"H 15"H Q 30"H w 15"H 15"H Tiles can be ordered in the size that matches or 65"H 60"H the frame height plus the stacker height. 15"H 45"H Example:Order a 60"H tile if you are using a 15"H 35"H frame plus a 30"H stacker. Emerge tiles are universal(except glass)and rlol< 1s°H 1s°H can be placed at any 71/2"increment on the frame. 0 30"H 30"H N 15"H 15"H 45"H *Additional tile combinations to those 15^H 15°H 1s"H shown at the left are possible;heights $0 H above 65"require stacking frames- C9 15"H 45"H maximum height is 110". Z 30"H 30"11 30"H Q 15"H w N 15"H N 30"H w 15"H 50"H 45"H O 15"H 60"H N w 95"H 30"H U 15"H 15"H U a 15"H 45"H rl 30"H 30"H 30"H 15"H X w Z 28 1 Maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge" Frame and Tile System M m M Tile Options Z Fabric Tiles m • Tiles do not include segment bars—order separately. • Tiles are non-dedicated.They can be used in any combination and in combination with other file sizes. Technology Tiles 0 ° Receptacle openings with blank covers(1 in 24"W tiles;2 in wider tiles). Located 303/8"above bottom of base raceway. • Tiles do not include segment bars—order separately. • 35"H frames do not have beltline data/power capability. • 30"H port tiles can be used in the base position on 421/2"H or higher frames for data/power access at beltline. • Specify the size that matches the frame size.One tile per frame side on 421/2"H,50"H and 65"H. • Technology Tile Power brackets are required,refer to page 39. T • Electrical components are sold separately and need to be specified. x Accessories Tiles • Tiles do not include segment bars—order separately. • Sturdy aluminum extrusion with steel support construction. D • Powder-coated for durable finish. 00 • Use in place of standard 15 H tiles. Ln • Cannot be used in the bottom location of a panel frame. m ,� Each tool tile has a suggested weight capacity of 80 lbs.of paper management accessories. • Optional horizontal tile stiffener support can be used to increase the stiffness of interior when using tool tiles and an acoustical tile.See page 32. z Clear and Frosted Glass Tiles D • Tempered safety glass encased within a frame with built-in shrouds. N d Single-pane construction,glass is flush on one side. For use in stacking frames also. • Glass opening is 4"less than nominal heights and widths. p • Cannot be used in top tile position of a 421/2"H panel frame or any frame with integrated power pole. � • Cannot be used at the bottom or beltline location of panel frame. Ln • To utilize glass tiles at an uppermost frame position,there must be clearance above the primary or stack-on panel frame equal to,or greater than the height of the glass. • 30"H tiles will work in top position of 65"H frames and in 30"H stacking frame.Segment bar needs to be ordered. N Laminate Tiles o HPL Laminate coated MDF construction. m • Available in ALL HPL options. D • Tiles do not ship with segment bars—order separately. m • Tiles attach with custom tile bracket kit—included.Specify paint color. • 15"H and 30"H tiles are non-dedicated and can be used in any tile position. Pass-Thru Tiles H -� Need to order(2)71/2"H fabric tiles to enclose the top of the frame when using a pass-thru tile. z Actual height of Pass-Thru Tile is 221/2". M • Segment kits are not required when using pass-thru. M Ln Steel Tiles n • Tiles do not include segment bars-order separately. _{ • Painted steel construction. czi • 71/2"H, 15"H and 30"H tiles are non-dedicated and can be used in any tile position. / Do not use this tile with wall track. • Accepts magnetic accessories. M Whiteboard Tiles Ln Ln • White marker board tile;painted steel surface. 0 • Accepts magnetic accessories. N • It is not recommended to use this tile with wall track. • 15"H and 30"H are non-dedicated and can be used in any tile position. • Surface is dry erase application. z 0 m X maxon• 1 29 Emerge'" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. W All Actual Dimensions are listed on page 20. U W Base Frame W L.L W List°' ` List Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Frame Base 35"H M-FTFB3524R 35" 24" 15.7 1.7 418 469 M-FTFB353OR 35" 30" 18.9 2.1 425 476 M-FTFB3536R 35" 36" 21.2 2.4 435 486 M-FTFB3542R 35" 42" 23.6 2.8 445 496 x_ ° ° M-FTFB3548R 35" 48" 26 3.2 458 509 11 M-FTFB3560R 35" 60" 30.8 4 467 518 w CL a Frame-Base421/z'H M-FTFB4224R 42.5" 24" 20.1 2 426 477 M-FTFB4230R 42.5" 30" 23.1 2.4 438 489 w Q M-FTF64236R 42.5" 36" 26 2.9 448 499 M-FTFB4242R 42.5" 42" 28.9 3.4 460 511 F- Q M-FTFB4248R 42.5" 48" 31.8 3.8 470 521 M-FTFB4260R 42.5" 60" 37.7 4.7 478 529 V) Frame-Base 50"H M-FTFB5024R 50" 24" 22.2 2.3 438 489 Ln Q M-FTFB5030R 50" 30" 25.2 2.9 451 502 M-FTFB5036R 50" 36" 28 3.4 461 512 N M-FTFB5042R 50" 42" 31 4 473 524 M-FTFB5048R 50" 48" 33.9 4.5 485 536 w ° M-FTFB5060R 50" 60" 40.3 5.6 497 548 U ° L z:) Frame-Base 65"H M-FTFB6524R 65" 24" 24.7 3 451 502 Ln Y M-FTFB653OR 65" 30" 27.8 3.7 464 515 O M-FTFB6536R 65" 36" 30.6 4.4 480 531 M-FTFB6542R 65" 42" 33.6 5.1 497 548 Ui M-FTFB6548R 65" 48" 36.5 5.8 502 553 z M-FTFB656OR 65" 60" 42.3 7.2 516 567 w � o a o w O Q O Ln i- (D Z Q w V) W HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Paint Color w See page 5 v u Q z � . 301 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge" Frame and Tile System See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. All Actual Dimensions are listed on page 20. m n m Stacking Frames m z n Includes rn • Stacking frame and attaching hardware. Description Model H W Wt. Cubes List Frame-Stacking 15"H M-FTFS1524R 15" 24" 8 0.7 342 M-FTFS153OR 15" 30" 10 0.9 351 M-FTFS1536R 15" 36" 12 1.1 358 M-FTFS1542R 15" 42" 14 1.3 368 v M-FTFS1548R 15" 48" 16 1.5 379 m M-FTFS1560R 15" 60" 20 1.8 386 X M-FTFS3024R 30" 24" 8 1.4 373 Frame-Stacking 30"H � M-FTF53030R 30" 30" 10 1.8 381 D M-FTFS3036R 30" 36" 12 2.1 391Ln M-FTFS3042R 30" 42" 14 2.4 413 D n m M-FTFS3048R 30" 48" 16 2.7 421 M-FTFS306OR 30" 60" 20 3.4 440 C D Ln Ln Ln Ln C m D rl m Ln m D M m Ln O A D M m M m Z C) HOW TO SPECIFY D n n Select Model Number M Ln O 22 m Ln .,_ I I m rn X maxon• 131 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U w Frames-Horizontal Stiffener Support LU w w w List Description Model W Wt. Cubes Core Paint Emerge Frame-Horizontal Stiffener Support M-FTFH24R 24" 2 0.4 91 M-FTFH30R 30" 2 0.4 104 M-FTFH36R 36" 3 0.5 112 M-FTFH42R 42" 3 0.5 132 M-FTFH48R 48" 3 0.6 146 x M-FTFH60R 60" 4 0.7 161 w w o: a w U Floor Mounting and Channel Brackets Q List List U1 Description _T Model W Wt. Cubes Core Premium v) Paint Paint a Emerge Floor Mounting and Channel Brackets M-EMFMC06 6" 0.5 0.1 24 50 N M-EMFMC12 12" 0.6 0.2 29 55 ` M-EMFMC24 24" 0.7 0.2 39 65 �* r w /� M-EMFMC30 30" 0.8 0.3 45 71 U ?i M-EMFMC36 36" 0.9 0.3 48 74 r M-EMFMC42 42" 1 0.4 49 75 ZD M-EMFMC48 48" 1.1 0.4 51 77 O w a w a w CD Q O V) CD Z Ln w w HOW TO SPECIFY Cr Select Model Number Select Paint Color O ., w See page 5 U U Q x o Z M - ' 32I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge" Frame and Tile System See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. M n m Sliding Door m z n Includes m • Sliding Door. • Two hang rail assemblies. • Two door stop brackets. • Frosted Acrylic Sliding Door. LIst List Core Premium Description Model HTw Wt. Cubes paint Paint Emerge Sliding Door M-FTSD5042 50" 42" 53 5.5 1907 1958 T M-FTSD6542 65" 42" 53 7.1 1988 2039 x M-FTSD8042 80" 42" 53 8.7 2065 2116 Ln D z D n m Ln C D Ln Ln Sliding Door Mounting Kit 0 List List c T Core Premium Description Model W Wt. Cubes paint Paint ^' In Emerge Sliding Door Kit M-FTSDKIT30 30" 0.5 0.4 262 313 M-FTSDKIT36 36" 0.5 0.5 279 330 -o / M-FTSDKIT42 42" 0.5 0.5 298 349 ^' v M-FTSDKIT48 48" 0.5 0.6 308 359 m Sliding door mounting kit to be � placed on adjacent panel. D n m M m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Paint Color n m Ln N See page 5 0 m �� Z I I " C m __. x maxon• 133 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. LLJ All Dimensions are Nominal.Pricing listed below is for Core Paint.Please see"How to Specify"section at bottom of page for Premium Paint upcharge. U w Hinged Door/Frame Package w W Includes • Door panel frame. • Front door. Hinges. • Top cap. • Attaching hardware. Specify(2)MFTTD0842 8"Fabric Tiles,no segment bars required. x List List Description Model H W Wt. Cubes LS L2 -T LU Emerge Hinged Door/Frame Package M-FTDP9542 95" 42" 155 9.8 3707 3809 w Q n. cc Q � t. to N Hinged Door Lock Set Kit M-DOORLEVER 6" 10" 2 0.1 418 � LU w U Un w o: Un Y O Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Grade A Grade B Fabric Fabric Hinged Door Fabric Tile M-FTTDO842F 13" 42" 3 0.9 99 103 w cc Q a w a w Q O F- C7 z Q w W HOW TO SPECIFY °C Select Model Number Select Door Laminate Select Paint Color 0 w See page 10 See page 5 Core Paint Choice(no upcharge) Q Premium Paint($51 upcharge) x Ui z l 341 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge'" Frame and Tile System See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. M n m Fabric Tiles m z Grade A Grade B rn Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Fabric Fabric 71/2"H Tackable Fabric Tile M-FTTS0724F 7.5" 24' 2 0.4 87 91 M-FTTS0730F 7.5" 30" 2 0.5 91 95 M-FTTS0736F 7.5" 36" 2 0.5 95 99 M-FTTS0742F 7.5" 42" 3 0.6 97 101 M-FTTS0748F 7.5" 48" 2 0.7 103 108 M-FTTS0760F 7.5" 60" 3 0.9 106 112 v M m T_ 15"H Tackable Fabric Tile M-FTTS1524F 15" 24" 1 0.1 99 103 X M-FTTS1530F 15" 30" 1.3 0.1 106 110 M-FTTS1536F 15" 36" 1.6 0.1 115 119 N M-FTTS1542F 15" 42" 1.8 0.2 126 131 D M-FTTS1548F 15" 48" 2.1 0.2 130 135 M-FTTS1560F 15" 60" 2.6 0.2 136 142 D n m 30"H Tackable Fabric Tile M-FTTS3024F 30" 24" 2 0.2 132 136 Ln M-FTTS3030F 30" 30" 2.5 0.2 142 147 C A M-FTTS3036F 30" 36" 3 0.3 151 157 D M-FTTS3042F 30" 42" 3.5 0.3 160 166 V' M-FTTS3048F 30" 48" 4 0.4 169 176 M-FTTS306OF 30" 60" 5 0.4 177 184 00 7z Ln C T D M m N .D M m D z m Ln O z D G) m Ln m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY D c-, Select Model Number Select Fabric N See pages 6-7 0 m Ln Z M� ��..: C X maxon• 135 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. v w Fabric Tiles w w w Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Grade A Grade 13 Fabric Fabric 371/2"H Tackable Fabric Tile M-FTTS3724F 37.5" 24" 2 0.2 184 190 M-FTTS3730F 37.5" 30" 2.5 0.2 196 202 M-FTTS3736F 37.S" 36" 3 0.3 209 216 M-FTTS3742F 37.5" 42" 3.5 0.3 220 227 M-FTTS3748F 37.5" 48" 4 0.4 233 241 M-FTTS3760F 37.5" 60" 5 0.4 245 254 x U- w a. 45"H Tackable Fabric Tile M-FTTS4524F 45" 24" 2 0.2 215 223 w M-FTTS4530F 45" 30" 2.5 0.2 269 278 M-FTTS4536F 45" 36" 3 0.3 290 301 a M-FTTS4542F 45" 42" 3.5 0.3 307 318 Q M-FTTS4548F 45" 48" 4 0.4 330 342 L M-FTTS4560F 45" 60" 5 0.4 352 365 to U) `" 60"H Tackable Fabric Tile M-FTTS6024F 60" 24" 2 0.2 235 244 M-FTTS603OF 60" 30" 2.5 0.2 313 323 L M-FTTS6036F 60" 36" 3 0.3 330 342 LL M-FTTS6042F 60" 42" 3.5 0.3 343 356 ZD M-FTTS6048F 60" 48" 4 0.4 358 372 Y M-FTTS606OF 60" 60" 5 0.4 375 390 O w Q a w a w l7 VI Q O F- l7 Z Q w N W HOW TO SPECIFY or Select Model Number Select Fabric 0 w See pages 6-7 Q o 1 M - z 36 1 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge'" Frame and Tile System See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. M n m Tiles m z Includes rn • Open base tile frame. • Specify(2)7.5H fabric tiles separately,no segment bars required. List List Core Premium Description Model H W Wt. Cubes paint Paint Emerge Tile 221/2'H Pass-Thru M-FTTS3024PT 22.5" 24" 6.8 0.3 286 337 /j M-FTTS303OPT 22.5" 30" 7.9 0.3 304 355 M-FTTS3036PT 22.5" 36" 9.1 0.4 320 371 M M-FT7S3042PT 22.5" 42" 10.2 0.5 339 390 X j M-FTTS3048PT 22.5" 48" 11.4 0.5 356 407 M-FTTS3060PT 22.5" 60" 12.6 0.7 395 446 D D n m Ln Accessory Tiles Ln Ln List List Core Premium Description Model H W Wt. Cubes paint Paint O Emerge Accessory Tile M-FTTS1524ACC 15" 24" 10 0.8 501 516 C M-FTTS1530ACC 15" 30" 12 0.9 532 547 T M-FTTS1536ACC 15" 36" 14 1.1 578 593 n rn M-FTTS1542ACC 15" 42" 16 1.3 614 629 L' - <r M FTT51548ACC 15" 48" 19 1.5 646 661 . � M-FTTS1560ACC 15" 60" 23 1.8 681 696 m D z m O D M m cn m D Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY D n n Select Model Number Select Paint Color N L, See page 5 0 Fn Ln Z M C� X maxon• 37 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal.Pricing listed below is for Core Paint.Please see"How to Specify"section at bottom of page for Premium Paint upcharge.Arrow at u bottom of the page notes laminate tile grain direction z w Technology Tiles l.L w °C Includes • Technology Tile with factory installed attachment hardware. • Receptacle openings with blank covers(one in 24"wide tiles:two in wider tiles). Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Grade A Grade B Fabric Fabric 15"H Technology Tile M-FTTS1524T 15" 24" 1.1 0.2 269 273 M-FTTS1530T 15" 30" 1.4 0.2 281 285 x ® M-FTTS1536T 15" 36" 1.7 0.3 287 291 LL Ui ® M-FTTS1542T 15" 42" 2 0.3 298 303 a M-FTTS1548T 15" 48" 2.2 0.4 307 312 M-FTTS1560T 15" 60" 2.7 0.4 322 328 w v Q a 30"H Technology Tile M-FTTS3024T 30" 24" 3.1 0.3 295 299 Q M-FTTS3030T 30" 30" 3.9 0.3 308 313 2 V ® M-FTTS3036T 30" 36" 4.7 0.4 456 462 ® M-FTTS3042T 30" 42" 5.3 0.5 351 357 cn M-FTTS3048T 30" 48" 6.1 0.5 410 417 M-FTTS3060T 30" 60" 7.6 0.7 424 431 z N 371h"H Technology Tile M-FTTS3724T 37.5" 24" 3.1 0.3 352 358 v M-FTTS3730T 37.5" 30" 3.9 0.3 409 415 Q M-FTTS3736T 37.5" 36" 4.7 0.4 426 433 YG d M-FTTS3742T 37.5" 42" 5.3 0.5 444 451 0 O M-FTTS3748T 37.5" 48" 6.1 0.5 463 471 M-FTi•S3760T 37.5" 60" 7.6 0.7 485 494 w Q o.. w or a w C7 cc O C7 z Ln w HOW TO SPECIFY o Select Model Number Select Fabric Select;Paint Color Ln w See pages 6-7 See page 5 Core Paint Choice(no upcharge) Premium Paint'($51 upcharge) w o M z 38 1 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge'" Frame and Tile System See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal.Pricing listed below is for Core Paint.Please see"How to Specify"section at bottom of page for Premium Paint upcharge.Arrow at m T bottom of the page notes laminate tile grain direction m 70 Technology Tiles z m Includes • Technology Tile with factory installed attachment hardware. • Receptacle openings with blank covers(one in 24"wide tiles:two in wider tiles). Grade A Grade B Description Model H W Wt. Cubes LFabric Fabric 45"H Technology Tile M-FTTS4524T 45" 24" 4.1 0.4 374 382 M-FTTS4S30T 45" 30" 5.1 0.4 451 460 M-FTTS4536T 45" 36" 6.1 0.5 463 474 M-FTTS4542T 45" 42" 7 0.6 478 489 T a' M-FTT54548T 45" 48" 8 0.7 501 513 X 0 M-FTT54560T 45" 60" 10 0.9 521 534 Ln Ln L v D n 60"H Tech noIogyTile M-FTTS6024T 60" 24" 5.2 0.4 409 418 m M-FTT56030T 60" 30" 6.5 0.6 483 493 M-FTTS6036T 60" 36" 7.8 0.7 508 520 U, C M-FTTS6042T 60" 42" 9 0.8 533 546 M-FTTS6048T 60" 48" 10.3 0.9 542 556 N M-FTTS6060T 60" 60" 12.9 1.1 563 578 0' A � O c m D n m Ln m v D Technology Tile Power Brackets m Description Model wt. Cubes List Ln O Tech Tile Power Brackets-Pkg of 12 M-FTTPB 3 0.2 147 D M m z HOW TO SPECIFY D n Select Model Number Select Fabric Select Paint Color N Un See pages 6-7 See page 5 O ai Core Paint Choice(no upcharge) M Premium Paint($51 upcharge) `" i Ivl I - x m 1 M maxon, 1 39 Emerge'" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. V W Steel Tiles LU W L W Lest LISt Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint 71/2"H Steel Tile M-FTTS0724S 7.5" 24" 11.4 0.4 168 219 M-FTTS0730S 7.5" 30" 13.5 0.5 178 229 M-FTTS0736S 7.5" 36" 15.5 0.5 191 242 M-FTTS0742S 7.5" 42" 17.6 0.6 201 252 X M-FTTS0748S 7.5" 48" 20.7 0.7 211 262 LL LU M-FTTS0760S 7.5" 60" 24.8 0.9 223 274 o_ w 15"H Steel Tile M-FTTS1524S 15" 24" 11.4 0.1 191 242 u M-FTTS1530S 15" 30" 13.5 0.1 201 252 Q o_ V) M-FTTS1536S 15" 36" 15.5 1.1 211 262 Q M-FTTS1542S 15" 42" 17.6 1.3 223 274 M-FTTS1548S 15" 48" 20.7 1.4 235 286 M-FTTS1560S 15" 60" 24.8 1.8 256 307 Ln Ln a 30"H Steel Tile M-FTTS3024S 30" 24" 14.5 1.4 223 274 0 `) M-FTTS3030S 30" 30" 16.6 1.7 240 291 M-FTTS3036S 30" 36" 18.6 2.1 256 307 u M-FTTS3042S 30" 42" 20.7 2.4 279 330 M-FTTS3048S 30" 48" 23.8 2.7 301 352 M-FTTS3060S 30" 60" 25.9 3.4 334 385 Y 0 W or d W 0. W Q 0 V) z Q W N W HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Model Number Select Paint Color w See page 5 V V Q z 401 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge'" Frame and Tile System See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. M n Whiteboard Tiles 70 z n m Description Model H W Wt. Cubes List 7'/2'"H Whiteboard Tile M-FTTS0724W 7.5" 24" 11.4 0.4 178 M-FTTS0730W 7.5" 30" 13.5 0.5 191 M-FTTS0736W 7.S" 36" 15.5 0.5 201 M-FTTS0742W 7.5" 42" 17.6 0.6 211 M-FTTS0748W 7.5" 48" 20.7 0.7 223 M-FTTS0760W 7.5" 60" 24.8 0.9 245 m T_ 15"H Whiteboard Tile M-FTTS1524W 15" 24" 11.4 0.1 201 X M-FTTS1530W 15" 30" 13.5 0.1 211 M-FTTS1536W 15" 36" 15.S 1.1 223 N M-FTTS1542W 15" 42" 17.6 1.3 245 D M-FTTS1548W 15" 48" 20.7 1.4 267 70 M-FTTS1560W 15" 60" 24.8 1.8 301 D n m 30"H Whiteboard Tile M-FTTS3024W 30" 24" 14.5 1.4 267 Ln M-FTTS303OW 30" 30" 16.6 1.7 290 C M-FTTS3036W 30" 36" 18.6 2.1 311 N M-FTTS3042W 30" 42" 20.7 2.4 334 M-FTTS3048W 30" 48" 23.8 2.7 356 M-FTTS306OW 30" 60" 25.9 3.4 400 0 O Ln Ln T D n m v A rn D z m Ln O z D G) m Ln m D Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY D n n Select Model Number Select Paint Color M Ln See page 5 0 m N "' I m X maxon• 141 Emerge'" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal.Pricing listed below is for Core Paint.Please see"How to Specify"section at bottom of page for Premium Paint upcharge.Arrow at U bottom of the page notes laminate tile grain direction Z w Laminate Tiles U w Includes Laminate Tile. • Tile Kit with factory installed attachment clips. • Arrow at bottom of the page notes laminate tile grain direction. List List, Description Model H W Wt. Cubes L1 L2 x w Emerge 15"H Laminate Tile M-FTTS15241-2 15" 24" 6 1.6 265 287 a M-FTTS15301-2 15" 30" 7 1.9 280 308 M-FTTS15361-2 15" 36" 8 2.2 293 325 M-FTTS15421-2 15" 42" 10 2.5 303 341 w UU M-FTTS15481.2 15" 48" 12 2.9 314 358 V' C� - M-FTTS15601-2 15" 60" 14 3.7 330 385 t— Q Ln Emerge 30"H Laminate Tile M-FTTS3024L2 30" 24" 6 1.6 342 370 M-FTT53030L2 30" 30" 7 1.9 356 390 M-FTTS30361-2 30" 36" 8 2.2 375 415 a M-FTTS30421-2 30" 42" 10 2.5 388 436 M-FTTS30481-2 30" 48" 12 2.9 403 458 `n M-FTTS30601-2 30" 60" 14 3.7 423 491 L w U Emerge 371/2"H Laminate Tile M-FTTS3724L2 371/2" 24" 6 1.6 375 403 N M-FTTS37301-2 371/2" 30" 7 1.9 388 422 Y M-FTTS37361-2 371/2" 36" 8 2.2 403 443 M-FTTS37421-2 371/2" 42" 10 2.5 423 471 M-FTTS37481-2 371/2" 48" 12 2.9 440 495 LU M-FTTS3760L2 371/2" 60" 14 3.7 483 551 a w a Grain Direction w C7 Q O c.7 Z Ln Ln w W HOW TO SPECIFY 1= Select Model Number Select Door Laminate Select Paint Color O w See.page 10 See page 5 U Core Paint Choice(no upcharge) U Q Premium Paint($51 upcharge) x LU z l^-.42 1 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge" Frame and Tile System See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal.Pricing listed below is for Core Paint.Please see"How to Specify"section at bottom of page for Premium Paint upcharge. m -M Clear and Frosted Glass Tiles z Includes ^' • Single pane of tempered safety glass encased in a painted steel frame. List List Clear Frosted Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Glass Glass Emerge 15"H Glass Tile M-FTTS1524G 15" 24" 18 0.8 340 380 M-FTTS153OG 15" 30" 23 0.9 3S5 403 M-FTTS1536G 15" 36" 27 1.1 372 426 m M-FTTS1542G 15" 42" 32 1.3 390 450 X / M-FTTS1548G 15" 48" 36 1.5 405 470 M-FTTS1560G 15" 60" 46 1.8 428 503 Emerge 30"H Glass Tile M-FTTS3024G 30" 24" 23 1.4 400 460 M-FTTS303OG 30" 30" 29 1.8 421 486 v M-FTTS3036G 30" 36" 34 2.1 442 512 M-FTTS3042G 30" 42" 39 2.4 484 559 M M-FTTS3048G 30" 48" 44 2.9 506 591 M-FTTS306OG 26" 60" 53 3.4 526 621 C z Ln O VI C= m D n m Segment Bars m n Description Model W Wt. Cubes List rrn Emerge Segment Bar M-FTSB24 24" 2 0.3 11 M-FTS830 30" 2 0.3 13 M-FTSB36 36" 3 0.4 15 M-FTSB42 42" 3 0.4 18 ;)a D M-FTSB48 48" 3 0.5 20 m M-FTSB60 60" 4 0.6 25 Ln m D Z HOW TO SPECIFY D Select Model Number Select Glass Select Paint Color N Ln C Clear Glass See page 5 O FT Frosted Glass Core Paint Choice(no upcharge) M Premium Paint($51 upcharge) "' x maxon• 1 43 Emerge`" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. uj All Dimensions are Nominal. U w Panel Connector Posts W W Includes • Top cap,connectors,vertical cover, light block and attaching hardware(for"L","S","T","V"and"Y"). • Top cap,light block,attaching hardware and connectors(for"X"Connector Posts). List List Description Model T-H I Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Emerge Connection Post 2-Way 90°"L" M-FTCPL07 7" 1 0.1 125 151 x M-FTCPLI5 15" 2 0.1 142 168 Ui M-FTCPL22 22" 2 0.2 162 188 n- M-FTCPL30 30" 3 0.3 182 208 M-FTCPL35 35" 3 0.3 175 201 w M-FTCPL42 42.5" 4 0.4 202 228 U M-FTCPL50 50" 5 0.5 260 286 M-FTCPL65 65" 6 0.6 286 312 ¢ M-FTCPL80 80" 6 0.8 319 345 5 LA Emerge Connection Post 2-Way 180°"S" M-FTCPS07 7" 1 0.1 141 167 cn M-FTCPS15 15" 2 0.1 169 195 Ln a M-FTCPS22 22" 2 0.2 187 213 D: M-FTCP530 30" 3 0.3 206 232 N I p�p M FTCPS35 35" 3 0.3 198 224 N - M-FTCPS42 42.5" 4 0.4 260 286 U �.. M-FTCPS50 50" 6 0.5 346 372. M-FTCPS65 65" 7 0.6 406 432 Y M-FTCPS80 80" 7 0.8 458 484 cc O Emerge Connection Post 3-Way"T" M-FTCPT07 7" 1 0.1 131 157 M-FTCPT15 15" 2 0.1 154 180 Q <./ M-FTCPT22 22" 2 0.2 174 200 w M-FTCPT30 30" 3 0.3 192 218 a M-FTCPT35 35' 3 0.3 176 202 M-FTCPT42 42.5" 4 0.4 213 239 M-FTCPT50 5o" 5 0.5 271 297 LU M-FTCPT65 65" 6 0.6 306 332 ¢ M-FTCPT80 80" 6 0.8 338 364 O C7 z Q w w HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Paint Color w See page 5 v US o I '"' z 44 1 Maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge'" Frame and Tile System See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. z All Dimensions are Nominal. M n Panel Connector Posts Continued... m z m list List Core Premium Description Model H Wt. Cubes Paint Paint Emerge Connection Post 4-Way"X" M-FTCPX07 7" 1 0.1 121 147 M-FTCPX15 15" 2 0.1 139 165 M-FTCPX22 22" 2 0.2 159 185 J M-FTCPX30 30" 3 0.3 174 200 M-FTCPX35 35" 3 0.3 164 190 m M-FTCPX42 42.5" 4 0.4 195 221 z m w M-FTCPX50 50" 6 0.5 251 277 x M-FTCPX65 65" 7 0.6 272 298 M-FTCPX80 80" 7 0.8 310 336 D Ln Emerge Connection Post 2-Way"V" M-FTCPY235 35" 3 0.3 193 219 L^ D M FTCPY242 42.5" 4 0.4 221 247 m M-FTCPY250 50" 5 0.5 282 308 M-FTCPY265 65" 6 0.6 310 336 V) Ln z D O Emerge Connection Post 3-Way"Y" M-FTCPY335 35" 3 0.3 198 224 M-FTCPY342 42.5" 4 0.4 241 267 c M-FTCPY350 50" 5 0.5 308 334 D "` M-FTCPY365 65" 6 0.6 357 383 M -o M m v D z m O z D M m Ln m Z HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln M See page 5 A m N Z 0 maxon, 145 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U W Panel Trim o: LL Includes W Top cap. End vertical trim cover. List Llst Description Model H Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Emerge End-of-Run Trim(E) M-FTETF15 15" 1 0.1 91 117 M-FTETF30 30" 2 0.3 102 128 x M-FTETF35 35" 2 0.3 111 137 1 w M-FTETF42 42.5" 2 0.4 130 156 a M-FTETF50 50" 3 0.5 154 180 M-FTETF65 65" 4 0.6 173 199 M-FTETF80 80" 4 0.8 197 223 w U N Emerge Variable Height End-of-Run Trim(FV) M-FTETFV07 7.5" 1 0.1 106 132 H- M-FTETFV15 15" 1 0.1 119 145 M-FTETFV22 22.5" 2 0.2 154 180 Ln M-FTETFV30 30" 2 0.3 209 235 Ln Ln a o: Ln Variable Height frameless Glass End Trim M-FTETFC07 7.5" 1 0.1 123 149 w M-FTETFC15 15" 1 0.1 161 187 U W Cr Ln N ]C Cr Q Wall Starter Kit w Includes a Wall Starter Kit and Top Cap. List List w 0 Core Premium < Description Model H Wt. Cubes paint Paint Wall Starter Kit M-FTWSK15 15" 3 0.2 123 149 V) fl M-FTWSK30 30" 3 0.3 161 187 M-FTWSK35 35" 4 0.3 194 220 (7 M-FTWSK42 42" 4 0.4 227 253 z M-FTWSK50 50" 5 0.5 261 287 ,a M-FTWSK65 65" 5 0.6 299 325 Ln W HOW TO SPECIFY z Select Model Number Select Paint Color 0 Uj See page 5 U x LU z I "' I 46 I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge" Frame and Tile System See pages 18-29 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. M n Emerge Frameless Glass z Includes n m • Frameless Laminated Glass and attaching brackets. List fist Core Premium Frosted F- -Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Paint Paint Glass Emerge Frameless Glass 7"H M-FTFG0724 7.25" 24 17.6 0.6 626 652 651 M-FTFG0730 7.25" 30 17.6 0.6 688 714 715 M-FTFG0736 7.25" 36 21.2 0.6 712 738 741 70 m M-FTFG0742 7.25" 42 24.8 0.7 757 783 787 X M-FTFG0748 7.25" 48 28.4 0.8 808 834 841 M-FTFG0754 7.25" 54 28.4 0.8 845 871 882 M-FTFG0760 7.25" 60 34.8 1 888 914 928 M-FTFG0766 7.25" 66 34.8 1 957 983 1003 z M-FTFG0772 7.25" 72 42.4 1.9 997 1023 1047 LA cn D n Emerge Frameless Glass 15"H M-FTFG1524 14.75" 24 28 1.5 660 686 695 M M-FTFG1530 14.75" 30 28 1.5 744 770 784 M-FTFG1536 14.75" 36 33.6 1.8 792 818 837 C M-FTFG1542 14.75" 42 39.2 2 877 903 927 Ln M-FTFG1548 14.75" 48 44.8 2.3 958 984 1013 N M-FTFG1554 14.75" 54 44.8 2.3 1059 1085 1119 M-FTFG1560 14.75" 60 56 2.8 1117 1143 1182 M-FTFG1566 14.75" 66 56 2.8 1177 1203 1247 0 M-FTFG1572 14.75" 72 67.2 3.5 1224 1250 1299 C m D n m Top Cap m D List' List m Description Model H Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Top Cap M-FTTC24 24" 2 0.3 53 79 O M-FTTC30 30" 2 0.3 65 91 D M-FTTC36 36" 2 0.3 78 104 m M-FTTC42 42" 3 0.4 91 117 M-FTTC48 48" 3 0.5 103 129 M-FTTC60 60" 4 0.6 118 144 L, M Z r7 HOW TO SPECIFY D Select Model Number Select Glass Select Paint Color N U) C Clear Glass See page 5 0 FT Frosted Glass m M ❑. m M x maxon• 147 Emerge'" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w z w Electrical Specification Information Integrated power pole Ceiling in-feed connects to W accommodates power in-feed building electrical supply. LL and communication/data Ceiling in-feed can also be used w lines. at the bottom to feed up into footed panels where exposed flex conduit is permitted by codes.This in-feed can be prewired before panels are installed.M-EPF3 in-feeds must be installed in panel before connecting to building wiring. Electrical power harnesses have capacity for 2 duplex receptacles (1 in a 24"W panel)per panel side when ported.Non-base pathway power requires x electrical mounting brackets. LL w a Cable openings in frame uprights permit cables to be run between U frames. Capacity for lay-in a cabling is provided i i Fiber optic and other data cabling LA underneath panel ; i can be routed through 90" Qtop caps. i i intersections. V) Ln more than on � one conduit that N is connected to a harness mounted to horizontal w can be routed Q through the same w cut out in the same horizontal. Y Attempting to use more will O � cause binding of conduit and may affect reveals on w Q O O receptacles. 0 w � Beltline area accommodates power and data or communication w lines. K a O H `^ Single Block Pass-Thru harnesses have capacity for z ® one duplex receptacle per w Jumper is required panel side. `" to conned base pathway power to beltline. 0 Uj w O w Double Block Duplex U Harness accepts up Fiber optic cables Q Power blocks snap to 2 duplex recepta- can follow 90°turns into base pathway cles per panel side at the intersection Base pathway power in-feed Base pathway horizontal frame (24"W limited to 1) of panel runs. mounts into any receptacle accommodates members and at base pathway. position in the base pathway w power and lay-in accept duplex area and is connected to the 0 capacity for data receptacles. building electrical supply. z and communication. 481 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge*" Frame and Tile System M m E Electrical In-feeds Electrical Systems Emerge offers a choice of two electrical systems: Power in feed cables deliver power from building to panel's Z stem al s i t lecrc system. r' • Four circuit,3+1 e `n • Four-circuit,2+2 In feed cables are housed in conduit to separate electrical system from communications and data lines. • See pages 50-51 for a detailed explanation of each Select quantity of base or ceiling in-feed cables depending on electrical system. individual power requirements. • All systems utilize an 8-wire electrical system,rated at 20 amps per circuit(15 amps Canadian)-16 amps planable in U.S. Base In-Feed • Emerge panels and electrical components are UL Listed. Sealtight base pathway power in-feed Electrical components are also CSA certified. mounts into any receptacle position in • Installation and use of the electrical system,the number of the base pathway area. receptacles used on a given circuit and connections to the A heavy rubber sheathing shields v building power supply should be in compliance with all local conduit,allowing in-feed to be exposed. m and national electrical codes. Ajumper is required to connect base X • Use of a 35"H frame in a panel run will block beltline and above pathway power to beltline. power distribution. Ceiling Power In-feed Caution:Electrical equipment cords or extension cords Ceiling power in feed connects to D MUST NOT BE ROUTED through cable openings in frame sides a prewired electrical harness in the beltline or base pathway, Ln Note:No more than one conduit that is connected to a harness traverses through an adjacent mounted to horizontal can be routed through the same cut out panel and terminates in the m in the same horizontal at beltline.Attempting to use more will junction box at the top of the integrated power pole. cause binding of conduit and may affect reveals on receptacle!,_j Use with integrated power pole. N • Most codes allow flex conduit to be exposed after installation. cz Verify code requirements before ordering for exposed Hardwire New York Code(page 60) application. N • Hardwire(New York Code)junction box (model M-EPFX)is used when local o Integrated Power Pole electrical codes require hardwire entry. Integrated power and communications • For use in panels 30"W to 60"W. poles provide capacity for routing o When used in 30"W and 36"W panels,power can be routed power supply directly through the top c only in one direction. of any structural or stacking frame • When used in 42"W,and wider panels,an electrical pass-thru using same width trim/connector kit cable or harness for that panel width can be used to route in place of top cap. M power back in the opposite direction. Avoid glass or pass-thru tiles in upper Unit must connect to a power or pass-thru harness position of frames with integrated positioned in the base pathway area of an adjacent panel, power poles. rn • Customer to furnish all cabling and wiring from power entry Power pole has a cavity on each side v to power source. of a center septum. m • Junction box can be positioned at any duplex receptacle When using a ceiling power in-feed,consider that the in-feed location. must connect into an electrical harness located in an adjacent Hardwire Chicago Code(page 60) panel. (See pages 55-56 for cable capacity.) un•'Wiring harnesses and snap connectors 0 0 are not allowed in Chicago-base D pathways must be comprised of ,G; all-metallic components. •'The base pathway,junction box (model M-ECH1)clips directly into receptacle locations and can be m used both single-and double-sided. - • In the beltline location,junction z box(model M-ECH1)can only be used single-sided. Power entry can be routed from the ceiling,via a Emerge D power pole,or from the floor into a junction box. n • Cannot be used in back to back applications. N 0 rn N Z rr m X maxon, 1 49 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w U z To Order: w w 1. Determine which electrical system you 2. Determine location,quantity,and circuit * Select Double Block Harness(M-EHXX), will use after consulting your electrician of duplexes. Single Block Harness(M-EPSXX),and and computer support personnel: 3. Determine the appropriate choice and Pass-Thru Harness(M-EPXX)with the last The four-circuit system use of isolated,isolated/dedicated. two digits corresponding with the panel (4-Hot/2-Neutral/2-Ground) 4.Specify appropriate power harnesses* width into which the component is to be — 3+1 option and pass-thru cables.* positioned. — 2+2 option 5. Determine the location,quantity,and The initial cable length can be stretched type of power in-feed needed. approximately 3"to transverse"T","X", "L",and extended straight connectors. Electrical System Options X The four-circuit,eight-wire electrical system is widely specified and trusted by hundreds of thousands of end-users.This proven system w delivers four circuits for every power in-feed in either a 3+1 or 2+2 configuration.The isolated/dedicated circuits are ideal for sensitive w computing equipment,while the common circuits are suitable for faxes,copiers,task lights and other peripherals.Both the 3+1 and 2+2 systems use the same prewired components,making it easy to adjust as electrical needs change. w U Q LnFour-circuit,3+1 Receptacle Option < 1 2 3 4 The 3+1 option is the electrical standard used on Maxon N systems for many years in most installations.This wiring option provides three utility circuits plus an isolated/ Z) dedicated circuit for more sensitive equipment.Circuit 2(one v=i 1 4 of the 3 common circuits sharing a neutral wire)cannot be Hot wire Hot wire used with single-phase building electrical supply. w 2 U lQl. Hot Wire CIRCUIT4 3 DUPLEX RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 2 CIRCUIT 3 DEDICATED Hot Wire D o p o L__0 (p GRAY NEUTRAL-2 12 GA Neutral Neutral WHITE i,NEUTRAL-1 10GA w GRNNLW 0 ISOLATED 12 GA GRN/BARE GROUND 12 GA Q PINK Q HOT-4 12 GA W BLUE 0 HOT-3 12 GA ° RED HOT-2 I?GA Common Ground Isolated Ground BLACK HOT-1 2 GA 1U Four-circuit,2+2 Receptacle Option re 1 2 3 4 o Ln The 2+2 option is a wiring option that provides two utility circuits and two isolated circuits for more extensive computer 0 usage applications. 3 w Hot Wire Hot Wire � DUPLEX RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT3 CIRCUIT 2.. 4 CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 2 ISOLATED ISOLATED e o N Hot Wire Hot Wire p o p o _w cc: 0 NEUTRAL-2 12 GA 0 WHITE Q NEUTRAL-1 10 GA to Neutral 1 Neutral 2 GRN/YLW RI ISOLATED 12 GA UGRN/BARE iI GROUND 12 GA U PINK HOT-4 12 GA Q BLUE HOT-3 12 GA RED HOT-2 12 GA Common Ground Isolated Ground BACK HOT-t 2 GA X w 0 Z 501 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge" Frame and Tile System z m Notes: m Emerge System Receptacle Usage Maxon model numbers are z Two 8-wire,20 amp(15 amp Canadian)electrical systems are offered printed on the UL labels,and n Receptacle Capacity components are color-coded to M Electrical System circuitry provide visual identification of Common Common Common Iso/Dedicated the different components. 3+1 Circuit-1 Circuit-2(1) circuit-3 Circuit-4 Four-circuit components have Four-circuit M-ED3 M-ED2 M-ED3 M-ED4 black plastic parts. 4-Hot/2-Neutral/2-Ground Common Common Isolated Isolated 2+2 Circuit-1 Circuit-2 Circuit-3 Circuit-4 Duplex Receptacles M-EDl M-ED2 M-ED3D M-ED4 0 0 (1)Circuit 2(one of the 3 common circuits sharing a neutral wire)cannot be used with a single-phase o o building electrical supply. 15 amp Receptacle m n X Typical power usage by the most commonly specified office equipment. v, EQUIPMENT AMPS EQUIPMENT AMPS EQUIPMENT AMPS > Computers Copiers Fax Machines Personal Compute.............................3 Desktop Copier...............................15 InkJet Fax........................... less than 1 D Notebook Computer..........................3 Console Copier ...............................20 Plain Paper Fax..................................8 n rn Monitors Copier/Duplicator............................30 Task Lights 13"Color Monitor.............................2 Printers 30"T5 Fluorescent...............0.12/bulb 17"Color Monitor.............................3 InkJet..................................less than 1 60"T5 Fluorescent...............0.24/bulb to 21"Color Monitor.............................4 Personal Laser or LED........................8 C A 15"Plasma Monitor.......................0.5 Workgroup Laser or LED..................15 D 20"Plasma Monitor..........................1 Source:Industry Analysis,Inc.,Rochester,NY N O 7z C T D n m N v z m D M m O z D M m to m Z G) D n n m V) O X m Z M m X maxon- 51 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w U Z w Of W Electrical Harness Single Block Pass-Thru Electrical power harnesses Specify harness length to match panel width. are used to distribute Electrical pass-thru harnesses have capacity to handle one power in Emerge panels. duplex receptacle on each side of the panel. Harnesses can be mounted Electrical Power Harness A 60" pass-thru harness can be used to jump up to a single at base pathway or beltline. duplex receptacle per side at beltline and connecting to a Power blocks on electrical power harness at base pathway. power harness and pass- Electrical power harnesses and pass-thru cables cannot be routed thru harness accept at 90°at beltline once frames are connected to connector blocks. duplex receptacles. , Specify harness length to match panel width. X ; Electrical Pass-thru Harnesses Without Power Block w Electrical Pass-Thru Harness With Power Block Specify harness length to match panel width. oa.. Electrical pass-thru cables distribute power through any panel where receptacles are not required.Cable length cannot be stretched. Electrical Jumper Cables • Electrical jumper cables connect power from base pathway Electrical Pass-Thru Harness Without Power Block or beltline to a harness located on any horizontal member as needed. L Jumper cable plugs into power block end of electrical power harness or electrical pass-thru harness. • Model M-EJ66 is 66"to jumper up to 30 inches vertically—base Ln pathway to beltline,beltline to base pathway,or up to 30" a above or below beltline when connected to beltline electrical. D Electrical Jumper Cables Model M-EJ108 is 108"to jumper up to 65"vertically—from `" baserail up to the highest 15"opening on an 80"H frame. • Jumper can also be used from beltline to adjacent beltline at uAll electrical power harnesses and`pass-thru harnesses will 90°juncture via baseline. LL stretch 31/2",allowing them to span"T","X",120°intersections, -and"S"extended straight connections. Power Blocks Y Emerge offers multiple options for mounting electrical: o Note:"T"intersections require a minimum of one power i�: harness and"X"intersections requires a minimum of two power Base Pathway Mounting harnesses. Power blocks snap directly onto brackets in base pathway cc area and accept receptacles w (sold separately)on each side a Requires of harness. minimum of Power Block Base Pathway one power Technology Tile Power Brackets Mounting harness, - Package of 12.One bracket UJ required at beltline for each Requires pass-thru harness and 24"W minimum of ; two power' power harness.Two brackets harnesses. required at beltline for 30"-60"W power harnesses. 1?i t Use of a ceiling in-feed orjumper at For ported receptacles at this location requires artadditional beltline or below worksurface, z power harness. mount power blocks onto Power Block at Beltline tz electrical mounting brackets LU V) Electrical Double Block Harness which screw into Emerge panel frame. • Specify harness length to match panel width. Power harness Model M-FTTP13 for use with data/electricai port tiles at beltline accepts one receptacle on each side of the harness,all other or directly below standard worksurface height on 421/2"H-65"H w length power harnesses have power blocks to accept four panels. duplex receptacles(two on each side of panel). Data/electrical port tiles must be used where exposed N Connectors at both ends of power harnesses allow power distri- receptacles will be located. U bution in either direction. To connect power between the base pathway and the beltline • Harness power blocks snap directly onto brackets in base area,four-circuit jumper cables(M-EJxx)must be connected pathway;harnesses require optional mounting brackets at to a power block at one end of a run,routed into an adjacent beltline or other vertical locations. panel that contains no power harness,then routed back into X the panel that contains a power harness(or pass-thru cable), o and connected to a power harness in the other pathway. z 52 I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge" Frame and Tile System rn m T Receptacles Data Components m Z n Duplex Receptacles ®� ®� m • Available with 3 integrated circuits 1,2,or 3(M-ED11 Row M-ED2,M-ED3)and 1 isolated circuit (M-ED4)or 2 integrated circuits 1 and 2(M-ED1, M-ED2)and M-FP3RJ45 M-FP4R145 2 isolated circuits 3 and 4(M-ED3D,M-ED4). • Each duplex outlet receptacle is rated at 15 amps. • Each circuit has a 20 amp maximum capacity(depending upon building wiring). Power-In Wiring(M-EPF2)plugs into Duplex Wiring Harness Voice/Data Receptacles (M-EH or M-EPS)in place of a Duplex Outlet Receptacle. �. • Duplex Outlets may be added at any time by removing the outlet cover plate and plugging the Duplex Outlet Receptacle M•sURJas6s T X into the Double or Single block harness. Data Faceplates • Isolated circuits are designated with an orange triangle. Emerge not only provides space for large volumes of voice • Duplex receptacles snap into power blocks of Double Block and and data cables,it also offers several means of mounting Single Block harnesses. commercially available voice and data components. • Each receptacle is labeled to indicate which circuit it will be Commercially available modular data faceplates can be connected to:1,2,3,or 4. mounted in vacant base receptacle openings. • Duplexes support either 3+1 and 2+2 electrical in feed. Due to panel depth,back-to-back data modules should not be Receptacle Color Recommended to Coordinate with Paint Color used at the base or at beltline on Emerge. M • Faceplates and Jacks available in black only. Ln Paint Color Receptacle Color Black— MPBL.................................................................Black— E4 C Data Jacks Flint— MP02....................................................................Flint—E9 D • AMP RJ45 CAT 5E Jack Loft—MP7B.....................................................................Loft— EV Black only v Greige—MPT5............................................................Muslin—EU Toolless Brownstone—MP7D...........................................Brownstone— EY AMP RJ45 CAT 6 Jack Muslin— MPT3............................................................Muslin—EU Black only O Gunmetal— MPR3...............................................Brownstone— EY • Requires Tool vim, Champagne—MPR5...................................................Muslin—EU Platinum— MPPL.......................................................Titanium—TI y White—MPWT............................................Designer White— DW Ln Two Receptacle/Two Data —Clamp On Worksurface • 6'Power cord.UL Listed. • Includes adapters to allow use of commercially O M available data terminals or blanks to fill unused openings. Many of the AMP,AT&T,Krone,Leviton M and most commercial data terminals can be used. • Color finish available:Loft. M-COMDOME2 • Fits on any worksurface with a 4"overhang. Ln O Two Receptacle/One USB—Clamp On Worksurface v • Must be installed at time of initial worksurface m installation if installing between a worksurface ° ,° and panel. °• 6'Power cord.UL Listed. • The USB hub allows simultaneous powering of 6 m 2 USB-A devices.The USB hub is a charger only, D no ability to connect to a PC.The charging M-PWRMOD2WC z capacity is limited and may not charge all devices. • Color finishes available:Storm(STRM)and Snow(SNW). D • Fits on any worksurface with a 4"overhang. r) n m V) Two Receptacle/One USB—Under Worksurface p 6'Power cord.UL Listed. o 22 m • Color finishes available:Storm(STRM)and `^ Snow(SNW). o0 00 • Works with any top that has a 5"x 5"square 6 clearance. M-PWRM0D3UWM z 0 m x maxom 153 Emerge'" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 W U W Cable and Wire Management Cable Management Tray "' Attaches under the worksurface to contain cables. • Metal tray shelf is 4"deep.Can hold electrical power strip and/or surge protector. • 24"and 36"lengths,use multiple units for larger worksurfaces. • Attachment hardware included,specify paint color. Lighting Task Lighting x Light Available in Black finish only. w ® Mount under Overhead Storage Cabinet or Shelf. For Chicago Version with Fuse Plug,order FP Option. CL 6'Cord. • Includes Florescent light bulb and hanger bars. W Universal Overhead Task Lighting Light Available in Black finish only. Mount under Overhead Storage Cabinet or Shelf. Q ; For Chicago Version with Fuse Plug,order FP Option. Excluded from GSA. Includes Florescent light bulb,mounting bars,9'Cord and Four cord clips. • Recessed task lights are black with a 9'long black cord that is attached to the right rear corner of the fixture.(Color does not need to be specified.) Ln Bulbs are included. • RECOMMENDATION:Provide a separate circuit for task lights to ensure proper,long-term operation. Includes 4 cord retainer clips. • Shorter width models can be used on wider overheads,shelves and hutches. • All models are equipped with electronic ballast for longer bulb life and cooler operating temperature. W • On/Off switch provides individual control of tasklight within the workstation. W U Q W D Ln Y W K Q O. W CL d W Q F'- Z Q W N W Ln N W U U Q x W 0 z 54 1 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge`" Frame and Tile System 70 m TI Base Pathway Receptacle,Locations Circuit Usage rn z 5 Strategy 1 Strategy 2 z r io%• -�' r�lor�•�. • M Circuits to Equipment Circuits to Workstations "' 24•_ Assign specific uses for each Assign specific workstations ion,-i i—ion'—� of the circuits: to each of the three available 0 0 For example, in a circuits.Use circuit 4 for i four-circuit system: power-sensitive electronic so- Circuit 1—Calculators, equipment. r-1o%'-_ fans,etc. O Circuit 2—Task lights 36• (could be wired to wall -- r1o, switch) v Circuit 3—CRT or flat M m O O m 42• screen monitors x Circuit 4—CPUs p O Placement of pedestals and lateral files may render some duplex locations inaccessible. Pedestal placement may also affect com D r-10'ti'-=- patibility with pull-up receptacles. p O D bps i m Lay-in Cable Capacity • The top and base pathway allow continuous voice and data Emerge Emerge lines to run through and between panels without interruption. • Lay-in is provided for environments where systems furniture orLn D cabling are subject to frequent change. Ln • Emerge top pathway accepts up to 7 voice/data cables 0 0 (.25"dia). Emerge variable height junctions accept up to O 3 voice/data cables(.25"dia.). Ln • Emerge base pathway accepts up to 56 voice/data cables c (.25"dia.)(6.03 sq.in.)at 60%fill. 56`cables iscabies ,, When electrical system shares base pathway,the cable capacity m in Emerge is reduced to 18 cables(2.25 sq.in.).Cable quantities listed are at 60%fill ratio. • Cable capacity of the Emerge power pole,in addition to Emerge electrical in-feed is 2.79 sq.in.on one side and 2.91 sq.in.on v o°�oc the other for a total capacity of 66 cables of.25"diameter. m oogo 0 0 66 cables O z D rn m N m 4 Z G1 D n n m O W m Z O m x maxon, 155 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w w Horizontal Capacityof Emerge Frames* Emerge String-in Capacity Openings in frame sides permit data and communication LU cables to be run between frames in Emerge. Using tackable acoustical tiles,the beltline pathway accom- 31W modates up to 62 cables(.25"dia)or 46 cables with electrical components installed. DO NOT run electrical equipment or extension cords through 35'FRAMES ILL cable openings in frame sides.Use beltline or base-mounted 42h',So', electrical system for all electrical supply. '.571W,65'FRAMES SEE DETAIL: Cables can enter/exit panel through underside of base pathway LL at juncture between frames. seEOErAI[ Openings are sized as follows(in sq.in.): CL Emerge System Sq.In. w *46 Fables with electrical Installed at Straight V beltline.62 cables without electrical connection 6.0 N installed at beltline. 65' 67Y:' 50' 42Vs' 35' "S"Extended Straight Ln Connection 10.0 „u,90" to Connection 8.9 a "T"Connection 15.9 V) "X"Connection 17.9 g �g "A"Connection — tn v "Y"Connection — a Underside of Base Pathway N Juncture Between Frames When leveling glides are fully retracted,panel-to-floor clearance is 7h6".This may affect the volume of cabling that can 0 be fed into the frame from the bottom of the pathway. Vertical Capacity w W Vertical Capacity through Panel Frames a w a Emerge 3" 0 p O 0 .830" LtJ Q • A 60%fill ratio is achievable;however,when electrical components are installed in the beltline area,cabling capacity through the beltline area will be limited to approximately 45%fill ratio. Panel Qty.of.25"Cables Qty.of.25"Cables Total Space z Width at 45%Fill Ratio at 60%Fill Ratio (sq.in.) 1= U Emerge 24"-60"W 45 60 5.26 to w O to to w V V Q X w 0 Z 56 1 Maxon* GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge" Frame and Tile System See pages 48-56 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. M n Byrne Power-In Wiring z n m Description Model Wt. List Power In-Feed through Side Receptacle(72") M-EPF2 0.5 343 Power In-Feed through End or Power Pole(Ceiling-168") M-EPF3 0.5 343 Im M m T X Emerge Integrated Power Pole List list N Core Premium D Description Model H Wt. Cubes paint Paint r) m (For 65"-95"base frames) M-FTPP56 56" 9 0.6 174 200 (For 42 Y:"H-57%"H Panels) M-FTPP78 78" 6 0.4 211 237 N C D V) O LA C 3; n n m Emerge Panel Top Trim Kit For Integrated Power Pole "' List List M D Description Model W Wt. Cubes Core Premium m L- Paint Paint Emerge Panel Top Trim Kit Integrated Power Pole M-FTPTT24 24" 1.6 0.3 117 143 M-FTPTT30 30" 1,1 0.3 136 162 M-FTPTT36 36" 2 0.3 155 181 0 M-FTPTT42 42" 2.2 0.4 171 197 GDi M-FTPTT48 48" 3.4 0.5 193 219 m M-FTPTT60 60" 3.9 0.6 209 235 Ln m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY D r-� Select Model Number Select Paint Color N See page 5 O 77 m N Z C ' IVI I I X maxorr 157 Emerge'" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 48-56 for the specification guide. LLJ All Dimensions are Nominal. U w Byrne Electrical Double Block Harness of W W W Description Model W t Wt. I List Single Block Duplex Harness 24W M-EH24 24" 2 231 Double Block Duplex Harness M-EH30 30" 2 257 M-EH36 36" 3 283 M-EH42 42" 3 297 1 M-EH48 48" 3 307 M-EH60 60" 4 328 X M-EH72 72"' 4 354 LL NOTE:Electrical harnesses are intended for use with Maxon systems furniture and are approved under GSA SIN 711-1.When purchased separately and used without Maxon systems furniture,those electrical harnesses are considered Open Market. W U Q V.. N H K Byrne Electric Duplex Outlet Receptacle V) FDescription Model Wt. Cubes List Byrne Electric Duplex Outlet Circuit M-ED1 1 0.1 54 Cr p u M-ED2 1 0.1 54 0 M-ED3 1 0.1 54 pa v� M-ED3D 1 0.1 54 W U M-ED4 1 0.1 54 Ln Y 0 W Q d W d C W Q 0 Ln N 0 z Ln W W HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Model Number Select Paint Color V) w See page 5 U U Q X LU M - Z 58 1 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge" Frame and Tile System See pages 48-56 for the specification guide. z All Dimensions are Nominal. m n Byrne Electrical Pass-Thru Harness m z m Description Model Wt.T7;:] Pass-Thru Harness M-EP24 1.2 161 M-EP30 1.5 178 M-EP36 1.7 186 I� M-EP42 2 193 I M-EP48 2.3 215 M-EP60 2.8 231 M-EP72 4 258 M m m X N Byrne Electrical Jumper Cable > D D :1 Description Model Wt. List m Jumper Cable M-EJ66 3 232 V) Ln D Ln O z 7z C Byrne Electrical Pass-Thru Harness n n m N Description Model Wt. List v Single-Block Pass-Thru Harness M-EPS24 1.5 186 m M-EPS30 1.8 193 D M-EPS36 2 215 m M-EPS42 2.3 225 M-EPS48 2.6 244 M-EPS60 3.1 271 O M-EPS72 4 303 D O m m Z HOW TO SPECIFY D n n Select Model Number v Un O m Ln �� Z I X "' X maxon• 59 Emerge'" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT GSA SIN711-1 See pages 48-56 for the specification guide. W All Dimensions are Nominal. U W Byrne Chicago Outlet Box LU W L W Description Model Wt. Cubes List Chicago Outlet Box-Base Raceway(Shown) M-ECH1 0.1 0.1 131 Chicago Outlet Box-Beltline Electric M-EMCDHP 0.5 0.1 140 X w Byrne New York Junction Box a Description Model Wt. List u Power In-Feed NY Junction Box M-EPFX 0.5 318 a cfff ' Ln L, Telecommunication Receptacles Ln 2<1 Description _T Model Twt. I List 3-Port Faceplate(Shown) M-FP3RJ45 0.1 28 4-Port Faceplate M-FP4R145 0.1 28 w v 0 Snap In Jack R45 Cat SE(Shown) M-SIJRJ45 0.1 53 LU Snap In Jack R45 Cat 6 M-SIJRJ456S 0.1 157 a< w o: a O 6 W Q K 0 F'- z Q W l%1 W HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Model Number w V V Q X w � M _ Z 601 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B EmergeT" Frame and Tile System See pages 48-56 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. m m m Electrical Accessories m z n m Description Model Wt. Cubes List O-Leg Wire Clip M-WMCLIPSM(4-Pack) 0.1 0.5 85 M-WMCLIPLG(8-Pack) 0.1 0.8 141 Available in black only v 2 Receptacles 1 USB Under Worksurface Mt(Shown) M-PWRMOD2UWM 2.3 0.2 621 m 3 Receptacles Under Worksurface Mt M-PWRMOD3UWM 2.3 0.2 430 x Ln D Available in Storm(STRM)or Snow(SNW)paint only v D 2 Receptacles 2 Data Accessory M-COMDOME2 2.5 0.2 451 M m C Ln Available in Loft paint only ^ 2 Receptacles 1 USB M-PWRMOD2WC 2.3 0.2 621 0 3 Receptacles(Shown) M-PWRMOD3WC 2.3 0.2 430 N _ c Available in Storm(STRM)or Snow(SNW)paint only v m m D m m O D M m Ln m Z n HOW TO SPECIFY D Select Model Number Select Paint Color m h Ln See page 5 0 m Ln M � x Z I I � maxon• 161 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 W U Center divider in sliding door models allows wfor either half to be locked. Finish options include Core and Premium paint. LU W LL W Available in sliding door, Overhead storage flipper door and hinged door. cabinets can be Flipper door slides overtop positioned vertically in 1"increments. of cabinet. X w a 15"design allows maximum storage while minimizing space. LAJ Locking clip U feature secures storage V) cabinets to panels. H Q Overheads have Core removable locks allow lateral files,center an open back. drawers,pedestals and overhead cabinets to be keyed alike. Ln V) .< Backstop keeps books, D binders and supplies from N coming in contact with tile fabric. UStraight low profile end Q Storage shelves can be positioned panels. vertically in 1"increments. V) Y O W W Q d. W Locking clip n feature secures storage shelves to panels. W Assembled Overhead Storage Cabinet Assembled Shelf 0 Product Dimensions Product Dimensions `" Width:24",30",36",42",48",60",and 72" Width:24",30",36",42",48",60",and 72" Inside Width:Flipper or 24"-36"W Hinged door—1/s"less than width Depth:121/8" 42"-48"W Hinged or Sliding door—two compartments Height:41/8" U that are half of less than width z Depth:141/4" w Inside Depth:121/8' RTA Shelf; V) Height:15" Product Dimensions Inside Height:12'/4' Width:24",30",36",42",48",60",and 72" Depth:111/z" w RTA Overhead Storage Cabinet Height:55/s" O Product Dimensions N Width:24",30",36",42",48",60",and 72" U Inside Width:Flipper or 24"-36"W Hinged door—'/a"less than width Q 42"-48"W Hinged or Sliding door—two compartments that are half of'A"less than width Depth:12" X Inside Depth:111/8" p Height:15" z Inside Height:121/4" 62 1 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge" Frame and Tile System m Specification Guidelines • In a panel run,only two overhead storage cabinets or open z storage shelves are recommended per panel side. • m Overhead storage cabinets and open storage shelves can be mounted on Emerge structural and stacking panels to a maximum height of 80"H. 00 00 �o o� o� 00 i When overhead storage units are suspended from stacking frames,the following guidelines should be adhered to: T • Stacking frames should be added to all the parent run panels, X and to,at least the first panel of each return panel run.Stacking panels added to return panel must match the parent run configuration. �^ • A maximum of two overhead storage units should be D suspended from each side of stacking frames on any given panel. > v • With Emerge,a full height panel end cover is required for n adequate stability when using overhead storage on the end of a run,or on a return panel. 80" C D Ln Ln Ln '^ C D n m m • No limitation to the number of units on structural frames when D run is supported with return panels on each side of storage shelves or overhead storage cabinets. Ln O z D G> 71 00 m • Storage shelf,RTA overhead,and RTA shelf width must correspond with width of panel(s). G) • It is possible to span two panels when combined panel width equals cabinet or shelf width. D n n m Ln Ln • Emerge assembled metal overhead cabinets can be mounted � on a panel equal to or up to 18"narrower than cabinet.One N side of overhead must be held on-module. z 0 m X maxon• 1 63 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w U z Overheads, Shelves, and Hutches Upmount Kits for Assembled Overhead Cabinets w For use on base panels only. w Assembled Overhead Storage Cabinet Consists of two upmount brackets,full back Overhead Cabinets have exposed back with panel,and required installation hardware. backsplash. Allows mounting of an assembled overhead • Ball bearing Overhead Door slides. Door cabinet up to 15"above height of panel. recedes over top of Overhead Cabinet. Specify upmount kits with 15"H,35"H, • Can be upmounted on base panel only. 50"H,or 65"H Emerge panels.Upmount kits • Steel cabinet with backstop. will not work with 421/2"panels. • Available with sliding, hinged,or flipper Sliding Door Overhead Brackets require a clearance of 61/2"below Upmount Kit for door(s). bottom of overhead cabinet. overhead cabinets Sliding door overhead has(1)door. Width must correspond with width of panel X Easy-Assist flipper door optional— frame or 2 panel frames joined directly inline. w requires minimal assistance in opening and Full back panel adds 1/2"to depth of overhead case. closing. Full back panel only used when upmounting cabinet. • Easy-Assist flipper door not available on Cannot be used with RTA models. 60"W or 72"W cabinets—specify 2-30"W cabinets or 2-36"W cabinets. Ready to Assemble(RTA) Flipper Door Overhead aSelf-engaging safety latch to secure cabinet Flipper Door Overhead Overhead Cabinets have exposed back. °; to panel. Does not come preassembled. Width can correspond with width of Can not be mounted off modular or panel,or two panels joined with an inline upmounted. N connector kit. Steel cabinet with open back. • 60"W and 72"W flipper door cabinets have 60"W and 72"W cabinets have 2 doors two doors with two independent locks. 'jo with independent locks. V 24"-36"W hinged door cabinets have 1 lockAccommodates recessed task lighting— and 2 arched pulls,42"-48"W have 2 locks ordered separately. Ready to Assemble Z) and 4 arched pulls. Hinged Door overhead Random keying,for locking (RTA)Flipper Door Overhead • Accommodates recessed task lighting specifications see page 68. w (specified separately). Ready to Assemble(RTA)Shelf 15"H cabinets can also be mounted on a panel equal to or up to a- 18"narrower than cabinet. Does not apply to RTA models. Metal shelf with locking clips. Sliding Door Overhead has a single door with built-in pull. Accommodates recessed task lighting— Y Sliding, Hinged,and Flipper Door Overhead Weight Limits: ordered separately. O24"W................59 lbs. 42"W................105 lbs. Ready to Assemble 30"W................74 lbs. 48"W................121 lbs. (RTA)Shelf 36"W................90 lbs. 60"W................152 lbs. w Mounting an overhead on frames that have an overall height of 571/2"H is not recommended.Slot modularity in relation to adjacent panels may be compromised. a. Assembled Open Shelf • Overhead Shelves have exposed back with backsplash. QMetal shelf with back stop. rzs < Locking clips(2)standard. open shelf o Will accommodate recessed task lighting (ordered separately). • Weight Limits: 24"W................61 lbs. 42"W................108 lbs. L7 30"W................77 lbs. 48"W................124 lbs. z 36"W................93 lbs. 60"W................155 lbs. wMounting an open shelf on Emerge frames cannot span base "' panel frame and stack-on frame—slot modularity is not maintained. U1 w O Ln V) w U U Q X w M Z 64 I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge'" Frame and Tile System See pages 62-64 for the specification guide. All Actual Dimensions are listed on page 62. M r Overhead Cabinets with Flipper Door m z n Includes m • Overhead cabinets. • Core removable locks. • Two keys. • Attaching brackets. List List Core Premium Description Model H D T-1wL Wt. Cubes Paint Paint v Flipper Painted Door Panel Mount M-USOH1524F 15" 14.25" 24" 35 3.6 614 665 T M-USOH153OF 15" 14.25" 30" 38 4.4 638 689 X M-USOH1536F 15" 14.25" 36" 41 5.3 676 727 M-USOH1542F 15" 14.25" 42" 46 6.1 725 776 M-USOH1548F 15" 14.25" 48" 52 6.9 790 841 M-USOH156OF 15" 14.25" 60" 62 8.6 1065 1116 M-USOH1572F 15" 14.25" 72" 72 15.1 1221 1272 D n m Flipper Easy Assist Painted Panel Mount M-USOH1524FE 15" 14.25" 24" 35 3.6 952 1003 M-USOH1530FE 15" 14.25" 30" 38 4.4 999 1050 Ln M-USOH1536FE 15" 14.25" 36" 41 5.3 1052 1103 � M-USOH1542FE 15" 14.25" 42" 46 6.1 1088 1139 D Ln M-USOH1548FE 15" 14.25" 48" 52 6.9 1146 1197 �^ O Flipper Painted Door Wall Mount M-UWMSCH1524F 15" 14.25" 24" 35 3.6 614 665 M-UWMSOH153OF 15" 14.25" 30" 38 4.4 638 689 C M-UWMSOH1536F 15" 14.25" 36" 41 5.3 676 727 D n M UWMSOH1542F 15" 14.25" 42" 46 6.1 725 776 Ln M-UWMSOH1548F 15" 14.25" 48" 52 6.9 790 841 M-UWMSOH156OF 15" 14.25" 60" 62 8.6 1065 1116 z m D z m Ln O z D M m V) m —DI Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY D n n Select Model Number Select Paint Color N See page 5 O z m Ln L'"' I I m x maxon• 165 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 62-64 for the specification guide. w All Actual Dimensions are listed on page 62. v w Ready-to-Assemble Overhead Cabinet cc W W Includes • Overhead cabinets. Core removable locks. • Two keys. Cabinet. • Assembly hardware. List Lis# a Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium w Paint Paint a Panel Mount Ready-to-Assemble Overhead M-USOC24R 15" 11.37" 24" 21 1.6 376 427 Cabinet with Flipper Door M-USOC30R 15" 11.37" 30" 24 1.6 392 443 M-USOC36R 15" 11.37" 36" 27 1.6 415 466 w Q M-USOC42R 15" 11.37" 42" 30 1.8 444 495 M-USOC48R 15" 11.37" 48" 33 2.1 486 537 Q M-USOC60R 15" 11.37" 60" 42 2.5 654 705 M-USOC72R 15" 11.37" 72"' 49 3 822 873 Ln a ZD V) Un w U Q W V) v) Y 0 W d W O_ W Q 0 V) N z Q W N Ln W HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Model Number Select Paint Color uSee page 5 u Q x Z M 66 1 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge'" Frame and Tile System See pages 62-64 for the specification guide. All Actual Dimensions are listed on page 62. M m M Overhead Cabinets with Hinged Door z Includes m • Overhead cabinets. • Core removable locks. • Two keys. • Attaching brackets. List fist Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium p Paint Paint Hinged Painted Door Panel Mount M-USOH1524H 15" 14.25" 24" 35 3.6 1194 1245 m M-USOH1530H 15" 14.25" 30" 38 4.4 1240 1291 x M-USOH1536H 15" 14.25" 36" 41 5.3 1293 1344 M-USOH1542H 15" 14.25" 42" 46 6.1 1328 1379 M-USOH1548H 15" 14.25" 48" 52 6.9 1383 1434 D v D n m Ln C Overhead Cabinets with Steel Sliding Door Ln Includes • Overhead cabinets. 0 • Attaching brackets. N • Two keys. D n List List V' Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint 7O m Panel Mount Steel Sliding Door M-USOH1524S 15" 14.25" 24" 35 3.6 741 792 D M-USOH1530S 15" 14.25" 30" 38 4.4 769 820 m M-USOH1536S 15" 14.25" 36" 41 5.3 804 855 M-USOH1542S 15" 14.25" 42" 46 6.1 853 904 Ln M-USOH1548S 15" 14.25" 48" 52 6.9 911 962 M-USOH1560S 15" 14.25" 60" 62 8.6 1279 1330 z D m m z G) HOW TO SPECIFY D Select Model Number Select Paint Color n See page 5 0 m Ln M x maxon• 167 Emerge'" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 62-64 for the specification guide. LLJ All Dimensions are Nominal. U W Upmount Kits for Overheads LU w W Includes • Two upmount brackets. • Full back panel. • Required installation hardware. List List Description Model T-H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint x Up Mounted Overhead Kits M-USUM24 15" 14.25" 24" 7 0.3 263 314 w M-USUM30 15" 14.25" 30" 8 0.3 279 330 M-USUM36 15" 14.25" 36" 10 0.4 298 349 M-USUM42 15" 14.25" 42" 11 0.4 310 361 w M-USUM48 15" 14.25" 48" 12 0.5 321 372 U M-USUM60 15" 14.25" 60" 16 0.6 358 409 a v Ln H o: V) o: Overhead Cabinet Locks ZD Ln Includes uEach Lock Core Kit includes one core and core removal tool,two keys and instructions. w Ln Y Description Model Wt. Cubes List O Lock Core Kit M-LC 1 0.1 39 Master Key(1) M-MK 1 0.1 25 LU w LU HOW TO SPECIFY < Select Upmount Kit Model Number Select Paint Color 0 See page 5 O z a w M - W HOW TO SPECIFY Select Cabinet Lock Model Number Key Number O V) LU v v x 681 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge'" Frame and Tile System See pages 62-64 for the specification guide. All Actual Dimensions are listed on page 62. m Ready-to-Assemble (RTA) Overhead Shelf m Z n 'List List m Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Panel Mount RTA Overhead Shelf M-USSC24R 5.625" 11.37" 24" 10 1.9 188 239 M-USSC30R 5.625" 11.37" 30" 11 1.9 196 247 M-USSC36R 5.625" 11.37" 36" 12 1.9 211 262 M-USSC42R 5.625" 11.37" 42" 13 2.1 234 285 M-USSC48R 5.625" 11.37" 48" 14 2.4 257 308 M-USSC60R 5.625" 11.37" 60" 16 3 288 339 M-USSC72R 5.625" 11.37" 72" 18 3.5 316 367 M x Overhead Shelves List List . D Ln Core Premium D Description Model H T D W Wt. TCubes paint Paint rn Universal Open Straight Shelf M-UOSS24 4.625" 12.875" 24" 11 1 310 350 M-UOSS30 4.625" 12.875" 30" 13 1.2 321 361 Ln M-UOSS36 4.625" 12.875" 36" 14 1.3 328 368 C M-UOSS42 4.625" 12.875" 42" 17 1.5 333 373 N M-UOSS48 4.625" 12.875" 48" 19 1.6 338 378 "' M-UOSS60 4.625" 12.875" 60" 23 2 358 398 M-UOSS72 4.625" 12.875" 72" 23 3.6 440 480 Ln C Shelf Organizer D m cn List List v Core Premium 7° Description Model Wt. Cubes D Paint Paint Shelf Organizer M-PS014 6 0.4 79 86 m O z M m V) m Di Z C) HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Paint Color N See pages O m M Z X maxon• 169 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w U w Accessories wMaxon's tool rail works in conjunction with a variety of accesso Small Paper Clip Tray CC, ries.Modular accessories free up worksurface space and provide Holds paper clips and other small objects. orderly storage that is well within reach.Units can be arranged and rearranged to respond to changing workflow.The work tools that attach to the tool rail are: Personal Shelf Letter Tray Small Paper Clip Tray Holds office supplies and personal File Pocket Personal Shelf effects. Binder Bin Diagonal Tray Tool Box Paper Clip Coat hooks,marker boards and center drawers round out the Diagonal Tray x organization offering. Diagonal trays are non-handed. • Provides 3 fully divided slots for organizing CC a files. • Keeps papers from"bowing"at bottom. w U a Tool rail,shown above,is height-adjustable in 1"increments using slots in panels.Tool n rail shown with two tool boxes,two letter trays and file pocket.File pocket and binder Paper Clip t bins extend below a tool rail.Diagonal tray and contents extend above a tool rail. Binds project papers together. Q Mounts to tool rail or tool tile. V2 Tool Rails and Work Tools • Universal Panel Accessory rail can be mounted off modular up to 18". N • The rails are designed for use on panels only. Coat Hook M-PMC6 a Accessories can be used only on the Universal Accessory Rail. Hangs directly into slotted Emerge or Emerge panel frame. or • Sturdy aluminum extrusion with steel support construction. Use for coat or bag. ") Powder coated for durable finish. Package of six.Available in black only. • Use to hang Extensions tools.Cannot be used to support "' w monitor arms. UU Suggested weight capacity not to exceed 80 lbs. Marker Board Consideration needs to be given to height of tools and location N of worksurfaces. Panel Mount can be moved from space to Y space as needed. • 5 high rail(widths coordinate with panels). o This surface is a dry erase application. Attachment via vertical reveals. • For use with dry marking pens. • Can be hung from wall track.Good solution for above copiers. Hangs directly on Emerge panel frame. w Systems tool rail is off-modular—can be used on a panel of Steel tile with whiteboard paint. equal width or one size smaller. Q Surface is magnetic. a May span two panels of appropriate size,i.e.,60"W Tool Rail on Width must correspond with width of two 30"W panels. panel. Letter Tray • Holds standard letter-size paper and LU inter-office envelopes. Shelf Organizer z Minimal horizontal intrusion. Fits all Universal Overhead Cabinets and o Shelves. N File Pocket Not compatible with Overhead Cabinets with • May be stacked by hanging back of File Pocket onto front of another File Pocket to maximize Sliding Doors. space. z Stores vertically for easy access to files. a Task Lights N Light available in Black finish only. • Mount under Overhead Storage Cabinet or Binder Bin Shelf. w Holds folders,binders,and manuals. For Chicago version with Fuse Plug,order FP option. o Cord cover is metal construction.Specify paint finish option. V) w U U x Tool Box w Holds pencils and other writing utensils,large post it z notes,and other desk top accessories. Ll 70I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge'" Frame and Tile System See page 70 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Actual. M m M m Task Lighting m z Includes m • Fluorescent light bulb. • Hanger bars. Description Wattage Model H D W Wt. Cubes List Task Light 24W or greater 15 M-USL24 1.425" 6.875" 18.3" 6 0.4 258 Task Light 30W or greater 20 M-USL30 1.425" 6.875" 24.3" 7 0.4 291 Task Light 42W or greater 30 M-USL42 1.425" 6.875" 36.3" 9 0.4 324 Task Light 54W or greater 40 M-USL54 1.425" 6.875" 48.3" it 0.4 379 m r X a N Task Light 24W or greater-Fuse Plug 15 M-USL24FP 1.425" 6.875" 18.3" 6 0.4 357 D> Task Light 30W or greater-Fuse Plug 20 M-USL30FP 1.425" 6.875" 24.3" 7 0.4 392 D Task Light 42W or greater-Fuse Plug 30 M-USL42FP 1.425" 6.875" 36.3" 9 0.4 428 � Task Light 54W or greater-Fuse Plug 40 M-USL54FP 1.425" 6.875" 48.3" 11 0.4 463 m C 00� D List List 0 Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium `" Paint Paint jO T Cord Cover(Manager) M-CCM10 10" 1.415" 1.125" 2 0.2 37 44 m Cord Cover(Manager) M-CCM15 15" 1.415" 1.125" 2 0.2 39 46 Cord Cover(Manager) M-CCM20 20" 1.415" 1.125" 2 0.2 52 59 v M m D Po m -�i O z D M m N m Z HOW TO SPECIFY D n n Select Model Number Select Paint Color N Ln See page 5 0 M Ln X maxon• 171 Emerge'" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See page 70 for the specification guide. W All Dimensions are Actual. U w Universal Overhead Task Lighting LU W w Includes • Fluorescent light bulb. 9'cord. • 4 cord clips • Mounting bars. Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes List Universal Overhead Task Light 24W M-USL024 1.125" 3.7" 18.375" 5 0.4 214 x Universal Overhead Task Light 30W M-USL030 1.125" 3.7" 22.875" 7 0.6 235 LL LU Universal Overhead Task Light 42W M-USL042 1.125" 3.7" 34.625" 10 0.9 266 a Universal Overhead Task Light 60W M-USL060 1.125" 3.7" 46.5" 12 1.1 323 W U Q a m N r-- < Universal Overhead Task Light 24W-Fuse Plug M-USL024FP 1.125" 3.7" 18.375" 5 0.4 225 N Universal Overhead Task Light 30W-Fuse Plug M-USL030FP 1.125" 3.7" 22.875" 7 0.6 255 Universal Overhead Task Light 42W-Fuse Plug M-USL042FP 1.125" 3.7" 34.625" 10 0.9 281 „n Universal Overhead Task Light 60W-Fuse Plug M-USL060FP 1.125" 3.7" 46.5" 12 1.1 348 N a N m N W V Q LL Ln N Y 0 W Q W d W tD Q 0 ♦- N tD Z Q W N W HOW TO SPECIFY Cr Select Model Number N N W U Q x W O M Z 72 I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge'" Frame and Tile System See page 70 for the specification guide. z All Dimensions are Actual. M n m Accessories m List List n m Core Premium Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes paint Paint Universal Accessory Rail M-ACCRAIL24 5" .5" 24" 5 0.2 224 244 M-ACCRAIL30 5" .5" 30" 6 0.3 240 260 M-ACCRAIL36 5" .5" 36" 7 0.3 253 273 M ACCRAIL42 5" 5" 42" 8 0.4 267 287 M-ACCRAIL48 5" .5" 48" 9 0.4 276 296 M-ACCRAIL60 5" .5" 60" 11 0.5 322 342 z m List List M Core Premium Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes paint Paint Personal Shelf(21") M-PS21 1.75" 7" 21" 3 0.05 158 178 D —n N D n m List `List N Core Premium z Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes paint Paint D Letter Tray M-LT 1.7" 9" 13" 0.05 0.05 153 173 c�'n O N C List List D n Core Premium Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes U' Paint Paint Binder Bin M-SB 8.5" 5.2" 3" 0.08 0.08 153 173 v z m I D I m Lists List Core Premium D Description Model H D W Wt. LCubes paint Paint m Diagonal Tray-(Non-handed)(3) M-DT 8.5" 9.5" 4.5" 2 0.03 213 233 m Z HOW TO SPECIFY D n r-� Select Model Number Select Paint Color M N See page 5 O m N r- z M �• X maxon• 73 Emerge'" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See page 70 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Actual. U W Accessories Continued... L w w LU List List Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint File Pocket M-FP 8.9" 1.25" 12.25" 2 0.3 158 178 I I II I _ X w List List a Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Core PremiumPaint Paint Paper Clip M-CLIP2 1.9" 5" 1 0.2 158 178 w ULn - ,) < V) List List cn a Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Core Premium cc Paint Paint ,ZD Small Paper Clip Tray M-SMTRAY 1.8" 6.8" 1 0.1 109 129 U w N Y � List Llst O Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint w Tool Box M-TB 5.25" 1.5" 5" 1 0.2 123 143 a w a w O v7 C7 Z Q w Ln W HOW TO SPECIFY c Select Model Number Select Paint Color O w See page 5 U v o z 74I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge" Frame and Tile System See page 70 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. m -n Panel Accessories rn M m Z Description Model Wt. Cubes List rn Coat Hook(6 per pack) M-PMC6 0.3 0.3 45 v M m m X Carpet Grippers Ln D Description Model H W Wt. Cubes List Ln Carpet Grippers(12 pk) M-AGC12 6.5" 1.5" 0.2 0.3 48 Carpet Grippers(4 pk) M-AGC4 6.5" 1.5" 0.1 0.3 28 M Ln D Ln O Ln C D n m cn -o M rn D M m --I O z D M m N m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Paint Color n Ln to See page 5 O z m V) X M �. O X maxon* 175 Emerge`" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 All Dimensions are Nominal. W U W Universal Panel Lu W w Includes o: • Panel mounted whiteboard. • Markertray. • Wall mounted tackboard comes with attaching hardware. List List F777Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint X Panel Mounted Whiteboard M-PMWB1324 13" 24" 6 1 418 444 w M-PMWB1330 13" 30" 7 1.3 456 482 ° — M-PMWB1336 13" 36" 9 1.5 478 504 " � I M-PMWB1342 13" 42" 10 1.7 489 515 W M-PMWB1348 13" 48" 12 2 500 526 M-PMWB1360 13" 60" 15 2.4 516 542 a Iq M-PMWB2624 26" 24" 9 1.9 500 526 Q M-PMWB2630 26" 30" 11 2.3 519 545 Ln M-PMWB2636 26" 36" 13 2.8 527 SS3 M-PMWB2642 26" 42" 15 3.2 538 564 N M-PMWB2648 26" 48" 18 3.6 549 575 a M-PMWB2660 26" 60" 23 4.5 564 590 tN W U Q W N cr >0 W d W d W ne O H z Q W w HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Model Number Select Paint Color w See page 5 U v Q Z M � ' 76I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Emerge'" Frame and Tile System All Dimensions are Nominal.Pricing listed below is for Core Paint.Please see"How to Specify"section at bottom of page for Premium Paint upcharge. Wall mounted tackboard comes with attaching hardware. A m M m A Universal Fabric Tackboard z n m Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Grade A Grade B Fabric Fabric Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard M-PMTB1324 13" 24" 6 0.6 364 373 i M-PMTB1330 13" 30" 7 0.8 380 389 M-PMTB1336 13" 36" 9 0.9 410 419 M-PMTB1342 13" 42" 10 1.1 440 451 M-PMTB1348 13" 48" 12 1.3 480 491 M-PMTB1360 13" 60" 15 1.6 508 519 M-PMTB2624 26" 24" 9 1.3 380 392 M-PMTB2630 26" 30" 11 1.5 410 422 X M-PMTB2636 26" 36" 13 1.7 434 446 M-PMTB2642 26" 42" 15 1.9 465 478 M-PMTB2648 26" 48" 18 2.1 501 514 M-PMTB2660 26" 60" 23 2.3 539 552 D Wall Mounted FabricTackboard M-WMTB1324 13" 24" 6 0.6 364 373 '^ v M-WMTB1330 13" 30" 7 0.8 380 389 n M-WMTB1336 13" 36" 9 0.9 410 419 M-WMTB1342 13" 42" 10 1.1 440 451 Ln M-WMTB1348 13" 48" 12 1.3 480 491 C z M-WMTB1360 13" 60" 15 1.6 508 519 D I� M-WMTB2624 26" 24" 9 1.3 380 392 cLni M-WMTB2630 26" 30" 11 1.5 410 422 M-WMTB2636 26" 36" 13 1.7 434 446 0 M-WMTB2642 26" 42" 15 1.9 465 478 P0 M-WMTB2648 26" 48" 18 2.1 501 514 Ln M-WMTB2660 26" 60" 23 2.3 539 552 D n m v M m D A m Ln O D M m m D Z C) HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Fabric Select Paint Color L' M Ln See pages 6-7 See page 5 O Core Paint Choice(no upcharge) M Premium Paint($26 upcharge) MI I �' �� x maxon, 1 77 Emerge" Frame and Tile System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 W U Z w c w U- W x LL W cr a. W U d vn Ln - 5 Q Ln Ln N d ZD Ln Ln w U Q W to Y W d W a. W Q p H- Ln Q W N Ln W_ O N Ln W v v x w Z 781 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix" Panel System x T Ln Ln Ln t, �H Prefix' Panel System D Ln Ln Many offices desire collaboration and the ability to stay connected.Lower panels with added glass allow for natural light and interaction. From call center activity,impromptu dialogues,private conversations and open plan environments,Prefix provides just the right amount of privacy.Connect stackers to your panels,choose your favorite worksurface and add some personal storage to create an efficient and O attractive aesthetic that can accommodate all your privacy needs. jO Ln Ln Prefix panels are 21/8"thick,and can be configured in a variety of heights and fabric finishes.The ability to combine fabric base panels with 70 glass or fabric stackers allows for multiple height,aesthetic and reconfigure options.This provides the versatility needed for today's ever changing offices spaces. "' Connector posts are available in straight,extended straight,2-Way,3-Way,4-Way and 120°options,provide optimal versatility and structural rigidity.Connect two stations or 10 depending upon your needs.Quick delivery and easy installation means you're up and =M working fast. m Worksurfaces are available with laminate to meet your budget and aesthetic needs.Prefix is manufactured in the USA and is covered by Maxon's Limited Lifetime Warranty.Workstations made easier. O D G) m Ln m Z G) D n n m LA Ln W m N Z M m X maxon• 79 Prefix' Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w U w Typicals LU w Please refer to our typicals gallery for all Maxon systems.www.maxonfurniture.com/design-resources/typicals.Here you can download Cad files,BOM's with current pricing and PDF's of each drawing.Each month we add new ideas to support industry trends. Use the Maxon Typicals Gallery to find the components in Prefix workstations: w cD cc w w Prefix"If Station 6'x 6' 36TC 36TC 36TC 36TC m 65X36T IC 65X36T 65T 65X36T IC 65X36T 65L a f N Uj 0.1 N U J �, �i BF- C1L- ?9 � 1R-20 - < - ------ V, ZD AZ h�3r C� v tz 399 14 9n 199 14ZX99 Q D1Vd Oltz QJ D ul Prefix"U"Station 8'x 8' 0 Provides seated privacy with ample storage and worksurface space FGS-1548 FGS-1548 LLJ 0 5OX48T 50X48T 50E ® GI LU WJ - ro RDFF-R s a X a� LL N �1'L� BBF-R a\ w O LO is ro U) s Q Z N 86z1Z N o Q LL A a N N OO O N I W W 0 109 MIX09 18bX09 w M-SJ=l 879L-SJ� 77 O Ln w U U Q X w O Z 80 I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix' Panel System M m M m Prefix Panels rM rM Monolithic Raceway 15"Segmented Raceway Glass Upper Glass and Fabric Stackers m *Available in fabric options *Available in fabric base m I A m i i ., ✓ 15„ 30„ 15" 35"High 42"High 50"High 65"High 50"High 65"High Glass Stacker Glass Stacker Fabric Stacker Doors Frameless Glass I D D Sliding Door Hinge Door n m 24"W 30"W 36"W 42"W 48"W 60"W 72"W 15"HLn D Ln 35"H 0 O C A T D n 42vz"H M D M m 50"H L/) —I O D G) m M 65"H D Z D Connector Posts Available in straight,extended straight,2-Way 90''L",3-Way"T",4-Way"X"and 120' N O m Extended 2-Way 901 3-Way 4-Way 120' 120" _ Straight "l" "T" "X" 2-Way 3-Way Z M m X maxon, 81 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w U w Working with Prefix Panels U w w w Top trim is relocated Stacking panels are available in from base panel frame. 15"H tackable or glazed and 30"H glazed.Frameless glass screens are also available for topping off panels w in 71/2"or 15"H,select either clear or frosted glass. w w Structural panel frames are available in 35",421/2",50", and 65"nominal heights. U a Panels are 21/V nominal thick, Q luse 21/4"to calculate inter- 2 sections in length of panel N runs). V) aQ ZD Lay-in base pathway accepts voice,data and Ln w fiber optic cable,as well as U electrical system. QL Base pathway cover has outlet openings M that accept duplex receptacles or Ycommercially available modular data 0 faceplates. O Leveling glides provide 21/8" of adjustment. w Q a Frame Dimensions(Actual) a Depth:21/a"(use 21/4"to calculate intersections in length of panel run) Widths:20",24",30",36",42",48",60",72" QHeights:341/4",411/4",491/4",641/4"(with levelers fully retracted) O Leveling Glides:21/s" range ° "' Stacking Panels: 15"H fabric and glass,30"H glass ° ° Frameless Glass:71/2"H Top of Glass to Extrusions,81/4"H Top of Glass to Top of Top Cap, 15"H Top of Glass to z Extrusions,16"H Top of Glass to Top of Top Cap t fit° QInline connections between w Panel frames are shipped with panels in a continuous run are base pathway covers installed. accomplished with an inline connector kit. Ln w Cr O V) LO w U U Q X w 0 Z 82I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix® Panel System 70 m T Building Vertically with Prefix Panels Stacking Frame Connection � Glazed panels only in top position M z 80"H 72%2"H 80°H 80"H I m 15" 15" 15" M 15" 15" M �lIV 15" Mm 35"H 42%2"H 50"H 65"H Stacking Fabric and Glass Stackers Ln • Stacking connection provides a solid connection,allowing the stacking K frame to accept hang-on components,per Prefix configuration D guidelines. � Includes attachment hardware.Specify connectors separately. D • Only one Glass Stacker can be added to top position of any Prefix panel r) of same width from 20"W to 72"W up to a maximum combined height M of 80". • End trim is specified in full end height to include height of base panel+ VI stacking panel, c p Guidelines for using overhead storage with Stackers are given on p pages 113-114. Ln D Glass Stackers feature clear or frosted tempered safety glass inserts (specified).Glass frame is painted to match trim. • Stacking frames can be added to base frames of the same width to achieve a maximum height of 80"H.Stackers can be added to 421/2"H 0 Base Frames to achieve heights of 571/2"H and 721/2"H. 70 Tackable Panels Slot modularity will be lost on Stacker used with 421/2"H panels.If panelCZ • Specifications:4-sided,welded tubular steel panel frame. mounting slots are not being used,this is not an issue. • Hardware included with connector kits. Stackers must match the width of the base frame and are unable to D • Available in 4 heights and 8 widths—add'/s"for each panel vertical span multiple panels. n end trim. Stacking frames cannot be used as base frames. • Panel frames can be leveled up to 21/a".Actual panel height varies Glass Stackers must be installed at top portion. depending on position of leveling glides. Cannot double stack Glass Stackers. • Direct connections between same height frames in a continuous run Stackers cannot be used on Top Tier Glass Panels. v are accomplished with provided hardware.There is no incremental Only one 15"and 30"Glass Stacker can be used on a panel. A increase in dimension along the run. Fabric Stackers cannot be used on top of a Glass Stacker. M • For adequate stability,one of two methods of stabilization shown on page 84 must be adhered to. • Due to depth of panel,back-to-back data modules should not be used in the base. —" • Add 21/4"to panel run for each"L","T","X",or extended straight 0 connector("S"). D • Acoustical panels meet BIFMA recommendations. m Tackable Glass Panels Standard Top Cap • Available 50"H and 65"H with 15"H clear or frosted tempered safety Specified separately. • It is possible to span multiple panels when the combined panel width is glass inserts(specified). equal to the top cap width. D • Glass frame is painted to match trim. • Top trim is specified separately. Frameless Glass Top Cap z • Cannot stack on glass panels. Frameless insert integrated into the base panel frame top trim. Replaces top trim on structural or Fabric Stacker. • It is possible to span multiple frames when the combined frame width is equal to the panel mounted screen width. n • Cannot do variable height,must go on highest panel(s). P • Frameless glass screens are non-structural. o • Do not hang or stack on top of frameless glass screens. 0 • Available in clear or frosted glass and heights of 7.5"or 15". • Made with'/8"thick laminated tempered safety glass. Ln • To be included in overall height of panel with a maximum combined height of 80". • Unit itself serves as the top cap.Top cap does not need to be ordered. z • Can not be used on Glass Stacker or Glass Panels. o • Can be used as a marker board on both sides. X maxon• i 83 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w w Building Horizontally with Prefix Panels LA_ Important planning guidelines:For adequate stability,one of two methods of stabilization must be adhered to: w Definitions: Parent Panel Run(Spine)—Panels(or a single panel)configured in a straight line intended to divide space.Parent panel runs greater LU than 60". °u Return Panels—Panels attached to a parent run for the purpose of stability.Return panels may also have the effect of dividing space. 2 w Note:Return panels must be no more than 30"lower than the maximum height of the parent panel run.When stacking,the maximum height allowed is 80".This includes frameless glass. If attaching overhead storage,return panels must be the same height as parent run. f.. LU a 1 �� Ln V) Method 1—Opposing returns Method 2—Single-sided returns • A parent run must be a minimum of 48"and a maximum of A parent run must be a minimum of 48"and a maximum of 144"between return panels. 144" between return panels. Ln The parent run must have a minimum of two 24"W return The parent run must have a minimum of two return panels panels running in opposing directions on each end of run. extending in one direction.Stack-ons may require additional w Return panels must not be any more than 30"shorter in height length. than parent run. Return panels must not be any more than 30"shorter in height Any panel run greater than 60"is considered a spine. than parent run. Y When using 120'connectors, 12" must be added to length of Any panel run greater than 60"is considered a spine. O return panels as determined by methods 1 and 2. When using 120•connectors,12"must be added to length of 3� return panels as determined by methods 1 and 2. w Q w Method 1 Method 2 a Minimum Minimum Return Panel Widths with Minimum Minimum Return Parent Run Length Panel Widths with Parent Run Length Return Panels Stack the Ons w Return Panels Stack-Ons Total(X+Y) Total(X+Y O 48"-108" 20" 20" 48"-108" 84" 84" O v~i 114"-144" 24" 24" 114"-144" 84" 96" Door Panel Frame Sliding Doors and Mounting Kits • The 80"H door panel frame includes 42"W Frosted Translucent Acrylic door. z frame,36"W laminate door. Sliding doors are available in 50"H,65"H, Q Door panel frame comes with hinges and and 80"H. v attaching hardware. Sliding doors are 42"wide to cover a 36" • Immediate adjacent panels must be equal wide opening. in height to the door panel frame. Must connect to a panel of equal or taller w Lockset with lever ordered separately. height. W Keyed alike option not available on door See illustration and specification informa- O e V) panels. tion on page"Working with Sliding Doors" LU Door is non-handed.For left or right on next page. Q hand:change to desired swing at time of Sliding Door Kits must be ordered installation. separately. • Top Cap ordered separately. x w Z 84I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix Panel System rM m T1 rm Working with Sliding Doors X Sliding doors for Prefix are a great addition to any new or existing installations.The sliding door can be specified with specific mounting z kits for each door ordered.With a Frosted Translucent insert and your choice of Core or Premium paint,the sliding door will create a m unique look for any office environment. The sliding doors are available in 50",65",and 80"H models and can mount to 30",36",42",and 48"W panels.They accommodate a rn 36"W opening and are 42"W,nominally.The door ships from the factory non-handed and can be installed in either right or left handed K applications.The handle pulls located on each side of the door are non-locking and are color matched to the trim to create a uniform � style.And with the threshold free design,the sliding door offers better aesthetics and safety by eliminating the potential for tripping. ,� General Guidelines for Use of Sliding Door • The system requires the ordering of both a door and a mounting bracket kit. • All doors are 42"wide to accommodate a 36"W opening and are non-handed.Door leveling is dependant on floor being level. • A mounting bracket kit must be ordered for each door corresponding to the mounting panels width(30",36",42",or 48"W). • Mounting bracket kits are system specific and for Prefix. General Guidelines for Layout Planning of Sliding Door • Stability guidelines must be followed when specifying a sliding door.The sliding door system was designed to close an opening in a LA run of lateral panels. Doors mounted to long runs of panels without floor support,ties to worksurfaces,or return panels may seem D less stable cc -_ If the door is used to close an If the door is mounted to a panel r nn �r run that is positioned adjacent to w opening(A)where the panel � JFE �I a wall(E)inside a 90°angle there d p opposite the door is at 90°,there LB must be 42"clearance between the will be a gap equal to the panel thickness between the door and track stop and the wall/inside 90°. D a the panel end when closed.To v close this gap,an Extended Straight Connector should be specified as shown. eOTC a,r The door is attached at the base of o e -- the panel at any end position with (� a wrap around bracket. Bracket kits s D are ordered in conjunction with � n >R „ti FEP appropriate end trim profiles.The slots at the base of the panel must N If back-to-back doors are mounted be clear(D)and cannot be utilized on panels(C)that are less than i by worksurface supports or panel n 42"W they will interfere with each Bt aM hung components. m other if both are open at the same - l88 18sX58 18EX98 M B � 7191 �19f X time. r^ T-0" ,.�. ..®. u ° „• ix When planning the layout,care a,rf If a door is closing an opening of "'i must be taken if the plan includes a workstation that includes a"T" t a door mounted on a panel that is connector in the opposite wall,an less than 42"W.If the panel is at a 9 extended straight connector may corner(B),the door will protrude need to be used to maintain the 36" into the aisle or next workstation required opening. when in the open position. nB OT B ax.n ,xxBB lwi �ix a9x rnD ou ott Lou Z G) 36fC 42TC The slide door is designed to be ,�e- --"� m� D 55 m e attached WBP.98 to an end of run panel To provide additional panel stability rri m - � only.The slide door should not beLn specified on a panel that is s when sliding doors are specified, o - connected on both ends, regardless I; worksurface support in the form of ?n " 1 rails are suggested. worksurface bracket kits or spanner if t to aone of those ends is connecting connector kit.Failure to abide - arm G - _ by this rule will result in a failure to 188 18EXSB 1LYX8B ^ __,�C 01* ,11, install the door. - z �S8 LBfXSB 18fXSB Q 019C 019C m X maxon• 185 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w U w Hinged Door w w A42X80Door y, Best placement of a door is at _ Door frame is 42"W R ; an L,T,X connector or wall starter Laminate Door Opening is 36"W. � --, connector for rigidity. 00, 3�_O�� h 01 w ° 3'-6" � k .10 w U N b, V) G fi Use of spanning top caps at an Wall starts should be used if panels R; inline will also help add additional 5 are not required along the wall. Q rigidity. a Ln " a ,w k N vx vu u w VllT 19]IlS9 ]IN s ¢ LO LL LO ]G 0 w a w a w ¢ 0 V) z a w V, w Cr 0 Ln w U U X w Z 86 I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix Panel System rn m Connectors and Trim Inline Connectors Finish Connectors m Panel End Trim z Intersecting Connectors End vertical trim cover(includes top cap— n adds 3/e"to run). Top View Order to finish the end of every panel run(except when attaching panels to Frame Frame �'' ' permanent walls). m M - Variable Height Connector Kits— 1 Post Trim M 2�4 ,-KKtl m Includes connectors,vertical cover,and attaching hardware. Frame Frame Order one per each panel height change in an"U' "T" "X" or"S„ Inline Connector Kit • Inline connections between panels in Multiple-Height Connections "S",Connector Kits a continuous run are accomplished Multiple-height connections also utilize • Specify post height as height of tallest with an inline connector kit.There is no standard"L","T","X",and"S"connectors, panel at the connection, incremental increase in dimension along in the height of the tallest panel.(See • Extended straight connector kit"S" the run. examples 1-4) can be used to keep continuous runs Inline connector kits include all parts dimensionally consistent with opposing required for connecting two panels of Wall Mount Kits > panel runs which incorporate"T"or"X" D p p same height together. Specify post height as height of tallest intersections. Kit includes inline connector strap, panel at the connection. • Add 2 W to the length of the run for every hardware,and glide tower to glide tower M-PFXC-65YEB is a pair of ends. extended straight connector used. screw. M-PFXC-65YM is the middle unit. M • Order panel end trim kits to finish the end All wall track system worksurfaces must be of every panel run(except when attaching floor supported by an end panel,pedestal Un panels to permanent walls). or lateral file,with one floor support at c each end of the worksurface run and a z Inline Variable Height End Trim Finish Kits maximum spacing of 8'between floor • Includes connectors,vertical cover,and supports. �^ attaching hardware. Not recommended for masonry. V 90, Wall mount kits provide a means to affix a • High-low"H"covers the exposed end panel run to a permanent building wall, o of a panel when joining panels inline of Includes top cap. differing heights. (Color must be specified.) • Order one per each panel height change Connector adds 1"to length of panel run. � sway in an inline connection.(See example 5 for Anchor devices are not supplied with the application.) wall mount kit.Refer to Prefix Installation N Example 1 Instructions for appropriate hardware. Connectors required: 1-50"H"T" Example 2 1-15"H"V Connectors required: M .50N 1-65 H"X" D "x"4-W aY a 1-15"H"VH 1-22'k'H"VH" M 1-30'H"VH" "T","X",Connector Kits 50'H • Specify post height as height of tallest panel at the connection. • I,[!""T",and"X"connector kits are used 65•H O when connecting panels at intersecting runs. > For"U',"T",and"X"connector kits,add 2 W M to the total length of the panel run for each o 0 0 0 intersection,whether located in the middle or at the end of the run. L3s"N • Ln Includes transition piece,connectors, azi H 35•H m vertical cover(s),and attaching hardware. Example 4 0 0 0 4 Example65 H 1 Z Connectors required: �M•PFXC•15HL G) 1-65"H'T' Example 5 D t-) 50'H n t 15'H M Stacking. N Panels Q A m to 0 o M•PFXC-65L 0 o Z 0 0 Panel S0"H Panel Frame". X maxon• 187 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 80-87 for the specification guide. All Actual Dimensions are listed on page 82.Pricing listed below is for Core Paint. Please see"How to Specify"section at bottom of page for Premium Paint upcharge. u W Standard Monolithic Tackable Fabric - Panel Uj w w LU Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Grade A Grade B Fabric Fabric Standard Monolithic Tackable Fabric M-PFXM-3520FP 35" 20" 20.2 1 501 515 w 35"H M-PFXM-3524FP 35" 24" 21.8 1.2 507 521 w M-PFXM-3530FP 35" 30" 23.5 1.5 512 526 w M-PFXM-3536FP 35" 36" 25.2 1.8 517 531 M-PFXM-3542FP 35" 42" 26.9 2.1 523 538 M-PFXM-3548FP 35" 48" 28.6 2.4 526 541 ° ° M-PFXM-3560FP 35" 60" 30.3 3 623 641 M-PFXM-3572FP 35" 72" 32 3.6 697 717 Standard Monolithic Tackable Fabric M-PFXM-4220FP 42.5" 20" 22 1.2 569 584 42.5"H M-PFXM-4224FP 42.5" 24" 24.8 1.5 577 592 u M-PFXM-4230FP 42.5" 30" 27.5 1.8 584 600 aQ. M-PFXM-4236FP 42.5" 36" 30.3 2.2 594 610 Ln M-PFXM-4242FP 42.5" 42" 33.1 2.6 612 629 ¢ M-PFXM-4248FP 42.5" 48" 35.8 3 631 649 Ln M-PFXM-4260FP 42.5" 60" 38.6 3.7 758 779 ° ° M-PFXM-4272FP 42.5" 72" 41.4 4.4 850 873 Ln Standard Monolithic Tackable Fabric M-PFXM-5020FP 50" 20" 23.4 1.4 594 610 50"H M-PFXM-5024FP 50" 24" 26.9 1.7 620 636 M-PFXM-5030FP 50" 30" 30.5 2.2 645 662 Ln M-PFXM-5036FP 50" 36" 34 2.6 687 706 w u M-PFXM-5042FP 50.. 42" 37.5 3 728 748 LL Ln M-PFXM-5048FP 50" 48" 41.1 3.5 771 792 Y M-PFXM-5060FP 50" 60" 44.6 4.3 922 947 or 0 r M-PFXM-5072FP 50.. 72" 48.2 5.2 1032 1060 w Standard Monolithic Tackable Fabric M-PFXM-6520FP 65" 20" 30.3 1.9 610 626 Q 65"H M-PFXM-6524FP 65" 24" 34.9 2.3 642 659 w M-PFXM-6530FP 65" 30" 39.5 2.8 679 697 M-PFXM-6S36FP 65" 36" 44.2 3.4 724 746 M-PFXM-6542FP 65" 42" 48.8 3.9 755 775 M-PFXM-6548FP 65" 48" 53.4 4.5 797 819 M-PFXM-6560FP 65" 60" 58 5.6 937 963 o M-PFXM-6572FP 65" 72" 62.6 6.8 1049 1077 0 0 C7 Z Q w N Ln w HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Model Number Select Fabric Select Trim Color W See pages 6-7 See page 5 v Core Paint Choice(no upcharge) v ¢ Premium Paint($51 upcharge) x LU z 88I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix® Panel System See pages 80-87 for the specification guide. All Actual Dimensions are listed on page 82.Pricing listed below is for Core Paint. Please see"How to Specify"section at bottom of page for Premium Paint upcharge. m rn Tackable Glass — Panel Z Includes M • Assembled panel with glass. List, List rM m Grade A G) Grade A Grade B � Model H W Wt. Cubes Frosted m Description fabric Fabric Glass Tackable Glass Panel 50"H M-PFXH-5020FGP 50" 20" 20.8 1.5 807 828 849 with 15"H Glass M-PFXH-5024FGP 50" 24" 23.4 1.8 885 908 930 M-PFXH-5030FGP 50" 30" 26.7 2.2 963 988 1013 M-PFXH-5036FGP 50" 36" 30.5 2.6 1038 1065 1092 M-PFXH-5042FGP 50" 42" 34.4 3 1097 1126 1156 M-PFXH-5048FGP 50" 48" 38.8 3.4 1115 1146 1178 M-PFXH-5060FGP 50" 60" 46 4.3 1356 1392 1427 M-PFXH-5072FGP 50" 72" 55.2 5.1 1569 1610 1651 D 0 a N D n m Tackable Glass Panel 65"H M-PFXH-6520FGP 65" 20" 23.8 2 937 961 985 with 15"H Glass M-PFXH-6524FGP 65" 24" 26.6 2.3 1028 1054 1080 Un M-PFXH-6530FGP 65" 30" 30.4 2.8 1128 1157 1186 C M-PFXH-6536FGP 65" 36" 34.3 3.4 1223 1255 1286 D M-PFXH-6542FGP 65" 42" 38.8 3.9 1325 1359 1394 Ln M-PFXH-6548FGP 65" 48" 43.2 4.4 1427 1464 1501 M-PFXH-6560FGP 65" 60" 50.7 5.5 1636 1679 1721 M-PFXH-6572FGP 65" 72" 60.3 6.5 1894 1943 1992 C � D o n m Ln v M m D z m O z D M m m Z C) HOW TO SPECIFY D n Select Model Number Select Fabric Select Trim Color Select Glass N See pages 6-7 See page 5 C Clear Glass 0 Core Paint Choice(no upcharge) FT Frosted Glass rr Premium Paint($51 upcharge) L' 0 maxon• 189 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 80-87 for the specification guide. w All Actual Dimensions are listed on page 82.Pricing listed below is for Core Paint. Please see"How to Specify"section at bottom of page for Premium Paint upcharge. V W Glass Stackers w W Includes • Assembled glass stacker. w List List w 2 Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Clear Frosted LU Glass Glass Glass Stacker 15"H M-PFXS-1520G 15" 20" 8.3 1.9 513 538 M-PFXS-1524G 15" 24" 9.4 1.9 563 591 M-PFXS-1530G 15" 30" 10.9 1.9 636 668 M-PFXS-1536G 15" 36" 12.5 2.2 656 689 M-PFXS-1542G 15" 42" 14.1 2.6 729 765 M-PFXS-1548G 15" 48" 15.7 2.9 784 823 M-PFXS-1560G 15" 60" 18.8 3.6 896 941 w Q M-PFXS-1572G 15" 72" 22 4.3 1059 1111 a N F- Q Glass Stacker 30"H M-PFXS-3020G 30" 20" 14.3 3.3 534 561 Ln M-PFXS-3024G 30" 24" 16.8 3.3 584 614 M-PFXS-3030G 30" 30" 19.8 3.3 655 689 Ln `^ M-PFXS-3036G 30" 36" 23 3.8 676 711 M-PFXS-3042G 30" 42" 26.2 4.4 744 782 M-PFXS-3048G 30" 48" 29.4 4.9 799 840 M-PFXS-3060G 30" 60" 35.6 6.2 908 955 Uj w V Q w Ln N Y 0 W or- Cr d W d W Q 0 H t/i z Q W w HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Model Number Select Trim Color Select Glass Ln w See page 5 C. .Clear Glass Core Paint Choice(no upcharge) FT Frosted Glass Q Premium Paint($26 upcharge) US 90 I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix Panel System See pages 80-87 for the specification guide. All Actual Dimensions are listed on page 82. z m M Fabric Stackers (Tackable) z n Includes m • Assembled fabric stacker. Wt. Cubes Grade A Grade B m Description Model H W Fabric Fabric m Fabric Stacker 15"H M-PFXS-1520F 15" 20" 6 1.9 423 429 (tackable) M-PFXS-1524F 15" 24" 6.8 1.9 453 460 M-PFXS-1530F 15" 30" 8.1 1.9 489 496 M-PFX5-1536F 15" 36" 9.3 2.2 526 534 M-PFXS-1542F 15" 42" 10.5 2.6 566 574 M-PFXS-1548F 15" 48" 11.7 2.9 606 615 M-PFXS-1560F 15" 60" 14.2 3.6 683 693 M-PFXS-1572F 15" 72" 17.2 4.3 791 803 D z —1 Prefix Panel Top Cap m List Llst Core Premium L^ Description Model W Wt. Cubes � Paint Paint :;a v Prefix Panel Top Cap M-PFXTC20 20" 2 0.3 45 71 D N M-PFXTC24 24" 2 0.3 45 71 N M-PFXTC30 30" 2 0.3 57 83 M-PFXTC36 36" 2 0.3 73 99 O M-PFXTC42 42" 2 0.4 86 112 M-PFXTC48 48" 3 0.5 94 120 C T M-PFXTC60 60" 4 0.6 106 132 D n M-PFXTC72 72" 4 0.7 112 138 N v z m D M m HOW TO SPECIFY Ln Select Fabric Stacker Model Number Select Fabric 0 D See pages 6-7 m u7 m Q� D M _ Z HOW TO SPECIFY D n n Select Top Cap Model Number Select Trim Color N Ln See page 5 0 m Ln Z M o x maxon• 191 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 80-87 for the specification guide. Uj All Actual Dimensions are listed on page 82.Pricing listed below is for Core Paint. Please see"How to Specify"section at bottom of page for Premium Paint upcharge. U W Frameless Glass cc w W Includes tr • Frameless Glass which replaces need for top cap. w List List w 2 Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Clear Frosted w Glass Glass Frameless Glass 7"H M-PFXFGS-0720 7.5" 20" 18 0.7 415 452 M-PFXFGS-0724 7.5" 24" 20 0.8 474 514 M-PFXFGS-0730 7.5" 30" 22 1 530 573 M-PFXFGS-0736 7.5" 36" 24 1.2 550 597 M-PFXFGS-0742 7.5" 42" 26 1.4 590 640 M-PFXFGS-0748 7.5" 48" 28 1.6 637 690 w M-PFXFGS-0754 7.5" 54" 30 1.8 668 725 U M-PFXFGS-0760 T5" 60" 32 2 705 765 a U0 M-PFXFGS-0766 7.5" 66" 34 2.2 769 832 <a M-PFXFGS-0772 7.5" 72" 36 2.4 804 871 2 V) Ln Frameless Glass 15"H M-PFXFGS-1520 15" 20" 18 0.7 444 484 Q M-PFXFGS-1524 15" 24" 20 0.8 503 546 a M-PFXFGS-1530 15" 30" 22 1 579 626 `n M-PFXFGS-1536 15" 36" 24 1.2 622 672 M-PFXFGS-1542 15" 42" 26 1.4 697 750 M-PFXFGS-1548 15" 48" 28 1.6 770 827 M-PFXFGS-1554 15" 54" 30 1.8 858 918 M-PFXFGS-1560 15" 60" 32 2 911 974 V) M-PFXFGS-1566 15" 66" 34 2.2 965 1032 O M-PFXFGS-1572 15" 72" 36 2.4 1006 1076 w Q n. w n. w U Q O H (7 Z Q w N V) HOW TO SPECIFY w O Select Model Number Select Trim Color Select Glass Ln w See page 5 C Clear Glass U Core Paint Choice(no upcharge) FT Frosted Glass U Premium Paint($26 upcharge) w CD M Z 92 I maxon• GSA SIN 711 1 EXHIBIT B Prefix® Panel System See pages 80-87 for the specification guide. z m M Sliding Door z List _: List m Core Premium Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Paint Paint m Prefix Sliding Door M-PFXSD5042 50" 42" 28 5.5 1663 1714 M m M-PFXSD6542 65" 42" 38 7.1 1733 1784 G;i M-PFXSD8042 80" 42" 46 8.6 1800 1851 M D U) v Sliding Door Mounting Kit m List List Core Premium Description Model W Wt. Cubes Paint Paint z D Prefix sliding door mounting kit M-PFXSDKIT30 30" 4 0.4 261 312 Ln M-PFXSDKIT36 36" 5 0.5 280 331 ° M-PFXSDKIT42 42" 6 0.5 297 348 M-PFXSDKIT48 48" 7 0.5 308 359 i � T D n m Ln -v m D z m V) --I O D M m N m Z HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Trim Color m Ln L' See page 5 O m Ln M X maxon' 193 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 80-87 for the specification guide. Uj All Dimensions are Nominal. U W Hinged Door Kits cc w U- W List Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Core Premium w Paint Paint Q) Prefix Door Panel-NO Top Cap M-PFXDP8042P 80" 42" 155 7.3 2124 2175 w w w U a V) Description Model H W Wt. Cubes List ¢ Door Lever M-DOORLEVER 2 0.1 418 5 V) V) a cr- Ln Ln w U Ln v1 Y K 0 W d W d W re Ln z c w N Ln W HOW TO SPECIFY 1= Select Model Number Select Paint Color Select Door Laminate 0 w See page See page 10 V U x z Z M 94I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix® Panel System See pages 80-87 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. z M Extended Straight Connector rri z Includes n m • Connector post,post cap,2 panel to post connectors and hardware. List List 3 m Core Premium � Description Model H Wt. Cubes m Paint Paint m Extended Straight Connector M-PFXC-35S 35" 1.8 0.5 156 182 M-PFXC-42S 42.5" 2.3 0.5 168 194 M-PFXC-50S 50" 2.7 0.6 179 205 M-PFXC-57S 57.5" 3.2 0.8 192 218 M-PFXC-65S 65" 3.6 0.8 204 230 M-PFXC-72S 72.5" 4 0.9 214 240 M-PFXC-80S 80" 4.5 0.9 228 254 Ln D v D M m 'T' Connector Includes v • Connector post, post cap,2 panel to post connectors and hardware. List list 0 Core Premium Description Model H Wt. Cubes Paint PaintCZ "L"Connector M-PFXC-35L 35" 1.8 0.5 156 182 M-PFXC-42L 42.5" 2.3 0.5 168 194 Ln M M-PFXC-50L 50" 2.7 0.6 179 205 M-PFXC-57L 57.5" 3.2 0.8 192 218 v M-PFXC-65L 65" 3.6 0.8 204 230 D M-PFXC-72L 72.5" 4 0.9 214 240 m M-PFXC-80L 80" 4.5 0.9 228 254 u7 O z D M m M m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY D Select Model Number Select Trim Color N v, Seepage 5 0 m �� Z _ _ I I X X maxon* 195 Prefix' Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 80-87 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U W "T" Connector LU W W Includes Connector post,post cap,3 panel to post connectors and hardware. W 0 List List' w 2E Description Model FHTWt. Cubes Core Premium Ui Paint Paint "T"Connector M-PFXC-35T 35" 1.8 0.5 156 182 M-PFXC-42T 42.5" 2.3 0.5 168 194 M-PFXC-50T 50" 2.7 0.6 179 205 M-PFXC-57T 57.5" 3.2 0.8 192 218 M-PFXC-65T 65" 3.6 0.8 204 230 M-PFXC-72T 72.5" 4 0.9 214 240 M-PFXC-80T 80" 4.5 0.9 228 254 LU Ln H C Q Ln V, "V Connector V) N Includes • Connector post,post cap,4 panel to post connectors and hardware. LO W U List List Core Premium Description Model H Wt. Cubes Paint Paint of O "X"Connector M-PFXC-35X 35" 1.8 0.5 156 182 M-PFXC-42X 42.5" 2.3 0.5 168 194 w M-PFXC-50X 50" 2.7 0.6 179 205 M-PFXC-57X 57.5" 3.2 0.8 192 218 or M-PFXC-65X 65" 3.6 0.8 204 230 a M-PFXC-72X 72.5" 4 0.9 214 240 M-PFXC-80X 80" 4.5 0.9 228 254 w CD Q O F- CD Z Q w W HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Trim Color Ln w See page 5 U LU Q x _ z "'I 96 I maxon, GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix® Panel System See pages 80-87 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. :10 m T Prefix 1200 2-Way Connector m z Includes M • Connector post, 120°post cap,2 panel to post connectors and hardware. List List m Core Premium ::aMDescription Model H Wt. Cubes O Paint Paint Prefix 120'2-Way Connector M-PFXC-35V 35" 6 0.4 166 192 M-PFXC-42V 42.5" 6 0.4 179 205 M-PFXC-50V 50" 6 0.6 194 220 e M-PFXC-57V 57.5" 8 0.7 205 231 M-PFXC-65V 6S" 8 0.7 218 244 M-PFXC-72V 72.5" 9 0.9 231 257 M-PFXC-80V 80" 9 0.9 243 269 D z v D n m Prefix 1200 3-Way Connector Ln Includes • Connector post, 120'post cap,3 panel to post connectors and hardware. N Ln List I list Core Premium O Description Model H Wt. Cubes Paint Paint N Prefix 120°3-Way Connector M-PFXC-35Y 35" 6 0.4 166 192 M-PFXC-42Y 42.5" 6 0.4 179 205 a M-PFXC-50Y 50" 6 0.6 194 220 cn a a M-PFXC-57Y 57.5" 8 0.7 205 231 M-PFXC-65Y 65" 8 0.7 218 244 -D z M-PFXC-72Y 72.5" 9 0.9 231 257 D M-PFXC-80Y 80" 9 0.9 243 269 m Ln O z D M m Ln m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY D n n Select Model Number Select Trim Color N Ln See page 5 0 M Ln "' I �. X X maxon• 197 Prefix" Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 80-87 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U w Straight Connector Kit w w w cc Includes • Connector post,120°post cap,2 panel to post connectors and hardware. w ,LU Description Model Wt. Cubes List 2 w Straight Connector Kit M-PFXC-S 0.0 1 11 w U Panel End Covers Q 2 Includes Ln • End trim,connector, hardware and end trim clips. Ln LO List List V) Description Model H Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Panel End Covers M-PFXC-35E 35" 3 0.5 85 111 U0 LU M-PFXC-42E 42.5" 3 0.5 90 116 LL M-PFXC-50E 50" 4 0.6 94 120 Ln M-PFXC-57E 57.5" 5 0.8 99 125 Y 0 O M-PFXC-65E 65" 5 0.8 104 130 i�: M-PFXC-72E 72.5" 6 0.9 109 135 M-PFXC-80E 80" 6 0.9 115 141 w Q a w o: a w C� Q O t7 Z Q w W HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Trim Color Ln uSee page 5 LU Q Z 0 M 981 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix® Panel System See pages 80-87 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. 7o m n Panel Wall Mount Kit X rn Z Includes m • Wall mount,wall mount top cap, panel to wall mount connector and hardware. List List ^' m Core Premium Description Model H Wt. Cubes paint Paint m Panel Wall Mount Kit M-PFXC-35W 35" 4 0.5 179 205 M-PFXC-42W 42.5" 4 0.5 200 226 M-PFXC-50W 50" 5 0.6 217 243 M-PFXC-57W 57.5" 6 0.8 232 258 M-PFXC-65W 65" 6 0.8 250 276 M-PFXC-72W 72.5" 7 0.9 263 289 M-PFXC-80W 80" 7 0.9 278 304 D z v D n m Panel Wall Strip Kit N Includes D Ln • Wall mount and hardware. List {ist O Core Premium Description Model H Wt. Cubes Paint Paint XX Panel Wall Mount Kit M-PFXC-65YEB 65" 6 0.7 213 239 M-PFXC-65YM 65" 3 0.7 206 232 M Ln v M D z m O D M m N m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY D n Select Model Number Select Trim Color M Ln Ln See page 5 0 m Ln �� z I I �' X ' ' x maxon• 99 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 80-87 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U w Variable Height Connector Kit Uj w w Includes o: • Connector,trim and hardware. List List w Description Model H FWt. Cubes Core Premium w Paint Paint Variable Height M-PFXC-07HL 7.5" 2 0.2 85 ill Connector Kit M-PFXC-15HL 15" 2 0.4 90 116 M-PFXC-22HL 22.5" 3 0.4 104 130 M-PFXC-30HL 30" 3 0.4 125 151 w U H Q Ln v, I. Line Variable Height Finishing Kit V) Includes • Trim cap,trim and hardware. List List V) Y Description Model H Wt. Cubes Core Premium � Paint Paint In-Line Variable Height M-PFXC-07HLS 7.5" 2 0.2 85 ill LU Finishing Kit M-PFXC-15HLS 15" 2 0.4 90 116 a M-PFXC-22HLS 22.5" 3 0.4 105 131 w a M-PFXC-30HLS 30" 3 0.4 125 151 w C7 Q O C7 Ln Ln z Q w W HOW TO SPECIFY z Select Model Number Select Trim Color 0 cn w See page 5 U v Q x LU z I "' 1001 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix' Panel System m Tl Electrical Specification Information m z Ceiling in-feed connects to building m Integrated power pole electrical supply.Ceiling in-feed can accommodates power in-feed also be used at the bottom to feed and communication/data up into panel where permitted by lines. codes.This in-feed can be prewired m before panels are installed.M-EPF3 K in-feed must be installed in panel M before connecting to building wiring. m D v D n m C 70 D V) O 70 70 m D n A v D M m Power blocks snap into base pathway horizontal frame members and accept duplex receptacles. O D Gl m Fiber optic cables m Electrical power can follow 90°turns harness accepts up at the intersection Base pathway power in-feed z to 2 duplex recepta- of panel runs. mounts into any receptacle cles per panel side position in the base pathway (24"W limited to 1) area and is connected to the Single block pass- at base pathway. building electrical supply. D thru harnesses have n Base pathway capacity for one m accommodates duplex receptacle N power and lay-in per panel side. A capacity for data and _ communication. U) Z l7 m X maxon• 1101 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w w Byrne Electrical System Capabilities Cr W LL • Prefix features a Byrne 4-circuit/8-wire modular power distribution NOTE ON THE SPECIFICATION AND INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS system.The standard power configuration provides three utility circuits,which share a common Neutral and Ground,plus an isolated/ The Maxon 4-Circuit/8-Wire power system conforms to National Electrical dedicated fourth circuit,with an independent Neutral and Ground. Code requirements.However,some variations may exist in the local zw As an option,the system can also provide 2 utility circuits+2 isolated authority of electrical code standards.The specifier or user is responsible circuits. for confirming code standard compliance in these locations before w The power distribution system provides access to multiple electrical specification and ordering.The availability of power components and outlets and circuits within the same panel. systems does not constitute local code approved by Maxon Furniture Inc. • The standard power distribution through the base-level raceway can branch electrical service up to the work surface level as needed. All electrical installation work on Maxon power systems should be done Each electrical circuit is rated 120volts/20amp.Up to four 20 Amp under the supervision of a licensed electrician or approved electrical circuits may be accessed from a 3-phase power source,and up to three contractor. circuits may be used with a single-phase source. The electrical system is UL LISTED. Electrical Systems Electrical In-Feeds Prefix Electrical Systems Power in-feed cables deliver power from building to panel's electrical system. Prefix offers a choice of two electrical systems: In-feed cables are housed in conduit to separate electrical system from Four-circuit,3+1 communications and data lines. < Four-circuit,2+2 Select quantity of base or ceiling in-feed cables depending on Both systems utilize an 8-wire electrical system,rated at 20 amps per individual power requirements. circuit(15 amps Canadian). Base Pathway Power In-feed • Prefix panels and electrical components are UL Listed.Electrical cn M-EPF2-(72"Long)For use in all Maxon Panel cn components are also CSA certified. Q Systems to connect system from a building Installation and use of the electrical system,the number of receptacles junction box.It also enters into a panel from the N used on a given circuit,and connections to the building power supply right or left(it pivots)and must mount in to an should be in compliance with all local and national electrical codes. M-EH model number(Electrical Wiring Harness) or an M-EPS model number(Single Block). Caution:Electrical equipment cords or extension cords Sealti ht base pathway g p y power in-feed mounts Q MUST NOT BE ROUTED through panels. into any receptacle position in the base pathway area. A heavy rubber sheathing shields conduit,allowing in-feed to be N exposed. o Hardwire Junction Box-New York Code(page 111) Ceiling Power In-feed • Hardwire'(New York Code) M-EPF3-(168"Long)For use in junction box(model M-EPFX)is p all Maxon Panel Systems.M-EPF3 used when')'ocal electrical codes connects to building junction box and require hardwire entry. poles.Can be used with desk height d For use in panels 30"W to 72"W. power applications for a 12'ceiling. LU When used in 30"W and 36"W panels,power can be routed Ceiling power in-feed connects to a prewired electrical harness in the ° base pathway, g Only in one direction. p y,traverses through an adjacent panel,and terminates in When used in 42"and wider panels,an electrical pass-thru the junction box at the top of the integrated power pole. or power harness the same width as the panel can be used to Use integrated power pole model M-PFXC-78P. LL, route power back in the opposite'direction Most codes allow flex conduit to be exposed after installation.Verify <7 code requirements before ordering for exposed application. < Unit must connect to a power or pass-thru harness 0 positioned.in the base pathway area of an adjacent panel. Integrated Power/Communication Pole Integrated power pole accommodates Hardwire Chicago Code(page 111) ceiling power in-feed and communication/ • Wiring Harnesses and snap connectors are not allowed in data lines. Chicago-base pathways must be comprised of all metallic Provide capacity for routing power z components. in-feed and cables to the base pathway of F= • The base pathway junction box(model M-ECH1)clips directly a panel. • Conduit of the in-feed cable serves as the LU into receptacle locations for single sided applications. division of electrical and communications • Customer must furnish conduit,wiring,and designer-type cabling. receptacles for the base pathway.` Installs into 421/2-65"H or 15"H stacking 90°, W Power entry can be routed from the ceiling,via Prefix power "T",and"X"connections. it pole,or from the floor into a junction box(model M-ECH1).; Integrated power pole includes trim kit. 0 Single cavity with removable cover. V, • junction box can be positioned at any duplex receptacle w location. Field-cut to desired length. u Cannot be used in back to back applications. Outside Dimension:2"square. Q When using a ceiling power in-feed,consider that the in-feed must connect into an electrical harness located in an adjacent panel. To power the prewired electrical system,from a ceiling power source,a ceiling in-feed cable,M-EFP3 must be purchased separately. w For applications requiring longer integrated power poles,a 156"H Z Z model is available. 1021 Maxon, GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix® Panel System m _n m To Order: 70 1. Determine which electrical system you 2.Determine location,quantity,and circuit * Select Double Block Harness(M-EHXX), z will use after consulting your electrician of duplexes. Single Block Harness(M EPSXX),and and computer support personnel: 3.Determine the appropriate choice and Pass-Thru Harness(M-EPXX)with the last ^' • The four-circuit system use of isolated,isolated/dedicated. two digits corresponding with the panel width into which the component i (4-Hot/2-Neutral/2-Ground) 4.Specify appropriate power harnesses* s to be m — 3+1 option and pass-thru cables.* positioned. — 2+2 option 5. Determine the location,quantity,and The initial cable length can be stretched z type of power in-feed needed. approximately 3"to transverse"T","X", m "L",and extended straight connectors. Electrical System Options The four-circuit,eight-wire electrical system is widely specified and trusted by hundreds of thousands of end-users.This proven system delivers four circuits for every power in-feed in either a 3+1 or 2+2 configuration.The isolated/dedicated circuits are ideal for sensitive computing equipment,while the common circuits are suitable for faxes,copiers,task lights and other peripherals.Both the 3+1 and 2+2 systems use the same prewired components, making it easy to adjust as electrical needs change. D Four-circuit,3+1 Receptacle Option 1 2 3 4 D n m 5,1111,11 The 3+1 option is the electrical standard used on Maxon a systems for many years in most installations.This wiring t„ option provides three utility circuits plus an isolated/ dedicated circuit for more sensitive equipment.Circuit 2(one D 1 4 of the 3 common circuits sharing a neutral wire)cannot be Ln Hot wire Hot Wire used with single-phase building electrical supply. 2 0 CIRCUIT4 � Hot Wire ISOLATED/ DUPLEX RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 2 CIRCUIT 3 DEDICATED C= 3 � o e D Hot Wire D o D o m 0— L-0 M GRAY NEUTRAL-2B12GA WHITE ONEUTRAL-110GA Neutral 1 NBUtral 2GRN/YLW I�ISOLATED12GAGRN/BARE 0 GROUND12 GA 12 CA M PINK HOT-4 1 BLUE HOT-3 12 GA D O RED QQ HOT-2 12 GA :;V Common Ground Isolated Ground BLACK m HOT-1 12GA m Four-circuit,2+2 Receptacle Option N i 0 1 2 3 4 D Gl Q m The 2+2 option is a wiring option that provides two utility circuits and two isolated circuits for more extensive computer usage applications. m 3 z z Hot Wire Hot Wire DUPLEX RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT 3 CIRCUIT 4 G) CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 2 ISOLATED ISOLATED 2 4 0 0 Hot Wire Hot Wire o eV V V n GRAY NEUTRAL-2 12 GA m WHITE IR NEUTRAL-1 10GA � Neutral 1 Neutral 2 GRN/YLW I�ISOLATED 12 GA 0 GRN/BARE 0 GROUND 12 GA 0 PINK IM HOT-4 12 GA m BLUE HOT-3 12 GA Lo RED HOT-2 12 GA Common Ground Isolated Ground BACK ® HOT-1 2 GA Z M m X maxon• 1103 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w V z Prefix System Receptacle Usage Notes: U_ Two 8-wire,20 amp(15 amp Canadian electrical systems are offered Maxon Model Numbers are LU printed on the UL labels,and ElectricalSystem Circuitry Receptacle Capacity components are color-coded to Common Common Common Iso/Dedicated provide visual identification of Ly 3+1 circuit-1 Circuit-2(l) circuit-3 Circuit-4 the different components. 0 Four-circuit M-ED1 M-ED2 M-ED3 M-ED4 Four-circuit components have "' 4-Hot/2-Neutral/2-Ground black plastic parts. 2 Common Common Isolated Isolated "' 2+2 Circuit-1 circuit-2 Circuit-3 circuit-4 Duplex Receptacles M-EDl I M-ED2 I M-ED3D M-ED4 (1)Circuit 2(one of the 3 common circuits sharing a neutral wire)cannot be used with a single-phase D o D o building electrical supply. o 0 15 amp Receptacle u Typical power usage by the most commonly specified office equipment. ,< EQUIPMENT AMPS EQUIPMENT AMPS EQUIPMENT AMPS to 1-- Computers Copiers Fax Machines Cr Q Personal Compute.............................3 Desktop Copier...............................15 Inklet Fax............................less than 1 2 Notebook Computer..........................3 Console Copier ...............................20 Plain Paper Fax..................................8 Monitors Copier/Duplicator............................30 Task Lights 13"Color Monitor.............................2 Printers 30"T5 Fluorescent...............0.12/bulb N 17"Color Monitor.............................3 InkJet..................................less than 1 60"TS Fluorescent...............0.24/bulb Ln 21"Color Monitor.............................4 Personal Laser or LED........................8 Q 15"Plasma Monitor.......................0.5 Workgroup Laser or LED..................15 20"Plasma Monitor..........................1 Source:Industry Analysis,Inc.,Rochester,NY N V) Lu V V) ]C O w aQ. w a w Q O H C7 Z Q w w O to w V V Q X w 0 Z 1041 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix® Panel System A m T m Electrical Harnesses m Electrical power harnesses are Electrical Double Block Harness z used to distribute power in Prefix Electrical Double Block Harnesses are used to distribute power M panels.Harness power blocks in panels. snap directly onto brackets in Prefix electrical can only be located at base pathway. rn base pathway.Power blocks on Specify harness length to match panel width. E: electrical power harness and 24"power harness accepts one receptacle on each side of thern pass-thru harness accept duplex harness,all other length power harnesses have power blocks to receptacles. accept four duplex receptacles(two on each side of panel). M • Connectors at both ends of power harnesses allow power distri- bution in either direction. • Harness power blocks snap directly onto brackets in base pathway. Electrical Double Block Harness Single Block Pass-Thru Harness • Single Block Pass-Thru Harness with power block have capacity to handle one duplex receptacle on each side of the panel when exposed. Specify harness length to match panel width or combined panel D I � widths. Single Block Pass-Thru Harness Single Block Pass-Thru harnesses accept one duplex receptacle D per panel side. n • m Note:"T"intersections require a minimum of one power harness and"X"intersections requires a minimum of two power harnesses. c Electrical Pass-Thru Harness All electrical Double Block Harnesses and Single Block Pass-Thru z Harnesses with power block will stretch 31/2",allowing them N ' to span"T","X","A"intersections,and"S"extended straight L" All electrical Double Block and Single Block Harnesses will stretch 3x/a",all them to span"T",'"X", connections. "320°"intersections,and"S"extended straight connections.' Pass Thrus are directional. 0 0 Electrical Pass-Thru HarnessLn Note;"T"'inter section s require a minimum.of one powerhar- Specify harness length to match panel width or combined panel ness and"X"intersections requires a minimum of two power widths. v harnesses. Electrical Pass-Thru Harnesses distribute power through any M panel(s)where receptacles are not required.Cable length " cannot be stretched. Allows you to take power through a panel raceway. rM Requires I +of, ! Duplex outlets cannot be used with M-EP Pass-Thru wiring. IPass-Thru runs from the receptacle location through the D minimum of z one power connection to next panels receptacle location. `� harness. > m Use of a ceiling.in-feed at this location requires an additional power harness. to m Z G) D n n m N O z m V) Z M m x maxon• 1105 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w U z w Receptacles Power/Data Modules—Clamp On Worksurface LL Must be installed at time of initial worksurface L _ installation if installing between a worksurface , and panel. ,� °• 6'Power cord.UL Listed. o The USB hub allows simultaneous powering of w Duplex Receptacle 2 USB-A devices.The USB hub is a charger only, e no ability to connect to a PC.The charging capacity w Receptacle Color Recommended to Coordinate with Paint Color is limited and may not charge all devices. M-PWRMOD2WC w Paint Color Receptacle Color ' Color finishes available:Storm(STRM)and Snow(SNW). Black—MPBL.................................................................Black— E4 Fits on any worksurface with a 4"overhang. Flint— MP02....................................................................Flint—E9 Loft— MP713.....................................................................Loft— EV Power/Data Modules— Under Worksurface Greige— MPT5............................................................Muslin— EU 6'Power cord.UL Listed. Brownstone—MP7D...........................................Brownstone— EY Color finishes available:Storm(STRM)and Muslin— MPT3............................................................Muslin— EU Snow(SNW). ° °o r that has a S"x 5"sq uare quae ° Gunmetal— MPR3...............................................Brownstone— EY Works with any 0 ° Champagne— MPRS...................................................Muslin—EU clearance. U Platinum— MPPL.......................................................Titanium—TI M-PWRMOD3UWM 6- White—MPWT............................................Designer White— DW Q Duplex Receptacles Available with 3 integrated circuits 1,2,or 3(M-ED1,M-ED2, Data Components M-ED3)and 1 isolated circuit 4(M-ED4)or 2 integrated circuits 1 and 2(M-ED1,M-ED2)and 2 isolated circuits 3 and 4(M-ED3D, LnM-ED4). O� M-FNR.145 Each duplex outlet receptacle is rated at 15 amps. r� ®�Each circuit has a 20 amp maximum capacity(depending upon N building wiring). M-FP3RJ45 Power-In Wiring(M-EPF2)plugs into Duplex Wiring Harness(M-EH or M-EPS)in place of a Duplex Outlet Receptacle. Ln • Duplex Outlets may be added at any time by removing the outlet Q cover plate and plugging the Duplex Outlet Receptacle into the Double or Single block harness. N Isolated circuits are designated with an orange triangle. voice/Data Receptacles Duplex receptacles snap into power blocks of Double Block and ° 0 Single Block harnesses. M-suRJ456S • Each receptacle is labeled to indicate which circuit it will be connected to:1,2,3,or 4. Data Faceplates L Duplexes support either 3+1 and 2+2 electrical in-feed. Prefix not only provides space for large volumes of voice and data a cables,it also offers several means of mounting commercially Power/Data Modules—Clamp On Worksurface available voice and data components. 6'Power cord.UL Listed. Commercially available modular data faceplates can be mounted in • Includes adapters to allow use of commercially vacant base receptacle openings. available data terminals or blanks to fill unused oo P Due to panel depth,back-to-back data modules should not be used LU openings.Many of the AMP,AT&T,Krone,Leviton 0o at the base on Prefix. and most commercial data terminals can be used. Faceplates and Jacks available in black only. Color finish available:Loft. o Fits on any worksurface with a 4"overhang. M-COMDOME2 Data Jacks Ln AMP RJ45 CAT 5E Jack • Black only • Toolless O AMP RJ45 CAT 6 Jack z Black only Q Requires Tool w V) w W O Ln w U U Q X w 0 Z 1061 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix® Panel System m T7 Base Pathway Receptacle Locations Circuit Usage m Strategy 1 Strategy 2 z 1o�n 101A•- . Knockout Dimension rn 2.700"W x 1.377"H Circuits to Equipment Circuits to Workstations z rn 1 Assign specific uses for each Assign specific workstations of the circuits: to each of the three avail m o For example,in a able circuits.Use circuit 4 for K L ao four-circuit system: power-sensitive electronic z Circuit 1—Calculators, equipment. m m r710s/.= f 10%h 1 fans,etc. Circuit 2—Task lights 36- 1° 1°��, (could be wired to wall r— switch) Circuit 3—CRT or flat 42' screen monitors Circuit 4—CPUs �- 48" Placement of pedestals and lateral files may render some duplex L, r-10%" 1 locations inaccessible.Pedestal placement may also affect com- patibility with pull-up receptacles. rri Lay-in Cable Capacity Ln Prefix ;Prefix The base pathway allows continuous voice and data lines to run through and between panels without interruption. 00 00 Lay-in is provided for environments where systems furniture or o 0 p cabling are subject to frequent change. Ln • Prefix base pathway accepts up to 77 voice/data cables(.25" dia.)(6.27 sq.in.)at 60%fill. D • When electrical system shares base pathway,the cable capacity ,� zs cables in Prefix is reduced to 25 cables(2.03 sq.in.). 77 cables Ln Cable capacity of the Prefix integrated power pole is 3.3 sq.in. for a total capacity of 34 cables of.25"diameter. z Prefix2p Cables can enter/exit panel through underside of base pathway rri on frames. z m 0000 000 Note:Cable quantities listed are at 60%fill ratio. 00� 2' cn 000 0 34cables 0 000 D .25 dia Model M-PFXD-78P rn 0 cn 0 0 D m 0 —I Z ln m N N O m Ln Z m X maxon• 1107 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w U W Cable and Wire Management LL Cable Management Tray LU Attaches under the worksurface to contain cables. Metal tray shelf is 4"deep.Can hold electrical power strip and/or surge protector. • 24"and 36"lengths,use multiple units for larger worksurfaces. w Cable Management Tray Attachment hardware included,specify paint color. C7 o: w Uj w Lighting Task Lighting • Light Available in Black finish only. Mount under Overhead Storage Cabinet or Shelf. 0;�� For Chicago Version with Fuse Plug,order FP Option. 6'Cord. • Includes Florescent light bulb and hanger bars. LU Universal Overhead Task Lighting ¢ Light Available in Black finish only. g y. Mount under Overhead Storage Cabinet or Shelf. For Chicago Version with Fuse Plug,order FP Option. < j Excluded from GSA. Ln Includes Florescent light bulb,mounting bars,9'Cord and Four cord clips. • Recessed task lights are black with a 9'long black cord that is attached to the right rear corner of the fixture.(Color does not need to be specified.) Ln Bulbs are included. • RECOMMENDATION:Provide a separate circuit for task lights to ensure proper,long-term operation. Includes 4 cord retainer clips. Ln • Shorter width models can be used on wider overheads,shelves and hutches. • All models are equipped with electronic ballast for longer bulb life and cooler operating temperature. LU • On/Off switch provides individual control of tasklight within the workstation. W U Q W Y LJ Q d W a. W Q V) z Q W N Ln W O Ul Ln W U U Q X W z 1081 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix° Panel System See pages 101-108 for the specification guide. m m m Byrne Power-In Wiring m z Description Model Wt. List Power In-Feed through Side Receptacle(72") M-EPF2 0.5 343 71 Power In-Feed through End or Power Pole(Ceiling-168") M-EPF3 0.5 343 K M m M / m ®r_� C_ � Io Byrne Electrical Double Block Harness D Includes D • Build-in Jumper. ,�, Description Model W Wt. List N Single Block Duplex Harness 24W M-EH24 24" 2 231 D Double Block Duplex Harness 30W M-EH30 30" 2 257 cn M-EH36 36" 3 283 M-EH42 42" 3 297 M-EH48 48" 3 307 O M-EH60 60" 4 328 M-EH72 72" 4 354 C: -M NOTE:Electrical harnesses are intended for use with Maxon systems furniture and rr) are approved under GSA SIN 711-1.When purchased separately and used without N Maxon systems furniture,those electrical harnesses are considered Open Market. v M m v D M m O z D m V) m Z n HOW TO SPECIFY n M Select Model Number Ln (n O Lo en Ln — � m M I I M X maxon• 1109 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 101-108 for the specification guide. w U W Byrne Electrical Pass-Thru Harness LU W L.L W Description Model Wt. List Pass-Thru Harness M-EP24 1.2 161 "' M-EP30 1.5 178 w M-EP 186 M-EP42 42 2 2 19393 w i M-EP48 2.3 215 M-EP60 2.8 231 M-EP72 4 258 Byrne Electrical Pass-Thru Harness a Description Q Model Wt. List Ln Single-Block Pass-Thru Harness M-EPS24 1.5 186 M-EPS30 1.8 193 Ln M-EPS36 2 215 M-EPS42 2.3 225 Z M-EP548 2.6 244 i M-EPS60 3.1 271 M-EPS72 4 303 w V U D Ln Y O Byrne Electric Duplex Outlet Receptacle w ¢ Description Model Wt. Cubes List a Cr Byrne Electric Duplex Outlet Circuit M-ED1 1 0.1 54 a lu M-ED2 1 0.1 54 M-ED3 1 0.1 54 w M-ED3D 1 0.1 54 Q M-ED4 1 0.1 54 O Ln C7 Ln Z Q w w HOW TO SPECIFY cc Select Model Number Select Paint Color O Ln w See page 5 v U x w � M - Z 1101 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix" Panel System See pages 101-108 for the specification guide. A m T1 Telecommunication Receptacles m z n Description Model Snap In Jack R45 Cat 6 Wt. List :] M 3-Port Faceplate(Shown) M-FP3RJ45 0.1 28 4-Port Faceplate M FP4RJ45 0.1 28 z m m r� Snap In Jack R45 Cat 5E(Shown) M-SIJRJ45 0.1 53 M-SIJRJ456S 0.1 157 ® D ® N D n m Byrne Chicago Outlet Box Ln Description Model Wt. List D Chicago Outlet Box-Base Raceway M-ECH1 0.1 131 O C D n m -0 z Byrne New York Junction Box D M m Description Model Wt. List Power In-Feed NY Junction Box M-EPFX .5 318 O a D m Ln m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln M Ln See page 5 0 M Ln Z � IVI X maxonr 1111 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 101-108 for the specification guide. w U W Prefix Integrated Power Pole Cr w W Includes Power Pole and trim. w O List List w wDescription Model H Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Prefix Integrated Power Pole-78"H (For 42.5"H panels and greater) M-PFXC-78P 78" 14 0.5 470 496 Prefix Integrated Power Pole-156"H M-PFXC-156P 156" 28 1.4 809 835 w U a N i F— a Electrical Accessories Description Model Wt. Cubes List z N 2 Receptacles 1 USB Under Worksurface MT(Shown) M-PWRMOD2UWM 2.3 0.2 621 3 Receptacles Under Worksurface Mt M-PWRMOD3UWM 2.3 0.2 430 v) nr sn LU U __.. .:+ Y Available in Storm(STRM)or Snow(SNW)paint only O 2 Receptacles 2 Data Accessory M-COMDOME2 2.5 0.2 451 LU �ja a w � Available in Loft paint only 2 Receptacles 1 USB M-PWRMOD2WC 2.3 0.2 621 LU 3 Receptacles(Shown) M-PWRMOD3WC 2.3 0.2 430 Q — o: Available in Storm(STRM)or Snow(SNW)paint only O Ln Z Q w w HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Paint Color O vSee page 5 U a x �� Z I "' I I �. 1121 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix® Panel System Center divider in sliding door models allows for either half to be locked. Finish options include Core and Premium paint. 70 m -n m A m Z r" m m Available in sliding door, K Overhead storage flipper door and hinged door, mz Flipper door slides over top G) cabinets can be of cabinet. r^ positioned vertically in 1"increments. 1S"design allows maximum storage while minimizing space. Locking clip N feature secures storage cabinets to panels. z Core removable locks allow lateral files,center D drawers,pedestals,and overhead cabinets to be keyed n alike. m Backstop on assembled models � keeps books,binders,and supplies v from coming in contact with tile D fabric. v Straight low profile end Storage shelves can be positioned vertically panels. O in 1"increments. N C D n v M D Locking clip M feature secures storage shelves to panels. Un O Assembled Overhead Storage Cabinet Assembled Shelf D Product Dimensions Product Dimensions G1 Width:24",30",36",42",48",60",and 72" Width:24",30",36",42",48",60",and 72" rn Inside Width:Flipper or 24"-36"W Hinged door—%"less than width Depth:127/e" 42"-48"W Hinged or Sliding door—two compartments Height:41/8" that are half of%"less than width Un m Depth:141/4" RTA Shelf > Inside Depth:127/s" Product Dimensions Z Height:15" Width:24",30",36",42",48",60",and 72" Inside Height:121/4' Depth:111/z" Height:51/8" RTA Overhead Storage Cabinet Product Dimensions N Width:24",30",36",42",48",60",and 72" O Inside Width:Flipper or 24"-36"W Hinged door—1/s"less than width a! m 42"-48"W Hinged or Sliding door—two compartments �^ that are half of 1/8"less than width Depth:12" Inside Depth:11s/s" z Height:15" Inside Height:121/4" x maxon• 1113 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 w 9 Specification Guidelines wIn a panel run,only two overhead storage cabinets or open storage shelves are recommended per panel side. • Overhead storage cabinets and open storage shelves can be mounted on Prefix structural and stacking panels to a maximum w height of 80"H. wBase panel frames with stacking frames that have an overall height of 571/2"will not accept overhead storage cabinets if LU spanning between stacker and base panel. Immediate adjacent panels must be equal height to panels with overhead storage cabinets on them. When overhead storage units are suspended from stacking frames,the following guidelines should be adhered to: Stacking panels can be added to any base panel up to 80"H. Prefix Stacking frames should be added to all the parent run panels, w and to each return-panel run.Stacking panels added to return Q panel must match the parent run configuration. A maximum of two overhead storage units should be Qsuspended from each side of stacking frames on any given panel. N Ln Prefix_ 65"+15" M Ln w V Q w N 291/2" Y O w d No limitation to the number of units on structural frames when a run is supported with return panels on each side of storage shelves or overhead storage cabinets. w C7 cc cc O V) 00 (D Z Q w "' Assembled metal overhead cabinets can be mounted on a panel equal to or up to 18"narrower than cabinet. ,„ One side of overhead must be held on-module. w iY O Ln w v v Q RTA overhead and RTA shelf width must correspond with width of panel(s). • It is possible to span two panels when combined panel width x equals cabinet or shelf width. LU z 1141 maxon• GSA SIN 711 1 EXHIBIT B Prefix® Panel System M m Overheads, Shelves, and Hutches Upmount Kits for Assembled Overhead Cabinets • For use on base panels only. 1 Assembled Overhead Storage Cabinet Consists of two upmount brackets,full back r) • �' Overhead Cabinets have exposed back with panel,and required installation hardware. Allows mounting of an assembled overhead backsplash. • Ball bearing Overhead Door slides.Door cabinet up to 15"above height of panel. m recedes over top of Overhead Cabinet. Specify upmount kits with 15"H,35"H, 1: rn • 50"H,or 65"H Prefix panels.Upmount kits Can be upmounted on base panel only. • Steel cabinet with backstop. will not work with 421/2"panels. ,M,., • Available with sliding, hinged,or flipper Brackets require a clearance of 61/2"below Upmount Kit for Sliding Door Overhead bottom of overhead cabinet. Overhead Cabinets door(s). • Sliding door overhead has(1)door. Width must correspond with width of panel • Easy-Assist flipper door optional— frame or 2 panel frames joined directly inline. requires minimal assistance in opening and Full back panel adds 1/2"to depth of overhead case. closing. Full back panel only used when upmounting cabinet. • Easy-Assist flipper door not available on Cannot be used with RTA models. 60"W or 72"W cabinets—specify 2-30"W Ready to Assemble(RTA) Flipper Door Overhead cabinets or 2-36"W cabinets. • Overhead Cabinets have exposed back. K Self-engaging safety latch to secure cabinet Flipper Door Overhead Does not come preassembled. > to panel. Can not be mounted off modular or i • Width can correspond with width of panel,or two panels joined with an inline upmounted. r) connector kit. Steel cabinet with open back. m • 60"W and 72"W flipper door cabinets have , 60"W and 72"W cabinets have 2 doors two doors with two independent locks. with independent locks. • 24" 36"W hinged door cabinets have 1 lock Accommodates recessed task lighting— c ordered separately. Ready to Assemble(RTA) and 2 arched pulls,42"-48"W have 2 locks Flipper Door overhead D and 4 arched pulls. Hinged Door overhead Random keying,for locking pp L" • Ln Accommodates recessed task lighting specifications see page 119. (specified separately). Ready to Assemble(RTA)Shelf ::E • 15'H cabinets can also be mounted on a panel equal to or up to Metal shelf with locking clips. 0 18"narrower than cabinet. Accommodates recessed task lighting— N • Sliding Door Overhead has a single door with built-in pull. � • Sliding,Hinged,and Flipper Door Overhead Weight Limits: ordered separately. 24"W................59 lbs. 42"W................105 lbs. Ready to Assemble m 30"W................74 lbs. 48"W................121 lbs. (RTA)Shelf vi 36"W................90 lbs. 60"W................152 lbs. • Mounting an overhead on frames that have an overall height of 571/2"H is not recommended.Slot modularity in relation to v adjacent panels may be compromised. D z m Assembled Open Shelf • Overhead Shelves have exposed back with backsplash. cn • Metal shelf with back stop. O • Locking clips(2)standard. D Open Shelf • Will accommodate recessed task lighting � m (ordered separately). • Weight Limits: 24"W................61 lbs. 42"W................108 lbs. 30"W................77 lbs. 48"W................124 lbs. m 36"W................93 lbs. 60"W................155 lbs. —Di • Mounting an open shelf on Prefix frames cannot span base z panel frame and stack-on frame—slot modularity is not maintained. D n n m Ln Ln m Z rn m x maxon• 1115 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 113-115 for the specification guide. w All Actual Dimensions are listed on page 113. U w Overhead Cabinets with Flipper Door LU w Includes o: • Overhead cabinets. Core removable locks. LU Two keys. Attaching brackets. w w ListF- List, Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Flipper Painted Door-Panel Mount M-USOH1524F 15" 14.25" 24" 35 3.6 614 665 M-USOH153OF 15" 14.25" 30" 38 4.4 638 689 M-USOH1536F 15" 14.25" 36" 41 5.3 676 727 M-USOH1542F 15" 14.25" 42" 46 6.1 725 776 w M-USOH1548F 15" 14.25" 48" 52 6.9 790 841 U i M-USOH156OF 15" 14.25" 60" 62 8.6 1065 1116 H � M-USOH1572F 15" 14.25" 72" 72 15.1 1221 1272 Q Ln N Flipper Easy Assist Painted Panel Mount M-USOH1524FE 15" 14.25" 24" 35 3.6 952 1003 N M-USOH1530FE 15" 14.25" 30" 38 4.4 999 1050 a i M-USOH1536FE 15" 14.25" 36" 41 5.3 1052 1103 o: M-USOH1542FE 15" 14.25" 42" 46 6.1 1088 1139 M-USOH1548FE 15" 14.25" 48" 52 6.9 1146 1197 w U Q Ln Flipper Painted Door-Wall Mount M-UWMSOH1524F 15" 14.25" 24" 35 3.6 614 665 Y M-UWMSOH1530F 15" 14.25" 30" 38 4.4 638 689 0 M-UWMSOH1536F 15" 14.25" 36' 41 5.3 676 727 M-UWMSOH1542F 15" 14.25" 42" 46 6.1 725 776 M-UWMSOH1548F 15" 14.25" 48" 52 6.9 790 841 w M-UWMSOH156OF 15" 14.25" 60" 62 8.6 1065 1116 a w o: o_ w l7 Q O 1— (D Z Q w V) W HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Paint Color uSee page 5 U a Ui x (� z ( '"'I �� 1161 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix" Panel System See pages 113-115 for the specification guide. 7 All Actual Dimensions are listed on page 113. M M Ready-to-Assemble Overhead Cabinet z n m includes • Overhead cabinets. m • Core removable locks. K • Two keys. 70 • Assembly hardware. m List List Core Premium Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Paint Paint Panel Mount Ready-to-Assemble Overhead M-USOC24R 15" 12" 24" 21 1.6 376 427 Cabinet with Flipper Door M-USOC30R 15" 12" 30" 24 1.6 392 443 M-USOC36R 15" 12" 36" 27 1.6 415 466 M-USOC42R 15" 12" 42" 30 1.8 444 495 L, K ' M-USOC48R 15" 12" 48" 33 2.1 486 537 D i M-USOC60R 15" 12" 60" 42 2.5 654 705 Ln D M-USOC72R 15" 12" 72" 49 3 822 873 n m L" C Ln Ln O Ln C mD n m to -D A m D z m -i O z D M m M m z HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Paint Color N V) See page 5 � m Ln Z X maxon• 1117 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 113-115 for the specification guide. w All Actual Dimensions are listed on page 113. u w Overhead Cabinets with Hinged Door W w W includes Overhead cabinets. Core removable locks. LU Two keys. Attaching brackets. w w List list Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Panel Mount Hinged Painted Door M-USOH1524H 15" 14.25" 24" 35 3.6 1194 1245 i M-USOH1530H 15" 14.25" 30" 38 4.4 1240 1291 M-USOH1536H 15" 14.25" 36" 41 5.3 1293 1344 M-USOH1542H 15" 14.25" 42" 46 6.1 1328 1379 LU - M-USOH1548H 15" 14.25" 48" 52 6.9 1383 1434 U d F- H CC cn Overhead Cabinets with Steel Sliding Door Includes Ln Overhead cabinets. Q Attaching brackets. LL Two keys. Ln Y >O List List 7 Description Model F H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premum i Paint Paint LU Panel Mount Steel Sliding Door M-USOH1524S 15" 14.25" 24" 35 3.6 741 792 a w M-USOH1530S 15" 14.25" 30" 38 4.4 769 820 a M-USOH1536S 15" 14.25" 36" 41 5.3 804 855 M-USOH1542S 15" 14.25" 42" 46 6.1 853 904 M-USOH1548S 15" 14.25" 48" 52 6.9 911 962 w7 C M-USOH1560S 15" 14.25" 60" 62 8.6 1279 1330 Q O Ln C7 Z Q w W HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Paint Color vSee page 5 v Q x � z I "' I I� 1181 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix Panel System See pages 113-115 for the specification guide. z m -n Upmount Kits for Overheads m z n Includes rn • Two upmount brackets. • Full back panel. m • Required installation hardware. K -- m List 'Is' m Core Premium Description Model W Wt. Cubes Paint Paint Up Mounted Overhead Kits M-USUM24 24" 7 0.3 263 314 M-USUM30 30" 8 0.3 279 330 M-USUM36 36" 10 0.4 298 349 M-USUM42 42" 11 0.4 310 361 M-USUM48 48" 12 0.5 321 372 M-USUM60 60" 16 0.6 358 409 D v D n m Ln Overhead Cabinet Locks D Includes • Each Lock Core Kit includes one core and core removal tool,two keys and instructions. O Description Model Wt. Cubes List CZ Lock Core Kit M-LC 1 0.1 39 Master Key(1) M-MK 1 0.1 25 N v m D z m -i O z D rn m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY r-) Select Model Number Select Paint Color or Lock Number N See page 5 m Ln z 0 M m x maxon• 1119 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See pages 113-115 for the specification guide. w All Actual Dimensions are listed on page 113. U W Overhead Shelves CC LL Includes w Straight Shelf with Steel End Panels. LU l7 List List "' Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium -T w Paint Paint Universal Open Straight Shelf M-UOSS24 4.625" 12.875" 24" 11 1 310 350 M-UOSS30 4.625" 12.875" 30" 13 1.2 321 361 M-UOSS36 4.625" 12.875" 36" 14 1.3 328 368 M-UOSS42 4.625" 12.875" 42" 17 1.5 333 373 M-UOSS48 4.625" 12.875" 48" 19 1.6 338 378 M-UOSS60 4.625" 12.875" 60" 23 2 358 398 M-UOSS72 4.625" 12.875" 72" 23 3.6 440 480 w U L Ready-to-Assemble (RTA) Overhead Shelf a Includes L/I Straight Shelf with Steel End Panels. L, List List Ln as Core Premium Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes paint Paint `" Panel Mount RTA Overhead Shelf M-USSC24R 5.625" 11.37" 24" 10 1.9 188 239 M-USSC30R 1*621" 11,37" 30" 11 1.9 196 247 v M-USSC36R 5.625" 11.37" 36" 12 1.9 211 262 Q J M-USSC42R 5.625" 11.37" 42" 13 2.1 234 285 � Y M-USSC48R 5.625" 11.37" 48" 14 2.4 257 308 ` M-USSC60R 5.625" 11.37" 60" 16 3 288 339 O 3: M-USSC72R 5.625" 11.37" 72" 18 3.5 316 367 Q Shelf Organizer Includes n, • Vertically divides and aligns books,magazines and folders. List List_ w Q Core Premium < Description Model Wt. Cubes O Paint Paint V) Shelf Organizer M-PS014 6 0.4 79 86 Z Q w W HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Paint Color w See page 5 U c.� a x LU Z I M 1201 maxon, GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix® Panel System M m M m Accessories Specifications M Maxon's tool rail works in conjunction with a variety of accesso- Small Paper Clip Tray z ries.Modular accessories free up worksurface space and provide Holds paper clips and other small objects. m orderly storage that is well within reach.Units can be arranged and rearranged to respond to changing workflow.The work tools that attach to the tool rail are: Personal Shelf • Letter Tray Small Paper Clip Tray Holds office supplies and personal • File Pocket Personal Shelf effects. rn • Binder Bin Diagonal Tray • Tool Box Paper Clip Coat hooks, marker boards and center drawers round out the Diagonal Tray organization offering. Diagonal trays are non-handed. • Provides 3 fully divided slots for organizing files. • Keeps papers from"bowing"at bottom. Tool rail,shown above,is height-adjustable in 1"increments using slots in panels.Tool paper Clip rail shown with two tool boxes,two letter trays and file pocket.File pocket and binder • Binds project papers together. 9Nq Ln bins extend below a tool rail.Diagonal tray and contents extend above a tool rail. P J P P g Mounts to tool rail or tool tile. n Tool Rails and Work Tools M • The rails are designed for use on panels only. • Accessories can be used only on the Universal Accessory Rail. Coat Hook M-PMC6 "' • Sturdy aluminum extrusion with steel support construction. • Powder coated for durable finish. • Hangs directly into slotted Emerge or Prefix panel frame. v Use for coat or bag. • Cannot be used to support monitor arms. Package of six.Available in black only. • Suggested weight capacity not to exceed 80 lbs. • Consideration needs to be given to height of tools and location of worksurfaces. o • 5" high rail(widths coordinate with panels). Marker Board N • Attachment via vertical reveals. Panel Mount can be moved from space to • Can be hung from wall track.Good solution for above copiers. space as needed. • Universal Accessory Rail is off-modular—can be used on a This surface is a dry erase application. m panel of equal width or one size smaller. For use with dry marking pens. "' • May span two panels of appropriate size,i.e., 50"W Tool Rail on Hangs directly on Prefix panel frame. two 30"W panels. Steel tile with whiteboard paint. • Surface is magnetic. M Letter Tray Width must correspond with width of D • Holds standard letter-size paper and M panel. "' inter-office envelopes. • Minimal horizontal intrusion. File Pocket Shelf Organizer I • May be stacked by hanging back of File Pocket Fits all Universal Overhead Cabinets and D onto front of another File Pocket to maximize Shelves. Gl space. Not compatible with Overhead Cabinets with M • Stores vertically for easy access to files. Sliding Doors. Binder Bin D • Holds folders,binders,and manuals. Z z C) D n n m Ln z TOOT Box m • Holds pencils and other writing utensils,large post-it v, notes,and other desk top accessories. z a rn X maxom 1121 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See page 108 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Actual. u w Task Lighting LU W w Includes • Fluorescent light bulb. • Hanger bars. W C7 w Description Wattage Model H D W Wt. [Cubes List W Task Light 24W or greater 15 M-USL24 1.425" 6.875" 18.3" 6 0.4 258 Task Light 30W or greater 20 M-USL30 1.425" 6.875" 24.3" 7 0.4 291 Task Light 42W or greater 30 M-USL42 1.425" 6.875" 36.3" 9 0.4 324 Task Light54W or greater 40 M-USL54 1.425" 6.875" 48.3" 11 0.4 379 9 W Q Task Light 24W or greater-Fuse Plug 15 M-USL24FP 1.425" 6.875" 18.3" 6 0.4 357 H Task Light 30W or greater-Fuse Plug 20 M-USL30FP 1.425" 6.875" 24.3" 7 0.4 392 Q Task Light 42W or greater-Fuse Plug 30 M-USL42FP 1.425" 6.875" 36.3" 9 0.4 428 Task Light54W or greater-Fuse Plug 40 M-USL54FP 1.425" 6.875" 48.3" 11 0.4 463 Ln Q A d N to List Li W CJ Q� Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Y Cord Cover(Manager) M-CCM10 10" 1.415" 1.125" 2 0.2 37 44 0 Cord Cover(Manager) M-CCM15 15" 1.415" 1.125" 2 0.2 39 46 Cord Cover(Manager) M-CCM20 20" 1.415" 1.125" 2 0.2 52 59 LU a W C7 Q oc O Ln C7 z Q W Ln w HOW TO SPECIFY 0 0 Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln See page 5 U Q X LU Z � 1221 Maxon, GSA SIR!711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix° Panel System See page 108 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Actual. ' M Universal Overhead Task Lighting z n Includes M • Fluorescent light bulb. • 9'cord. m • 4 cord clips • Mounting bars. Gl rn Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes List Universal Overhead Task Light 24W M-USL024 1.125" 3.7" 18.375" 5 0.4 214 Universal Overhead Task Light 30W M-USL030 1.125" 3.7" 22.875" 7 0.6 235 Universal Overhead Task Light 42W M-USL042 1.125" 3.7" 34.625" 10 0.9 266 Universal Overhead Task Light 60W M-USL060 1.125" 3.7" 46.5" 12 1.1 323 to D m z D Universal Overhead Task Light 24W-Fuse Plug M-USL024FP 1.125" 3.7" 18375" 5 0.4 225 n Universal Overhead Task Light 30W-Fuse Plug M-USL030FP 1.125" 3.7" 22.875" 7 0.9 281 m Universal Overhead Task Light 42W-Fuse Plug M-USL042FP 1.125" 3.7" 34.625" 10 0.9 281 Ln Universal Overhead Task Light 60W-Fuse Plug M-USL060FP 1.125" 3.7" 46.5" 12 1.1 348 C Ln D Ln ® c< O x 71 Qn C T D n m cn rn m D M m O D M m cn m D Z HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number N O z m Ln Z M � O X maxon, 1123 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See page 121 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Actual. v W Universal Accessory Panel Rail and Accessories Uj w w w List List Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint LU Universal Accessory Rail M-ACCRAIL24 5" .5" 24" 5 0.2 224 244 O w M-ACCRAIL30 5" .5" 30" 6 0.3 240 260 M-ACCRAIL36 5" .5" 36" 7 0.3 253 273 M-ACCRAIL42 5" .5" 42" 8 0.4 267 287 M-ACCRAIL48 5" .5" 48" 9 0.4 276 296 M-ACCRAIL60 5" .5" 60" 11 0.5 322 342 List List Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint U Personal Shelf(21") M-PS21 1.75" 7" 21" 3 0.05 158 178 Q a N I— Q V) N List List N N Q Core Premium a Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Paint Paint v=i Letter Tray M-LT 1.7" 9" 13" 0.05 0.05 153 173 N w Q \ w Ln N Y List List O Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint w Binder Bin M-SB 8.5" 5.2" 3" 0.08 0.08 153 173 w ' Lu List List Q C` O N Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Diagonal Tray-(Non-handed)(3) M-DT 8.5" 9.5" 4.5" 2 0.03 213 233 t� z a w N W HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Model Number Select Paint Color N See page 5 U Q x W�l w o M - Z 1241 Maxon, GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix° Panel System See page 121 for the specification guide. A All Dimensions are Actual. ^' m Universal Accessory Panel Rail and Accessories Continued... m z n List List. P t. Core Premium Description Model H D W WJ Cubes Paint Paint m File Pocket M-FP 8.9" 1.25" 12.25" 2 0.3 158 178 m III m I %I List List, Core Premium Description Model H Tw Wt. Cubes Paint Paint Paper Clip M-CLIP2 1.9" 5" 1 0.2 158 178 > D Ln 5 m (n C List List y Core Premium Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Paint Paint Small Paper Clip Tray M-SMTRAY 1.8" 6.8" 1 0.1 109 129 0 z Ln Ln n m List" List rn m Core Premium D Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Paint Paint :;a Tool Box M-TB 5.25" 1.5" 5" 1 0.2 123 143 O D M m Ln m Z t7 HOW TO SPECIFY n n Select Model Number Select Paint Color I„ Ln See page 5 � m Ln �� Z __. I I X X maxon' 1125 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See page 121 for the specification guide. W All Dimensions are Nominal. v w Panel Accessories W L W cr Description Model Wt. Cubes List Coat Hook(6 pack) M-PMC6 0.3 0.3 45 w w w Carpet Grippers w Description Model H W Wt. CubesU I I I F 7L, NCarpet Grippers(12 pk) M-AGC12 6.5" 1.5" 0.2 0.3 48 Carpet Grippers(4 pk) M-AGC4 6.5" 1.5" 0.1 0.3 28 Q V) Ln V) Ln Ln tN W U LQL N or O W Q W d W Q 0 f— N tD z Q W N w HOW TO SPECIFY 0 :Select Model Number Select Paint Color 0 uU See page 5 Q x 1261 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1 EXHIBIT B Prefix" Panel System See page 121 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. ^' T Universal Panel Mounted Whiteboard m z n m Includes • Panel mounted whiteboard. • Marker tray. rri rri List List rn m Core Premium Description Model H W Wt. Cubes paint Paint Panel Mounted Whiteboard M-PMWB1324 13" 24" 6 1 418 444 M-PMWB1330 13" 30" 7 1.3 456 482 M-PMWB1336 13" 36" 9 1.5 478 504 >= M-PMWB1342 13" 42" 10 1.7 489 515 M-PMWB1348 13" 48" 12 2 500 526 l M-PMWB1360 13" 60" 15 2.4 516 542 N M-PMWB2624 26" 24" 9 1.9 500 526 D M-PMWB2630 26" 30" 11 2.3 519 545 M-PMWB2636 26" 36" 13 2.8 527 553 D M-PMWB2642 26 42" 15 3.2 538 564 n m M-PMWB2648 26" 48" 18 3.6 549 575 M-PMWB2660 26" 60" 23 4.5 564 590 L/I C Ln O Po Ln C D n rn Ln PO m D rM m O D G) m m Z HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln N See page 5 m z m x maxon• 1127 Prefix® Panel System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1 See page 121 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal.Pricing listed below is for Core Paint. Please see"How to Specify"section at bottom of page for Premium Paint upcharge. U w Universal Fabric Tackboard LU w LL Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Grade A Grade B Fabric Fabric Panel Mounted Fabric Tackboard M-PMTB1324 13" 24" 6 0.6 364 373 LU M-PMTB1330 13" 30" 7 0.8 380 389 c7 LU w M-PMTB1336 13" 36" 9 0.9 410 419 w M-PMTB1342 13" 42" 10 1.1 440 451 M-PMTB1348 13" 48" 12 1.3 480 491 M-PMTB1360 13" 60" 15 1.6 508 519 M-PMTB2624 26" 24" 9 1.3 380 392 M-PMTB2630 26" 30" 11 1.5 410 422 M-PMTB2636 26" 36" 13 1.7 434 446 M-PMTB2642 26" 42" 15 1.9 465 478 M-PMTB2648 26" 48" 18 2.1 501 514 v M-PMTB2660 26" 60" 23 2.3 539 552 of a of Q Wall Mounted Fabric Tackboard M-WMTB1324 13" 24" 6 0.6 364 373 M-WMTB1330 13" 30" 7 0.8 380 389 M-WMTB1336 13" 36" 9 0.9 410 419 QM-WMTB1342 13" 42" 10 1.1 440 451 M-WMTB1348 13" 48" 12 1.3 480 491 N M-WMTB1360 13" 60" 15 1.6 508 519 M-WMTB2624 26" 24" 9 1.3 380 392 w M-W MTB2630 26" 30" 11 1.5 410 422 U M-WMTB2636 26" 36" 13 1.7 434 446 °C M-WMTB2642 26" 42" 15 1.9 465 478 Y M-WMTB2648 26" 48" 18 2.1 501 514 0 M-WMTB2660 26" 60" 23 2.3 539 552 w o: a a w o_ w a 0 Ln Ln z w w HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Paint Color Select Fabric 0 w See page 5 See pages 6-7 QCore Paint Choice(no upcharge) Premium Paint($26 upcharge) x LU Z M 1281 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace'" Benching System z m m Mal 4 q m m M fit ae+M I 5: X Ot Un r x..N� * *E IIt w+W�a➢ �u Smartsp aceTM Benching System C:T With the increase in office collaboration,comes an easy-to-install benching solution.Now that's smart thinking. Easily integrate power m trough allows every workstation to access technology.Even better,this solution comes pre-assembled for a simpler,smarter installation and offers space planning flexibility.Smartspace benching fits more people into a smaller area and has the ability to support the growth of your business.Complement your design ideas with Smartspace. m v D M m Ln --I O z D M m m Z G) D n n m N Ln m Ln Z M m X maxon• 1129 Smartspace'" Benching System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 w U W Typicals LUPlease refer to our typicals gallery for all Maxon systems.www.maxonfurniture.com/design-resources/typicals.Here you can download Cad files,BOM's with current pricing and PDF's of each drawing.Each month we add new ideas to support industry trends. Use the Maxon Typicals Gallery to find the components in Smartspace workstations: w 0 w LU w x w a � � \ si Ln \ \\ RI vv M � w U V) 0I v w CL CL w re 0 Z Ve Q ?9 R \-zz�, IdOZL I Ln W U Coll ! 10 o N! !W g L O `� X w 0 Z EL 1301 maxorr GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace- Benching System rn m m Smartspace'" Finishes Chart m z n N m CO Y 00 C C U a) a CC U @ C IE f4 f9 G V1 m co V) D c A v Q Q @ a v m c r ai NM 10� N L L GD Y Y a) 'O d v� bD CD 0 C L1 LAMINATES CODES m Bourbon Cherry H x Cognac COGN Harvest C c Mocha MOCH -o Natural Maple D 0 Pinnacle PINC Shaker Cherry F Florence Walnut LFW1 ' Kingswood Walnut LKI1 N c Designer White LDW1 o , 0 Flint LM16 N Loft LOFT ' E Sheer Mesh* LTBB x 0 v a Silver Mesh* LTBD C m [L2 LAMINATES CODES n D m Amber Cherry LWAC Beigewood LWBE C � Columbian Walnut LWZ m � D 00 Lowell Ash LLA1 m Natural Recon LNR1 Portico Teak LPT1 ' (n PAINTS CODES O Black MPBL > D Brownstone MP7D m a Flint MP02 ' `o Greige MPTS Loft M P7B D Muslin MPT3 Champagne MPRS ' G Gunmetal MPR3 ' D E Platinum MPPL n v m White MPWT 0 Silver PR6Ln A m m White PD8 = Nickel P81- End-of-Run Screens and Modesties come with matching Edgeband. z *Sheer Mesh has Muslin Edgeband. o *Silver Mesh has Loft Edgeband. maxon, 1131 Smartspace" Benching System EXHIBIT GSA SIN 711-2 w LLJ LLJ LU W I I �LY 1 0 Step 1: Legs Step 5:Worksurfaces w All necessary brackets ship attached to the legs. All necessary brackets ship attached to the beam.Simply fasten to the legs with the provided screws. X w a � Step 2:Support Beams(Static Only) All necessary brackets ship attached to the beam.Simply fasten to the legs with the provided screws. Step 6:Screens Drop shared screens into installed brackets,slide side screens into place or attach end-of-run screens at end of worksurfaces. 0 Ln Ln Step 3:Troughs ? ZD Slide the trough over the support beams for double-sided. "' Screw the trough into the surface for single-sided. Ln w a Step 7:Storage M Choose your storage,from pedestals,to credenzas to towers— Y whatever suits your needs. O U w a w Step 4: Electrical a Slide 8-wire harnesses/duplexes into pre-installed clips on the trough.Lay in data if necessary and cover. w (7 a 0 V) 0 z a w Ln w 0 Ln Ln w V V Q X w 0 Z 1321 maxon* GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace'" Benching System A m Double Depth U-Legs 120°Shared Trough m • Ships as a box of 2 legs. Trough width will match worksurface width. ®D� z • M-SSEL4828 for use with back-to-back 24"D I For use with 120°double sided stations. worksurfaces. Slots available in trough to zip tie data cables to m • M-SSEL6028 for use with back-to-back 30"D the trough. worksurfaces. 2 duplexes and 1 data knock out per straight trough. m Double Depth Shared U-Leg Metal Side Screen • M-SSSL4828 for use with back-to-back 24"D Metal screen slides over the edge of the worksurface M A worksurfaces. and screws in under the worksurface. G) 1:: m • M-SSSL6028 for use with back-to-back 30"D worksurfaces. Fabric Side Screen Single Depth U-Legs Fabric screen adheres to the top of the worksurface • Ships as a box of 2 legs. with heavy-duty double stick tape. A • M-SSEL2428 for use with single 24"D worksurfaces. m • M-SSEL3028 for use with single 30"D worksurfaces. ni Shared Fabric Screen Single Depth Shared U-Leg • For use with double-sided stations. • When used with power poles,Shared Fabric Screen M 5552428 for use with single 24"D worksurfaces. will need to be one size smaller to avoid interference • M-SSSL3028 for use with single 30"D worksurfaces. with power pole. Single Depth Return U-Leg rf Single Fabric Screen • Ships with two Flat Brackets. For use with single-sided stations. • Support beam is required to support return surface. When used with power poles,Single Fabric Screen M-SSRLEL2428 Left-Hand for use with single 24"D return will need to be one size smaller to avoid interference worksurfaces. with power pole. • M-SSRREL2428 Right-Hand for use with single 24"D return c worksurfaces. Shared Glass Screen 120°Double Depth U-Legs For use with double sided stations. N • Only to be used with 120°Worksurface models in a When used with power poles,Shared Glass Screen v back-to-back application-cannot be used single sided. will need to be one size smaller to avoid interferencewith power pole. • Ships as single leg for 120°applications. ::E • M-SS120EL4828 for use with back-to-back 24"D Single Glass Screen 71 worksurfaces. • For use with single-sided stations. N M-SS120EL6028 for with back-to-back 30"D worksurfaces. c • When used with power poles,Single Glass Screen 120°Post Legs will need to be one size smaller to avoid interference • Only to be used with 120'Worksurface models in a back-to-back with power pole. N application-cannot be used single sided. Laminate Modesty • One post leg needed per 120°worksurface. For use with single-sided stations. • Post leg ships with attachment brackets needed to connect support beams and worksurfaces. See Laminate options page 131. v D Support Beams M • One support beam per worksurface is needed. Single End-of-Run Laminate Screen • For use with single-sided stations. For use with single-sided stations. • 36"W returns will use the 48"W Support Beam. See Laminate options page 131. un • 48"W returns will use the 60"W Support Beam. 24"W models used on 24"D Worksurfaces. • 30"W models are used on 30"D Worksurfaces. D Support Beams(Box of 2) End-of-run screens sit 1"inset on each side of the depth • One support beam per worksurface is needed. of the run. M • For use with double-sided stations. Laminate is vertical grain. • 36"W returns will use the 48"W Support Beam, End-of-run screens are always 13"below the surface and either • 48"W returns will use the 60"W Support Beam. 13"H or 20"H above the surface. u1 120°Support Beams(Box of 2) Double End-of-Run Laminate Screen D • Two support beams per 120'worksurface are needed. • For use with double-sided stations. For use with 120°double-sided stations. See Laminate options page 131. \ Shared Trough 48"W models used with back-to-back 24"D worksurfaces. • Trough width will match worksurface width. 60"W models used with back-to-back 30"D worksurfaces. • For use with double sided stations. End-of-run screens sit 1"inset on each side of the depth of D n • Slots available in trough to zip tie data cables to the run. m the trough. Laminate is vertical grain. o • 2 duplexes and 1 data knock out per straight trough. End-of-run screens are always 13"below the surface and either 0 13"H or 20"H above the surface. m Ln Single-Sided Trough • Trough width will match worksurface width. • For use with single-sided stations. • Slots available in trough to zip tie data cables to z the trough. • 2 duplexes and 1 data knock out per straight trough. x maxon' 1133 Smartspace'" Benching System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 W U Z Height-Adjustable Base Height-Adjustable Trough Lid LU Ships as 2 boxes total of 4 legs. Optional hinged trough lids can be attached to the LL Must be use as Double-Sided application only. cable troughs to enclose wire management area. Does not require the use of an external support Lids have a 1"gap to allow for cables to pass into channel. the trough from above. Available in Nickel and White. Lid must match width of trough. Glides provide 1"of adjustment. Come with(2)standard 4 set memory controller. Wire Management Chain w Height adjustment:Two stage range 255/a"—451/4". Flexible chain attaches from underside of worksurface to side of trough UWeight rating:250lbs. allowing for concealed wire routing. • Travel Speed 1.2"per second. Includes 26 oval shaped links and one worksurface attachment bracket. Control Box for 2 Leg System:400 Watts/3.3 Amps.9'grounded power 1.8"wide x 1.25"deep x 52"long. cord.Collision detection system senses collisions with hard objects and See page 154 for cable capacities. reverses travel. x Bases are all steel construction with a telescoping horizontal frame that To the Floor Wire Manager zadjusts from 41"W to 71"W to accommodate a variety of worksurfaces. Attaches to side of benching base column using double sided tape. a Worksurfaces are available in two depths,23.25"and 29.25"and three Covers floor in-feed and data cables that are being routed from widths,46",58",and 70".Worksurfaces must be same width in each trough to floor. back-to-back section. Use a 24"pass thru harness,M-EP24,to allow for easy routing of • A 2"gap between side by side worksurfaces prevents pinch points Sealtight in-feed through the benching crossbeam. while a 4.5"gap between back-to-back worksurfaces allows for the 3"wide x 1.5"deep x 17.25"long. mounting of screens to the back of the worksurfaces. See page 154 for cable capacities. • Adjacent bases are ganged together with included raceway jumper that also covers electrical and data passing between stations.Adjacent Screens bases that are electrically connected must be mechanically fastened Smartspace single sided-screens in glass or fabric may be attached to together.A ganging bracket is included that attaches beneath the the back of each worksurface. raceway jumper. Screens are offset to allow for cables to drop behind the worksurface ,„ into the trough or wire chain. Ln Height-Adjustable End of Run Smartspace fabric and metal side screens may also be used for privacy Includes one benching base and one end of run kit. between users. N Allows for attaching half round or rectangular worksurfaces on the end of a benching run.Attaches to Worksurface Width Suggested Screen Width crossbeam and is independently adjustable. 46" 42" w Must be used attached to end of Height-Adjustable Base, Q cannot be freestanding,cannot be used with stationary 58" 54" Smartspace bases. 70" 60" Available in Nickel and White. Y • Glides provide 1"of adjustment. o Comes with(2)standard 4 set memory controller. Laminate Gallery Panel Height adjustment:Two stage range 255/a"—451/4". Added to the end of a benching run. Weight rating:250lbs. Available in 51"or 63"wide and 50"high. LL, Travel Speed 1.2"per second. Panels are supported by three leveling glides and are attached to the Control Box for 2 Leg System:400 Watts/3.3 Amps.T grounded power benching crossbeam and hooked into column glides at the floor. cord.Collision detection system senses collisions with hard objects and Glides have 1"of adjustability. w reverses travel. ° End of Run cable trough and trough lid are available that feature a raceway with two knockouts supporting up to two duplexes,data faceplates or one of each.One end of run jumper kit is needed for each w duplex desired. • End of run supports the following worksurface models: ( oac M-PPHAHR24SON M-PPHAHR3062N "*a tt M-PPHA4824N M-PPHA4830N `^ M-PPHA6024N M-PPHA603ON Height-Adjustable Trough M Troughs attach to the crossbeams. Ij Z Must be used with a matching worksurface width. H A raceway cover is included which allow for the / (� enclosed routing of the 8-trac electrical system and j n f data wiring. i, 6 .. ._.... '.t c5 • Two electrical knockouts and one data knockout are located on each side of the raceway.Extra cabling can be ran outside of the raceway by w removing knockouts at the ends of the raceway. it O V1 Compliance W Meets or exceeds X5.5-2014 ANSI/BIFMA and U U ISTA Performance Standards Q X w 0 Z 1341 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace'" Benching System See pages 130-134 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. 7O m T Arrow on worksurface notes woodgrain direction. z m Z r7 Rectangular Worksurface: No Grommet m List List M m z LDescription Model D FW Wt. Cubes L1 L2 m Rectangular Worksurface No Grommet,24"D M-URW2436N 24" 36" 32 2.3 370 402 M-URW2448N 24" 48" 46 3 420 464 M-URW2460N 24" 60" 53 3.7 460 515 v \ M-URW2472N 24" 72" 75 4.4 543 608 z m n X Rectangular Worksurface No Grommet,30"D M-URW3048N 30" 48" 52 3.6 460 515 M-URW3060N 30" 60" 63 4.6 502 570 M-URW3072N 30" 72" 80 5.5 586 668 Rectangle Height-Adjustable Worksurfaces,24"D M-PPHA4824N 48" 24" 58 3.1 487 531 M-PPHA6024N 60" 24" 101 4.8 541 596 M-PPHA7224N 72" 24" 95.6 5 623 688 N D Rectangle Height-Adjustable Worksurfaces,30"D M-PPHA483ON 48" 30" 68 3.9 541 596 Ln M-PPHA603ON 60" 30" 101 4.8 595 663 M-PPHA7230N 72" 30" 111.6 6.1 677 7 p U, C T D M m cn M m D z m Ln --I O z D M m L' m Z Gl HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color N 1 See page 11 J, Edgeband Un See page 10 rn maxon• 1135 Smartspace'" Benching System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 See pages 130-134 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. U Z Arrow on worksurface notes woodgrain direction. W W W UJ 120° Worksurface: No Grommet LU List List LU w Ui W Description Model D W Wt. Cubes LS L2 120°Worksurface No Grommets,24"D M-UYCW2436N 24" 36" 77 7.1 658 746 M-UYCW2442N 24" 42" 82 8.5 824 934 x , M-UYCW2448N 24" 48" 87 10.6 934 1070 W a 120'Worksurface No Grommets,30"D M-UYCW3042N 30" 42" 102 11.2 848 958 M-UYCW3048N 30" 48" 112 11.2 960 1096 Half Round Height-Adjustable M-PPHAHR245ON 50" 24" 54 4.8 860 915 in No Grommet Worksurface M-PPHAHR3062N 60" 30" 77 5.9 1000 1068 Ln a V) to LU U Q W Z) N Y W d W 0= d W t� Q 0 H V) tD z Ln Q W N W HOW TO SPECIFY o Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color in LU See page it 1i J Q Edgeband See page 10 x LU Z M 1361 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace" Benching System See pages 130-134 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. M n Height-Adjustable Base z m List Core Description Model D W Wt. Cubes paint ^' Height-Adjustable Bases for Back-to-Back Workstation M-SSHAB2S4C 51"-63" 48"-72" 130 5.4 3968 M z G) m v M m 1�pt T X Height-Adjustable End-of-Run Kit List Core Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Paint C z Height-Adjustable End-of-Run Kit M-SSHAEOR 30" 51"-63" 80 5.8 2200 D O C m D n m 'O M m v D M m Ln O D M m Ln m D Z HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Paint Color N Ln See page 5 � Nickel .P8L M White .PDB MI I �' X maxon• 1137 Smartspace" Benching System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 See pages 130-134 for the specification guide. W All Dimensions are Nominal. U w Double Depth U-Legs Uj w L W List List DescriptionTCore Premium w p� Model D W Wt. FCube� C7 Paint Paint LU Double Depth U-Leg(Box of 2) M-SSEL4828 55.5" 16" 32.4 14.9 1612 1644 w M-SSEL6028 62.5" 16" 34.8 18.2 1768 1800 x LU LL Double Depth Shared U-Legs List ! List Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium V) Paint Paint Double Depth Shared U-Leg(Singles) M-SSSL4828 30" 15" 21.1 4.7 660 692 a V) M-SSSL6028 42" 15" 22.5 6.4 728 760 Ln w U Q u. Ln N :be O W cc Q W d W (D Q 0 N z Q W W HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Paint Color 0 Ln v See page 5 U Q LU x z i '"' 1381 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace" Benching System See pages 130-134 for the specification guide. 70 All Dimensions are Nominal. M n m Single Depth U-Legs rn z m List List Core Premium Description Model D W��Cubes paint Paintrri 'T Single Depth U-Leg(Box of 2) M-SSEL2428 24" 15" 23.7 7.5 832 864 G1 M-SSEL3028 30" 15" 24.9 9.1 1040 1072 rn -v M rn ri I m X Single Depth Shared U-Leg Llst "__T List Core Premium . Description Model D W Wt Cubes paint Paint Single Depth Shared U-Leg(Singles) M-SSSL2428 18" 8" 14.8 3 494 526 M-SSSL3028 24" 8" 15.6 3.9 541 573 LA c 70 Ln Ln O Single Depth Return U-Leg N C m List List n m Ln Core Premium Description Model D W Wt. Cubes paint Paint v Single Depth Return Leg,Left-Hand M-SSRLEL2428 24" 15" 23.7 7.54 494 526 M m \ M \ m Ln O Single Depth Return Leg,Right-Hand M-SSRREL2428 24" 15" 23.7 7.54 494 526 > rri �✓ m Ln m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY D n Select Model Number Select Paint Color N U, See page 5 0 rn N �� Z .__ I I X X maxon' 1139 Smartspace'" Benching System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 See pages 130-134 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U w 120° Double Depth U-Leg cc W W W List List Description Core Premium p� Model D WWt. T— LUCubes <7 Paint Paint w Double Depth U-leg(Single Leg for 120°) M-SS120EL4828 56" 8" 19 7.8 832 864 M-SS120EL6028 63" 8" 21 9.6 1040 1072 X LL w z a 1200 Post Leg List List Q Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium a. Paint Paint Post Leg for 120'(Singles) M-SS120POST 9" 29" 7 1 395 411 N Un W U W LO N Y O W d W W Q 0 N z Q W N W HOW TO SPECIFY °C Select Model Number Select Paint Color 0 Ln w See page 5 U V Q X o M - Z 1401 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace" Benching System See pages 130-134 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. A m n Full Height Pedestals will not fit under Support Beams. m z m Z n Support Beams m Description Model D W Wt. CubesMK list Support Beams(Box of 1) M-SSUB148 4.3" 48" 7.3 0.5 406 M-SSUB160 4.3" 60" 8.3 0.6 452 m M-SSUB172 4.3" 72" 9.3 0.8 499 v M m m X Support Beams (Box of 2) Description Model D W Wt. Cubes List Support Beams(Box of 2) M-SSUB248 4.3" 48" 12.3 0.5 811 M-SSUB260 4.3" 60" 14.3 0.6 905 M-SSUB272 4.3" 72" 17.3 0.8 1004 L, C v D Ln Ln 1200 Support Beams (Box of 2) T D M Description Model D W Wt. Cubes List cn 120'Support Beams(Box of 2) M-SS120UB236 4.3" 36" 7.8 0.8 640 M-SS120UB242 4.3" 42" 9.5 0.8 723 m M-SS120UB248 4.3" 48" 11 0.8 811 D M m --I O D G) m Ln m Z M HOW TO SPECIFY n n Select Model Number M Ln Ln O m N Z M M Maxon' 1141 Smartspace" Benching System EXHIBIT GSA SIN 711-2 See pages 130-134 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U w Shared Trough w w w Description Model D W Wt. Cubes List Shared Trough M-SSTROUGH48 20" 48" 3.3 5.3 562 w CD M-SSTROUGH60 20" 60" 4.3 6 619 Ui M-SSTROUGH72 20" 72" 5.3 7.5 676 w 0 ,10 LL w w Single-Sided Trough F_ Description Model D W Wt. Cubes List Single-Sided Trough M-SSSTROUGH48 6" 48" 3 5.3 416 M-SSSTROUGH60 6" 60" 4 6 572 M-SSSTROUGH72 6" 72" 5 7.5 718 00* Q n. ZD V) L, 120° Shared Trough w U Q w , Description Model D W Wt. Cubes List Y p Shared Trough for 120° M-SS120TROUGH36 20" 36" 6.9 2.9 447 M-SS120TROUGH42 20" 42" 8.4 2.9 504 OO M-SS120TROUGH48 20" 48" 9.9 5 562 wQ ® ® a w a w (D re O F- O Z Q w W HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln w See page 5 U Silver .PR6 White .MPWT X - o M Z 1421 maxon, GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace" Benching System See pages 130-134 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. m M Height-Adjustable Shared Trough m Z —] n m Description Model D W Wt. Cubes List Shared Trough for HAB M-SSHATROUGH48 13" 48" 5 1.7 553 rM M-SSHATROUGH60 13" 60" 6.5 2.2 608 K 4 ® M-SSHATROUGH72 13" 72" 7 2.7 668 o m End-of-Run Trough for HAB M-SSHATROUGH2O 7.5" 20" 3 0.4 445 .0 z m n X Height-Adjustable Single-Sided Trough Lid Description Model D W Wt. Cubes List C z D Single Sided Trough Lid to Span HAB M-SSHASLID48 4" 48" 3 0.4 158 Ln M-SSHASLID60 4" 60" 4 0.5 174 M-SSHASLID72 4" 72" 5 0.6 192 O Ln End-of-Run Trough for HAB M-SSHASLID20 4" 20" 2 0.4 128 T D Ln v m D m N O z D Gl m m Z G1 HOW TO SPECIFY D r-� Select Model Number Select Paint Color ^i V) See page 5 0 Silver .PR6 m White .MPWT v "' I ' m x maxon' 1143 Smartspace'" Benching System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 See pages 130-134 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. v w Metal Side Screen w w U- w List list; Description Model --T—D W Wt. Core Premium w Cubes Paint Paint CD Painted Metal Side Screen,13"H M-SSDMS2413 13" 24" 6.3 1.9 374 386 o_ Uj M-SSDMS3013 13" 30" 7.7 2.8 432 444 w X LL w a Fabric Side Screen List List Grade A Grade B Grade A Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Premium Fabric Fabric Paint Fabric Side Screen,13"H M-MDRS1324F 13" 24" 4.5 1 559 575 638 N M-MDRS1330F 13" 30" 5 2 574 590 653 a Ln w v Q w Ln Fabric Side Screen,20"H M-MDRS2024F 20" 24" 4.5 1.9 581 597 660 Y M-MDRS203OF 20" 30" 5 2.2 595 611 674 O w w a w HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Metal Side Screen Select Paint Color cr- � See page 5 c.7 z w M Ln w HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Fabric Side Screen Select Fabric Select Paint Color Ln w See pages 6-7 See page 5 u u a z I M 1441 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace" Benching System See pages 130-134 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. m -M Shared Fabric Screen m List List n m Grade A Grade B Grade A Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Fabric Fabric Premium Paint m Shared Fabric Screen,13"H M-SSCFS3613 13" 36" 8.3 1.9 676 692 708 M m M-SSCFS4813 13" 48" 10.3 2.4 806 822 838 G1 m M-SSCFS6013 13" 60" 12.3 2.9 962 978 994 v rn m T X Shared Fabric Screen,20"H M-SSCFS3620 20" 36" 9.8 2.7 858 874 890 M-SSCFS4820 20" 48" 12.3 3.5 946 962 978 M-SSCFS6020 20" 60" 14.8 4.2 1040 1056 1072 C D Un Single-Sided Fabric Screen List List 0 7z Grade A Grade A Grade B � Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Fabric Fabric Premium , Paint n m Single Fabric Screen,13"H M-SSFSS3613 13" 36" 8.3 2.2 676 692 708 M-SSFSS4213 13" 42" 11 1.7 710 726 742 M-SSFSS4813 13" 48" 11.3 2.8 806 822 838 m M-SSFS55413 13" 54" 12.8 2.7 850 866 882 D C�� M-SSFS56013 13" 60" 14.3 3.4 962 978 994 m Single Fabric Screen,20"H M-SSFSS3620 20" 36" 9.8 3 858 874 890 V) M-SSFSS4220 20" 42" 13.6 2.4 875 891 907 M-SSFSS4820 20" 48" 13.3 3.9 946 962 978 C) m M-SSFSS5420 20" 54" 15.9 3.6 955 971 987 M-SSFSS6020 20" 60" 16.8 4.7 1040 1056 1072 M m D Z 6) HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Fabric Side Screen Select Fabric Select Paint Color N See pages 6-7 See page 5 0 m Z M � M X maxon' 1145 Smartspace" Benching System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 See pages 130-134 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U w Shared Glass Screen w w w List List Ly, Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint w Shared Glass Screen,13"H M-SSFG3613 13" 36" 8.3 1.9 702 714 w M-SSFG4813 13" 48" 10.3 2.4 832 844 M-SSFG6013 13" 60" 12.3 2.9 1014 1026 M-SSFG7213 13" 72" 43.3 3.4 1118 1130 X w w a Shared Glass Screen,20"H M-SSFG3620 20" 36" 9.8 2.7 910 922 M-SSFG4820 20" 48" 12.3 3.5 1014 1026 M-SSFG6020 20" 60" 14.8 4.2 1118 1130 M-SSFG7220 20" 72" 60.3 5 1222 1234 c Single-Sided Glass Screen Includes Ln • Glass is frosted. Un w U Q � List list Z3 Y Core Premium Description Model D W Wt. Cubes O Paint Paint Single Glass Screen,13"H M-SSFGS3613 13" 36" 8.3 2.2 718 730 M-SSFGS4213 13" 42" 28.3 2.2 760 772 owc M-SSFGS4813 13" 48" 11.3 2.8 858 870 nQ w M-SSFGS5413 13" 54" 47.9 3.1 900 912 a M-SSFGS6013 13" 60" 14.3 3.4 1024 1036 M-SSFGS7213 13" 72" 46.3 4.1 1134 1146 CLU7 Single Glass Screen,20"H M-SSFGS3620 20" 36" 9.8 3 910 922 M-SSFGS4220 20" 42" 34.4 2.8 925 937 M-SSFGS4820 20" 48" 13.3 3.9 1014 1026 M-SSFGS5420 20" 54" 47.9 3.8 1025 1037 M-SSFGS6020 20" 60" 16.8 4.7 1118 1130 ce M-SSFGS7220 20" 72" 63.3 5.7 1222 1234 z Ln Ln w w HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Model Number Select Paint Color ,`j See page 5 U U Q LU X IM`` Z 1461 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace' Benching System See pages 130-134 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. z m m Arrow on tile notes woodgrain direction. m x m Z Laminate Modesty Panel m List List m Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Li L2 m m Laminate Modesty Panel,13"H M-SSLM3613 13" 36" 11.6 1.7 250 282 M-SSLM4813 13" 48" 15.6 2.2 291 335 M-SSLM6013 13" 60" 18.6 2.7 354 409 v z m r5�1 m X Single End-Of-Run Laminate Screen List List Description Model D W Wt. Cubes LS L2 C Single End-of-Run Laminate Screen,24"W M-SSLM2426 26" 24" 15.6 2.2 255 277 D M-SSLM2434 34" 24" 19.6 2.7 281 303 O 7z C A m D n Single End-of-Run Laminate Screen,30"W M-SSLM3026 26" 30" 29.6 4.1 255 282 ^' M-SSLM3034 34" 30" 37.6 5.1 281 309 v z m v D z m O Grain Direction m N m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Paint Color M Laminate options are limited See page 5 O 22 See page 10 m Ln — x x maxon• 1147 Smartspace" Benching System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 See pages 130-134 for the specification guide. LU All Dimensions are Nominal. U Z rrow on tile notes woodgrain direction. w W Double End-Of-Run Laminate Screen List List CD Description Model D W Wt. Cubes LS L2 LU Double End-of-Run Laminate Screen,48"W M-SSLM4826 26" 48" 15.6 2.6 374 429 M-SSLM4834 34" 48" 19.6 3.3 411 466 x LL w n. Double End-of-Run Laminate Screen,60"W M-SSLM6026 26" 60" 30.9 5.1 504 572 M-SSLM6034 34" 60" 38.9 6.4 551 619 LA I C: Grain Direction a o: Ln Ln Ln w U uQ.. V1 1z Y Double End-of-Run Laminate Gallery Panel w List list a Core Premium � Description Model H W Wt. Cubes paint Paint a Double End-of-Run Laminate Gallery Panel for HAB M-SSLGP5048 50" 48" 855 867 M-SSLGP5060 50" 60" 950 962 w Q n q O Ln Grain Direction O z a Ln Ln w HOW TO SPECIFY cc Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Paint Color 0 cn L Laminate options are limited Seepage 5 U U See page 10 Q Z M � 1481 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace'" Benching System M m M Byrne Electrical System Capabilities Z • Smartspace features a Byrne 4-circuit/8-wire modular power NOTE ON THE SPECIFICATION AND INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS m distribution system.The standard power configuration provides three utility circuits,which share a common Neutral and Ground,plus an The Maxon 4-Circuit/8-Wire power system conforms to National Electrical isolated/dedicated fourth circuit,with an independent Neutral and Code requirements.However,some variations may exist in the local Ground.As an option,the system can also provide 2 utility circuits+ authority of electrical code standards.The specifier or user is responsible M 2 isolated circuits. for confirming code standard compliance in these locations before z The power distribution system provides access to multiple electrical specification and ordering.The availability of power components and m outlets and circuits within the same panel. systems does not constitute local code approved by Maxon Furniture Inc. rn • The standard power distribution through the base-level raceway can branch electrical service up to the work surface level as needed. All electrical installation work on Maxon power systems should be done • Each electrical circuit is rated 120volts/20amp.Up to four 20 Amp under the supervision of a licensed electrician or approved electrical circuits may be accessed from a 3-phase power source,and up to three contractor. z circuits may be used with a single-phase source. M T The electrical system is UL LISTED. X Electrical Systems Electrical In-Feeds Smartspace Electrical Systems Power in-feed cables deliver power from building to panel's electrical system. Smartspace offers a choice of two electrical systems: In-feed cables are housed in conduit to separate electrical system from • Four-circuit,3+1 communications and data lines. • Four-circuit,2+2 Select quantity of base or ceiling in-feed cables depending on Both systems utilize an 8-wire electrical system,rated at 20 amps per individual power requirements. circuit(15 amps Canadian). Floor or Ceiling Power In-feed Electrical components are UL Listed.Electrical components are also M-SS144-(144"Long)Conduit is UL listed Black Liquid CSA certified. tight conduit.Outside diameter is'/e.M-SS144 connects Installation and use of the electrical system,the number of receptacles to building junction box and poles.Can be used with D used on a given circuit,and connections to the building power supply desk height power applications for a 12'ceiling. L/)/, should be in compliance with all local and national electrical codes. Floor or ceiling power in-feed connects to a prewired electrical harness in the trough,traverses through an adjacent trough,and terminates in the junction box at the top of the ::E Hardwire Junction Box-New York Code{page 157) integrated power pole. SO • `Hardwire(New York Code) Use integrated power pole model M-SSPP125. c junction box(model M-EPFX)is o Most codes allow flex conduit to be exposed after installation.Verify CZ used when local electrical codes code requirements before ordering for exposed application. D require hardwire entry. Integrated Power/Communication Pole Ln • <Must be mounted to underside of trough. Integrated power pole accommodates ceiling power in-feed and communication/data lines. Hardwire Chicago Code(page 157) Provide capacity for routing power z Wring Harnesses and snap connectors are not allowed in-feed and cables to the base pathway of a D in Chicago—trough must be comprised of all metallic panel. z components. Double cavity,plus conduit of In-Feed Cable • The junction box(model M-ECH1)clips directly into serves as the division of electrical and communications cabling. o receptacle locations for single sided applications. • Customer must furnish conduit,wiring,and designer7type Installs into Double Depth receptacles for the trough. Integrated power pole includes trim kit. • Field-cut to desired length. 0• Power entry can be routed from the ceiling,via Smartspace outside Dimension:2"square. m power pole;or from the floor into a junction box(model When using a ceiling power in-feed,consider that M M-ECH1). the in-feed must connect into an electrical harness • Junction box can be positioned at an duplex adjacent receptacle located in an acenttrough. integrated Power and p y P. p 1 Communications Pole location. To power the prewired electrical system,from Cannot be used in back-to-back applications. a ceiling power source,a ceiling in-feed cable,M-SS144 must be D purchased separately. � Specify Fabric or Glass screen.Screen will need to be one size smaller Z to avoid interference with power pole. Not available in Platinum or Gunmetal paint finishes. D n n m Ln Ln m Ln Z O m x maxon, 1149 Smartspace" Benching System EXHIBIT GSA SIN 711-2 w U z To Order: w Cr w 1. Determine which electrical system you 2. Determine location,quantity,and circuit * Select Double Block Harness(M-EHXX), w will use after consulting your electrician of duplexes. Single Block Harness(M-EPSXX),and °C and computer support personnel: 3. Determine the appropriate choice and Pass-Thru Harness(M-EPXX)with the • The four-circuit system use of isolated,isolated/dedicated. last two digits corresponding with (4-Hot/2-Neutral/2-Ground) 4.Specify appropriate power harnesses* the worksurface width into which the � — 3+1 option and pass-thru cables.* component is to be positioned. W — 2+2 option 5. Determine the location,quantity,and 2 type of power in-feed needed. w Electrical System Options X The four-circuit,eight-wire electrical system is widely specified and trusted by hundreds of thousands of end-users.This proven system w delivers four circuits for every power in-feed in either a 3+1 or 2+2 configuration.The isolated/dedicated circuits are ideal for sensitive computing equipment,while the common circuits are suitable for faxes,copiers,task lights and other peripherals.Both the 3+1 and 2+2 systems use the same prewired components,making it easy to adjust as electrical needs change. Four-circuit,3+1 Receptacle Option 1 2 3 4 0 The 3+1 option is the electrical standard used on Maxon 1„ systems for many years in most installations.This wiring C option provides three utility circuits plus an isolated/ 2 dedicated circuit for more sensitive equipment.Circuit 2(one ,D 1 4 of the 3 common circuits sharing a neutral wire)cannot be Hot Wire Hot Wire used with single-phase building electrical supply. w 2 V Hot Wire CIRCUIT4 DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ISOLATED/ G - CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 2 CIRCUIT 3 DEDICATED Yo 0 Hot Wire D D O o 0V V V V 3: L__0 GRAY 0 NEUTTRRALAL-2 12 GA Neutral Neutral WHITE ONEU -1 OGA w GRN/YLW D ISOLATED 12GA cc GRN/BARE GROUND 12 GA Q PINK Q HOT-4 12 GA W BLUE lEI HOT-3 12 GA RED 0 HOT-2 12GA d. Common Ground Isolated Ground BLACK O HOT-1 12 GA LU Four-circuit,2+2 Receptacle Option 1 2 3 4 O v 4 � . The 2+2 option is a wiring option that provides two utility circuits and two isolated circuits for more extensive computer usage applications. z 1 3 Q w Hot Wire Hot Wire DUPLEX RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT 3 CIRCUIT4 N 2 4 CIRCUIT CIRCUIT ISOLATED ISOLATED e o N Hot Wire Hot Wire D o D oV (P w_ 0- GRAY NEUTRAL-2 V '2GA 0 CWHITE NEUTRAL-1 10 GA V) Neutral 1 Neutral 2 GRN/YLW III ISOLATED t2 GA LU GRN/BARE 0 GROUND 12 GA V BLUE Q HOT-3 12 GA Q RED Q HOT-2 12 GA Common Ground Isolated Ground BLACK HOT-t 2 GA X LU M Z 1501 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace" Benching System M m Notes: M Smartspace Receptacle Usage Maxon Model Numbers are m z Two 8-wire,20 amp(15 amp Canadian electrical systems are offered printed on the UL labels,and n components are color-coded to m Electrical System Circuitry Receptacle Capacity provide visual identification of Common Common Common Iso/Dedicated the different components. 3+1 Circuit-1 Circuit-2(l) Circuit-3 circuit-4 Four-circuit components have m M-ED1 M-ED2 M-ED3 M-ED4 K Four-circuit black plastic parts. M 4-Hot/2-Neutral/2-Ground Common Common Isolated Isolated Gl 2+2 Circuit-1 Circuit-2 Circuit-3 Circuit-4 Duplex Receptacles m M-ED1 M-ED2 M-ED31) M-ED4 0 0 (1)Circuit 2(one of the 3 common circuits sharing a neutral wire)cannot be used with a single-phase o o building electrical supply. 15 amp Receptacle m m X Typical power usage by the most commonly specified office equipment. EQUIPMENT AMPS EQUIPMENT AMPS EQUIPMENT AMPS Computers Copiers Fax Machines Personal Compute.............................3 Desktop Copier...............................15 Inkjet Fax............................less than 1 ` Notebook Computer..........................3 Console Copier ...............................20 Plain Paper Fax..................................8 Monitors Copier/Duplicator............................30 Task Lights 13"Color Monitor.............................2 Printers 30"T5 Fluorescent...............0.12/bulb 17"Color Monitor.............................3 Inklet..................................less than 1 60"T5 Fluorescent...............0.24/bulb C 21"Color Monitor............................4 Personal Laser or LED........................8 7O D 15"Plasma Monitor.......................0.5 Workgroup Laser or LED..................15 � 20"Plasma Monitor..........................1 Source:Industry Analysis,Inc,Rochester,NY NC G O �L7 C D 3-Pack 1200 Electric N Specification Guide M B "' 36" 120 surface M-EPS24 M-EPS48 'T 42" 120 surface M-EPS24 M-EPS60 S 48" 120 surface M-EPS24 M-EPS72 t, , cn �� V) O M V) D z G) D n n m to N O m N Z O m X maxon• 1151 Smartspace'" Benching System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 W W Electrical Harnesses LUw Electrical power harnesses are Electrical Double Block Harness used to distribute power in Smartspace Troughs. Harness Electrical Double Block Harnesses are used to distribute power. power blocks snap directly onto Specify harness length to match worksurface width.All outlet W brackets in trough. Power blocks Placements are 12"from the edge of the worksurface. U) on electrical power harness and 24"power harness accepts one receptacle on each side of the W pass thru harness accept duplex harness,all other length power harnesses have power blocks to , receptacles. accept four duplex receptacles(two on each side of panel). Connectors at both ends of power harnesses allow power distri- bution in either direction. • Harness power blocks snap directly onto brackets in trough. X Single Block Pass-Thru Harness W LU or_ Electrical Double Block Harness Single Block Pass-Thru Harness with power block have capacity to handle one duplex receptacle on each side of the trough. Specify harness length to match worksurface width or combined worksurface widths. Power harnesses accept one duplex receptacle per panel side. j For use with 120'layouts. • Pass-Thrus are directional. Single Block Pass-Thru Harness Electrical Pass-Thru Harness • Specify harness length to match worksurface width or combined worksurface widths. Ln Electrical Pass-Thru Harnesses distribute power through any Electrical Pass-Thru Harness worksurface(s)where receptacles are not required.Cable length cannot be stretched. V Allows you to take power through a trough. • Duplex outlets cannot be used with M-EP Pass-Thru wiring. Pass-Thru runs from the receptacle location through the aconnection to next panels receptacle location. Pass-Thru wiring runs from 10"inside on trough,through the N connection and 10"into the next trough in the run. Y 0 W d W a W Q 0 LO N z Q W N V1 W K 0 V7 vN Uj U U Q x W z 1521 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace'" Benching System M m Receptacles Power/Data Modules—Clamp On Worksurface rn • Must be installed at time of initial worksurface m installation if installing between a worksurface °e z and panel. ® °� • M 6'Power cord.UL Listed. • The USB hub allows simultaneous powering of e Receptacle Color Recommended to Coordinate with Paint Color 2 USB-A devices.The USB hub is a charger only, rn no ability to connect to a PC.The charging capacity K Paint Color Receptacle Color is limited and may not charge all devices. Color finishes available:Storm(STRM)and Snow(SNW). • ,, Black— MPBL............................................................ Black — E4 Fits on any worksurface with a 4"overhang. Flint— MP02................................................................Flint — E9 Loft— MP7B.................................................................Loft — EV Greige— MPT5................................................ .......Muslin — EU Brownstone—MP7D......................................Brownstone — EY Power/Data Modules— Under Worksurface Muslin— MPT3........................................................Muslin — EU 6'Power cord.UL Listed. o T Gunmetal— MPR3.......................................... Brownstone — EY Color finishes available:Storm(STRM)and o • x Champagne—MPR5...............................................Muslin — EU Snow(SNW). • o� o ° Platinum— MPPL..................................................Titanium — TI Works with any top that has a 5"x 5"square White—MPWT..........................................Designer White — DW clearance. Duplex Receptacles Available with 3 integrated circuits 1,2,or 3(M-ED1,M-ED2, M-ED3)and 1 isolated circuit 4(M-ED4)or 2 integrated circuits Vertebrae 1 and 2(M-ED1,M-ED2)and 2 isolated circuits 3 and 4(M-ED3D, 30"H M-ED4). Can be mounted anywhere under trough. • Each duplex outlet receptacle is rated at 15 amps. N • Each circuit has a 20 amp maximum capacity(depending upon building wiring). D • Power-In Wiring(M-EPF2)plugs into Duplex Wiring Harness(M-EH or M-EPS)in place of a Duplex Outlet Receptacle. Ln • Duplex Outlets may be added at any time by removing the outlet cover plate and plugging the Duplex Outlet Receptacle into the Double or Single block harness. o • Isolated circuits are designated with an orange triangle. • Duplex receptacles snap into power blocks of Double Block and c Single Block harnesses. D • Each receptacle is labeled to indicate which circuit it will be r� connected to:1,2,3,or 4. v • Duplexes support either 3+1 and 2+2 electrical in-feed. v Power/Data Modules—Clamp On Worksurface A • 6'Power cord.UL Listed. D • Includes adapters to allow use of commercially DO m available data terminals or blanks to fill unused openings.Many of the AMP,AT&T,Krone,Leviton o and most commercial data terminals can be used. • Color finish available:Loft. 4 • Fits on any worksurface with a 4"overhang. 0 D G) m m D Z O D n n m Ln m Ln Z M m x maxon• 1153 Smartspace" Benching System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 w W Circuit Usage w Strategy 1 Strategy 2 Circuits to Equipment Circuits to Workstations Assign specific uses for each Assign specific workstations to each of the three available circuits. w of the circuits: Use circuit 4 for power-sensitive electronic equipment. For example,in a four-circuit system: w Circuit 1—Calculators,fans,etc. Circuit 2—Task lights(could be wired to wall switch) Circuit 3—CRT or flat screen monitors Circuit 4—CPUs X Placement of pedestals and lateral files may render some duplex zz locations inaccessible. Pedestal placement may also affect com- LU patibility with pull-up receptacles. Lay-in Cable Capacity • Smartspace Trough allows continuous voice and data lines to run between worksurfaces without interruption. • Lay-in is provided for environments where systems furniture or N cabling are subject to frequent change. a Z) V) Vertebrae: Data Cable Packing in Power Pole: LU 17 Cables,0.250 Diameter(CAT-6) 33 Cables,0.250 Diameter(CAT-6) V LLQ. D (N Y Cr 0 Single-Depth Cable Trough Cover Capacity: w 13 Cables,0.250 Diameter(CAT-6) nQ Cable Chain Capacity:14 cables,.250 diameter W CL �r 01> Q 0 "' Double-Depth Cable Trough Cover Capacity: To the Floor Wire Manager:26 cables,.250 diameter 14 Cable,0.250 Diameter(CAT-6) with pass through harness. i Ln To the Floor Wire Manager:42 cables,.250 diameter „ with electrical in-feed. w O wx X w O Z 1541 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace" Benching System See pages 149-154 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. M n Height-Adjustable Wire Manager m z n m Description Model Wt. Cubes List Height-Adjustable Wire Manager for Worksurface to Trough M-SSHAWTWML 3 0.1 367 m K M Gl m v z m m X Height-Adjustable Wire Management List List Core Premium Description Model Wt. Cubes Paint Paint Height-Adjustable Wire Management M-SSHATFWML 2 0.3 220 232 C z D O cn C T D n m v M m Jumper T. m Description Model Wt. Cubes List Jumper for End-of-Run HAB M-SSJUMP 2 0.3 220 Ln O M D m M m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY D n n Select Model Number v Ln O m V) Z "_ 1 X maxon, 1155 Smartspace" Benching System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 See pages 149-154 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U W Byrne Electrical Double Block Harness LU w L W Description Model W Wt. List Double Block Duplex Harness M-EH48 48" 3 307 w M-EH60 60" 4 328 M-EH72 72" 4 354 w NOTE:Electrical harnesses are intended for use with Maxon systems furniture and are approved under GSA SIN 711-1.When purchased separately and used without X Maxon systems furniture,those electrical harnesses are considered Open Market. LL a Byrne Single Block Pass-Thru Harness Description Model W Wt. List Single-Block Pass-Thru Harness M-EPS24 24" 1.5 186 v`ni M-EPS48 48" 2.6 244 a � M-EPS60 60" 3.1 271 M-EPS72 72" 4 303 I Ui W U Q ZD N Y 0 Byrne Electrical Pass-Thru Harness w Q Description Model W Wt. List a Pass-Thru Harness M-EP48 48" 2.3 215 M-EP60 60" 2.8 231 �O M-EP72 72" 4 258 (D 0 Ln I— z a w N W HOW TO SPECIFY o Select Model Number v'f Ln u U Q US X _� M Z 1561 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace'" Benching System See pages 149-154 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. z n Byrne Electrical Pass m Z ('1 m Description Model Wt. Cubes List Byrne Electric Duplex Outlet Circuit M-ED1 1 0.1 54 M-ED2 1 0.1 54 K M-ED3 1 0.1 54 IL M-ED3D 1 0.1 54 m M-ED4 1 0.1 54 v M m T X Byrne Chicago Outlet Box Description Model Wt. Cubes. List Chicago Outlet Box-Trough M-ECH1 1 0.1 131 Ln v D Ln N O ;)U 7K N Byrne New York Junction Box D n Description Model Wt. List Ln Power In-Feed NY Junction Box M-EPFX 0.5 318 v z m __� D O m Ln --I O D G) m Ln m D Z Gl HOW TO SPECIFY D r-� Select Model Number Select Paint Color M v, See page 5 O M V) Z M - � X maxon• 1157 Smartspace'" Benching System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 See pages 149-154 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U W Byrne Power-In Wiring w w w Description Model W Wt. List Power In-Feed for Smartspace M-SS144 7" 1.1 442 LU (D W w w X U_ LU Power Pole List _`List Description Model Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Power Pole M-SSPP125 14.3 0.7 598 630 Ln L � o V, N a Uj w U w U, Y Vertebrae w Q Description Model Wt. Cubes List a U-i Vertebrae M-SSVWM28 3 0.2 302 a w C7 ¢ 0 z Q (10 W HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln uSee page 5 U X 0 M z ' 1581 maxon' GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Smartspace'" Benching System See pages 149-154 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. z m Electrical Accessories x m Z n m Description Model Wt. Cubes List 2 Receptacles 1 U5B Under Worksurface MT(Shown) M-PWRMOD2UWM 2.3 0.2 621 3 Receptacles Under Worksurface Mt M-PWRMOD3UWM 2.3 0.2 430 G) .... _ M m Available in Storm(STRM)and Snow(SNW)paint only v 2 Receptacles 2 Data Accessory M-COMDOME2 2.5 0.2 451 T Available in Loft paint only 2 Receptacles 1 USB M-PWRMOD2WC 2.3 0.2 621 3 Receptacles(Shown) M-PWRMOD3WC 2.3 0.2 430 Available in(STRM)and Snow(SNW)paint onlyLn D Ln O 7z Ln C m D n m Ln m T. z m Ln O z D G) m N m z G) HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model;Number Select Paint Color N L2 See page 5 O m Ln 71 M maxon• 1159 Smartspace'" Benching System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 w V Z w w w w w C7 LU w w x w w a. !n N d ZD Ln to w V Q w Ln N Y O W Q d W W Q 0 H N 0 Z Q W N N W_ Ln N w W V V a x w 0 Z 1601 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass' Desking System M m M m ., m Z m �P :; m m m 77 ' _ --'--• as'z X Ln M T 7 Ln I t Ln M Surpass' Desking System m D M m Surpass freestanding desking offers solid construction with almost unlimited versatility and flexibility.You can build a private office, collaborative teaming station,or combine it with panels for more privacy.The heavy-duty steel construction and modular design means that Surpass can be reconfigured as your needs change and still perform in any office environment.Available in all of Maxon's fabrics and Ln finishes,Surpass will look good long after it's installed and in use.And,of course,it's backed by the Limited Lifetime Warranty. O D The double wall construction of Surpass support legs and steel modesty panels adds strength and durability throughout the system. M Impact-resistant,high-pressure laminate worksurfaces,are strong enough to endure years of day-to-day use,and are available in a wide selection of colors and wood-grain patterns.A wide variety of desk shapes and sizes means you will find the right fit no matter what your needs. M m Surpass offers straight steel hutch options with top-mounted hinged doors.The hutch accepts tackboards,task lights and personal D accessory rail components.Coordinating pedestal and lateral files, bookcases,storage towers and personal storage centers ensure the perfect solution for every storage need. D n P m LA Ln m Z M m X maxon• 1161 Surpass® Des king System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 w W Typicals w Please refer to our typicals gallery for all Maxon systems.www.maxonfurniture.com/design-resources/typicals.Here you can download LUCad files, BOM's with current pricing and PDF's of each drawing.Each month we add new ideas to support industry trends. Use the Maxon Typicals Gallery to find the components in Surpass workstations: w w w 28x60FT o �9 N x � �Cl� W �� v, OC N 2472 r u — s Q < a v � o �n x to G') LU w V Q -'1 Y 0 — SC54 LU Q U w SC CL w N O \ V I ` > A `` N TN1LLJ I ` Q V) W I DTI Ji n FTI w iY O V) V w V V a x w 0 z it 1621 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass® Desking System M m T O-Legs and Shared Support m epIIf Support Legs End Panels 0-Leg Stanchion cm;i m Modesty to Panel Mount Bracket Modesty Panels m X N Half Modesty Panel,Full Modesty Panel, Half Modesty Stand D Alone Corner, Full Modesty Stand Alone Corner. V) -v D n Hutches and Tackboards Desk Mounted Fabric Screen and Return Fabric Screen M �I L Hutch with standard flat front painted steel doors,Open shelf 13"H and 20"H, Desk Mounted Return Fabric Screen. hutch with open back,Tackboard for Hutch. 0 c Desk Mounted Glass Screen and Return Glass Screen Desk Dividing Full Privacy Screens v n In rn m D m Accessories L^ 0 _ M I=_- _ � m Hutch Accessory Desk Mounted Personal Shelf Letter Tray Binder Bin Diagonal Tray- Rail Accessory Rail (Non-handed)(3) V, m Fri G) File Pocket Paper Clip Small Paper Clip Tray Tool Box Wire Management D n Tray m V) Ln O m Ln Z 0 m X maxon, 1163 Surpass® Desking System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 w z End-Panel Support Flat Brackets wEnd panels are non-handed. Flat brackets can be used to connect one w End panels include attaching hardware and worksurface perpendicularly to another leveling glides. worksurface. • Leveling glides provide 21/4"of adjustment. Can support worksurfaces up to 48"W when not • End panels are universal,shipped with a left using an C-leg.See 0-leg comment in regards to the counter w and right-hand attachment bracket. top bracket. z End panels cannot be used for inline junctions w and are only used at the end of a run. O-Legs LL' Support Leg 281/2"High,2"Thick. ram; • Support legs are non handed. Available 20",24",30"Deep. Leg portion is 121/4"D and 11/e'Thick. 0 Legs are non-handed. • Supports junctions of two worksurfaces. Ships fully assembled with mounting hardware. LL • Includes a flat bracket and panel mount bracket. Levelers provide 2"vertical adjustment. Must use support legs at the seam of a corner Modesties and gussets will not attach to 0-Legs. a and rectangle surface when a corner leg and 28"H Pedestals should not be specified next to 0-Legs due to modesty panels is used. the leg attaching brackets. • Surpass universal support legs are used to support 24"D or LU u 30"D worksurfaces only in a shared position. Shared O-Legs a Must be panel mounted or specified with a modesty panel or 281/2" High,2"Thick. gussets. Available 12",20",24",30" Deep. • Panel mount bracket may be removed in freestanding Spans two worksurfaces to provide support with the g applications. look of a single C-leg. y ° N Support Column 12"deep should be used in conjunction with a • Used to support one end of curvilinear worksurfaces. Countertop Flat Bracket. Corner Desk Leg 30"deep will have a 6"overhang when used with a 36"D • Attaches two modesty panels at rear of corner desk. worksurface. • Leveler provides 11/2"vertical adjustment. Modesties and gussets will not attach to 0-Legs. • Must be used with modesty panels or gussets. Levelers provide 2"vertical adjustment. Bridge Kit Double Depth O-Legs u Connects bridge worksurface and modesty panel to 281/2"High,2"Thick. end panels and worksurfaces that are perpendicular Available 48",60" Deep. to the bridge worksurface. For use in back to back applications.Ln I. • Includes two flat brackets and two modesty Modesties and gussets will not attach to 0-Legs. 0 panel-to-end-panel brackets. Levelers provide 2"vertical adjustment. Add 12"to modesty panel. Return Kit Standing Height O-Legs �� w 41"High,2"Thick. f Connects return worksurface and modesty panel to end panel and perpendicular worksurface— non Available 24",30"Deep. ;'•,j II w Modesties and gussets will not attach to 0-Legs. f handed. Includes one flat bracket and one modesty panel-to- Levelers provide 2"vertical adjustment. N,-_ end-panel bracket. • Add 6"to modesty panel. Shared Standing Height O-Legs 1 J Desk-To-Panel Attachment Kit 41" High,2"Thick. c� Available 24",30"Deep. Q Used to connect a worksurface and modesty panel CC Modesties and gussets will not attach to 0-Legs. 0 perpendicularly to a Emerge or Prefix panel.Opposing Levelers provide 2"vertical adjustment. v1 end of worksurface must be attached with an end-panel, support leg or corner leg mounted directly under this O-Leg Stanchions worksurface. • 7"High,2"Thick. /y? • If using corner or L-Return with the rear corner attached Available 20",24",30" Deep. z to a panel,and opposing end of worksurface is attached to a For use with Include Low Credenzas. freestanding desk—use corner w/desk panel attachment kit. No glides on 0-leg Stanchion. w "Hand"of unit is determined from the user's side of the desk (left hand unit attaches to left side of modesty). Shared C-Leg Support Leg Corner w/Desk Panel Attachment Kit 4 29.5"High,31/8"Thick, 18"Deep. 4 Ln Used when the rear corner of a corner or L-Return Spans two worksurfaces to support inline worksurfaces. worksurface and modesty panel is attached to a Emerge Should not be used to support return surfaces adjacent i 0 or Prefix panel and opposing end of worksurface is to corners when a corner leg and modesty panels are > w attached to a freestanding desk.Opposing end of used. Q worksurface shares the support leg that is mounted Modesty panels or gussets can be used,but not required. under the adjacent freestanding desk. Levelers provide 1"vertical adjustment. • "Hand"of unit is determined from the user's side of the desk. Example: right hand unit attaches to right hand modesty. End Support and Bridging Bracket w If corner surface ends in a Full End Panel on opposite end End panels and bridging brackets are symmetrical and may be 0 of bracket,a Stand Alone Corner Modesty Panel must be used for right-or left-hand support at any time. specified. 1641 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass® Desking System z m Modesty Panel Peninsula Modesty Panel m • Mounts to end-panel supports,desk support legs, Mounts under peninsula,p-shape,and Grand m bridge kit, return kit,desk-to-panel and corner w/ Peninsula worksurfaces. z desk panel attachment kits. Can be used with panel-mounted and M • 291/2"H units provide 1/4"of space between bottom freestanding worksurfaces. of modesty panel and floor. Provides 81/2"of privacy and is non-handed. • 14"H half modesty units provide 141/4"of space Constructed of steel. K between bottom of modesty panel and floor. Only requires attachment to the worksurface. � • Use 14"H half modesty panels for desks positioned against a Does not provide electrical,data or structural support. m wall to provide access to electrical receptacles. Panel is 11/2"thick and can be mounted at various distances • 14"H half modesty panels,stand-alone corner modesty panels from edge of worksurface based on user's preference for or gussets can be used with corner or L-Return worksurfaces. clearance and conferencing requirements. • Refer to pages 166-168 to select proper width. • Modesty panels are inset 21/s";when adding pedestals,consult Peninsula Modesty Panels for Surpass WorksurFaces m the chart below. Peninsula P-Shape Grand Peninsula —n X Model 60% 66"L 72"L 72"L 66"L 72"L Stand-alone Corner Modesty Panel M-MDPM54 • Use only when freestanding one or both sides of a corner or L-Return worksurface(end of corner ends r. M-MDPM60 in a full end panel). M-MDPM66 D • Specify width the same as width of worksurface. • See examples on pages 166-168 on how to D specify. M m • 291/2"H units provide 1/4"of spacing between bottom of panel and floor. • 14"H half modesty units provide 141/4'of space between bottom of modesty panel and floor. • Actual width of modesty panel is 61/16" less than the nominal dimension listed below. • Modesty panels are inset 21/s";when adding pedestals,consult the chart below. O z Gussets • Comes as a pair of non handed brackets. • Can be used in place of a modesty panel with desks 36"W to 60"W. M Ln • Provides easy access to wall outlets. • Can be used with corner desks. v • Modesty panels are inset 21/8";when adding m pedestals,consult the chart below. D • Gussets are inset 21/8";when adding pedestals,consult the 70 chart below. Pedestal Compatibility with Surpass Desking and Systems Worksurfaces Pedestal Depth 24"Deep 30"Deep 0 18" Yes Yes D 20" Yes* Yes m 24" Yes *Wire management grommet is blocked in these applications. Note;Pedestal placement may affect access to receptacles in base pathway. m Z G) D n M m VI VI m Ln Z M m X maxon• 1165 Surpass® Desking System EXHIBIT GSA SIN 711-2 W U w Working with Surpass ,LL End Panels©and Support Legs 0 Return Brackets 0 °C Each are available in two options:freestanding or panel-mount. Return brackets include:one flat bracket,one modesty panel-to- The only difference between the two options are the panel- end panel attachment bracket,and one tie strap.These are used mount models come with a left-or right-handed bracket to attach when attaching a return to a primary desk.Return brackets can 0 the support to a panel in a Surpass systems application.If the also be used in some bridge applications—one example is shown ,LU freestanding version is purchased and later needs to be converted below when using a peninsula. L2 to panel-mount,the proper handed panel-mount bracket may be purchased separately. © m The 12"D end panel is used to freestand peninsulas,curvilinear X shapes,and D-tops in panel applications. w Corner Desk Legs Corner desk legs have a 90°bend and welded construction.The strong construction allows gussets or half-height modesty panels to U be used with corner legs. aQ Ln Bridge Brackets 0 m Q Bridge brackets include:two flat brackets,two modesty panel-to- p Nend panel attachment brackets,and two tie straps.This bracket is used when attaching a bridge unit between two rectangular worksurfaces.Bridge surface can be a max of 48"W before floor support is needed. m m © m am Desk-to-Panel Attachment Brackets Q Desk-to-panel attachment brackets are used to connect a N worksurface and modesty panel perpendicular to a panel of z ® m corresponding width.Opposing end of worksurface must be 0 attached with an end-panel,support leg,or corner leg mounted m directly under this worksurface. QWhen using a corner or L-return worksurface with the rear corner a attached to a panel,and opposing end of worksurface is attached to a freestanding desk,use corner w/desk attachment bracket. Hand of unit is determined from the user's side of the desk(right hand unit attaches to right side of modesty). w There are some bridge instances where only half of a bridge o bracket is needed(e.g. using a bridge between a rectangular worksurface and a corner or peninsula).A return bracket may be ordered for these instances. 0 Surface© ® 0r z Support Column 4M Support columns are used to support one end of curvilinear N worksurfaces.Includes column,worksurface bracket M-MDPC29, © 0 attaching hardware,and adjustable glides. Ln UJ 0 w U U Q X w Z 1661 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass® Desking System z m Corner with Desk Panel Attachment Bracket(0) Modesty Panels© m Corner w/desk panel attachment bracket connects the rear corner The following are some general guidelines for Surpass z of a corner or corner cove worksurface and modesty panel to a modesty panels: m panel when the opposing end of the worksurface shares a support Desk:Modesty panel width is the same width as the leg with an adjacent freestanding desk and the support leg is worksurface mounted under the freestanding desk.Hand of unit is determined Return:Modesty panel width is M+6"greater than the width m from the user's side of the desk(left hand unit attaches to left side of the worksurface K of modesty). Bridge connecting two rectangular worksurfaces:Modesty 70 panel width is M+12"greater than the width of the bridge m worksurface Corner with Desk Bridge connecting a rectangular worksurface and corner or M-MDCWD29L peninsula:Modesty panel width is 6"greater than the width of the worksurface • Corner connecting to an adjacent worksurface:Modesty panel M width is the same width as the worksurface. X © Stand-Alone Corner Modesty Panels m © Stand-alone corner modesty panels are used only when one Ln m m or both sides of a corner or L-return worksurface are freestanding and NOT attached to another worksurface. o © Specify the width the same as the width of the worksurface. D 0 M © © v m If no shared leg "L", use "D" not"CW",see previous page. Corner Worksurfaces Corner worksurfaces to accommodate 90'corner desk legs. In-Line Connections of Desks 0 Freestanding full end panels must be used to support adjacent Ln 7Z rectangular desks,corner desks,and corner desks with returns. A Freestanding support legs should NOT be used at the inline D junction.24"D full end panels may be used at the inline junction © m M Ln on 30"D rectangular desks if two worksurface tie straps are used to secure the desks together. © M e m © M Gussets O Ln Gussets can be used in place of a modesty panel with desks 36"W o to 60"W.Gussets can also be used with corner desk legs. M Shared C-Leg M-MDSL29 O N m D a� z 100 O Gl Pedestals and Storage Pedestals must be ordered one size smaller than the depth of 0 M the worksurface.For example,20"D peds should be used with 0 N 24"D worksurfaces.20"D or 23"D pedestals can be used with 0 � FF 30"D worksurfaces. Using 18"D laterals or personal files provide Ln additional pull style and storage options under 24"D worksurfaces. z 0 m x maxon• 1167 Surpass® Desking System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 W U W Working with Surpass O-Legs Ui w O-Leg Support 0 Double Depth O-Leg Support •' Does not require additional support,such as modesty panel or Will support two worksurfaces in a back-to-back benching applica- gusset.Will only support the ends of worksurfaces. Non-handed tion.No additional support is needed. Ui and comes fully assembled. o O-Leg Stanchion Support W Only used on Include low credenzas at the end of worksurfaces. 0 • o X p O O ee e� aCountertop Flat Bracket Ln To be used on returns with 0-Legs that are 42"or less. • • a Standing O-Leg Support • V) Supports worksurfaces at a standing height.Does not require additional support,such as modesty panel or gusset.Will only support the ends of worksurfaces. Non-handed and comes fully • assembled. Standing Shared O-Leg Support \ The only difference between Standing Height 0-Leg and Standing Shared 0-leg,is shared will span two worksurfaces. Ln u Surface© Shared O-Leg Support The only difference between 0-Leg and Shared O-Leg,is shared will � span two worksurfaces. V Y 0 o W O LU W � a Shared C-Leg Support 0 0 Will span two worksurfaces.Modesty panels or gussets can be • v~i used in a freestanding application without additional support. ® 0 � o z e W a V) o w 0 Ln U_, v v Q X w 0 Z 1681 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass® Desking System Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. All Dimensions are Actual.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URW2448N.Arrow on worksurface notes woodgrain direction. m Rectangular Worksurface: Edgeband M Z List List M Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Ll L2--] m M With Grommets � M-URW2024 20" 24" 21 1.6 301 323 m Rectangular Worksurface,20"D M-URW2030 20" 30" 25 1.9 327 355 O O M-URW2036 20" 36" 31 2.2 341 373 M-URW2042 20" 42" 43 2.6 365 403 v D M URW2048 20" 48" 45 2.9 390 434 m M-URW2054 20" 54" 47 3.2 416 466 x W M-URW2060 20" 60" 52 3.6 442 497 M-URW2066 20" 66" 67 3.9 464 524 M-URW2072 20" 72" 74 4.2 485 550 D V) D Rectangular Worksurface,24"D M-URW2424 24" 24" 22 1.9 329 351 M m O O M-URW2430 24" 30" 26 1.9 345 373 M-URW2436 24" 36" 32 2.3 370 402 D M-URW2442 24" 42" 44 2.7 386 424 M-URW2448 24" 48" 46 3 420 464 W M-URW2454 24" 54" 48 3.7 438 488 M-URW2460 24" 60" 53 3.7 460 515 M-URW2466 24" 66" 68 4.4 501 561 M-URW2472 24" 72" 75 4.4 543 608 N c m D n Rectangular Worksurface,30"D M-URW3024 30" 24" 27 1.9 370 398 Ln 0 o M-URW3030 30" 30" 39 2.4 386 420 M-URW3036 30" 36" 45 2.8 413 453 A D M-URW3042 30" 42" 47 3.2 430 478 D M-URW3048 30" 48" 52 3.6 460 515 :;a m W M-URW3054 30" 54" 59 4.6 480 542 M-URW3060 30" 60" 63 4.6 502 570 M-URW3066 30" 66" 72 5.5 543 618 Ln M-URW3072 30" 72" 80 5.5 586 668 O z D M m V) m —D-I Z Gl HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color M No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 1Y." O J(no upcharge) 22Edgeband N See page 10 I '�' I ' I �• �' o maxon• 1169 Surpass Des king System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. w All Dimensions are Actual.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URW2448N.Arrow on worksurface notes woodgrain direction. u w Wedge Worksurface: Edgeband LU w w w List List LU Description Model Depth Depth W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 C7 z w With Grommets Wedge Worksurface 20"L/24"R M-UTWD482024 20" 24" 52" 47 3.4 491 535 M-UTWD542024 20" 24" 58" 52 3.8 534 584 W 1 T M-UTWD602024 20" 24" 64" 55 4.1 587 642 O O M-UTWD662024 20" 24" 70" 64 4.5 640 700 x DL W DR M-UTWD722024 20" 24" 76" 72 4.9 693 758 W a User Edge u Wedge Worksurface 24"L/20"R M-UTWD482420 24" 20" S2" 47 3.4 491 535 na N M-UTWD542420 24" 20" 58" 52 3.8 534 584 z W T M-UTWD602420 24" 20" 64" 55 4.1 587 642 Q I 2 O O M-UTWD662420 24" 20" 70" 64 4.5 640 700 N DL DR M-UTWD722420 24" 20" 76" 72 4.9 693 758 1 1 User Edge Wedge Worksurface 24"L/30"R M-UTWD482430 24" 30" 52" 48 4.1 524 579 W M-UTWD542430 24" 30" 58" 54 4.6 574 636 Ln i CD O M-UTWD602430 24" 30" 64" 57 5 645 713 < M-UTWD662430 24" 30" 70" 66 5.5 698 773 DL l DR M-UTWD722430 24" 30" 76" 74 6 757 839 Ln ce ce 1 1 0 User Edge U-1 Wedge Worksurface 30"L/24"R M-UTWD483024 30" 24" 52" 48 4.1 524 579 W M-UTWD543024 30" 24" 58" 54 4.6 574 636 I O CDi M-UTWD603024 30" 24" 64" 57 5 645 713 Cl- M-UTWD663024 30" 24" 70" 66 5.5 698 773 DL < DR M-UTWD723024 30" 24" 76" 74 6 757 839 W 1 1I User Edge O I— N C7 Z Q Ln w vi W HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color Ln kn LU No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 J L) (no upcharge) Q Edgeband See page 10 LU x � z I "' I 1701 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass® Desking System Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. All Dimensions are Actual.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URW2448N.Arrow on worksurface notes woodgrain direction. m Straight-Front Corner Worksurface: Edgeband m Z Includes m • Straight-front corner worksurface. • Rear Supporting Bracket. m K m List List ;o G) m Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 With Grommets Straight Front Corner,24"D M-USCW2436 24" 36" 46 3.4 701 751 z M-USCW2442 24" 42" 59 3.3 724 792 T 0 M-USCW2448 24" 48" 72 5.7 956 1044 x w Ln Ln N D D n m 1 User Edge Straight Front Corner,30"D M-USCW3042 30" 42" 76 4.4 935 1003 M-USCW3048 30" 48" 77 5.7 1014 1102 O� w O 0 C n m D User Edge v M m D z m Corner worksurfaces with Straight Leading Edge 36" 42" 48" 42" 48' O 24"D 24" 24" 24" 30 36" 42 48„ 30"D 42" 48" G) m 24" f 17" 253/e" 24" 30�� / 34" 24" 17" 253/e" 30" m Z M HOW TO SPECIFY D n Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color rri Ln cn No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 0 (no upcharge) J Edgeband Ln See page 10 ___ 1 ' m 0 X maxon* 1171 Surpass® Desking System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. w All Dimensions are Actual.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URW2448N.Arrow on worksurface notes woodgrain direction. U w Radius-Front Corner Worksurface: Edgeband w w Includes Radius-front corner worksurface. • Rear Supporting Bracket. w (D cc LU List st w Description Model Depth Radius W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 With Grommet x Radius Front Corner,24"Depth M-URCW2436 24" 11" 36" 46 3.4 701 751 LL- LU W M-URCW2442 24" 17" 42" 59 3.3 724 792 n i O M-URCW2448 24" 17" 48" 72 5.7 956 1044 D Qcc 1 cc Q Radius N D — Radius Front Corner,30"Depth M-URCW3042 30" 11" 42" 76 4.4 935 1003 w i M-URCW3048 30" 17" 48" 77 5.7 1014 1102 O I U Q D w Y 1 D Radius w or Q a w or Q. Corner Worksurfaces with Radial Leading Edge LU 36" 42" 48" 42" 48" 0 24"D 24"E 36 24" 42 24" 30"D 30" 42 30" Ln 48" 48" / 24" 10112" Radius 24" 30" C7 for all Corner Worksurfaces 24 30" z with Radial Leading Edge Q w W HOW TO SPECIFY or Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color o w No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 tu" (no upch'arge) Q Edgeband See page 10 w 0 M - Z 1721 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass® Desking System Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. All Dimensions are Actual.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URW2448N.Arrow on worksurface notes woodgrain direction. :)o m L-Return Radius Front Worksurface: Edgeband rri m Includes z n • L-return radius front worksurface. M • Rear Supporting Bracket. List List m Description Model D L W Wt. Cubes LI L2 M m With Grommets L-Return Worksurface Left-Hand,24",36"W M-ULRL243660 60" 24" 36" 54 5.4 854 936 i L M-ULRL243672 72" 24" 36" 63 6.4 899 997 -00 0 M m m D x 1 W Radius D Ln Ln L-Return Worksurface Left-Hand,24",48"W M-ULRL244860 60" 24" 48" 75 7.1 899 1031 n m L M-ULRL244872 72" 24" 48" 86 8.5 937 1047 i o 0 D 1 w Radius O D 7z L-Return Worksurface Right-Hand,24",36"W M-ULRR243660 60" 24" 36" 54 5.4 854 936 ` ) c SO L M-ULRR243672 72" 24" 36" 63 6.4 899 997 D 0 o m cn D v W m D Radius m L-Return Worksurface Right-Hand,24",48"W M-ULRR244860 60" 24" 48" 75 7.1 899 1031 N L M-ULRR244872 72" 24" 48" 86 8.5 937 1047 p 0 0 z D M W 1 Ln m Radius z D G7 HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color N Ln No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 i O (no upcharge) J Edgeband V) See page 10 �' z MI 1 �' M x maxon• 1173 Surpass® Desking System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. w All Dimensions are Actual.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URW2448N.Arrow on worksurface notes woodgrain direction. U w Radius End Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband w w w Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 (D F w With Grommets w Radius End Peninsula Worksurface,30"D M-URP3060 30" 60" 63 3.8 778 846 W M-URP3066 30" 66" 72 5.5 802 877 i M-URP3072 30" 72" 80 5.5 830 912 D oLL. < w 9= U Radius End Peninsula Worksurface,36"D M-URP3660 36" 60" 75 5.4 830 912 u a W M URP3666 36" 66" 80 6.4 860 950 Ln QM-URP3672 36" 72" 89 6.4 883 981 N D 0 L w U Ln Y 0 Cr a a w a. w a 0 Un 0 z a w w HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color O -1 v No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 U�J u (no upcharge) Q Edgeband See page 10 LU x (� z I '"' 1741 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass' Desking System Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. All Dimensions are Actual.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URW2448N.Arrow on worksurface notes woodgrain direction. m "P" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband m Z n m List List Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 m With Grommets A Left Hand P-Shaped Peninsula Worksurface,30"D M-UPPL3072 30" 72" 90 7.5 1173 1255 M m v 42" diameter i m 0 D X W Right-Hand P-Shaped Peninsula Worksurface,30"D M-UPPR3072 30" 72" 90 7.5 1173 12S5 D D n i m 42" diameter D 0 < 1 W O m D n m Ln m v D z m N O D Gl m V7 m Z Gl HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color M Lo No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 1 " (no upcharge) _j rn Edgeband N Seepage 10 z M M maxon, 1175 Surpass® Desking System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. w All Dimensions are Actual.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URW2448N.Arrow on worksurface notes woodgrain direction. U W Grand Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband of w LL w List ' ,List . w Description Model L D W Wt. Cubes Li L2 C7 LU w With Grommets w Left-Hand Grand Peninsula Worksurface M-UGPL244866 66" 24" 48" 84 8.5 1173 1293 L M-UGPL244872 72" 24" 48" 91 8.5 1223 1351 x LL w C � w 0 w U Q d N D Q Right-Hand Grand Peninsula Worksurface M-UGPR244866 66" 24" 48" 84 8.5 1173 1293 L M-UGPR244872 72" 24" 48" 91 8.5 1223 1351 0 w LU w U a LL Y O w w B B Cl- A D Left-Hand D D Right-Hand D A LU (D Q 12" Radius re C Top View C V) z a w N W HOW TO SPECIFY o Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color v No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 J" (no upcharge) U U Edgeband See page 10 LU z M I 1761 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass' Desking System Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. All Dimensions are Nominal. jO Worksurface Support Legs M m Includes Z n m • Legs and attaching hardware. • 28"H Pedestals should not be used next to 0-Legs due to the attaching brackets. m K List List m Gl Core Premium ^' Description Model H D Wt. Cubes Paint Paint End Panel Leg 12",24",30"W M-MDEP12 29.5" 12" 15 2.3 200 232 " M-MDEP24 29.5" 24 25 2.7 242 274 I _0 M-MDEP30 29.5" 30" 30 3.1 258 290 M m m X ' I Ln l Support Leg 24",30"W M-MDSL2429 29.5" 24" 25 1.1 212 238 K M-MDSL3029 29.5" 30" 25 1.1 223 249 D n m Shared C-Leg Support Leg M-MDSL29 29.5" 18" 18" 1.5 334 360 0 Ln 0-Leg 20",24",30"W M-SL20280 29.5" 20" 15 3.6 315 341 C z tM M-SL24280 29.5" 24" 17 3.6 327 353 D M-SL30280 29.5" 30" 19 5.3 338 364 N i x i IW i M m v Shared O-Leg 12",20",24",30"W M-SL1228SL 29.5" 12" 7 0.5 305 331 ::o m r M-SL2028SL 29.5" 20" 16.5 3.6 327 353 M-SL2428SL 29.5" 24" 18.7 3.6 348 374 M-SL3028SL 29.5" 30" 20.9 5.3 370 396 N o D O m Ln M Z G1 HOW TO SPECIFY D Select Model Number Select Paint Color n m Ln See page 5 L' O m M m X maxon• 1177 Surpass® Desking System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U W Worksurface Support Legs LU w w Includes • 1 Support Leg,support bracket and hardware. w List- List w Description Model H F 7 Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Standing Height 0-Leg 24",30"W M-SL24410 41" 24" 16 5.2 458 484 M-SL30410 41" 30" 17 6.4 522 548 x # i w Shared Standing Height 0-Leg 24",30"W M-SL2441SL 41" 24" 16 5.2 489 515 U M-SL3041SL 41" 30" 17 6.4 555 581 or � 3 Double Depth C-Leg 48",60"W M-SL48280 29.5" 48" 18 7 598 624 J1 M-SL60280 29.5" 60" 17 8.6 680 706 U) w U Q O-Leg Stanchion 20",24",30"W M-SCAW6520 6" 20" 5 0.9 217 224 Y M-SCAW6524 6" 24" 6 0.9 240 247 M-SCAW6530 6" 30" 7 0.9 261 268 00, a a w o. w a 0 z w w HOW TO SPECIFY cr Select Model Number Select Paint Color 0 Ln w See page 5 U U Q o 1M � - Z L� 1781 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass' Desking System Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. All Dimensions are Nominal. jo m -n External Table Top Support Channel 70 m z n m Description Model W Wt. Cubes List External Table Top Support Channel M-PPSC42 30" S.8 0.4 184 M-PPSC48 36" 5.8 0.4 190 K M-PPSC54 41" 6.6 0.4 244 M-PPSC60 48" 8.3 O.S 250 M M-PPSC72 60" 9.9 0.5 260 M-PPSC84 72" 11.5 0.5 270 v 7Q m m X External Support Channel Selection Guide SUPPORT COMBINATION Worksurface Width for Rectangle D —I SUPPORT 1 SUPPORT 2 72" 66" 60" 54" 0 D 0-Leg 0-Leg M-PPSC72 M-PPSC60 M-PPSC60 M-PPSC54 n 0-Leg Full End panel with Gusset M-PPSC72 M-PPSC60 M-PPSC60 M-PPSC54 Full End panel with Gusset Full End panel with Gusset M-PPSC72 M-PPSC60 M-PPSC60 M-PPSC54 0-Leg Pedestal M-PPSC60 M-PPSC60 M-PPSC54 Pedestal Full End panel with Gusset M-PPSC60 M-PPSC60 Pedestal Pedestal 0-Leg 2H Lat/PS O Pedestal 2H Lat/PS �)o Full End panel with Gusset 2H Lat/PS C T D n rn v M m v D A m O D M m m D z c� HOW TO SPECIFY n n Select Model Number M V) Ln O z m z IM X x maxon• 1179 Surpass® Desking System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. w All Dimensions are Actual. U W Peninsula Modesty Panels LU w W Includes • Modesty panel and mounting hardware. w List List w u' Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Peninsula Modesty Panel M-MDPM54 8.5" 41" 12.4 2.2 462 541 M-MDPM60 8.5" 47" 13.2 2.5 487 566 X / M-MDPM66 8.5" 53" 14.8 2.8 505 584 w LU /w M-MDPM72 8.5" 65" 16.4 3.1 530 609 v a to CQ G N Peninsula Column Leg List List w Core Premium u Description Model H W Wt. Cubes paint Paint Q Peninsula Column Leg M-MDPC29 28" 7" 28 1 150 182 Ln O w Q a w a - w C� Q O F CD Z Q w vn w HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln W See page 5 U v x Ui z �' 1801 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass® Desking System Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. All Dimensions are Nominal. 7O m Return Bracket m Includes z n • Flat Bracket,modesty panel-to-end-panel bracket. M List List" m Core Premium K Description Model W Wt. Cubes paint Paint M Maxon Desking Return Kit Support M-MDCRK29 6 0.4 126 158 m v M m T X N D Bridge Bracket Un Includes • 2 flat brackets,2 modesty panel-to-end-panel brackets. M List List Core Premium Description Model W Wt. Cubes Paint Paint Maxon Desking Bridge Kit Support M-MDCBK29 10 0.4 200 232 O C T n m U Ln M m Corner Leg D m List List Description Model W Wt. Cubes Core Premium p Paint Paint Maxon Desking Corner Leg Support M-MDCDL29 7 0.4 126 158 A D G) m V) m 'D{ Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Paint Color N V1 See page 5 O m V) Z O maxon• 1181 Surpass Des king System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. W All Dimensions are Nominal. U w Flat Brackets LU w w w Description Model W Wt. Cubes List Flat Bracket M-FB24 24" 3 0.3 62 LU (D M-FB30 30" 5 0.8 89 w wAvailable in Charcoal finish only x LL w Gusset Bracket Includes w U 1 Gusset Bracket Set(2 brackets non-handed) a V) z Q List list Description Model Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Gusset Bracket M-MDPG 5 0.6 114 146 L w U Q W V) Y 0 W d W O.. W tD Q C 0 N z Q W N ., HOW TO SPECIFY w Select Model Number Select Paint Color 0 Ln w See page 5 U U Q x 1821 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass® Desking System Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. All Dimensions are Nominal. 7O m M Full Modesty Panel - Standard m Z n List List m Core Premium Description Model W Wt. Cubes Paint Paint m Full Modesty Panel M-MDMP24FP 24" 8 2.1 150 182 K M-MDMP30FP 30" 10 2.6 161 193 :;0 C) M-MDMP36FP 36" 12 3.1 179 211 m M-MDMP42FP 42" 13 3.6 184 216 M-MDMP48FP 48" 14 4 189 221 M-MDMP54FP 54" 16 4.5 200 232 -0 M-MDMP60FP 60" 17 5 208 240 T M-MDMP66FP 66" 19 5.5 218 250 x M-MDMP72FP 72" 20 7.4 229 261 Half Modesty Panel - Standard -) List List D n m Description Model W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Pain Paint Half Modesty Panel M-MDMP24HP 24" 6 2.1 138 170 M-MDMP30HP 30" 8 2.6 150 182 M-MDMP36HP 36" 10 3.1 167 199 M-MDMP42HP 42" 11 3.6 172 204 M-MDMP48HP 48" 12 4 179 211 M-MDMP54HP 54" 14 4.5 189 221 ,0 M-MDMP60HP 60" 15 5 195 227 C M-MDMP66HP 66" 17 5.5 208 240 D M-MDMP72HP 72" 18 7.4 218 250 Mn Panel Mount Bracket - Standard m 11 Includes � • 1 Panel Mount Bracket, Right or Left Hand.Additional Support Worksurface Bracket included. m List List Ln Core Premium 0 Description Model Wt. Cubes :' p Paint Paint Panel Mount Bracket M-MDPMBLH 3 0.2 136 168 M M-MDPMBRH 3 0.2 136 168 m z HOW TO SPECIFY D n Select Model Number Select Paint Color N Ln See page 5 0 m Z M 0 maxon• 1183 Surpass® Desking System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 Reference pages 162-168 for Surpass specification information. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U W Full Modesty Stand-Alone Corner w LL W List. List Description Model Fw7 Wt. Cubes Core Premium W Paint Paint Full Modesty Stand Alone Corner M-MDMPC36F 36" 12 3.1 195 227 LU M-MDMPC42F 42" 13 3.6 208 240 W M-MDMPC48F 48" 14 4 218 250 M-MDMPC60F 60" 17 5 229 261 M-MDMPC72F 72" 20 7.4 253 285 x U_ w a LU Half Modesty Stand-Alone Corner Q List List —]— Description Model W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Half Modesty Stand Alone Corner M-MDMPC36H 36" 62 3.1 184 216 M-MDMPC42H 42" 63 3.6 195 227 • M-MDMPC48H 48" 65 4 208 240 M-MDMPC60H 60" 15 5 218 250 N / M-MDMPC72H 72" 18 7.4 242 274 w Ln W Ln o Panel Mount Bracket - Stand-Alone Corner List List LU a Description Model Wt. Cubes Core Premium w Paint Paint Panel Mount Bracket M-MDCWD29L 5 0.4 140 172 j M-MDCWD29R 5 0.4 140 172 W lD p 1 F- Z Q w W HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln Ln LU See page 5 v U Q x w T IMI - Z 111-111 - 1841 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass' Desking System rn m Hutches, Screens and Accessories Hutch with Open Lower Back Desk Mounted Fabric Screens and Return Fabric Screens n Overall hutch height is 341/8". 1/4"thick tackable fabric. • On 36"-48"hutches,there is one door which Available 13"H and 20"H. includes one lock core. Attaches to top and side of worksurface with m • 60"W and 72"W hutches have 2 doors with �, adhesive banding. 2 locks keyed alike. Surfaces must be cleaned prior to adhering the A • Includes hardware for hutch assembly,double screen and must be left to cure for 24 hours G) sided tape and screws to attach to worksurface. without touching for best adhesion. M • End Panel acts as a wire manager-additional cord covers are Screen can be the same size or smaller that the worksurface it not required. is being attached to. • Order hutch to match width of worksurface(s)it covers. Return screens are used perpendicular to standard desk • Must be supported by floor support on both ends. screens. z • Cannot be supported by a flat bracket,return or bridge kit. Return screens are 2"short of nominal so as not to interfere ter^., • Hutches have a height clearance of 191/4"for computers,etc. with the primary desk screen. X • Depth dimensions 141/2"includes thickness of door,inside Depth listed in pricer is nominal. binder depth 121/4. See chart for actual dimensions. • Hutches are shipped easy-to-assemble. �^ • Accommodates recessed task lighting(specified separately). Desk Mounted Glass Screen D • Available in Frosted Glass only. ; Open Shelf Hutch with Open Lower Back Ships complete with attachment brackets. Ln • Overall hutch height is 361/8". Can be used with Prepare Height-Adjustable • Includes hardware for open shelf hutch Bases. m assembly,double sided tape and screws to (' Attaches on back edge of worksurface with attach to worksurface. I. 1/8"D brackets.Brackets are secured with • End Panel acts as a wire manager-additional screws to underside of worksurface. cord covers are not required. Cannot be specified on seam of surfaces that share a support • Order open shelf hutch to match width of worksurface it leg under the surface.Bracket will interfere. covers. • Must be supported by floor support on both ends. Desk Mounted Return Glass Screens • Cannot be supported by a flat bracket, return or bridge kit Available in Frosted Glass only. • Hutches have a height clearance of 201/16"for computers,etc. Return Glass Screens are intended to be attached O • Depth dimensions 131/8",inside binder depth 121/4. between users sitting side-by-side but will create N • Hutches are shipped easy-to-assemble. 1/a"spacing between the worksurfaces.Please • Accommodates recessed task lighting(specified separately). consider Creep if using in a panel-wrapped y application. nrn Hutch Tackboard N -' Ships complete with attachment brackets. • Use tackboard to close the back of hutch or open Return Glass Screens attach to top and edge of worksurface shelf below storage unit. with adhesive banding. � • Due to width of fabric roll,72"W tackboards are m available in railroad cut only. Surfaces must be cleaned prior to adhering the screen and must D • Can be used with hutch accessory rail. be left to cure for 24 hours without touching for best adhesion. m Hutch Accessory Rail Desk Dividing Full Privacy Screens • To be use with the Hutch or Open Shelf. __ = ' Available in Frosted Acrylic only. • Dividing Full Privacy Screens extends 13"above and cn • Can be used with Hutch Tackboard. -_— — • Accessory rail 5' high and provides a continuous full-width slot 13"below the worksurface. o for mounting personal accessory components.for complete with attachment brackets. D • Attachment bracket extend 2"into the worksurface. ,M Storage Hutch Specifications Can be used with Prepare Height-Adjustable Bases. • Storage Hutches are 353/4" high x 14"deep and,when installed, Desk Mounted Accessory Rail have a floor to top-of-hutch height of 65".The vertical side supports are constructed of 20 gauge formed steel.All hutches Accessory rail 5"high and provides acontinuous -- D have a matching width,fully enclosed storage bin.Hutch bin full-width slot for mounting personal accessory. z • 7/2"from surface to bottom of rail. bases and lids are constructed of 16 gauge formed steel.All m points of connection in the assembly are steel-to-steel for Attaches to back edge of worksurface by with added strength and durability. screws. • Can be used with fabric screens. • Surpass Hutches will accept task lights.Accessory Rails are also n available for use with the hutches to accommodate our Cannot be used back to back on the same screen. Mn complete line of paper management trays,bins,and other o storage components. :;a • 60-72" hutches have two doors with two locks automatically N keyed alike. • Hutch doors may be keyed-alike to match floor pedestal or lateral file lock.Refer to page 339 for details z 0 X X maxorr 1185 Surpass® Desking System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 Reference page 185 for Surpass specification information. Uj All Dimensions are Nominal. U w Hutch Ui w w w List ; List 11 Description Model TW Wt. Cubes Core Premium O Paint Paint w Hutch with standard flat front painted steel doors, M-MDH01536E 36" 59 3.1 1228 1292 w and open lower back M-MDH01542E 42" 63 3.1 1306 1370 M-MDH01548E 48" 67 3.9 1370 1434 M-MDH01560E 60" 76 4.7 1760 1824 X I. l M-MDH01566E 66" 81 5.1 1819 1883 w M-MDH01572E 72" 87 5.1 1885 1949 w w U Q Q Open Shelf Hutch ListList Description Model TW Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Open shelf hutch with open back M-MD5036E 36" 34 5.1 831 895 M-MDS042E 42" 35 5.8 875 939 M-MD5048E 48" 37 6.6 913 977 w LL M-MD5060E 60" 41 8.1 995 1059 M-MDS066E 66" 44 8.9 1037 1101 M-MDS072E 72" 46 9.7 1079 1143 O w d w a w C7 Q O l7 Ln Z Q w W HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Paint Color in w See page 5 u u Q o I "' z 1861 maxon, GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass® Desking System Reference page 185 for Surpass specification information. All Dimensions are Nominal. m -n Hutch Lock A m Z Includes m • Each Lock Core Kit includes one core and core removal tool,two keys and instructions. m Description Model Wt. Cubes List M m z Lock Core Kit M-LC 0.1 0.1 39 m v Master Key(1) M-MK 0.1 0.1 25 m M X C/1 D v D Hutch Tackboard m List List Description Model W Wt. Cubes Grade A Grade B Premium Fabric Fabric Paint Tackboard for Hutch M-MDHT1536 36" 9 1.7 387 403 451 M-MDHT1542 42" 10 2 410 426 474 M-MDHT1548 48" 11 2.3 422 438 486 M-MDHT1560 60" 13 2.8 454 470 518 �^ C i M-MDHT1566 66" 14 3.1 479 498 543 D M-MDHT1572 72" 15 1.7 491 510 555 n m v M m D M m HOW TO SPECIFY Select Hutch Lock Model Number Key Number O z D m M M z Gl HOW TO SPECIFY D Select Hutch Tackboard Model Number Select Fabric Select Paint Color N See pages 6-7 See page 5 0 m m x maxon' 1187 Surpass® Desking System EXHIBIT GSA SIN 711-2 Reference page 185 for Surpass specification information. All Dimensions are Actual. u W Desk Mounted Fabric Screen LU w w Includes • Fabric screen and hardware. w W List i List w :2 Grade A w Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Grade A Grade B Premium Fabric Fabric Paint Desk Mounted Fabric Screen,13"H M-MDDS1324F 12.5" 22.5" 4.5 1 559 575 638 X M-MDDS1330F 12.5" 28.5" 5 2.2 574 590 653 Uj M-MDDS1336F 12.5" 34.5" 5.5 2.5 631 647 710 a M-MDDS1342F 12.5" 40.5" 7 3.1 648 664 727 M-MDDS1348F 12.5" 46.5" 8 3.4 661 677 740 w M-MDDS1354F 12.5" 52.5" 9 4.4 675 691 754 V M-MDDS1360F 12.5" 58.5" 9 2.2 691 707 770 a V) ¢ Desk Mounted Fabric Screen,20"H M-MDDS2024F 20.25" 22.5" 4.5 1.9 581 597 660 L/) M-MDDS203OF 20.25" 28.5" 5 2.2 595 611 674 M-MDDS2036F 20.25" 34.5" 5.5 2.5 655 671 734 M-MDDS2042F 20.25" 40.5" 7 3.1 669 685 748 M-MDDS2048F 20.25" 46.5" 8 3.4 683 699 762 M-MDDS2054F 20.25" 52.5" 9 4.4 698 714 777 M-MDDS206OF 20.25" 58.5" 9 2.2 712 728 791 LU w V w ZD Ln Y Cr Mounted Return Fabric Screen Includes Fabric screen and hardware. LU w 0 List List Grade A Grade B Grade A w Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Fabric Fabric Premium Paint O Desk Mounted Return Fabric Screen M-MDRS1324F 12.5" 20.875" 4.5 1 559 575 638 N M-MDRS1330F 12.5" 26.875" 5 2.2 574 590 653 M-MDRS2024F 20.25" 20.875" 4.5 1.9 581 597 660 O M-MDRS203OF 20.25" 26.875" 5 2.2 595 611 674 Z Q w N w HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Hutch Tackboard Model Number Select Fabric Select Paint Color w See pages 6-7 See page 5 v v X LLJ 1881 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass® Desking System Reference page 185 for Surpass specification information. All Dimensions are Actual. 7O m -n Desk Mounted Glass Screen m z Includes n • Privacy screen and attachment brackets. • Available in frosted glass only. m K m List List 7O M m Core :P:ai.tm iu Description Model H W Wt. Cubes paint Desk Dividing Screen M-MDDD1230FT 13" 29.5" 13 1.5 463 489 M-MDDD1236FT 13" 35.5" 15 1.8 513 539 -0 M-MDDD1242FT 13" 41.5" 18 2.3 579 605 T M-MDDD1248FT 13" 47.5" 20 2.3 628 654 x M-MDDD1254FT 13' 53.5" 22 2.8 687 713 M-MDDD1260FT 13" 59.5" 24 2.8 744 770 D , Ln Ln v D M m Desk Mounted Return Glass Screens Includes • Privacy screen and attachment brackets. • Available in frosted glass only. O List ListCZ M Core Premium D Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Paint Paint N Maxon Desk Divider Return Screen M-MDDR1220FT 13" 19.5" 13 1.3 364 390 M-MDDR1224FT 13" 23.5" 16 1.3 413 439 v M-MDDR1230FT 13" 29.5" 18 1.6 446 472 m D M-MDDR1236FT 13" 35.5" 20 1.9 496 522 � m O D C) m Ln m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY D n n Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln M Ln See page 5 0 m N Z .__ I I X X maxon• 1189 Surpass® Desking System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 Reference page 185 for Surpass specification information. 1 U All Dimensions are Actual. U w Desk Dividing Full Privacy Screens Cr w w Includes w • Privacy screen. • Attachment brackets. w l7 � List List w Description Model H 7Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Desk Full Privacy Screens M-MDFPS283OFT 27.5" 30" 6 6.3 1102 1128 x M-MDFPS2836FT 27.5" 36" 6 6.3 1323 1349 LU M-MDFPS2842FT 27.5" 42" 6 6.3 1433 1459 n M-MDFPS2848FT 27.5" 48" 8 8.2 1543 1569 M-MDFPS2854FT 27.5" 54" 9 8.6 1763 1789 w M-M DFPS2860FT 27.5" 60" 9 8.6 1874 1900 Ln Q a Q Above-Below Privacy Screen Selection Chart SUPPORT COMBINATION TOP SIZE SUPPORTI SUPPORT2 72" 66" 60" 54" 48" 42" 36" 0-Leg 0-Leg M-MDFPS286OFT M-MDFPS2854FT M-MDFPS2848FT M-MDFPS2842FT M-MDFPS2836FT M-MDFPS283OFT L U O-Leg Pedestal M-MDFPS2854FT M-MDFPS2848FT M-MDFPS2842FT M-MDFPS2836FT M-MDFPS2830FT Q 0-Leg Full End panel M-MDFPS2848FT M-MDFPS2842FT M-MDFPS2836FT M-MDFPS283OFT Y Full End panel Full End panel M-MDFPS2836FT M-MDFPS2830FT Cr O Pedestal Pedestal M-MDFPS2836FT M-MDFPS2830FT Pedestal Full End panel M-MDFPS2836FT M-MDFPS283OFT w O-Leg 2H 30"Lat/PS M-MDFPS2836FT M-MDFPS2830FT Pedestal 2H 30"Lat/PS w a Full End panel 2H 30"Lat/PS HAT HAT M-MDFPS286OFT M-MDFPS2854FT M-MDFPS2848FT M-MDFPS2842FT M-MDFPS2836FT w C7 Q O l7 z Q w N Ln W HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Paint Color(Frosted Only) w See page 5 v U Q X w o M - z 1901 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass® Desking System z m T Surpass Accessories Maxon's tool rail works in conjunction with a variety of accesso- Small Paper Clip Tray Z rri ries.Modular accessories free up worksurface space and provide Holds paper clips and other small objects. m orderly storage that is well within reach.Units can be arranged and rearranged to respond to changing workflow.The work tools that attach to the tool rail are: Personal Shelf R, • Letter TraySmall Paper Clip Tray ' Holds office supplies and personal p p Y effects. • File Pocket Personal Shelf M • Binder Bin Diagonal Tray • Tool Box Paper Clip Diagonal Tray Coat hooks,marker boards and center drawers round out the Diagonal trays are non-handed. organization offering. Provides 3 fully divided slots for organizing m files. 7Q n • Keeps papers from"bowing"at bottom. X V�gr Paper Clip gggK Tool rail,shown above,is height-adjustable in 1"increments using slots in panels.Tool Binds project papers together. D rail shown with two tool boxes,two letter trays and file pocket.File pocket and binder Mounts to tool rail or tool tile. Ln bins extend below a tool rail.Diagonal tray and contents extend above a tool rail. D Desk Mounted Accessory Rail P"' • Sturdy aluminum extrusion with steel support Power/Data Modules—Clamp On Worksurface construction.Powder coated for durable finish. — 6' Power cord. UL Listed. • - Includes adapters to allow use of commercially Use to hang work tools. o • Cannot be used to support monitor arms. available data terminals or blanks to fill unused DO eoo Suggested weight capacity acit not toexceed 80 lbs. openings.Man of the AMP,AT&T, Krone,Leviton • Consideration needs to be given to height of tools and location and most commercial data terminals can be used. of worksurfaces. • Available in Loft. • 5" high rail(widths coordinate with panels). • Fits on any worksurface with a 4"overhang. • Attachment with wrap around bracket screwed to bottom of 0 worksurface Ln Power/Data Modules—Clamp On Worksurface c Tool Rail for Hutches _ Must be installed at time of initial worksurface D • Sturdy aluminum extrusion with steel installation if installing between a worksurface 'e o m support construction. and panel. •B o • Powder coated for durable finish. 6'Power cord. UL Listed. • Use to hang work tools. The USB hub allows simultaneous powering of a • Cannot be used to support monitor arms. 2 USB-A devices.The USB hub is a charger only, M • Suggested weight capacity not to exceed 80 lbs. no ability to connect to a PC.The charging � • Consideration needs to be given to height of tools and location capacity is limited and may not charge all devices. M of worksurfaces. Color finishes available:Storm(STRM)and Snow(SNW). Letter Tray Fits on any worksurface with a 4"overhang. Ln • Holds standard letter-size paper and inter-office envelopes. • Minimal horizontal intrusion. Power/Data Modules— Under Worksurface • 6'Power cord.UL Listed. o m File Pocket Color finishes available:Storm(STRM)and • Holds manila envelopes. Snow(SNW). • May be stacked by hanging back of File Pocket Works with any top that has a 5"x 5"square 9 onto front of another File Pocket to maximize clearance. M space. D • Stores vertically for easy access to files. Z Wire Management Trays and J-Hooks Binder Bin Screwed to the underside of the • Holds folders,binders,and manuals. worksurface. D 69_�5§• n Used to manage computer cords, phone n m cords,etc. $;So v • Available in Black paint only. 0 m Tool Box • Holds pencils and other writing utensils,large post-it o notes,and other desk top accessories. X maxon, 1191 Surpass® Des king System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 Reference page 191 for Surpass specification information. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U w Surpass Accessories w w w w List ,' List " Uj Description Model H I W Wt. Cubes Core Premium CD Paint Paint w Hutch Accessory Rail M-MDPAR36 5" 36" 7 1 240 272 ___.-- M-MDPAR42 5" 42" 7.5 1.1 248 280 ---��_ M-MDPAR48 5" 48" 8 1.2 268 300 M-MDPAR54 5" 54" 9 1.3 286 318 M-MDPAR60 5" 60" 9 1.4 300 332 X u- M-MDPAR66 5" 66" 9.5 1.5 309 341 w a M-MDPAR72 5" 72" 10 1.6 330 362 Desk Mounted Accessory Rail M-MDAR24 13" 24" 5 0.2 318 397 U — M-MDAR30 13" 30" 6 0.3 345 424 N M MDAR36 13" 36" 7 0.3 365 444 Qe M-MDAR42 13" 42" 8 0.4 389 468 M-MDAR48 13" 48" 9 0.4 418 497 Personal Shelf M-PS21 1.7" 21.6" 3 0.5 158 178 Ln Letter Tray M-LT 1.7" 13" 2 0.5 153 173 LU Ln Q w Ln O Binder Bin M-SB 8.5" 5.2" 3 0.8 153 173 w Q n_ w oc n. Diagonal Tray-(Non-handed)(3) M-DT 8.5" 4.5" 2 0.3 213 233 LU Ln Q Ln (D Z Q w N w HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Model Number Select Paint Color w See page 5 U U Q Xfn I(' Z L 1921 maxon, GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass® Desking System Reference page 191 for Surpass specification information. All Dimensions are Nominal. A m -n Surpass Accessories Continued... m Z n m List Llst Core Premium Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Paint Paint K File Pocket M-FP 8.9" 12" 2 0.3 158 178 m i v Paper Clip M-CLIP2 1.9" 5" 1 0.2 158 178 m k� X Small Paper Clip Tray M-SMTRAY 1.8" 6.8" 1 0.1 109 129 D n - m Tool Box M-TB 5.25" 5" 1 0.2 123 143 F 1-9 0 c T D Wire Management Trays N Includes o • Tray and mounting hardware. D m List List Core Premium Description Model W H D Wt. Cubes paint Paint o Wire Management Tray M-MDWMT24 24" 4" 4" 2 0.4 133 228 D M-MDWMT36 36" 4" 4" 3 0.5 152 247 91 m m Z HOW TO SPECIFY D Select Model Number Select Paint Color m Ln Ln See page 5 0 m N Z M � - X X maxon' 1193 Surpass® Desking System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 Reference page 191 for Surpass specification information. LU All Dimensions are Actual. U w Electrical Management Power Pole w LU Includes • 2"x 2"pole(two pieces), bottom trim,connecting pins,top ceiling trim and hardware. w C7 L LU List C'ist w Core Premium Description Model H Wt. Cubes Paint Paint Power Pole-actual height M-MDPP 128.5" 12.7 0.9 596 628 x Ll- a w U Q a Q N Electrical Management J-Hook Includes • M-MDJC-11-Hook,2 mounting screws. • M-MDJC12-12 pack J-Hooks,2 mounting screws per hook. LU V Description Model Wt. Cubes List Y J-Hook M-MDJC 0.1 0.3 37 O M-MD1C12 0.12 0.3 140 w 7 Q Available in Black only a w W a. w Q O I- N Z Q w w HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln LU See page 5 v V Q X o M Z 1941 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Surpass® Desking System Reference page 191 for Surpass specification information. All Dimensions are Actual. z m M Electrical Accessories m z n m Description Model Wt. Cubes List 0-1-eg Wire Clip M-WMCLIPSM(4-Pack) 0.1 0.5 85 M-WMCLIPLG(8-Pack) 0.1 0.8 141 K m A G) M 2 Receptacles 1 USB Under Worksurface Mount(Shown) M-PWRMCD2UWM 2.3 0.2 621 -D 3 Receptacles 1 USB Under Worksurface Mount M-PWRMCD3UWM 2.3 0.2 430 T x Available in Storm(STRM)or Snow(SNW)paint only D 2 Receptacles 2 Data Accessory M-CCMDCME2 2.5 0.2 451 D n "6 Available in Loft paint only 2 Receptacles 1 USB M-PWRMCD2WC 2.3 0.2 621 3 Receptacles(Shown) M-PWRMCD3WC 2.3 0.2 430 O C C Available in Storm(STRM)or Snow(SNW)paint only y n m N 'O M m Dv m N O D M m m Z HOW TO SPECIFY D n n Select Model Number Select Paint Color M See page 5 O A N Z x maxon• 1195 Surpass® Desking System EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 W U z W W W W W W W X Ll- W U Q N LU W U Q W D N Y 0 W d W d W Q K 0 H N Z Q W N W_ 0 N N W U U Q X W 0 Z 1961 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2 EXHIBIT B Worksurfaces and Supports m m m m m \ n a� d...........Mm m �' *3: r, y �� r m m T X �" In D Ln D n Worksurfaces and Supports m Ln C D Ln • v m m v D m m L', --I O D m Ln m Z Gl D n n m Ln Ln A Z O m X maxon, 1197 Worksurfaces and Supports EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2 W U wWorksurface Statement of Line WStraight Extended Wedge Corner Radius Front L-Return 120° 0 0 � --- (D <: LU LU w Peninsula P-Shape Grand Connecting Surfaces X L ED C n. LU Support Statement of Line a Cantilever Flat Brackets Spanner Rails Column Leg Post Leg z Q u Z �Ln o �- � V) V) O-Leg Shared 0-Leg Panel Mount Standing Shared Standing Standing Height Double O-Leg Bracket Height O-Leg Height C-Leg Panel Mount Depth O-Leg Stanchion Bracket .01 J1, w a End Panel Leg Support Leg P-Leg External Support Panel w r W cc 0 F- l/'1 Countertops Statement of Line Straight Corner Prefix Brackets Countertop Flat Bracket c� z W wLU it 0 V) Ln w U u x w 0 z 1981 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2 EXHIBIT B Worksurfaces and Supports M rn Worksurfaces are 11/4"thick with particleboard core and with top surfaces finished in laminate.Bottom surfaces are covered with a backer m sheet.Worksurfaces are available in laminate. M z Wire management grommets are m standard in most worksurfaces (unless specified without grommets). m K Corner worksurfaces optimize M use of space,and provide G) a convenient location for M Worksurface computer and monitor. bracket kits support Worksurfaces can be specified without worksurface by grommets—no upcharge. attaching to an adjacent return ® :;0 panel the same width M T as the worksurface X depth. D - Cantilever brackets can be I lid inserted into panel reveals D in 1"vertical increments. rn In-line support legs are used to support worksurfaces only in a shared position. End-panel supports are used C at the end of a run when no z return panel is present. D w Worksurfaces • Laminate worksurfaces are 11/4"thick Wire management grommets are standard in most worksurfaces with particle board core and with top (unless specified with no grommets)oval grommet is 31/2"x 2"with surfaces finished in high-pressure t V ' caps. laminate.Bottom surfaces are covered with a backer sheet. Edgeband • Edgeband trim is available on laminate tops in twenty standard colors(customer specified)to match m solid or woodgrain laminates and to complement patterned Oval laminates. Rectangular worksurfaces over 42"W have two grommets. M • Optional wider L-Return worksurfaces will have two grommets.Peninsula and width primary corner worksurfaces have one.Half-Round worksurfaces and worksurfaces are available for use countertops do not have grommets. with Emerge and____ Grommets on standard Universal worksurfaces are located 0 - Prefix panel runs. 8.285"from side edges and 4.5"from back edge. Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets— rn no upcharge. Supports Support Guidelines—See Drawings on page 200 rn Worksurfaces can be configured at 291/2"H with end-panel Panel mounted worksurface runs 72"and greater need floor supports and inline support panels,or at various heights on support for improved stability when overheads are not used. z 1"increments using specific product configurations. When using overheads in panel mounted worksurface run Worksurface support options include: applications 72"and greater,floor support*is required.(See list at left.) D • Support column* Support storage units* When using overheads at the end of a panel run,floor n • Flat brackets Pedestal-to-panel attachment supports*are required. Ln • External support channel kit* Worksurface bracket kits should be used to tie panels to A • Worksurface bracket kits Desk to panel attachment kit* worksurface for added stability. m • Height-adjustable table bases Corner desk leg* A return panel at the end of a panel run can be substituted • Cantilever brackets Bridge and return kits with one of these floor supports:storage,open or closed end • Support legs* Modesty panels support panel,0-leg. • End-panel supports* Gussets o *Units provide floor support. continued Oh next page X maxon• 1199 Worksurfaces and Supports EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2 w Zcontinued from previous page Support channel may interfere with mounting of some CPU w Cantilever brackets cannot be used at the end of a worksurface holders and keyboard supports. ;; panel run in place of a return panel or floor support. Cantilevers are recommended in place of an external Worksurface runs greater than 60"W require an external worksurface support channel where feasible. worksurface support channel when a center support cantilever Surpass configurations utilize modesty panels and gussets cannot be used.It is recommended for spans greater than in place of external support channels for worksurfaces up to LU 48"W.See pages 204 and 224. 72"W.See pages 166-168. LU w Panel mounted worksurface runs 72" and greater need floor support for improved stability. X LL w W a 49 CJ V 9 F- Q These floor supports can ® substitute a return panel at the end of a panel run: rV) storage,open or closed Q end support panel,C-legs. a Worksurface bracket kit should be used to tie panels to worksurface for• .e added stability. o O w a 0 O w lJ Q O Cantilevers are recommended in place of an external worksurface support channel where feasible. Z49 Q w o w ®� cc O Cantilever brackets cannot be used at the end of Ln � a worksurface panel run in place of a return or w o u floor support. Q Worksurface runs greater than 60"W require an external worksurface x support channel when a center support cantilever cannot be used.It wp is recommended for spans greater than 48"W.See pages 204 and 224. Z 2001 maxom GSA SIN 711-1/2 EXHIBIT B Worksurfaces and Supports 70 m Worksurface runs greaterthan 72 require floor support.Example:support pedestal or support leg.For panel stability,Worksurface Bracket Kits should be used when an end of run worksurface's depth matches the return panel width. If the return panel width is longer than the surface depth,a Worksurface to Wing Panel Bracket should be used. Cantilevers can and should still be used in the middle of a � worksurface run 72"or less for proper support and to help prevent worksurface bowing.See examples below. M Example A:Worksurface to Wing Panel Brackets used because Example B:Cantilevers used as center support because M the return panels are longer the worksurface depth. worksurface run is not greater than 72"W. m z 48TC 36TC 36TC c) 0 50X48T 50L o 5OX36T IC 5OX36T 50L M LO 04 a I a o II a� vX 11 m X LO I 30z48 N I q Q M CA CA m m m m D 30"D x 48"W Worksurface and 42"W Return Panels 30"D x 72"W Worksurface and 42"W Return Panels v D M m Example C:Worksurface to Wing Panel 42TC 42TC 5oL 0 5OX42T IC 50X42T D Brackets are used at both ends of 84"run. LO _ _ _ — Ln Support Leg or floor support is required in center because worksurface run is greater than 72"W. p r N C I O N < a d -0 U) 3044 N d O1 0 0 m m 30"D Worksurface and 42"W Return Panels z m v D m Example D:Worksurface bracket kits are J 48TC 48TC 5oL used at the end of runs where panel widths 50X48T IC 50X48T o > match worksurface depths.In this off- module application,a Cantilever is used _ rM m when the return panel does not match oO r o the surface depth because the panels are 2o 3 w tied into the surface elsewhere.A support -+ leg is required as center support on the m 30z66 D worksurface run that is 96".A Cantilever is 0---- _ sufficient as center support on the 72"W A C) run. v, 30"D Worksurfaces and 30"W Return Panels I X2 D w� n m o m 309 10£X09 010E z 0 m X maxon, 1201 Worksurfaces and Supports EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2 w U w Worksurfaces with Edgeband W WPrimary Worksurfaces 60'Pie Worksurface • Primary worksurfaces are available in e Order support column and two flat brackets 20",24",and 30"depths up to 90"W. o separately. Worksurface spans greater than 72" LU require floor support. L-Return Worksurfaces w Nominal worksurface width is equal to nominal panel width. Two wire management grommets w • Wire management grommets standard,one for widths up standard. to 42",two on widths 48"W and greater.Add "N"suffix for no Add suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets. grommets. • Center support bracket included on 60"and wider surfaces. Grain direction runs along length of x Other support hardware is ordered separately. worksurface(directional laminates only). LL Worksurfaces greater than 60"W require a cantilever bracket Rear corner support bracket included with all surfaces. for center support in panel mounted applications.Specify Worksurface bracket kit(order separately) required at junction 20"cantilever on 20"D and 24"D cantilever on 24"D and 30"D where a panel is wall-mounted to a permanent wall and wall worksurfaces. track stanchion is not positioned in the right-hand corner.All LU Worksurface runs greater than 72"W require floor support. other support hardware is ordered separately. U (Support Pedestal or Support Leg) Can be used with a modesty panel and appropriate supports to NWidth must correspond with panel width(s).For worksurface to configure freestanding desk(s).Refer to Surpass Qspan a"T"use Extended Rectangular worksurface models. pages 166-168. < Rectangular worksurfaces can be used with a modesty panel Worksurfaces greater than 60"W require a cantilever bracket N and appropriate supports to configure freestanding desk(s). for center support in panel mounted applications.Specify 24" Refer to"Working With Surpass",pages 166-168. cantilever on 24"D and 30"D worksurfaces. Grain direction runs along width(directional laminates only) Peninsula, P-Shaped,and Grand Peninsula Worksurfaces Ln Grommets are located 8.285"from outer edges on Wire mana ement grommets standard. .< worksurfaces 48"and greater. g Add suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets. Add suffix"N"to a model number for no 0 V) grommets. Wedge Worksurfaces -Grain direction runs along length of • Transition worksurfaces are available in 24"D. worksurface(directional laminates only). • Wire management grommets standard,one for widths up Unsupported spans 54"or greater requires an ED to 42",two on widths 48"W and greater. external support channel. • Center support bracket included on 66"W and wider.Other Peninsula Worksurface Support Kit ordered support hardware is ordered separately. separately,includes column,and worksurface • Worksurfaces greater than 60"W require a cantilever bracket support brackets. DD for center support in panel mounted applications. Can be used with a modesty panel and w External support channel can also be used. appropriate supports to configure freestanding Grain direction runs along width(directional laminates only). desk(s). Refer to Surpass pages 166-168. Lguc • Grommets are located 8.285"from outer edges oncc Radius Connecting Worksurfaces a worksurfaces 48"and greater. • Add suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets. Use to connect two 90°panel attached worksurfaces. Corner Worksurfaces Grain direction is diagonal(45°)(directional One wire management grommet. laminates only). • Add suffix"N"to a model number for no Order support column and two flat brackets o grommets. separately. Ln Corner worksurfaces with woodgrain laminate have grain direction diagonal to adjacent worksurfaces. • Rear corner left-handed support bracket included.Worksurface bracket kit(order separately)required at junction where a Half-Round Worksurfaces z panel is wall-mounted to a permanent wall and wall track Order support column and two 24"D in-line Q stanchion is not positioned in the right-hand corner. support legs separately. v Not recommended for use with M-C1L or M-C1R 120°Corner Worksurfaces for shared applications. • Standard with one wire management grommet Includes attachment bracket. LLU n in corner location. Grain direction runs perpendicular to back edge of worksurface • Add suffix"N"to a model number for no (directional laminates only). V) grommets. L Rear support bracket included (left-handed).Worksurface U bracket kit(order separately)required at junction where a panel is wall-mounted to a permanent wall and wall track stanchion is not positioned in the right-hand corner. x w Z 2021 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2 EXHIBIT B Worksurfaces and Supports m T Countertops • Countertops provide a functional transactional worksurface,while providing a visual cue by physically defining a user and guest z n space. M • Maxon Countertops are offered in Edgeband.Edge is available in coordinating woodgrain options. • Countertops are 15%"deep and offer a crisp,clean look. m m Countertops m Straight Corner (Edgeband) v m m m Emerge Countertops x • Countertops are available in straight and corner configurations. • When ordering Countertops match panel widths to cover the panel run. cn • Mounting brackets,top trim,and attaching hardware included. D • Countertops come with a painted top cap—specify color. • Countertops are flush with the ends of panel top cap. �^ n Prefix Countertops Prefix Countertop Brackets m • Mounting brackets and attaching hardware Prefix Countertop brackets must be ordered ordered separately. separately. Models M-1351500 and M-P51500-42 each • Countertops are flush with panel top cap. contain one right-hand and one left-hand bracket. • Countertops are 15"D. Order 2 sets of brackets for each countertop. • Straight Countertops:Grain direction runs along Specify paint color. vD width of worksurface(directional laminates only). Model M-P51500 brackets are for 35"H or 50"H panels.Model "' • Corner Countertops:Grain direction runs M-P51500-42 brackets are for 421/2"H panels. diagonally along of worksurface(directional laminates only). Order two model M-1351500 or M-P51500-42 for straight • Countertops can be mounted off modular.For Straight can be countertops.Order three model M-P51500 or M-P51500-42 for mounted off modular. corner countertops. • For Straight Countertop applications,countertops can be mounted in any combination to cover the panel run. • For Corner Countertop,order a corner size to fit the larger return panel. • Add a Straight Countertop with 2 Countertop Flat Brackets to equal the panel run. m • Outside ends of Countertops must end at a Countertop D Mounting Bracket,they cannot end mid panel or hang over the 70 m end of run. Ln O D M m N m Z G) n m N Ln O z m Ln Z M m X maxon• 1203 Worksurfaces and Supports EXHIBIT GSA SIN711-1/2 w z End Supports and Bracket Kits Cantilever Brackets Continued End-panels are 1s/a"thick.For use in place of panels at the DO NOT use to support worksurfaces from which a peninsula wend of worksurface runs. worksurface is attached. Levelers provide 11/2"vertical adjustment. DO NOT use cantilever brackets to support worksurfaces supported • Must be connected into panel slots for panel hung applications. with permanent-wall hanger kit. Straight worksurfaces adjacent to 120•connections Cantilevers can be used as support in Emerge applications when w must be supported by full end-panels. worksurface runs are 84"W or less.Avoid installation only one side or O 12"D end-panel models for use with Half-Round worksurfaces a straight connection except to support corner worksurfaces.Floor w or curvilinear shaped worksurfaces End-Panel support is required for runs greater than 84". 5 in freestanding applications. Cantilevers can be used as support in Prefix applications when LU Panel mounted end-panel supports are ordered for worksurface runs are 72"W or less.Avoid installation on only one side right-or left-handed application. of a straight connection except to support corner worksurfaces.Floor • Open end panel supports are non-handed and are support is required for runs greater than 72". only for panel mounted applications. open End Worksurface Bracket Kit X M-PMEP and M-MDEP are the same leg. w M-PMEP comes with the panel mount bracket,M-MDEP do not. Worksurface bracket kits allows one end of a � worksurface to be supported by a return panel. a Support Legs Return panel width must be the same as the • Support legs are 15/e'thick.Leg portion is 123/4"D.Supports depth of the worksurface. Worksurface Brackets the junction of two worksurfaces. Kit includes one pair of brackets and attachment hardware. v Non-handed for use at either end of worksurface. Freestanding pedestals can also be used to support one end of a panel- Provided with flat bracket. attached worksurface in conjunction with worksurface bracket. • Universal Support Legs are used to support worksurfaces Flat Brackets only in a shared position.Worksurfaces require to the floor �. support every 72". Support Legs Includes bracket and attaching hardware. Ln Levelers provide 11/2"vertical adjustment. Can be used to connect one worksurface perpendicular • Must be connected into panel slots for panel hung applications. to another worksurface. Flat Brackets N Panel mounted models can be converted to freestanding with removal pedestal-to-Panel Attachment Bracket Ln of panel mount bracket. Q Can be used in place of full end panel or return panel. Modesty Panels or Gussets required if used as freestanding. Provides structural support to panel run by securing N Support leg bracket kit(non-handed)converts freestanding model to panel mounted. panel directlyto pedestal. • Works with Universal Systems and Include. Support Columns Pedestal-to-Panel • Used to support one end of curvilinear worksurfaces. • Half-Round,P-shaped,peninsula,grand peninsulas External Worksurface support Channel worksurfaces require support columns(ordered separately). Is required on a systems worksurface for • Includes column,worksurface bracket kit,attaching hardware additional support for spans greater than 60". and adjustable glides. Support Width of worksurface span can be reduced by Columns using support storage. • Extends 11/2"below the worksurface.Installs External Worksurface Seated Height Universal Post Leg 7"from user's edge. Support Channel LU Used to support one end of curvilinear worksurfaces. `l pp i When using 28"H mobile pedestals the length of support channel <m All peninsula worksurfaces require support columns needs to be reduced to accommodate width of the pedestal. (ordered separately). Support channel may interfere with mounting of some CPU holders and a Can be used to support a freestanding desk. keyboard supports. Standing Height Universal Post Leg External Support Channel Selection Guide • Used to support one end of curvilinear worksurfaces. Post 0 All peninsula worksurfaces require support columns Leg Support Combination worksurface width for Rectangle < (ordered separately). SUPPORT 1 SUPPORT2 72" 66" 60" 54" O Can be used when the other side of the surface is attached to a panel. N 0-Leg 0-Leg M-PPSC72 M-PPSC60 M-PPSC60 M-PPSC54 Cantilever Brackets—handed 0-Leg Full End panel M-PPSC72 M-PPSC60 M-PPSC60 M-PPSC54 • Cantilever brackets are left or right handed.No with Gusset assembly required. (7 They can be inserted into panel reveals in 1"vertical Full End panel Full End panel M-PPSC72 M-PPSC60 M-PPSC60 M-PPSC54 z increments. with Gusset with Gusset LUOne size is used for both 24"and 30"D worksurfaces. o-Leg Pedestal M-PPSC60 M-PPSC60 M-PPSC54 20"D cantilever are for use with 20"D worksurfaces Handed pedestal Full End panel M-PPSC60 M-PPSC60 and to support 24"D worksurfaces 66"-72"W that Cantilever Brackets P require a cantilever bracket for center support in panel mounted with Gusset Ln w applications. Pedestal Pedestal S Both left and right brackets are required in shared applications. 0-Leg 2H Lat/PS 0 Includes attachment hardware. LO w Use with runs 72"or less—avoid installation on only one side of a Pedestal 2H Lat/PS U straight connection except to support corner worksurfaces.Floor Full End panel 2H Lat/PS Q support is required for runs greater than 72".See page 201. with Gusset • Cantilevers can and should be used in the middle of a worksurface run 72"W or less for proper support and to help prevent worksurface Freestanding Desks bowing.See page 201. x Freestanding desks can be created by combining rectangular and LU o DO NOT position at the end of a panel or worksu rface run. corner worksurfaces with modesty panels and appropriate desk z supports.See Surpass pages 166-168. 204I maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2 EXHIBIT B Worksurfaces and Supports See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URCW2448N.Arrow on surfaces note woodgrain direction. m n Rectangular Worksurface: Edgeband m Z n rn List List Description Model D TW Wt. Cubes Ll L2 With Grommets z Rectangular Worksurface,20"D M-URW2024 20" 24" 21 1.6 301 323 M M-URW2030 20" 30" 25 1.9 327 355 O O M-URW2036 20" 36" 31 2.2 341 373 -' D M-URW2042 20" 42" 43 2.6 365 403 v M-URW2048 20" 48" 45 2.9 390 434 A m W M-URW2054 20" 54" 47 3.2 416 466 X M-URW2060 20" 60" 52 3.6 442 497 M-URW2066 20" 66" 67 3.9 464 524 M-URW2072 20" 72" 74 4.2 485 550 K M-URW2078 20" 78" 80 4.6 509 579 D M-URW2084 20" 84" 87 4.9 589 665 v M-URW2090 20" 90" 93 5.9 634 716 m Rectangular Worksurface,24"D M-URW2424 24" 24" 22 1.9 329 351 M-URW2430 24" 30" 26 1.9 345 373 O O LO M-URW2436 24" 36" 32 2.3 370 402 C D M-URW2442 24" 42" 44 2.7 386 424 D M-URW2448 24" 48" 46 3 420 464 W M-URW2454 24" 54" 48 3.7 438 488 M-URW2460 24" 60" 53 3.7 460 515 • M-URW2466 24" 66" 68 4.4 501 561 M-URW2472 24" 72" 75 4.4 543 608 M-URW2478 24" 78" 81 5.1 586 656 M-URW2484 24" 84" 88 5.1 627 703 M-URW2490 24" 90" 94 7.5 655 737 Rectangular Worksurface,30"D M-URW3024 30" 24" 27 1.9 370 398 O O M-URW3030 30" 30" 39 2.4 386 420 v M-URW3036 30" 36" 45 2.8 413 453 D z D M-URW3042 30 42" 47 3.2 430 478 m " M-URW3048 30" 48" 52 3.6 460 515 W M-URW3054 30" 54" 59 4.6 480 542 Ln M-URW3060 30" 60" 63 4.6 502 570 p M-URW3066 30" 66" 72 5.5 543 618 M-URW3072 30" 72" 80 5.5 586 668 M M-URW3078 30" 78" 87 6.3 627 715 M-URW3084 30" 84" 93 6.2 668 764 M-URW3090 30" 90" 100 6.7 720 822 D z C) HOW TO SPECIFY D Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color N U) No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix Seepage 10 J � (no upcharge) Edgeband M See page 10 M ' z maxon• 1205 Worksurfaces and Supports EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2 See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URCW2448N.Arrow on surfaces note woodgrain direction. U W Extended Rectangular Worksurface: Edgeband w w w List List—, i,, Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 C7 ,LU With Grommets Emerge T-Span Worksurface,24"D M-FTRW2426 24" 26" 22 1.9 375 403 M-FTRW2432 24" 32" 26 2.3 399 431 O O M-FTRW2438 24" 38" 32 2.6 418 456 D M-FTRW2444 24" 44" 46 3.7 450 494 x u.. M-FTRW2450 24" 50" 48 3.7 467 517 w M-FTRW2456 24" 56" 53 4.4 488 543 a W M-FTRW2462 24" 62" 68 4.4 510 570 M-FTRW2468 24" 68" 75 4.6 535 600 w U Q a N Q N Prefix T-Span Worksurface,24"D M-PXRW2426 24" 26" 22 1.8 386 414 O O M-PXRW2432 24" 32" 26 2.2 413 445 Ln M-PXRW2438 24" 38" 32 2.5 430 468 D M-PXRW2444 24" 44" 44 2.9 463 507 V) M-PXRW2450 24" 50" 46 3.3 480 530 W M-PXRW2456 24" 56" 48 3.7 502 557 M-PXRW2462 24" 62" 53 4.1 523 583 M-PXRW2468 24" 68" 68 4.5 549 614 w Q a w a w C7 Q O Ln (D Z Q w v7 Ln W HOW TO SPECIFY o Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color Ln w Ln No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 li" U (no upcharge) J Q Edgeband See page 10 Uj z 2061 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2 EXHIBIT B Worksurfaces and Supports See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URCW2448N.Arrow on surfaces note woodgrain direction. m Wedge Worksurface: Edgeband m Z (1 m List List Description Model Depth Depth W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 With Grommets � Wedge Worksurface 20"L/24"R M-UTWD482024 20" 24" 52" 47 3.4 491 535 M m M-UTWD542024 20" 24" 58" 52 3.8 534 584 T W M-UTWD602024 20" 24" 64" 55 4.1 587 642 CD I M-UTWD662024 20" 24" 70" 64 4.5 640 700 v IL M-UTWD722024 20" 24" 76" 72 4.9 693 758 m 70 f> DR T 1 x 1 User Edge Ln Wedge Worksurface 24"L/20"R M-UTWD482420 24" 20" 52" 47 3.4 491 535 D M-UTWD542420 24" 20" 58" 52 3.8 534 584 W 1 M-UTWD602420 24" 20" 64" 55 4.1 587 642 n O O m M-UTWD662420 24" 20" 70" 64 4.5 640 700 DL DR M-UTWD722420 24" 20" 76" 72 4.9 693 758 1 1 Ln User Edge N Wedge Worksurface 24"L/30"R M-UTWD482430 24" 30" 52" 48 4.1 524 579 W M-UTWD542430 24" 30" 58" 54 4.6 574 636 w O O M-UTWD602430 24" 30" 64" 57 5 645 713 M-UTWD662430 24" 30" 70" 66 5.5 698 773 DL DR M-UTWD722430 24" 30" 76" 74 6 757 839 1 User Edge v Wedge Worksurface 30"L/24"R M-UTWD483024 30" 24" 52" 48 4.1 524 579 v M-UTWD543024 30" 24" 58" 54 4.6 574 636 D M W 1 O O i M-UTWD603024 30" 24" 64" 57 5 645 713 M-UTW D663024 30" 24" 70" 66 5.5 698 773 DL DR M-UTWD723024 30" 24" 76" 74 6 757 839 N 1 1 D User Edge m m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY D n Select Model Number Select laminate Select Edge Trim Color N l o No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 iu" 0 (no upcharge) Edgeband M See page 10 z o IIV' I I x maxon• 1207 Worksurfaces and Supports EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2 See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. LLJ All Dimensions are Nominal.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URCW2448N.Arrow on surfaces note woodgrain direction. U W Straight-Front Corner Worksurface: Edgeband LU w w w List i,List Description Model D U er W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 w ge L With Grommet LU Straight-Front Corner,24"Depth M-USCW2436 24" 17" 36" 46 3.4 701 751 c" M-USCW2442 24" 25" 42" 59 3.3 724 792 O M-USCW2448 24" 22" 48" 72 5.7 956 1044 w x w D w U a User Edge N H < Straight-Front Corner,30"Depth M-USCW3042 30" 17" 42" 76 4.4 935 1003 N M-USCW3048 30" 25" 48" 77 5.7 1014 1102 O n w a KD\ User Edge w n¢. w CL a w t7 a O Ln z a w W HOW TO SPECIFY U Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color o Ln Ln w No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 lY" (no,upcharge) _1 Q Edgeband See page 10 ' x Uj Z M 2081 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2 EXHIBIT B Worksurfaces and Supports See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URCW2448N.Arrow on surfaces note woodgrain direction. n Radius-Front Corner Worksurface: Edgeband m z n m List List Description Model Depth Radius W Wt. Cubes L3 L2 M m With Grommet Radius Front Corner,24"Depth M-URCW2436 24" 11" 36" 46 3.4 701 7 792 M W M-URCW2442 24" 17" 42" 59 3.3 724 1 M-URCW2448 24" 17" 48" 72 5.7 956 1044 O D M 1 m X Radius D D n m Radius Front Corner,30"Depth M-URCW3042 30" 11" 42" 76 4.4 935 1003 w M-URCW3048 30" 17" 48" 77 5.7 1014 1102 Ln O D D L' Ln 1 D _, Radius v Corner Worksurfaces with Radial Leading Edge v D 36" 42" 48" 42" 48" z m 0 0 0 0 24"D 24" 36" 24" 0 24" 30"D 30" 42 30" 42" 48�� 48° Un 24" O 101h" Radius 24" 30' for all Corner Worksurfaces 24 30" G) with Radial Leading Edge M m D z Gl HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color N No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 1 J. � — (no upcharge) Edgeband vmi See page 10 maxon• 1209 Worksurfaces and Supports EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2 See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URCW2448N.Arrow on surfaces note woodgrain direction. u w 120' Corner Worksurface - Edgeband LU w w w List. List i„ Description Model D W Wt. Cubes L1 L2 lD w With Grommet w 120°Worksurface,24"D M-UYCW2430 24" 30" 72 5.1 604 672 0 M-UYCW2436 24" 36" 77 7.1 658 746 M-UYCW2442 24" 42" 82 8.5 824 934 M-UYCW2448 24" 48" 87 10.6 934 1070 w w CL a Ln v a H Q Pie 60' Radius Connecting Worksurface Ln V) List List a Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 Pie 60°Radius Connecting Worksurface M-UWPR24 24" 24" 17 2.4 426 448 • w Q a w n. w CD Q O Ln lD Z Q w tN w HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Mode)Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color LO w No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 1 Q (no upcharge) -i Edgeband See page 10 LU z i 2101 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2 EXHIBIT B Worksurfaces and Supports See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URCW2448N.Arrow on surfaces note woodgrain direction. m n Radius-Front L-Return Worksurface: Edgeband m z List List rn Description Model D R W L Wt. Cubes L3 L2 rn With Grommets L-Return Worksurface Left-Hand, M-ULRL243660 24" 11" 36" 60" 54 5.4 854 936 M 24"D,36"W M-ULRL243672 24" 11" 36" 72" 63 6.4 899 997 Gri m L 1 O O D m M 1 m W m /J X f Radius L-Return Worksurface Left-Hand, M-ULRL244860 24" 17" 48" 60" 75 7.1 899 1031 D —"i 24"D,48"W M-ULRL244872 24" 17" 48" 72" 86 8.5 937 1047 D n L m I O O ID cn 1 c WR7dZ � L-Return Worksurface Right-Hand, M-ULRR243660 24" 11" 36" 60" 54 5.4 854 936 24"D,36"W M-ULRR243672 24" 11" 36" 72' 63 6.4 899 997 L T O O D v W m D z I _: ,Radius rn D L-Return Worksurface Right-Hand,24"D,48"W M-ULRR244860 24" 17" 48" 60" 75 7.1 899 1031 N M-ULRR244872 24" 17" 48" 72" 86 8.5 937 1047 O L � D O O G) m ` ID W \ 1 V1 Radius Z D D n HOW TO SPECIFY M Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color O No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 i/' M J (no upcharge) Edgeband See page 10 X M M maxon• 1211 Worksurfaces and Supports EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2 See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URCW2448N.Arrow on surfaces note woodgrain direction. U w Radius End Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband W LL ust °'� list w Description Model D W Wt. Cubes L3 L2 CD w With Grommet Radius End Peninsula Worksurface,30"D M-URP3060 30" 60" 63 3.8 778 846 W M-URP3066 30" 66" 72 5.5 802 877 iM-URP3072 30" 72" 80 5.5 830 912 LL x \ w D 0 a U Radius End Peninsula Worksurface,36"D M-URP3660 36" 60" 75 5.4 830 912 N W M-URP3666 36" 66" 80 6.4 860 950 Q M-URP3672 36" 72" 89 6.4 883 981 V) D 0 � a ZD Ln • w Q a w o: a w CD Q O V) 0 Z Q w N W HOW TO SPECIFY o Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color w No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 1 U (no upcharge) a Edgeband See page 10 x LU o I "' I I z 2121 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2 EXHIBIT B Worksurfaces and Supports See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URCW2448N.Arrow on surfaces note woodgrain direction. m n "P" Shaped Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband z n m List List Description Model D W Wt. Cubes LS L2 M m With Grommet Left-Hand P-Shaped Peninsula Worksurface,30"D M-UPPL3072 30" 72" 90 7.5 1173 1255 M 42" M diameter m � Q D m X N W D z Right-Hand P-Shaped Peninsula Worksurface,30"D M-UPPR3072 30" 72" 90 7.5 1173 1255 �^ D n m Ln 42 C diameter D 1 W M m v D M m O D M m Ln m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color N V) No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 1'/• O J X (no upcharge) Edgeband Ln Seepage 10 maxon' 1213 Worksurfaces and Supports EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2 See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URCW2448N.Arrow on surfaces note woodgrain direction. U w Grand Peninsula Worksurface: Edgeband LU W LL W LIst List W Description Model D W L Wt. Cubes L1 L2 C7 W With Grommet w Left-Hand Grand Peninsula Worksurface M-UGPL244866 24" 48" 66" 84 8.5 1173 1293 L M-UGPL244872 24" 48" 72" 91 8.5 1223 1351 X > LL w n- w 0 w U a D Ln Ln Right-Hand Grand Peninsula Worksurface M-UGPR244866 24" 48" 66" 84 8.5 1173 1293 L M-UGPR244872 24" 48" 72" 91 8.5 1223 1351 in a Ln C: 0 w • �— D w z Q n. w a w U Q O I— Ln C7 Z Q w W HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Laminate �(Selec�t Edge Trim Color w No Grommet option:Add 'N''suffix See page 10 l�v U (no upcharge) Q Edgeband See page 10 x LU z M 2141 maxon* GSA SIN 711-1/2 EXHIBIT B Worksurfaces and Supports See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal.Arrow on surfaces note woodgrain direction. m q Half Round Extension Worksurface: Edgeband m List List m Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 Prefix Half Round Extension M-PXHR24 24" 30" 52 4.6 628 672 K D M-PXHR30 30" 36" 77 5.8 667 711 z Gl m W I � z rn Emerge Half Round Extension M-FTHR24 24" 30" 52 4.6 628 672 X D M-FTHR30 30" 36" 77 5.8 667 711 N D W 1 Ln D n m N C D Radius Connecting Worksurface Top: Edgeband `/) List List 4 Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 Prefix Half Round Extension M-PXCR24 24" 26" 18 2.4 475 497 v M m v D z m Emerge Half Round Extension M-FTCR24 24" 26" 18 2.4 475 497 D Gl m m D z :?) Gl HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color M See page 10' Ln � J Edgeband Un Seepage 10 maxon, 1215 Worksurfaces and Supports EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2 See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal.Arrow on surfaces note woodgrain direction. v w Emerge Countertop with Support - Edgeband w w Includes Straight Countertop • Top Cap LU Countertop Brackets C7 LU w ListList Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 x Straight Countertop with Support M-FTCT1524E 15" 24" 15 1.2 565 587 LLJ M-FTCT1530E 15" 30" 19 1.4 597 625 M-FTCT1536E 15" 36" 21 1.7 629 661 M-FTCT1542E 15" 42" 25 1.9 661 699 w M-FTCT1548E 15" 48" 29 2.1 692 736 u M-FTCT1554E 15" 54" 33 2.7 723 773 a U1 M-FTCT1560E 15" 60" 37 2.7 755 810 Q M-FTCT1566E 15" 66" 41 3.2 786 846 M-FTCT1572E 15" 72" 45 3.2 818 883 Ln Q a Z) Emerge 90' Corner Countertop with Support - Edgeband Includes • 90'Degree Corner Countertop • Top Caps • Countertop Brackets List List w aQ Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 w a Corner Countertop with Support M-FTCCT152424E 15" 24" 34 2.8 972 994 M-FTCCT153030E 15" 30" 39 4 1084 1112 M-FTCCT153636E 15" 36" 45 5.1 1197 1229 LU O V v7 C7 Z Q w N w HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color LU See page 10 �J v Q Edgeband See page 10 2161 Maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2 EXHIBIT B Worksurfaces and Supports See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal.Arrow on surfaces note woodgrain direction. z m n Prefix Straight Countertop: Edgeband m List List n m Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 Prefix Straight Countertop M-PXCT1512E 15" 12" 14 1 363 375 r^ i M-PXCTIS18E 15" 18" 16 1.2 384 402 z M-PXCT1524E 15" 24" 18 1.4 399 421 G) m 7 D M-PXCT1530E 15" 30" 20 1.7 419 447 M-PXCT1536E 15" 36" 22 2.1 438 470 M-PXCT1542E 15" 42" 24 2.4 457 495 -v W M-PXCT1548E 15" 48" 26 2.7 483 527 M m T M-PXCT1554E 15" 54" 28 3 499 554 X M-PXCT1560E 15" 60" 30 3.3 523 583 M-PXCT1566E 15" 66" 32 3.6 538 603 M-PXCT1572E 15" 72" 34 3.9 556 626 D z Prefix 900 Corner Countertop: Edgeband D n List ' List m Description Model D W Wt. Cubes L1 L2 C Prefix 90°Corner Countertop,Edgeband M-PXCCT152424E 15" 24" 25 4.1 656 678 D M-PXCCT153030E 15" 30" 35 5.4 778 806 Ln M-PXCCT153636E 15" 36" 45 6.9 870 902 D M-PXCCT154242E 15" 42" 55 7.2 1016 1054 71 W l L/F v Prefix Countertop Support Brackets D Includes M • 2 brackets, 1 left and 1 right,and hardware List ' List L, Description Model Wt. Cubes Core Premium D Paint Paint G) Standard Countertop Support M-P51500 1 0.1 S6 63 M 42.5"H Base Panel Countertop Support M-P51500-42 1 0.1 S6 63 �\\ Ln Gz1 HOW TO SPECIFY D n Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color M Ln See page 10 J Edgeband N See page 10 z o M x maxon, 1217 Worksurfaces and Supports EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2 See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U W Cantilever Worksurface Bracket LU w w List List Description Core Premium p Model Wt. Cubes Paint Paint 0 Cantilevered Worksurface Bracket M-C1L(Shown) 9 1.4 68 94 w M-C1R 9 1.4 68 94 w r!�� 20"Cantilevered Worksurface Bracket,Left-Handed M-C1L-20 8 1.4 66 92 S 20"Cantilevered Worksurface Bracket,Right-Handed M-C1R-20 8 1.4 66 92 w w v a Q Ln Worksurface Support - Return Worksurface Bracket Ln List Alst ZD `" Core Premium Description Model Wt. Cubes Paint Paint Return Worksurface Bracket(Pair) M-CWB2 0.4 0.3 34 41 ar w Q a Worksurface Support - Attaching Bracket F_ Description Model Wt. Cubes List w Worksurface Support-Attaching Bracket M-DAB1 0.1 0.3 20 Q Worksurface Support-Attaching Bracket(Packet of 10) M-DAB10 1 0.3 79 z O F- Ln C7 Z a w W HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln See page 5 v Q x w M Z 2181 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2 EXHIBIT B Worksurfaces and Supports See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. z m M Worksurface Support Flat Bracketrri z Description Model Wt. Cubes List--] rn Worksurface Support Flat Bracket M-FB24 3 0.3 62 M-FB30 5 0.8 89 m K rn Charcoal Paint only rn v z m Countertop Flat Bracket X Description Model TWt. Cubes List Countertop Flat Bracket M-CTFB 0.2 0.3 36 D V) <;> D n m Charcoal Paint only Ln C z D • v M m D M m Ln --I O D G1 m rn Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number', Select Paint Color Ln M See page 5 O rn �� Z .__ I ' 0 X maxon• 1219 Worksurfaces and Supports EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2 See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U W Universal Worksurface End Panel Support LU w Includes • Universal Worksurface End Panel Support,panel mounting brackets and adjustable glides. w C7 w .List List c" Core Premium Description Model H D Wt. Cubes Paint Paint Universal Worksurface End Panel Support M-PMEP12L 28" 12" 11 2.8 308 334 M-PMEP12R 28" 12" 11 2.8 308 334 x w M-PMEP24L 28" 24" 22 2.8 365 391 a M-PMEP24R 28" 24" 22 2.8 365 391 M-PMEP30L 28" 30" 25 2.8 407 433 M-PMEP30R 28" 30" 25 2.8 407 433 w U d h I— Q N Universal Worksurface Open Panel Mounted P-Leg Support Includes a a Universal Worksurface Support,panel mounting brackets and adjustable glide. Ln List List Description Model H D Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Universal Worksurface Panel Support M-UPMHEP1229 29" 12" 7 0.5 294 320 M-UPMHEP2429 29" 24" 11 1.2 305 331 M-UPMHEP3029 29" 30" 15 1.8 315 341 w a w n_ w C7 Q O V) C7 Z Ln Q w W HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln w See page 5 Q x LU z I "'2201 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2 EXHIBIT B Worksurfaces and Supports See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. z All Dimensions are Nominal. M n Universal Worksurface Support Legs m z n Includes M • Legs and attaching hardware. m List List K m z Core Premium m Description Model H W Wt. Cubes premium Paints 0-Leg 20",24",30"wide M-SL20280 29.5" 20" 15 3.6 315 341 M-SL24280 29.5" 24" 17 3.6 327 353 M-SL30280 295' 30" 19 5.3 338 364 70 m T I x E Shared 0-Leg 12",20",24",30"wide M-SL1228SL 29.5" 12" 7 0.5 305 331 D> M-SL2028SL 29.5" 20" 16.5 3.6 327 353 Ln Ln M-SL2428SL 29.5" 24" 18.7 3.6 348 374 n M-SL3028SL 29.5" 30" 20.9 5.3 370 396 M f Ln C ' v Panel Mounted O-Leg Bracket M-SLPBL 29.5" 3 3.6 93 100 Ln M-SLPBR 29.5" 3 3.6 93 100 • Support Leg 24",30"wide M-MDSL2429 29.5" 24" 25 1.1 212 238 -v M-MDSL3029 29.5" 30" 25 1.1 223 249 �;Q m m O z D M m Ln m D Z n HOW TO SPECIFY D n n Select Model Number Select Paint Color N Ln See page 5 0 m N �� Z "' I x maxon, 1221 Worksurfaces and Supports EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2 See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. V w Universal Worksurface Support Legs Uj w W Includes • Legs and attaching hardware. w C7 LU w List List,-' "' Description Model H W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Premium Paints Standing Height C-Leg 24",30"wide M-SL24410 41" 24" 16 5.2 458 484 x .� .t M-SL30410 41" 30" 17 6.4 522 548 LL a w V a Shared Standing Height C-Leg 24",30"wide M-SL2441SL 41" 24" 16 5.2 489 515 M-SL3041SL 41" 30" 17 6.4 555 581 Ln Ln N V) Panel Mounted Standing Height O-Leg Bracket M-SLSPBL 41" ■ 6 3.7 136 143 M-SLSPBR 41" ■ 6 3.7 136 143 0-Leg Stanchion 20",24",30"wide M-SCAW6520 6" 20" 5 0.9 217 224 M-SCAW6524 6" 24" 6 0.9 240 247 w M-SCAW6530 6" 30" 7 0.9 261 268 a w a Double Depth O-Leg 48",60"wide M-SL48280 29.5" 48" 18 7 598 624 QM-SL60280 29.5" 60' 17 8.6 680 706 z ✓ o fI C7 Ln Z Q w W HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln uSee page 5 LU Q Z l �. 2221 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2 EXHIBIT B Worksurfaces and Supports See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. z m m Universal Worksurface Tower Support m z m List List Core Premium Description Model Wt. Cubes Paint Paint M M-TB2W1 1 05 46 72 . Universal Worksurface Tower Support Bracket � m v M m TI X N External Table Top Support Channel > D cn v Description Model Wt. 1 :1 Cubes List External Table Top Support Channel M-PPSC42 5.8 0.4 184 M-PPSC48 5.8 0.4 190 N M-PPSC54 6.6 0.4 244 C M-PPSC60 8.3 0.5 250 M-PPSC72 9.9 0.5 260 L^ M-PPSC84 11.5 0.5 270 • M m D M m tn O D G) m Ln m Di Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY D n n Select Model Number Select Paint Color Seepage 5 0 m w �� Z ___ I O X maxon• 1223 Worksurfaces and Supports EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2 See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. w u w Universal Worksurface Support Column w Li w List List P Model Wt. Cubes Core Premium w Description (D Paint Paint w Universal Worksurface Support Column M-USC 10 1 238 264 w X LL w d w u a N Universal Worksurface Post Leg "' Includes • Universal Worksurface Post Leg. N 70 mounting plate. a List List Description Model Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Universal Worksurface Post Leg M-UWSL29 6.7 3.2 258 284 M-UWSL40 10 4.1 304 330 N l w n- w o. w C7 o: O (D z Q Ln Ln W HOW TO SPECIFY w Select Model Number Select Paint Color O Ln w See page 5 u u x Z M 2241 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2 EXHIBIT B Worksurfaces and Supports See pages 198-204 for the specification guide. A m 71 Worksurface Stanchions m z n m List "List Core Premium Description Model Wt. Cubes Paint Paint K m Worksurface Support Stanchion To be used with a Worktop z 6) M-USS0512WT 3.5 0.5 332 390 m M-USS0518WT 4.1 0.7 350 408 M-USS1012WT 3 1.2 277 335 M-USS1018WT 5 1.4 294 352 v M m m To be used without a Worktop x M-USS0612 3.5 0.5 350 408 M-USS0618 4.1 0.7 366 424 M-USS1112 3 1.2 376 434 M-USS1118 5 1.4 393 451 D 4 un D n m Worksurface to Wing Panel Bracket Ln Includes Ln • Spanner Rail. • Adjustable worksurface mount clips. • Panel Brackets. List< List Model Wt. Cubes Core Premium Description Paint Paint Universal Spanner Rail M-UWSR24 2.5 0.39 98 124 M-UWSR30 3 0.39 109 135 D F M-UWSR36 3.5 0.48 121 147 m M-UWSR42 4 0.48 131 157 M-UWSR48 4.5 0.56 141 167 Ln -i O z D M m L, m Z G> HOW TO SPECIFY D n Select Model Number Select Paint Color N See page 5 0 M Z M X maxon, 1225 Worksurfaces and Supports EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2 w u Z w LU w w w w C7 w w X U- W a. W U d N f-� Q V) N V) V) d V) • W W W Q 0 H l/'1 Z Q W N W_ w 0 L 1 N W V U Q X w 0 Z 2261 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2/11 EXHIBIT B Prepare" z m m m t x Z � � m m t z � LA J d 3 � HC •wa ap, Cn "D a t � cn LA N C PrepareTM M n In Prepare has the right table solution that includes teaming,height-adjustable and conference tables. Easily create an interactive learning space,add on to your existing private office,or share ideas comfortably in a cafe setting. Prepare offers an extensive line of shapes, sizes,heights,bases and color options.This table line supports todays workplace needs of heads down work,casual conversation,formal meetings and large learning spaces. All Prepare tables offer: • High pressure laminate(HPL)surfaces with edgeband edge.Durability providing for extended performance and usage. • ` Steel leg construction. + O z D m Ln M Z G) D n M m Ln Ln m Ln Z O m x maxon• 1227 Prepare'" EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2/11 w w Typicals Uj w LL- Please refer to our typicals gallery for all Maxon systems.www.maxonfurniture.com/design-resources/typicals.Here you can download Cad files,BOM's with current pricing and PDF's of each drawing.Each month we add new ideas to support industry trends. Use the Maxon Typicals Gallery to find the components in Prepare workstations: w C7 LU w w X LL- w a FGS-1572 FGS-1572 SOX36T 5OX36T 5OX36T SOX36T 50L �-q 01; I •�1 T'1 W N H t>7 rn � V m U L W N y L/) N620 CAD $' n � m Q BBF-A BBF-A Ln ® to d D O to W U Q w LY ul N Y K O ZLxN ZL4Z aewlS :41 LU (D \ O V) U Z Q � t•L�yr�zee w N 24172 CIU 2412 N w iY O LU w U U Q X w Z 2281 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2/11 EXHIBIT B Prepare'" m m m m Prepare Height-Adjustable Tables Z n Worksurfaces m m m m z G) H-A Rectangle Table Top H-A L-Return Table Top m C-Leg Bases 2 Stage C-Leg Optional Controller v m X L, M-PPBC2S M-PPBC2S3L M-PPBCM C z GSA GSA v D n m T-Leg 2 Stage Base Ln c z D V) N M-PPBT2S2L M-PPBT3SG 0 O GSA c z T D T-Leg 3 Stage Base m M-PPBT3S M-PPBT3S3L M-PPBT3S3LG GSA O D G> m N m -DI Z Gl D n n m Ln z A Z m m X maxon• 1229 Prepare'" EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2/11 w V z Prepare Height-Adjustable Tables w Moving worksurfaces can collide with other components.It is important to ensure free range of motion prior to operating the table. w Pedestals when placed under table will limit range in lowest position. Product line meets or exceeds all ANSI/BIFMA standards. • 5-year limited warranty when used with Maxon worksurface. Height-Adjustable Worksurfaces w Height-adjustable worksurfaces are available in laminate with edgeband. 7 Worksurfaces are pre-drilled with mounting location for bases. LU Rectangular worksurface grommet location is centered on the width and 1.33"from back edge due to mounting of worksurface supports at each end of the worksurface. • L-Return worksurface grommets are located 14"from each end and 3.09"from back edge. x w Height-Adjustable Base Comparison a Model M-PPBC2S M-PPBC253L M-PPBT252L M-PPBT3S M-PPBT353L M-PPBT35G M-PPBT3S3LG Stages 2-Stage 2-Stage 2-Stage 3-Stage 3-Stage 3-Stage 3-Stage Style C-Le Base C-Le Base T-Le Base T-Le Base T-Le Base T-Le Base T-Le`Base w Leg Qt 2-Les 3-Les 2-Les 2-Les 3-Les 2-Les 3-Legs V Max.Load 300lb5. 450Ids. 250Ids, 250Ids. 400Ids, 250lbs. 400Ids. Range with 1'a"Top 273 4"-473 e" 273 4"-47's" 263 4"-46'a" 22'4"-48'"" 223 4"-48's" 22'a"-48'"' 223 a''-48's" Top Depth 24%30" 24"-30" 24"-36" 24"-36" 24"-36" 24"-36" 24"-36 2 Top Width 48"-72" 48"x 48"-60"x 72" 48"-84"* 48"-84"* 48"x 48"-72"x 84"* 48"-84"* 48"x 48"-72"x 84"* Color Black Silver White Black,Silver,White Nicker Nickel Nickel Nickel Nickel 4 Set Memory Control Ordered Separately Ordered Separately Included Included Included Included Included Glide Adjustment 1B 1 1A" 1/2 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" /2" 4n 90'Corner Base No Yes No No Yes No Yes d 120"Corner No Yes No No Yes No Yes cc D Base" No Yes No No Yes No Yes Two-Piece Tops No No No No Yes No Yes TravelSpeed 1.5"/second 1.5"/second 1.2"/second 1.4"/second 1,4"/second 1.4"/second 1.4'/second w Watts/Amps 20OW/SA 30OW/8A 40OW/3.3A 400W/3.3A 50OW/4.2A 40OW/3.3A SOOW/4.2A' V GSA Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes or_ *36"deep tops have maximum width of 72" Y K 0 Height-Adjustable Base with Rectangle or L-Return Table Top M-PPBC25 M-PPBC253L M-PPBT2S2L M-PPBT3S M-PPBT353L M-PPBT35G M-PPST353LG 48Wx24D 54Wx24D - - 60Wx24D 66Wx24D 72Wx24D 48Wx3OD 54Wx3OD w 60Wx3OD < 66Wx3OD 72Wx30D O 58Wx35D LH Ln 58Wx46D LH 70Wx35D LH 70Wx46D LH 58Wx35D RH z 58Wx46D RH Q 70Wx35D RH LU Ln 70Wx46D RH V) w O Ln w v x w 0 z 2301 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2/11 EXHIBIT B Prepare'" M m M Height-Adjustable Bases m Z r C-Leg Base n m Can use a CPU and keyboard trays. • 2 Stage Leg Design. • 2 Leg option for Rectangle worksurfaces. 3 Leg option for L-Return worksurfaces. m • 66"and 72"W Height-Adjustable Rectangular Worksurfaces include an external support channel.All Height- z Adjustable L-Return Worksurfaces include an external support channel. m • The independent leg,no crossbar design of the C-Leg exceeds knee clearance recommendations and provides optimal undersurface mounting capability. G Available in Black,White and Silver. I: t Glides provide 3/8"of adjustment. o • Come with standard up and down controller. 70 • Optional controller with 4 set memory available. X • Height adjustment:273/4"-473/s". • Weight rating:300 Ibs including top for 2 Legs. • Weight rating:450 Ibs including top for 3 Legs. L„ • Travel Speed 1.5"per second. K • Control Box for 2 Leg System:200 Watts/5 Amps. D • Control Box for 3 Leg System:300 Watts/8 Amps. Ln D C-Leg Optional Controller n m • Intuitive Desk Panel. • Reminder function via a light strip. Ln • 4 memory positions. c • Integrated Display. D • Bluetooth®capable. Ln T Leg Base 2-Stage Leg Design 0 • Cannot use CPU or keyboard trays. • 2 Leg option for Rectangle worksurfaces. can Does not require the use of an external support channel. c • Available in Nickel only. D • Glides provide 5/8"of adjustment. M • Come with standard 4 set memory controller. • Height adjustment:263/4"-463/8". • Weight rating:250 lbs. • Travel Speed 1.2"per second. • Control Box for 2 Leg System:400 Watts/3.3 Amps. T-Leg Base 3-Stage Leg Design Cannot use CPU or keyboard trays. l;. 2 Leg option for Rectangle worksurfaces. 0 z 3 Leg option for L-Return worksurfaces. • Does not require the use of an external support channel. m • Available in Nickel only. • Glides provide 1/8"of adjustment. • Come with standard 4 set memory controller. Un • Height adjustment:223/4"-481/8". D • Weight rating:250 Ibs including top for 2 Legs. =i • Weight rating:400 Ibs including top for 3 Legs. Z G) • Travel Speed 1.4"per second. • Control Box for 2 Leg System:400 Watts/3.3 Amps. • Control Box for 3 Leg System:500 Watts/4.2 Amps. D n • Models ending in G are GSA compliant. n Ln Qn 0 70 m Ln Z 0 m X maxon 1231 Prepare" EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2/11 w u LU Height-Adjustable Tops and Bases w w Prepare'"adjustable-height bases are available in four styles: w w w X LU 2-Stage Electric 2-Stage Electric 3-Stage Electric 3-Stage Electric a C-Leg Base with C-Leg Base with T-Leg Base with T-Leg Base with Rectangular Worksurface L-Return Worksurface Rectangular Worksurface L-Return Worksurface w a Bottom Views a N cr cr Ln N N N w 2-Stage with C-Legs 3-Stage with T-Legs V) N Y o Clearance Dimensions Rectangle Corner E1 El e ice — _._W E2_� ___.__W2.. �I —__W2------ T-Leg 214 31/V C Leg -2"C-Leg Rectangle Corner w Q Oo Base Style: T-Leg Base C-Leg Base N Dimension location: El W3 W2 E2 El- Wl W2 E2 Surface dimensions Edge of table to Between legs Between legs Edge of table to Edge of table to Between legs Between legs Edge of table to are nominal outside of leg outside of leg outside of leg outside of leg C7 24"x 48"Rectangle — — — — 2" 38" — 127/8" Z Q 24"x 54"Rectangle 21/2" 411A" — 105/e" 2" 44" — 12'/s" w 24"x 60"Rectangle 21h" 471/4" — 101N, 2" 50" — 127/e" N 24"x 66"Rectangle 21/7" 531/4" — 105/a" 2" 56" — 127/s" 24"x 72"Rectangle 22h" 591/4" — 105/e" 2" 62" — 127/e" N 30"x 48"Rectangle — — — — 2" 38" — 177/e" w 30"x 54"Rectangle 21/2" 411/4" — 135W 2" 44" — 177/e" 0 30"x 60"Rectangle 22h" 471/4" — 135/e" 2" 50" O — 171/e" N 30"x 66"Rectangle 21/2" 531/4" — 135/e" 2" 56" — 177/s" w u 30"x 72"Rectangle 21/2" 591/4" — 131/e" 2" 62" — 177h" Q60"x 36"Corner Cove — — — — 71/e" 431/4" 267/V — 60"x 48"Corner Cove 21/2' 43" 31" — 71/e" 431/" 377/d' — 72"x 36"Corner Cove — — — — TA" 551/4" 261/e" — 72"x 48"Corner Cove 21/5 55" 31" — 71/s" 551/4" 377/d' — X w 0 Z 2321 Maxon, GSA SIN 711-11 EXHIBIT B Prepare" See pages 228-232 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Actual.Add Suffix"N"to a model number for no grommets.Example:M-URCW2448N. m n Height-Adjustable Table Tops - Rectangle Z r., m List List Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 ,T M With Grommets `z:o Height-Adjustable Rectangle Table Top M-PPHA4824* 23.25" 46" 46 3 487 531 m M-PPHA5424 23.25" 52" 48 3.8 515 565 O M-PPHA6024* 23.25" 58" 53 3.8 541 596 M-PPHA6624 23.25" 64" 73.8 4.9 569 629 M-PPHA7224* 23.25" 70" 81.6 5 623 688 ::a m M-PPHA4830* 29.25" 46" 52 3.7 541 596 X M-PPHA5430 29.25" 52" 59 4.6 569 631 M-PPHA6030* 29.25" 58" 63 4.6 595 663 M-PPHA6630 29.25" 64" 72 5.5 623 698 M-PPHA7230* 29.25" 70" 80 5.5 677 759 D *Models are available in no grommet option. D m Ln C Height-Adjustable Table Tops - L-Return Ln List List o 0 Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 `n Height-Adjustable Return Table Top(Left Hand) M-PPHAL5835ELS 23.25" 58" 59.8 5.9 839 921 n M-PPHAL5846ELS 23.25" 58" 80.8 7.6 893 1025 M CD O M-PPHAL7035ELS 23.25" 70" 69.6 6.9 947 1045 > M-PPHAL7046ELS 23.25" 70" 92.6 9 1002 1112 Height-Adjustable Return Table Top(Right Hand) M-PPHAL5835ERS 23.25" 58" 59.8 5.9 839 921 M-PPHAL5846ERS 23.25" 58" 80.8 7.6 893 1025 Ln CD CD M-PPHAL7035ERS 23.25" 70" 69.6 6.9 947 1045 A < —� M-PPHAL7046ERS 23.25" 70" 92.6 9 1002 1112 D M m Ln m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color N Ln *No Grommet option:Add"N"suffix See page 10 J M (no upcharge) Edgeband n See page 10 z o X maxon, 1233 Prepare'" EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-11 See pages 228-232 for the specification guide. w U W Height-Adjustable C-Leg Base: 2-Legs Ui W Ui w List` List Ui Description Model Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint W 2-Stage C-leg Electric Power Base 2 legs M-PPBC2S 60 3.3 3030 3108 �J ,i x LL LU Select finishes listed on page 5 a Height-Adjustable C-Leg Base: 3-Legs w U Q vai List s List t— Description Model Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint 2-Stage C-leg Electric Power Base 3 legs M-PPBC2S3L 74 3.3 4112 4190 V) Ln � li uSelect finishes listed on page 5 a LL V) C-Leg Height-Adjustable Base - Memory Control Y 0 Description Model Wt. Cubes List Memory Controls for C-leg base M-PPBCMC** 0.6 0.1 324 **Height-Adjustable Base-Memory Controls are intended for use with Maxon height-adjustable tables and are approved under GSA SIN 711-11.When purchased separately and used without a Maxon height-adjustable table,the memory control marked(")is considered open market. w l7 a 0 Ln z a Ln Ln W HOW TO SPECIFY 0 0 Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln uSee page 5 v Q x US Z I I 2341 maxon• GSA SIN 711-11 EXHIBIT B Prepare'" See pages 228-232 for the specification guide. z m M Height-Adjustable T-Leg Base: 2-Legs Z Includes M • Height-Adjustable Base. • Memory Control. m M m Model Wt. Cubes List Description m Height-Adjustable Base(2 Stage) M-PPBT252L 66 2.4 1850 v z m Y T X Select finishes listed on page 5 M-PPBT3S 67 2.4 2016 Ln Height-Adjustable Base(3 Stage) K M-PPBT3SG 66 2.4 2267 Dz Ln n C D Ln Ln Height-Adjustable T Leg Base: 3-Legs 0 0 Ln Includes • Height-Adjustable Base. D • Memory Control. M Ln Description Model Wt. Cubes List Height-Adjustable Base(3 Stage) M-PPBT3S3L 97 3.6 3182 M-PPBT3S3LG 91 3.6 3580 LA 0 D M m Ln m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Paint Color M Ln See page 5 � Nickel Only m Ln z M FPJ 8 FL M maxon• 1235 Prepare" EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2/11 w LU Prepare Tables w W Worksurfaces w �� i Rectangle Table Top Round Table Top Square Table Top Oval Table Top Half-Round Table Top x Support w w V Nesting Table Base X Table Base T Table Base T Base Stretcher Bar External Table Top Ln Support Channel Q ti Electrical L ZD a. Ln �O Ln Om V CAI' Q Wire Manager Cover Power/Data Port Interlink IQ Electrical Modules Y O Combine Table Surfaces and Base Finishes Table tops are available in laminate and are available with Edgeband.Cast aluminum table bases are available with painted finishes. Prepare tables exceed BIFMA Standards and are backed by the Maxon limited lifetime warranty.Die-cast and extruded aluminum components are lightweight,yet highly durable. w C7 Q O Ln C7 Z Q w Ln w O Ln Ln w V V Q X w Z 2361 maxon• GSA SIN 711-1/2/11 EXHIBIT B Prepare'" M m Tops are Out with four grommet options: m Prepare Tables • 1 Power/Data Centered side to side and approximately z n Table Tops • Tops are available in laminate with edgeband. 2"from back edge T • 1 Power/Data Centered front to back and side to side • Pre-drilled locator holes for bracket attachment ensure 2 Power/Data Centered front to back and approximately precision alignment. 12"from each side M • Surfaces 60"and larger must have an external stiffener added. power/Data cutout is 8"x 4". K z C) Table Tops Model No Cut Out 1 Power/Data Rear Edge 1 Power Data Centered 2 Power Data m M-PP2436RE M-PP2448RE* M-PP2460RE* M-PP2472RE* M-PP3048RE* T M-PP3060RE* X M-PP3072RE* M-PP3648RE M-PP3660RE M-PP3672RE M-PP3684RE D M-PP3696RE M-PP486ORE D M-PP4872RE m M-PP4884RE M-PP4896RE M-PP2436RE1 M-PP2448RE1* C M-PP246ORE1* Rectangle M-PP2472RE1* D Ln M-PP3048RE1* M-PP3060RE1* M-PP3072RE1* M-PP3648RE1 O M-PP3660RE1 A M-PP3672RE1 C M-PP3684RE1 M-PP3696RE1 n M-PP4860RE1 N M-PP4872RE1 M-PP4884RE1 M-PP4896RE1 M-PP3072RE2 M-PP3672RE2 M-PP3684RE2 M-PP3696RE2 M-PP4872RE2 M-PP4884RE2 M-PP4896RE2 V) Half Round M-PPHR3248E1* O M-PPHR3060E1* y M-PP30RND m M-PP36RND M-PP42RND M-PP48RND M-PP30SQR Ln M-PP36SQR M M-PP42SQR D Round and Square M-PP48SQR z M-PP30RND1 M-PP36RND1 M-PP42RND1 M-PP48RND1 n M-PP30SQR1 m M-PP36SQR1 V) M-PP42SQR1 O M-PP48S R1 m M-PP3672CO V' M-PP4284C0 Oval M-PP4896C0 M-PP3672CO2 M-PP4284CO2 z M-PP4896CO2 M X *Can be used with Nesting Base. maxon, 1237 Prepare'" EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2/11 w W j External Support Channels W Extends 11/2" below the worksurface. w 36"channel used with 48"worksurface. 48"channel used with 60"worksurface. 60"channel used with 72"worksurface. • 72"channel used with 84"or 96"worksurface. LU Sizes listed are actual.Please follow notes above to determine worksurface/external support channel compatibility. LU w g T-Table Base Base available in core and premium paint finishes. For use with oval and rectangle tops. Small to be used with 24"D table tops. • Medium to be used with 30"D and 36"D table tops. rl- Large to be used with 42"D and 48"D oval and rectangle table tops. � Available with glides or casters. °- All casters are urethane tread locking casters. Glides provide 1/2"of adjustment. • Seated height tables are 29"H. QMust specify stretcher bar on 48"D surfaces.Stretcher bar sold separately. (See page 249) Un T Base Stretcher Bar • Specify stretcher bar for all 48"D rectangle tables with large"T" bases. N 48"x 60'' rectangle tables require a 38"stretcher bar. 48"x 72''and 48"x 84" rectangle tables require a 50"stretcher bar. • 48"x 96" rectangle tables require a 58"stretcher bar. T-Base with Rectangle or Oval Top Z N Table Top M-PPT20FC M-PPT20FG M-PPT24FC M-PPT24FG M-PPT34FG M-PPBAR38 M-PPBAR50 M-PPBAR58 M-PPSC60 M-PPSC72 M-PPSC84 24Dx36W v 24Dx48W Z�s� 24Dx60W • D Y 24Dx72W O 30Dx48W 30Dx6OW 30Dx72W 36Dx48W 36Dx60W , 36Dx72 W 36Dx84W w 36Dx96W l7 ¢ 42Dx84W 48Dx60W 48Dx72 W 48Dx84W C7 48Dx96W Z Ln w Wire Management Cover • For use with T-Base(sold separately). w Wire Manager Covers safely conceal wires and cords to and from the storage compartment. 0 One Wire Manager Cover accommodates up to three power cords and eight data cables. wCables should be placed side-by-side and be neatly organized to prevent overlapping. Cable quantities listed are at 60%fill ratio. Cross-Sectional View of Wire Manager Cover x Showing Capacity w Z 2381 maxon• GSA SIN 711 1/2/11 EXHIBIT B Prepare" m "T"Base "T"Base and"X"Base m = t. X-Table Base • Base available in core and premium paint finishes. z • For use with round and square table tops. E1 w E2 n m • Medium to be used with 30"D and 36'D tabletops. • Large to be used with 42"D and 48"D tabletops. • Base with"E"suffix used with Power/Data Port sold separately. ,-„ \ X-Table Base glides provide 1/2'of adjustment. K • Medium seated height X-table bases are available with glides or casters. M • All casters are urethane tread locking casters. • Seated height tables are 29"H. • Standing height tables are 42"H. X"Table Base " "T"Table Base m m El W E2 E2 X Approximate dimensions Edge of table to Between Edge of table to shown in inches outside of leg Legs outside of leg _ 131/4" V) 30"Round — _ _ 16'/4" D 36"Round — _ 193/4" 42"Round 22 Ln — 3/n" v 48"Round — — 22/4" D 13 n 30"S uare — _ _ 163/4' M 36"Square — _ — 193/4 42"Square — _ 223A" Ln 48"S uare 1, 31" 105/s" C= 24"x 36"Rectangle 24"x 49"Rectangle V. 43" 105/s" — D Ln 24"x 60"Rectangle 1" SS" 105/s" N 24"x 72"Rectangle 1" 67" 10/8" — " — 30"x 48"Rectangle 1" 43" 131/s 30"x 60"Rectangle V. 55" 131/s" — 30'x 72"Rectan le 1 67 135/8 36"x 48"Rectangle 1" 42" 161/e' — Ln Ln _ C 36"x 60"Rectangle 9" 38 161N' � 36"x 72"Rectangle 9" 50" 161/s" — y 36"x 84"Rectangle 17" 46" 165/s l m 36"x 96"Rectangle 17" 58.1 165/s" — L3 48"x 60"Rectangle 9" 38" 225/8" — 48"x 72"Rectangle 9" 50" 225/e" — 48"x 84"Rectangle 15° 50" 221W 48"x 96"Rectan le 17° 58 221/s X-Base with Round or Square Table Top Table Top M-PPX27FC M-PPX27FG M-PPX27FGE M-PPX27FGU M-PPX27FGUE M-PPX34FG M-PPX34FGE rn 30"No Cutout O 36" No Cutout D 42" No Cutout Gl 48" No Cutout m 30"Power Cutout 36"Power Cutout M 42"Power Cutout Ln rn 48"Power Cutout Z G') Nesting Table Base Nesting Base with Rectangle or Half Round Table Top • Base available in core and premium paint Table Top M-PPFLIP24S M-PPFLIP30S M-PPFLIP24L M-PPFLIP30L finishes. D 48W • To be used with rectangle and half round tops. 24Dx m 24Dx60W Ln • Dampened articulation mechanism. 24Dx72w "' • Nesting Table Base is standard with casters. O 30Dx48 W 22 • All casters are urethane tread locking casters. 30ox6ow v • Seated height tables are 29"H. 30Dx72W 32Dx48W Half Round 30Dx60W Half Round _ Z M m X maxon, 1239 Prepare'" EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2/11 w U LU Z Prepare Standard Tables— Pop-up Power/Grommet Options w Prepare standard tables are available with tops equipped with Power/Data Ports.Power/Data Ports allow you to remain powered W and connected by providing two electrical receptacles and two data positions per Power/Data Port Caddy. Power/Data Ports(ordered separately)includes two openings for adapters allowing use of commercially available data terminals and blank faceplate adapters to fill unused openings.Power/Data Ports have an anodized aluminum bezel and a 120"(10 ft.)long cord. LU Models ending with 1 have one power/data cut out.Models ending with 2 have two power/data cut outs. LU w 2i The chart on page 237 indicates which options are available on Prepare standard tables.See Prepare table top pages 236-241 for LU specification instructions and examples. Cutout Options X No Cut Out. L 1 Power/Data Port Centered side to side and approximately 2"from back edge. 1 Power/Data Port Centered front to back and side to side. • 2 Power/Data Ports Centered front to back and approximately 12"from each side. u Electrical options g Prepare Tables offer two power options:Corded,or Interlink IQ. Installation and use of electrical systems,the number of receptacles used Ln on a given circuit,and connections to the building power supply should be in compliance with all local and national electrical codes.Verify Q code requirements before ordering.Chicago,New York,and San Francisco do not permit use of Interlink IQ components.Power/Data 2i Ports include(2)Receptacles and(2)Blank Inserts. 10 foot cord and plug. V) 0 4 � O o D Ln Corded w Corded models plug directly into an outlet with a 10 foot cord and plug and cannot be daisy-chained.When routing corded models to a a wall outlet,the maximum amount of cord that can be exposed outside of the furniture is 6 feet.(New York,check local code.)Power/Data Ports include(3)Receptacles and(3)Blank Inserts(Data Jacks sold separately).For use on power/data port worksurfaces only.Silver Cover N with Black Electrical. Y O w Interlink IQ Interlink IQ provides the ability to use one 15-amp in-feed starter(with 3-prong plug)and power up to 8 power modules(including jumpers)off of one in-feed starter. Interlink IQ provides a visual indicator of system status.LED illuminates green when you are connected and ready to plug in.A red light indicates you have linked too many units.UL recognizes Interlink IQ as a powered table system and meets the requirement of UL962.All models include wire management clips and hardware.Power harnesses include 60"cord and 11"tail.Daisy chained tables in line over 60"W require a 36"jumper between modules.See page 241 for examples of multiple tables using Interlink IQ z components. w V) w iY O Ln V) w U U Q X w M Z 2401 maxon, GSA SIN 711-1/2/11 EXHIBIT B Prepare" M rn M m M m Z n m m K m z G) m Interlink IQ Examples The example above utilizes the following Interlink IQ m components to power three 72"W Prepare tables: x 3—Interlink IQ 60" Power Harnesses model number:M-PPQH5 (provides two AC power receptacles per unit) to 2—Interlink IQ 36"Jumpers model number:M-PPQJ3 D 1—Interlink IQ Starter model number:M-PPQB The example below utilizes the following Interlink IQ D components to power five 72"W Prepare tables: m 5—Interlink IQ 60" Power Harnesses model number: M-PPQH5 (provides two AC power receptacles per unit) ' c 2—Interlink IQ 36"Jumpers model number:M-PPQJ3 1—Interlink IQ Starter model number:M PPQB Ln D uxoa Ln Specification guide for IQ Electrical on Prepare tables Determine table width,and the desired number of tables.The table will then o identify the type and quantity of components needed per table along with the maximum table run.Note that this is in addition to the Power base in-feed c which is needed for each run. ° ° T a M m Top Width ONE(1)POWER/DATA PORT �^ PER TABLE 36" (1)M-PPQH5 8 Maximum tP Table Run Il " 42" (1)M-PPQH5 8 Maximum Table Run 48" (1)M-PPQH5 8 Maximum Table Run 54" (1)M-PPQH5 8 Maximum O Table Run o D G) 1 M-PPQH5 M ( ) 8 Maximum 60" Table Run (1)M-PPQJ3 (1)M-PPQH5 4 Maximum M 66" Table Run ^' (1)M-PPQJ3 (1)M-PPQH5 4 Maximum z 72" Gl (1)M-PPQJ3 Table Run (1)M-PPQH5 4 Maximum D 84 (1)M-PPQJ3 Table Run n Ln (1)M-PPQH5 Ln 4 Maximum p 96 Table Run a!(1)M-PPQJ3 m Half-Round (1)M-PPQH5 8 Maximum (all sizes) Table Run Z O m x maxon• 1241 Prepare`" EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-11 See pages 236-241 for the specification guide. LU All Dimensions are Actual. U W Table Tops - Rectangle LU w LU w List Mist ,,, Description Model D W Wt. Cubes L3 T-L2 C7 ,Uj Rectangle Table Top M-PP2436RE 24" 36" 36 2 433 465 M-PP2448RE* 24" 48" 46 2.5 487 531 M-PP2460RE* 24" 60" 53 3.1 541 596 M-PP2472RE* 24" 72" 75 3.7 595 660 x_ M-PP3048RE* 30" 48" 52 3.6 515 570 U- M-PP3060RE* 30" 60" 63 4.5 569 637 w a M-PP3072RE* 30" 72" 80 5.3 649 731 M-PP3648RE 36" 48" 58 4.7 628 683 M-PP3660RE 36" 60" 73 5.9 682 750 w U M-PP3672RE 36" 72" 85 6.9 757 839 Ln M-PP3684RE 36" 84" 100 8.1 919 1015 Q M-PP3696RE 36" 96" 116 9.4 1028 1130 M-PP4860RE 48" 60" 145 6.2 844 946 Ln M-PP4872RE 48" 72" 156 7 899 1001 M-PP4884RE 48" 84" 167 10.1 973 1075 tN Ln Q M-PP4896RE 48" 96" 178 11.5 1056 1158 n_ n Ln *Can be used with nesting base. Ln Ln w U ua.. Ln N Y 0 W a 0 Ln Ln z a w w HOW TO SPECIFY o Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color Ln See page 10 J Q Edgeband See page 10 x LU z I "' I I �' 2421 maxon• GSA SIN 711-11 EXHIBIT B Prepare`" See pages 236-241 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Actual. M m M Table Tops - Rectangle - Power/Data Port Cut Out z Includes m • Table top. • Power/Data Port Cut Out(cutout will be unfinished unless used with power/data port). m K m List :fL:2t:l is Gl m Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Li Rectangle Table Top,1 Power/Data Port Cut Out M-PP2436RE1 24" 36" 36 2 487 519 M-PP2448RE1* 24" 48" 46 2.5 541 585 A 0 M-PP2460RE1* 24" 60" M 3.1 595 650 T " M-PP2472RE1* 24" 72" 75 3.7 649 714 x M-PP3048RE1* 30" 48" 52 3.6 569 624 M-PP3060RE1* 30" 60" 63 4.5 623 691 M-PP3072RE1* 30" 72" 80 5.3 703 785 > D M PP3648RE1 36" 48" 58 4.7 682 737 M-PP3660RE1 36" 60" 73 5.9 736 804 D M-PP3672RE1 36" 72" 85 6.9 811 893 m M-PP3684RE1 36' 84" 100 8.1 973 1069 M-PP3696RE1 36" 96" 116 9.4 1082 1184 L/, C M-PP4860RE1 48" 60" 145 6.2 899 1001 M-PP4872RE1 48" 72" 156 7 9S3 1055 D Ln M-PP4884RE1 48" 84" 167 10.1 1028 1130 M-PP4896RE1 48" 96" 178 11.5 1110 1212 Rectangle Table Top,2 Power/Data Port Cut Out M-PP3072RE2 30" 72" 80 5.3 757 839 p M-PP3672RE2 36" 72" 85 6.9 865 947 Ln 7z M-PP3684RE2 36" 84" 100 8.1 1028 1124 M-PP3696RE2 36" 96" 116 9.4 1136 1238 n a M-PP4872RE2 48" 72" 156 7 1007 1109 Ln M-PP4884RE2 48" 84" 167 10.1 1082 1184 M-PP4896RE2 48" 96" 178 11.5 1164 1266 *Can be used with nesting base. O z D M m N m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color N V) See page 10 J � Edgeband cmii See page 10 � z o maxon• 1243 Prepare`" EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-11 See pages 236-241 for the specification guide. Uj All Dimensions are Actual. U W Table Tops - Half-Round w W Includes W • Table top. • Power/Data Port Cut Out(cutout will be unfinished unless used with power/data port). w C'J o: w List List w Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 *Half-Round Table Top M-PPHR3248E1 32" 48" 32.4 3.2 407 451 x O M-PPHR3060E1 30" 60" 48.5 5 487 531 LL w cr d / \ \ U a *Discontinued Mid Year 2019. Nesting Table Bases N Includes z 2 locking and 2 non-locking casters. Z) Ln N List List w U Core Premium a Description Model H Wt. Cubes Paint Paint Y Nesting Table Base M-PPFLIP24S 29" 24 2.7 747 826 M-PPFLIP30S 29" 24 2.7 757 836 O M-PPF111241 29" 27 2.7 770 849 M-PPFLIP30L 29" 27 2.7 780 859 w HOW TO SPECIFY Select Table Top Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color See page 10 1v" Ln J Edgeband See page 10 c� Z w 11 W HOW TO SPECIFY K O Select.Table Base Model Number Select Paint Color Ln uSee page 5 u Ui x ��j z "'2441 maxon• GSA SIN 711-11 EXHIBIT B Prepare" See pages 236-241 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Actual. z m M Table Tops - Round and Square z n m List List Description Model W Wt. Cubes LS L2 M Round Table Top M-PP30RND 30" 28 3 541 585 z M-PP36RND 36" 40 3.6 623 667 G) m M-PP42RND 42" 56 4.5 757 801 M-PP48RND 48" 71 4.8 865 909 v Square Table Top M PP30SQR 30" 36 3 433 477 M m M-PP36SQR 36" 50 3.6 476 520 X M-PP42SQR 42" 68 4.2 649 693 M-PP48SQR 48" 89 4.8 731 775 z v D n m Table Tops - Round and Square - Power/Data Port Cut Out L, List List N Ln Description Model W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 *Round Table Top-1 Power/Data Port Cut Out M-PP30RND1 30" 28 3 677 721 O M-PP36RND1 36" 40 3.6 757 801 M-PP42RND1 42" 56 4.5 893 937 c D M-PP48RND1 48" 71 4.8 1002 1046 n In *Square Table Top-1 Power/Data Port Cut Out M-PP30SQR1 30" 36 3 569 613 M-PP36SQR1 36" 50 3.6 613 657 M-PP42SQR1 42" 68 4.2 785 829 M-PP48SQR1 48' 89 4.8 865 909 *Discontinued Mid Year 2019. `^ O z D M m m z HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color M N Seepage 10 �J � Edgeband cmn See page 10 z M �. �. M maxorr 1245 Prepare" EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-11 See pages 236-241 for the specification guide. W All Dimensions are Actual. u w Table Tops - Oval w LL w List list w Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Ll L2 (D w *Oval Table Top M-PP3672CO 36" 72" 85 6.9 1190 1272 M-PP4284CO 42" 84" 120 8.5 1515 1611 M-PP4896CO 48" 96" 178 11.5 1732 1834 CE � x LL W d W Ln Table Tops - Oval - Power/ Data Port Cut Out Q 2 cn List List N Description Model D W FWt. Cubes Ll L2 Q *Oval Table Top-1 Power/Data Port Cut Out M-PP3672COl 36" 72" 85 6.9 1244 1326 ZD '^ M-PP4284COI 42" 84" 120 8.5 1569 1665 M-PP4896COl 48" 96" 178 11.5 1786 1888 N o w aC; -� LL Ln N Y O *Oval Table Top-2 Power/Data Port Cut Out M-PP3672CO2 36" 72" 85 6.9 1298 1380 M-PP4284CO2 42" 84" 120 8.5 1623 1719 M-PP4896CO2 48" 96" 178 11.5 1840 1942 a o w Q *Discontinued Mid Year 2019. O Ln N l7 z Q w N W HOW TO SPECIFY O Select Model Number Select Laminate ((Select Edgge Trim Color u See page 10 U�J!,. J Q Edgeband See page 10 x US z I "' I I 2461 maxon• GSA SIN 711-11 EXHIBIT B Prepare'" See pages 236-241 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. z rn M "X" Table Bases m Z List List , m Core Premium Description Model H Wt. Cubes Paint Paint m Medium Seated Height with Casters M-PPX27FC** 28" 15 2 541 620 Medium Seated Height with Glides M-PPX27FG** 28" 17 2 541 620 *Medium Seated Height with Glides,Power M-PPX27FGE** 28" 16 2 649 728 m v z m T Medium Standing Height with Glides M-PPX27FGU** 41" 16 3.6 649 728 N *Medium Standing Height with Glides,Power M-PPX27FGUE** 41" 18 3.6 757 836 D � D n m V) C D Large Seated Height with Glides M-PPX34FG** 28" 18 3.7 757 836 *Large Seated Height with Glides,Power M-PPX34FGE** 28" 18 3.7 865 944 O **Table bases are intended for use with Maxon table tops and are approved under GSA SIN 711- L'„ 11.When purchased separately and used without a Maxon top,those bases marked(*)are considered open market. m N *Power bases will be discontinued Mid Year 2019. O D M m Ln m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY n n Select Model Number Select Paint Color N L' See page 5 � m Ln M � Z 1 �* O m x maxon• 1247 Prepare'" EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-11 See pages 236-241 for the specification guide. W All Dimensions are Nominal. U z "T" Table Bases W LU w W Includes cc • Table Base(pair). • All surface casters,non-marring glides. w 0 z w List Description Model H Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Small Seated Height M-PPT20FC** 30" 15 2 574 653 M-PPT20FG** 28" 15 2 574 653 X L' w a Uj Medium Seated Height M-PPT24FC** 30" 17 2.2 623 702 M-PPT24FG** 28" 17 2.2 623 702 N 4 Q V) N Large Seated Height M-PPT34FG** 28" 25 3.1 757 836 Ln a `' **Table bases are intended for use with Maxon table tops and are approved under GSA SIN 711- a 11.When purchased separately and used without a Maxon top,those bases marked(*)are N considered open market. Ln w U Q Ln to Y 0 W Q 0 V) 0 z a Ln Ln W HOW TO SPECIFY 1 Select Model Number Select Paint Color 0 Ln Ln LU See page 5 U Q LU X �� 2481 maxon• GSA SIN 711-11 EXHIBIT B Prepare" See pages 236-241 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Actual. m n T Base Stretcher Bar m Z n M List List Model W Wt. Cubes Core Premium Description Paint Paint r- K T Base Stretcher Bar M-PPBAR38 38" 4 0.5 239 318 M M-PPBAR50 50" 4.8 0.5 250 329 m M-PPBAR58 58" 5 0.7 260 339 v M m m X External Table Top Support Channel D Description Model W Wt. Cubes List D External Table Top Support Channel M-PPSC48 36" 5.8 0.4 190 n m M-PPSC60 48" 8.3 0.5 250 M-PPSC72 60" 9.9 0.5 260 M-PPSC84 72" 11.5 0.5 270 C v Ln D Ln lC/) G 0 ;a Wire Manager Cover Ln T D List List M Description Model Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Wire Manager Cover M-PPT2024CVR 4 0.3 136 162 M-PPT34CVR 4 0.3 136 162 O M m N m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Paint Color n Ln See page 5` O m M � maxon• 1249 Prepare" EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-11 See pages 236-241 for the specification guide. w V W Ganging Bracket LU w w w Description Model Wt. Cubes List 2 PACK Ganging Bracket M-PPGNB 1 0.1 54 w LU w X Power/Data Port LL w o_ Description Model Wt. Cubes List LU Power/Data Port Corded includes(3)Receptacles and(1)Blank Insert M-PP4P2C 3 1.8 487 V 6'cord and plug c V) CC to e N N Interlink IQ Electrical Modules Ln N Description Model Wt. Cubes List w w Interlink IQ Starter with 72"In-feed cord M-PPQB 2 0.1 947 Y O w Interlink IQ 60"Power Harness w/Pop-Up-3 Receptacles/1 Data M-PPQHS 3 1.8 682 Interlink IQ36"Jumper M-PPQJ3 2 0.1 190 LU i V Q O �. Z Ln Q w W HOW TO SPECIFY o Select Model Number in Ln u Q X Z 2501 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2/3 EXHIBIT B Storage rn m m �.,.....a...__..... jj + .. _ m m G) q T R7 N C Storage T Maxon Freestanding Storage options incorporate innovative,durable designs that maximize the efficiency of your workspace.Constructed of heavy-duty steel, Maxon Freestanding Storage provides functionality,durability,and value.Our storage solutions are designed to be fully integrated with Maxon Panel,Desking and Benching systems. D M m Ln m Z D n n m Ln m Z M m x maxon• 1251 Storage EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2/3 W W Storage is an essential part of the productive workplace. w Make storage a matter of personal choice as well as necessity.Choose from metal, laminate,or veneer with features like multiple pull ,'; styles,drawer sizes,finishes,and more. It's your workspace.Shouldn't it look like it? Personal Storage Laterals and Shared Storage u, 1.Pedestal. 3.Personal tower. S.Lateral file. 7. Bookcases. Support,mobile,or Versatile storage with a small The storage workhorse, Quick access to information, 2 suspended,with three footprint.It's storage that in multiple heights and in depths to match laterals 1U drawer sizes. goes up,not out.Combine widths.Works with systems or narrower profiles to stand 2.Personal file. drawers,personal storage, furniture or by itself. on their own. Combines pedestal and and wardrobe options for 6.Storage cabinet. x lateral storage to create the right solution. Equipped g q pped with hinged, a personal filing solution 4.Low credenza. locking doors and adjustable n� for letter and legal size Active storage that creates shelves to conceal and documents. a layered look in any secure supplies. workspace. w Q a. 1 2 3 4 7 a v❑i + U Y O W a � � W D • • 5 6 C� Z Ln w Ln w it O Ln Ln w U U Q X w Z 2521 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2/3 EXHIBIT B Universal Storage m m m Universal Pedestals � m --= Z m m m m File/File Box/Box/File G1 28"H x 15"W 28"H x 15"W m 19.875"D 19.875"D Universal Lateral Files rn m m x Ln 2-High 3-High 4-High 5-High 27.875"H 391/a"H 521/2"H 641/4"H 30",36",42"W 30",36",42"W 30",36",42"W 30",36",42"W n 18"D 18"D 18"D 18"D m Universal Bookcases c Ln Ln Ln 29"H 41"H 59"H 71"H C 341/2"W 341/2"W 341/2"W 341/2"W 12a/a"D 121/8"D 121/s"D 121/a"D n m Ln Universal Storage Cabinets v m m D m m Hinged Doors Hinged Doors g g • 39.125"H 64.25"H 36"W 36"W 18"D 18"D m rn Z D n n m N Ln m Ln Z m m X maxon* 1253 Universal Storage EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2/3 w w Universal Systems and Desk Pedestal Files Universal Bookcases w Available in Box/Box/File and File/File Shelf depth is 121/4". LL LU configurations in 20"depth. Available in four heights,29"H,41"H,59"H,71"H. Available in two pull options—Arch or All units case dimensions are 3378"W x 121/8"D. Recessed pulls. Inside shelves adjust in 1/2"increments. • Support pedestals have fully enclosed tops. Shelf load capacity 114 lbs. Tops have punch holes for mounting to a Bookcases have the following number of °; worksurface. adjustable shelves: 5; • When used under a surface it MUST be mounted to 29"high.............................1 59"high.............................3 w the worksurface. 41" high..............................2 71" high..............................4 Steel, ball-bearing slide suspension with 90%extension on file Shelves are 1/4"thick.Interior 41/4"less than height. drawers,and 75%extension on box drawers. Bookcases do not include leveling glides. x May be used as worksurfaces support in panel environment. Cannot be used on top of or under worksurfaces as support. w File Drawer Compressor(M-FCP1), Partition Storage Tray (M-UT1),and Box Drawer Divider(M-BDD)sold separately. • Side-to-side filing utilizes two cross rails(M-FCV1)sold separately. Cantilevered Surpass w • File drawer has high sides to allow front-to-back filing. Worksurfaces Desks and Returns • Universal Systems Pedestals not used to support a worksurface 24"D 30"D 24"D 30"D d (freestanding)require a counterweight kit sold separately. Ln Caster package available to field convert support pedestals Storage 20" ■ ■ ■ ■ Q Depths to mobile. 23" ■ ■ ■ L Master keys are available.For key alike option,M-LC(page 261 must be ordered separately). N Universal Lateral Files a Available in two pull options—Arch or Recessed pulls. °•., `^ All files are 18"deep. • Two-drawer laterals can be used as worksurface Ln w support. a • Counterweight standard on all heights. Not required on 5 high drawer models. YLateral files have an"Interlock"mechanism that prevents users from opening two file drawers at the same time. Top drawer on 5-drawer lateral is a roll out shelf with a receding door. w Three-part,telescoping,slide suspension with 40 steel ball bearings per side. Q Laminate tops are available—order separately. w p p Y• Master keys are available.For key alike option,M-LC(page 261 must be ordered separately) • Load capacities per 12"opening per current ANSI/BIFMA Standards: 30"W.........................86 lbs. 36"W....................... 105 lbs. • 42"W....................... 124 1 bs. Clearance Dimensions—H x W 30/36/42"x D Roll-out drawer........ 111/4"x 271/8"/331/s"/391/8"x 161/2" Roll-out shelf............ 101/2"x 271/8"/331/8"/391/8"x 161/2" z a Universal Storage Cabinets v Cabinets are 36"W and are available in two heights, 391/8"H and 641/4"H. • Shelves are height-adjustable in 2"increments and w are 151/4"D. 0 Storage cabinets have the following number of N adjustable shelves: u391/8"H...............................2 641/4"H................................4 a Leveling glides are adjustable In 1"Increments. • Wire management grommet in back of unit. • Cabinets are fully assembled. x Master keys are available.For key alike option,M-LC(page 261 o must be ordered separately) z 2541 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2/3 EXHIBIT B Storage Include Lateral File Storage m m Lateral File Width 30"W 36"W 42"W m z Front-to-Back Filing*-outside tabs of folders rest on drawer sides rr) Letter Size (81/2 x 11") m A m Filing Volume: Filing Volume: Filing Volume: SHADEQ BOX INQICATES G1 291/2' (Include) 291h' (Include) 45" (Universal) ^i MAXIMUM FILING,EFFICIENCY 30" (Universal) 30" (Universal) A4 (81/4 x 111/a") m NA n X Filing Volume: Filing Volume: Filing Volume: 141/4" (Include) 291/2" (Include) 30" (Universal) 15" (Universal) 30" (Universal D z Legal Size D (81/2 x 14") m Filing Volume: Filing Volume: Filing Volume: c 141/4" (Include) 29ii`'" (Include) 30" (Universal) 15" (Universal) 30" (Universal U) EDP O t Filing Volume: Filing Volume:. CZ� 141/4"(Include) 291h"(Include) D n m Side-to-Side Filing Letter,A4 and Legal A m D rn m Filing Volume:261/4" Filing Volume:321/4' Filing Volume:381/4" Load Capacities(per current ANSI/BIFMA standards) ANSI/BIFMA Standards Include Opening Height 30"Wide 36"Wide Maxon lateral files,incorporating • the required counterweights in 12" 87 lbs.(Metal) 107 lbs.(Metal) freestanding situations,meet or exceed the applicable ANSI/BIFMA Storage Unit Test Standards X5.9-2012. M m Lateral Filing Options Combination Filing: Front-to-back filing: Side-to-side filing: (front-to-back with side-to-side in one drawer) 30"wide files*:301h"of filing with letter/letter rows. 30"wide files:27"of filing with letter or legal. 30"wide files:not recommended. 36"wide files*:301/z'of filing with letter/letter, 36"wide files:33"of filing with letter or legal. 36"wide files:151/4"of front-to-back filing and D legal/legal,or letter/legal rows, 42"wide files:39"of filing with letter or legal. 201/4"of side-to-side legal filing. 42"wide files**:451/4"of filing with 3 rows letter or 42"wide files:151/4"of front-to-back filing and cmn 301b"of 2 rows legal,or 2 standard printout rows. 261/4"of side-to-side legal filing. 0 rn *Include Front-to-back filing requires optional front-to-back filing bars M-ICCAHR12 for 18"D units(except 2H lateral files use filing bar "1 M-ICCAHRI5)one bar per row of filing.Order bars separately,see page 298. Universal Front-to-back filing requires optional front-to-back filing bars M-LSR4 one bar per row of filing. M-LDR2 for use in 42"W case z for front-to-back filing of letter paper size.Order bars separately,see page 263. o maxon• 1255 Universal Storage EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-1/2 See pages 252-255 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Actual. U w Universal Systems and Desk Pedestal Files Uj w W Includes • Pencil tray included in one box drawer. w cccc List List u.w 2 Description Configuration Model H D w wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint Systems and Desk Pedestal File/File M-SYP20E-R 28" 19.875" 15" 61 6.8 681 739 X LL w cc a w U a Systems and Desk Pedestal Box/Box/File M-SYP20B-R 28" 19.875" 15" 61 6.8 681 739 Ln I— Q Ln V) a 0 Systems and Desk Pedestal File/File M-SYP20E-A 28" 19.875" 15" 61 6.8 681 739 LU w w L N Y 0 Systems and Desk Pedestal Box/Box/File M-SYP206-A 28" 19.875" 15" 61 6.8 681 739 w cc w a • l7 Z Q w N Ln w HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln w See page 5 V Q X o M - Z 2561 maxon• GSA SIN 711-3 EXHIBIT B Universal Storage See pages 252-255 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Actual. M m M Universal Storage Cabinets z n m List List Core Premium Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Paint Paint M Storage Cabinet,R-Pull M-SC183640 R 39.125" 18" 36" 119 20 2032 2190 r^ z M-SC183664-R 64.25" 18" 36" 184 31.8 2783 2941 M m v M m m x (n D z -v D n m Un C D Ln Ln O 7z Ln Ln 70 T D n m N -O M m D M m • m z G) HOW TO SPECIFY D n n Select Model Number Select Paint Color M Ln See page 5 0 m Ln Z O maxon* 1257 Universal Storage EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-3 See pages 252-255 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Actual. w Universal Lateral Files cc w w Includes • Lateral File • Four adjustable leveling glides. w Two adjustable hangrails per drawer for side to side filing. ( Magnetic label holders identify contents within drawers. w w List ' List Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes Core Premium x f I I I I Paint Paint w 2-Drawer,R-Pull M-LF230-R 277/a" 18" 30" 138 11.8 1616 1774 n- M-LF236-R 271/a" 18" 36" 156 13.9 1780 1938 M-LF242-R 277/a" 18" 42" 177 16.1 2051 2209 U a V) Q2-Drawer,A-Pull M-LF230-A 277/a" 18" 30" 138 11.8 1616 1774 M-LF236-A 277/a' 18" 36" 156 13.9 1780 1938 M-LF242-A 271/8" 18" 42" 177 16.1 2051 2209 L V) a V) 3-Drawer,R-Pull M-LF330-R 391/a" 18" 30" 150 16.2 1973 2131 M-LF336-R 391/8" 18" 36" 174 19.3 2208 2366 ,`J M-LF342-R 391/8" 18' 42" 197 22.3 2545 2703 j Y 0 3-Drawer,A-Pull M-LF330-A 391/a" 18" 30" 150 16.2 1973 2131 M-LF336-A 391/a" 18" 36" 174 19.3 2208 2366 w M-LF342-A 391/8" 18" 42" 197 22.3 2545 2703 aa. � w o_ w (D Z Q w LO HOW TO SPECIFY w of Select Model Number Select Paint Color 0 v' See page 5 w U U Q W � M Z 2581 maxon• GSA SIN 711-3 EXHIBIT B Universal Storage See pages 252-255 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Actual. m M Universal Lateral Files z n m List List Core Premium Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes paint Paint 71 K 4-Drawer,R-Pull M-LF430-R 521/2" 18" 30" 150 16.2 2478 2636 M-LF436-R 521/z' 18" 36" 174 19.3 2805 2963 m M-LF442-R 521/2" 18" 42" 197 22.3 3212 3370 v z m X 4-Drawer,A-Pull M-LF430-A 521/2" 18" 30" 176 20.7 2478 2636 M-LF436-A 521/2" 18" 36" 198 24.6 2805 2963 M-LF442-A 521/2" 18" 42" 213 28.5 3212 3370 � � D v � D n � rn 5-Drawer,R-Pull M-LF530-R 641/4" 18" 30" 203 24.9 3119 3277 c M-LF536-R 641/4" 18" 36" 238 29.6 3512 3670Ln D M-LF542-R 641/4" 18" 42" 264 34.2 4064 4222 Ln O z Ln Ln D 5-Drawer,A-Pull M-LF530-A 641/4" 18" 30" 203 24.9 3119 3277 N M-LF536-A 641/4" 18" 36" 238 29.6 3512 3512 M-LF542-A 641/4" 18" 42" 264 34.2 4064 4222 D M � D M m ld� U" m Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number Select Paint Color n Ln Ln See page 5 O m - Z M �. M maxon• 1259 Universal Storage EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-3 See pages 252-255 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. v w Universal Bookcases w w w w List lst Description Model H D W wt. Cubes Core Premium w I I I I I Paint Paint Bookcase,2-Shelf M-BS30 29" 123/4" 341/2" 44 9.3 922 1080 w w X LL Bookcase,3-Shelf M-BS42 41" 123/4" 341/2" 57 12.8 1008 1166 w a w U a N H < Bookcase,4-Shelf M-BS60 59" 123/4" 341/2" 77 18.2 1176 1334 Ln kn Ln a ZD V) Bookcase,5-Shelf M-BS72 71" 123/4" 341/2" 87 21.7 1261 1419 w Ln ¢ Ln Y 0 w a w a z Ln w w HOW TO SPECIFY w Select Model Number Select Paint Color 0 W See page 5 U L) LU M Z 2601 maxon• i GSA SIN 711-3 EXHIBIT B Universal Storage See pages 252-255 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. :;0 m M Universal Storage Interchangeable File Lock Options Z Includes m • Each Lock Core Kit includes one core and core removal tool,two keys and instructions. m Description Model Wt. Cubes List z Lock Core Kit M LC 1 0.1 39 m Master Key(1) M-MK 1 0.1 25 v z m x Universal Storage Interchangeable File Accessories > D v Description Model Wt. Cubes List m Mobile to Stationary Ped Glide Kit M-MTSKIT 5 0.3 70 Ln D Stationary to Mobile Ped Caster Kit M-STMKIT 5 0.3 70 (Universal System Pedestals Only) 0 0 m Universal Systems Pedestal Counter Weight Kit M-ESPCW 18 0.2 226 '^ v M 4�j m D z m HOW TO SPECIFY Select Cabinet Lock Model Number Key Number m M G) HOW TO SPECIFY n n Select Model Number M Ln 0 m V) Z X maxon* 1261 Universal Storage EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-3 See pages 252-255 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Nominal. U w Pedestal and Lateral File Accessories cc w w List List Description Model Wt. Cubes Core Premium Paint Paint w Box Drawer Divider M-BDD 0.5 0.3 27 27 z w w x U_ w File Drawer Compressor(4 Pack) M-FCP1 4 0.7 197 197 w U Ln CC H Q Ln File Drawer Side to Side Filing Bars(4 Pack) M-FCV1 1 0.1 127 127 V1 a z V) Ln LU Partition Storage Tray(Black) M-UT1 0.5 0.2 74 74 w Y 0 w a Pedestal to-Panel side spacers (**for 24"only) M-PEDSPRO-LH** 1.1 0.4 70 96 w a M-PEDSPRO-RH** 1.1 0.4 70 96 M-PEDSPR4-LH 2.5 0.4 79 105 M-PEDSPR4-RH 2.5 0.4 79 105 � I, I -i w Lateral-to-Panel side spacers M-LATSPR6-LH 3.7 2.3 105 131 M-LATSPR6-RH 3.7 2.3 105 131 Z Ln w } W HOW TO SPECIFY 0 Select Model Number Select Paint Color Ln w See page 5 U U LU X Z ��' 2621 Maxon' GSA SIN 711-3 EXHIBIT B Universal Storage i See pages 252-255 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. m -n Pedestal and Lateral File Accessories m z n m Description Model Wt. Cubes List Lateral File Single Hanging File Rack(4 Pack) M-1-SR4 1 0.1 56 m 4ez m Lateral File Double Hanging File Rack(2 Pack) M-LDR2 1.5 0.1 56 G/ x m X Ln z Ln v D n m Ln Un D Un O C D n m Ln A m D m • m 4 Z O HOW TO SPECIFY n Select Model Number N Ln O m U1 Z M M m X maxon• 1263 Universal Storage EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-3 See pages 252-255 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Actual. U w Work Tops w w w List List w Description Model H W Wt. Cubes L3 L2 C7 w Lateral File Worktop 18"Deep Edgeband M-LFWT1830E 18" 30" 18 2.2 374 402 w M-LFWT1836E 18" 36" 22 2.6 458 490 M-LFWT1842E 18" 42" 25 3 508 546 M-LFWT1848E 18" 48" 30 3.8 598 642 M-LFWT1860E 18" 60" 36 4.2 643 698 x u M-LFWT1866E 18' 66" 39 4.6 697 757 w n. M-LFWT1872E 18" 72" 43 5 755 820 M-LFWT1878E 18" 78" 46 5.4 822 892 M-LFWT1884E 18" 84" 50 5.8 882 958 w U a Lateral File Worktop 36"Deep Edgeband M-LFWT3630E 36" 30" 36 3.7 614 662 a~c M-LFWT3636E 36" 36" 43 3.8 737 792 Q M-LFWT3642E 36" 42" 50 4.5 804 866 M-LFWT3648E 36" 48" 60 5.0 896 964 M-LFWT3660E 36" 60" 71 6 986 1068 vni M-LFWT3666E 36" 66" 78 6.8 1066 1156 nQ � M-LFWT3672E 36" 72" 85 7.1 1141 1239 N M-LFWT3678E 36" 78" 92 8 1224 1326 M-LFWT3684E 36" 84" 99 9 1290 1400 Ln w U Ln w Ln Y 0 W cr Q 0.. W d tD z Q W N W HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Laminate Select Edge Trim Color oSee page 10 J U U Edgeband Q See page 10 x LU z " 2641 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2/3 EXHIBIT B Include® Storage M m T Include Metal Pedestals—support or mobile z _ E _ m File/File Box/Box/File File/File Box/Box/File Box/File 27.35"H x 15"W 27.35"H x 15"W 27.16"H x 15"W 27.16"H x 15"W 21.08"H Mobile M 16.75",22.75"D 16.75",2275"D 16.75",22.75p 16.75",22.75 D 22"H Freestanding m 16.75",22.75"D x 15"W Plinth base shown,models available with feet.Choice of metal or laminate fronts. M Include Low Metal Storage—credenzas,right and left configurations available X Box/Lateral/Open Box/Lateral/Open Box/Lateral/Open Box/Lateral Open 72"W 60"W 48"W 24",30",36",42"W 24",30",36",42"W Ln 22"H x 18"D 22"H x 18"D 22"H x 18"D 22"H x 18"D 22"H x 18"D D Plinth base shown,models available with feet.Choice of metal or laminate fronts. U) D n m Include Metal Lateral and Personal Files Ln _ c D Ln N 2-High 2-High 28"H 28"H 30",36"W 30"W 18"D 18"D � 7z Plinth base shown,models available with feet. �^ Choice of metal or laminate fronts. z T D n m N Include Metal Personal Towers and Lockers—left configuration shown, also available right M D m • 49"H 64"H 24"W x 24"D 24"W x 24"D m Z D n M m Un m Z 0 m X maxom 1265 Include® Storage EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2/3 w z "O" Frame Construction Locking System LU w Heavy duty outer shell and front Robust lock system for security and LU and rear perimeter frames provides reliability. significant strength;helps keep the cabinet true to square. Core Removable Locks Master-keyed core removable lock w File and Box Drawers feature allows key numbers to be easily Full extension file and box drawers changed in the field and facilitates 2 glide easily on steel ball-bearing 0 one-key access.Different storage "' suspensions;allows complete access components can be keyed alike within to drawer contents with a quiet a workstation. drawer motion. Mobile Pedestals '5 Double-Wall Drawer Front Mobile pedestals provide flexible Cr Drawer fronts are fully lined to storage and can be nested under reduce noise and to prevent damage worksurfaces. from drawer contents. Support Pedestals w Filing Support pedestals can support one aFile drawers can accommodate end of a panel-attached worksurface, Ln front-to-back and side-to-side filing. in lieu of other worksurface supports, z Order hanging frames separately. and can be used to support worksurfaces in desking applications.Drawers align L^ Full Front Drawer Design with laterals. Drawer front is square and extends N fully across the case. Freestanding Pedestals Ln Freestanding pedestal drawers align Counterweight with credenzas. N Counterweights(standard on mobile pedestal units)inhibit tipping when Depth drawers are opened. Pedestals are 18"and 23'/4"and w credenzas are 18",both can be used ¢ Alignment with systems worksurfaces.Placement Drawer alignment matches across may affect access to receptacles in base Y Include storage offering. Lateral pathway and worksurface grommets. base height matches Emerge base raceway. Pull Styles Choice of pull styles,available on pedestals,credenzas,towers,and laterals,allows for total design a¢. coordination on projects. w a • Z Z a Ln w 0 V) Ln w Q �Vincludemetal storage models are available t, plus laminate front option. x w 0 z 2661 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2/3 EXHIBIT B Include® Storage M m Seven-formation Front Post Design Four Hex-head Leveling Glides _n Steel front posts are formed with Leveling glides can be adjusted from M seven formations to provide outside or inside the case.Because z unparalleled stability and strength. of the hex-head design of the stem, M This unique design allows leveling can be done even when the file unmatched longevity for Maxon files. is fully loaded. Range is 11/2". m Dual-side Locking Suspension M Drawers and doors lock on both Extra heavy-duty,telescoping, m sides to prevent being pried open. ball-bearing slides. The locking system is enclosed within the case to hide mechanisms Hanging Frames which can snag and scratch.This Front-to-back and side-to-side are feature is not found on most other both standard.For front-to-back filing, z manufacturers'files. backs should be set on rear position for T maximum storage capacity. X Dual Interlock This mechanism inhibits roll out Core Removable Lock of more than one drawer,either Core removable lock feature allows sequentially or simultaneously. key numbers to be easily changed in D the field.It also facilitates installation. Adjustable Drawer Backs Laterals can be keyed alike with Backs are adjustable to three depths pedestals,laterals,credenzas,towers, n to accommodate letter,A4,and legal and overhead cabinets. `T' documents side to side without the need for extra components. Full Front Drawer Style Features core removable lock located in Infinitely Adjustable Divider top drawer on the right. D This design allows the divider to also function as a compressor in Pull Styles that it can be located where it is Metal fronts available in Arch or needed versus being limited to Recessed pull.Laminate fronts available o pre-set positions. in Arch pull. offset Construction Double-wall Drawer Front T As a result of the back and the top Construction of the case sides being offset,the Drawer fronts are fully lined to reduce n file case has a finished appearance noise and to prevent damage from with smooth seams and no drawer contents. M overlaps. Counterweight Kit D Fully Enclosed Bottom The unique design of the counterweight PO P° Unlike many files,the Maxon file allows easy installation because,unlike features a fully enclosed steel some files,the drawers and shelves in bottom to help prevent moisture Maxon files do not have to be removed and dust from affecting the filed to install the required counterweights. e documents.Double bottoms are welded into all files for added Drawer Interiors rigidity. Painted same color as case. Side Knockouts Paint Finish Files have two knockouts on each Durable baked enamel finish is side to allow easy ganging of applied over rust-inhibiting phosphate D freestanding units to inhibit tipping. pre-treatment. z n n m N O m N Z m X maxon• 1267 Include® Storage EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2/3 w U z Offset Construction UJ w As a result of the back and the top of U_J the case sides being offset,the file case has a finished appearance with smooth seams and no overlaps. Include Personal Tower Fully Enclosed Bottom Locking wDouble bottoms are welded into all Three lockssecure doors and drawers !-> files for added rigidity. w on front access towers;two locks on Four Hex-head Leveling Glides side access towers. Leveling glides can be adjusted from outside or inside the case.Because European Hinges x of the hex-head design of the stem, Wardrobe and cabinet door both w leveling can be done even when the contain European-style hinged door. a file is fully loaded.Range is 21/4". Filing Double-Wall Drawer Front File drawers can accommodate Construction front-to-back and side-to-side filing. U 0 Order hanging frames separately. g Drawer fronts are fully lined to 0 Hanging frames are compatible with reduce noise and to prevent damage metal case/metal front and metal < from drawer contents. case/wood front models. "' Alignment Drawer alignment matches other 0 Ln Include storage. Q � Full Front Design (.n Drawer and door fronts extend fully across the case. W Pull Styles 5 Available in Arch or Recessed pulls. YSuspension 0 Heavy-duty,telescoping ball-bearing slides. Paint Finish Durable baked enamel finish nQ is applied over rust-inhibiting owl phosphate pre-treatment. a Core Removable Locks Core removable lock feature allows key numbers to be easily changed in the field.It also facilitates o installation.Towers can be keyed alike with pedestals, laterals,and overhead cabinets. c� z a W V) Ln w 0 V) u., U U Q X w 0 Z 2681 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2/3 EXHIBIT B Include® Storage rn m Include Metal Storage Include Metal Mobile Pedestals M • Double wall drawer construction. Available as box/file, box/box/file or file/file m • n Steel,ball-bearing slide suspension with full-extension drawers. drawers. �, • Heavy-duty steel 0-frame. Available in 18"and 24"depths. "' • Support pedestals are available with recessed plinth base,feet. Metal fronts available in Arch or Recessed pull. • Full front drawers are available as metal or laminate. Laminate fronts available in Arch pull. rn • Metal fronts available in Arch or Recessed pull. Laminate fronts To allow clearance under worksurfaces,an Include K available in Arch pull. mobile pedestal is 11/2"shorter than an equivalent M • Box drawers have an adjustable divider. Include support pedestal.This,combined with m • Standard core removable locks,see page 298.M-LC1S lock the leveling range of Include support pedestals, cores should be specified for key alike option. personal files,towers,laterals,and credenzas will • For locking specification,see page 339. result in an offset of horizontal drawer reveals of 11/2"to 3". Include Metal Support Pedestals Counterweight is standard in mobile pedestals. R° • Support pedestals have fully enclosed top. Four casters. �' T' • Support pedestals not used to support a x worksurface require a pedestal top and counterweight kit. • Available as box/box/file or file/file drawers. Include Pedestal Cushion • Available in 18"and 24"depths. Seat cushion provides quick and convenient • Metal fronts available in Arch or Recessed pull. additional seating on box/file pedestals. Ln Laminate fronts available in Arch pull. D • Seat cushion adds approximately 2"H n • Pencil trays included—one per pedestal with m a box drawer. ae to pedestal. �, • Seat cushion has stitched corners and File drawer front reveals of support pedestals bumpers on bottom. ,,, will align with Include metal laterals,towers, Seat cushion to be used on steel(mobile) C and credenzas. pedestal top only. • Leveling glides standard on freestanding pedestals. • COM yardage for seat cushion is 0.9 yards. ,,, • Hardware for attaching pedestal to worksurface is included. • 281/s"H pedestals can be used to support worksurface at Include Pedestal Accessories 291/2"H. Accessories are for use with Include pedestals, personal files, o • Include metal support pedestals are available with recessed and personal towers. base or feet. L" C Include Metal Freestanding Pedestals • Available as box/file drawers. M M • Available in 18"and 24"depths. • Metal fronts available in Arch or Recessed pull. Laminate fronts available in Arch pull. m • Pencil tray included in box drawer. D • Drawer reveals of freestanding pedestals will align m with Include credenzas. • Leveling glides standard on freestanding pedestals. • Include metal freestanding pedestals are available with feet. • rn m Z G) D n n m cn Ln z m Un Z M m X maxon* 1269 Include® Storage EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2/3 w U w Credenzas Pull Options: w Full metal construction with finished top and back. Arch LU Welded case with"0"frame construction for added strength. Full front design with proud,double wall drawer fronts. • Units are 18"D or 171/4'D on open bookcases. • Interlock and full extension ball bearing slides on all drawers. Enclosed bottom pan on open bookcase and on w box/lateral/open units. W Available with feet;or plinth base,recessed. • Drawer fronts are available as metal or laminate. • Metal fronts available in Arch or Recessed pull. Laminate fronts L, available in Arch pull. X Plinth base option on drawer only units:recessed. a Leveling glides can be extended 11/2". Jj • Side-to-side filing bar included.Front-to-back filing with optional filing bar.Two rows of front to back letter filing on drawers 30"W or wider drawers,order 2 filing bars. See page 298. U Accessories include:seat cushions,laminate tops. Planning:credenzas require panel bracket,worksurface Load Capacities(per current ANSI/BIFMA standards) V) stanchion,or counterweight(sold separately)for units with Include 22"H Credenzas 24"wide 30"wide 36"Wide a drawers.See page 274 for specification examples. � 3'/s'"H Box Drawer 19lbs.< 241bs. 30lbs. Storage-to-Panel Bracket Used to attach the back or side of storage to 101/2"H Box Drawer 50lbs.; 64 lbs. 78lbs. ,',^, a panel frame to provide stability when used Right with Emerge or Prefix panel frames. Matte Silver Removable Lock Core Kit Handedness is determined by side of storage Matte Silver used on Include credenzas with "' that attaches to panel when facing panel run. drawers. Includes one core,two keys,one core Left removal tool,adapter and instructions. Ln v j Credenza Cushions 5 Cushions are for use on 22"H Include re N Worksurface Support Stanchions credenzas to create additional seating. Worksurface stanchions are Silver and made of Cushions can be placed directly on metal top b aluminum. of unit or on laminate top. Use 5"H stanchions for 22"H Include credenza with Freestanding applications require counterweights— worksurface,or 6"H stanchions for credenza without see page 274. Cr a worksurface. a Lateral File Tops for Include Credenzas a. Available in depths of 12"and 18". 12"is designed to work with cc 18"D worksurfaces and 18"with 24"D worksurfaces. Use two Tops are 11/a"thick and are field installed. stanchions when mounting a 30"D or deeper worksurface. For use in freestanding or layered • Stanchion orientation should run perpendicular to the length of applications. the worksurface it is supporting. For use on 18"and 24"deep Include credenzas.36"D tops are available for Front-to-Back Filing Bar 18"D credenzas placed back-to-back. • Front-to-back filing bar can be positioned to accommodate letter,A4,or legal size documents. 30"W and wider drawers can accommodate two rows requiring two bars.See page 298. z Counterweight Kits !¢ • Metal weight attached to back of V) freestanding files to inhibit tipping;field installed only.Use of storage-to-panel bracket or worksurface support stanchion w may eliminate need for counterweight kit— p see examples on page 274. wCounterweight kit required for freestanding files: u 48"W Credenzas................................... 25 LB kit 60"W,and 72"W Credenzas................. 35 LB kit 30"W and 36"W Credenzas.................50 LB kit X w O Z 2701 maxon• GSA SIR! 711-2/3 EXHIBIT B include' Storage 70 m m Interior Dimensions for Credenzas M z 1T3 Description Height Depth Width Z Credenzas Open 22"H—171/4" 18"D—171/8"—17"interior 30"exterior—283/s"interior m 1 Adj.Shelf 1/4" Shelf 151/4" 36"exterior—343/s"interior 81/4"Shelf 81/4" or 12"Shelf 41/2" m Box/Lateral Box—37/a" Box—131/4" 24"exterior—21"interior M m 30"exterior—27"interior 36"exterior—33"interior m Lateral—101/2" 18"D—Lateral—131/4" 30"exterior—261/2"interior 36"exterior—321/2"interior Box/Lateral w/Open Side Box—31/8" Box—131/4" 48"exterior—21"interior D 60"exterior—27"interior A m 72"exterior—33"interior T x Lateral-101/2' 18"D—Lateral-131/4" 48"exterior-201/2"interior 60"exterior-261/2"interior 72"exterior-321/2"interior L, Open-171/4' 18"D—171/a"-17"interior 48"exterior-221/8"interior > D 1 Adj.Shelf 3/4' Shelf 151/4" 60"exterior—281/8"interior � 81/4",Shelf,81/4 72"exterior—343/s"interior D or 12",Shelf,41/2" m Laterals Lateral-101/2" 18"D—Lateral—131/4" 30"exterior—261/2"interior 36"exterior—321/2"interior Ln c v D (n NC O T3 Ln N C T D n rn M m D M m N m D Z G) D n n m V) O m Ln z 0 m x maxon• 1271 Include' Storage EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2/3 w U w LOW STORAGE CREDENZAS — Lateral File Width: LU LL 24"or 48"W 30"or 60"W 36"or 72"W w (48",60",and 72"credenzas are half lateral drawer/half open shell) w C� w U2 Front-to-Back Filing* • Outside tabs of folders rest on drawer sides. • Single File Rails X cc w Letter Size Hanging File Folders (81/z x 11"documents) v 18"D-111/4"of letter filing 18"D-231/2"of letter filing 18"D-231/2"of letter filing Q a Q Ln Ln A4 Hanging File Folders (8'/a x 115/8'documents) Ln a 18"D-111/4"of A4 filing 18"D-231h"of A4 filing 18"D-231h"of A4 filing D V) Ln w Legal Size Hanging File Folders C= (81/z x 14"documents) M -M Cr 0 18"D-111/4"of legal filing 18"D-111v of legal filing 18"D-231/2"of legal filing w Q w Side-to-Side Filing Letter or A4 Hanging File Folders 18"D-201/4"of letter or A4 filing 18"D-261/4"of letter or A4 filing 18"D-231/4 of letter or A4 filing e *Front-to-back filing requires optional front-to-back filing bars M-ICCAHR12 for 18"D units(except 2H lateral files use filing bar M-ICCAHRI5)one bar per 0 row of filing.Order bars separately,see page 298. z a w Uj w it 0 Un Un w V V Q X w 0 Z 2721 maxon• GSA SIN 711-18 EXHIBIT B Seating A r) m z �e D H � v D r> m Seating N C "O From casual conference room to private office seating,Maxon offers a range of high quality,stylish options that feature ergonomic design N and all day comfort.Adjustable arms,seat slides,lumbar support and upholstered or mesh backs are just a few of the comforts afforded by our chairs. Easily create a unified and cohesive look in your office with an array of upholstery options and comfort controls. 0 z 7z Ln Monitor position: ®. z Arm-length away Top of monitor at eye level N Monitor directly in line Armrests: - D Straight wrist postures � m Wrists not resting on worksurface edge Relaxed shoulders Ln s . ;:. 0 Lumbar curvature supported • '�""""" m Recline Tension: • Allow movement - " ' .f Seat Depth: 2-3"of clearance behind knee Seat Height: • j n Hips at or above knee level rn Un Knees bent to 85-110 degrees 0 Feet stable on the floor jO m Z M m X maxon• 1301 Adept Seating EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-18 w U w COM Program Maxon understands that customers may at times want to specify 2.If your fabric is not listed as approved,and it is not a Partnership fabrics outside of Maxon's standard fabric offering.Our COM program fabric you may request a"Dealer to Supply"code.Select the was designed to make specifying COMB on Maxon products a simpler, "Request COM Test"link on the COM Search website.Your name, friendlier,and hassle-free process.This process is simple and easy company name and email will be prepopulated fields.The secondary w to use,and is described below under"Maxon to Supply(MTS)."If email,project name,and bid/contract number are optional cD a Dealer wishes to manage the COM process themselves,they can information.The supplier,pattern,and color will show a list by w do so by following guidelines under"Dealer to Supply(DTS)".MTS clicking in the box and entering the first letter of the name and these U2 is the preferred method for all COM fabrics.With MTS,Company are free form text boxes.Once that information is entered click add. will provide acknowledgment based upon planned date of receipt of (Multiple series can be added to the same request if they are the COM fabric and manage the entire process.DTS is allowed if it is not a same supplier,pattern,and color.)Then click submit. partnership fabric or if Company does not have access to the supplier. 3.An email will be sent to the to the requestor stating the COM DTS may cause order delays and is strongly discouraged.Find out x Request was successfully submitted.Up to four emails could be u more about Maxon's COM process by emailing our COM Department at received:Testing materials requested,in testing,and final approval/ maxoncomteam@maxonmaila. .com. denial with price grade and fabric code.It's rare actual test yardage Maxon to Supply(MTS): is required.Testing is mainly done by reviewing the attributes of the 1.Select the fabric you wish to use and check the COM Search fabric.The testing process takes approximately 48 hours. U on maxonfurniture.com at:www.maxonfurniture.com/design- 4.Make sure to use a"Dealer to Supply"COM code(e.g.,S216426ZP) a resources/textiles-and-finishes/com-search.Or Call Maxon Customer and place your order directly with Maxon Customer Support. CC, Service to see if the fabric you have chosen has already been tested 5.All"Dealer to Supply"orders will be charged Grade 4 pricing for Q and approved on the product you are interested in.You will need to seating,and Grade D pricingfor panels.Dealers will a for the COM Ln have the COM supplier's name,fabric pattern name,and color name p pay fabric separately. to search for approved fabrics. 2.If your fabric is listed as an approved fabric,you may place your 6.All"Dealer to Supply"fabric must be sent on a fabric roll.Estimate � order directly with Maxon Customer Service.Please use the fabric the yardage required by using the yardage requirements listed in the a code(e.g.,S216426XP)from the COM Test Request on your order in price list by model.For questions please contact Maxon Customer Nthe place of the standard fabric code. Service. 7.Place your fabric order directly with the COM Supplier with If your fabric is not listed as approved,you will need to select the instructions for the fabric to be sent on a fabric roll to: LU Ln "Request COM Test"link on the COM Search website.Your name, company name and email will be prepopulated fields.The secondary HNI Textile Distribution Center email,project name,and bid/contract number are optional COM Production Yardage—PO Number Un information.The supplier,pattern,and color will show a list by Docks 20-22 clicking in the box and entering the first letter of the name and these 301 Mulberry Avenue 0 are free form text boxes.Once that information is entered click add. Muscatine,IA 52761 (Multiple series can be added to the same request if they are the same supplier,pattern,and color.)Then click submit. Information that MUST be included in the packing slip attached to LL, the fabric: 3.An email will be sent to the to the requestor stating the COM a 1.Dealer's Purchase Order number to Maxon w Request was successfully submitted. Up to four emails could be °C g q g, approval/ 2.Maxon's Tracking number for the COM fabric a received:Testing materials requested,in testing,and final a / denial with price grade and fabric code.It's rare actual test yardage 3.Dealer Name 4.Yards of Fabric is required.Testing is mainly done by reviewing the attributes of the fabric.The testing process takes approximately 48 hours.Written If the fabric shipment does not match the correct fabric and yardage, COM price quotes hold pricing for 90 days after issue date. Maxon will notify the Dealer for resolution. 0O 4.Once the fabric has been approved by Maxon,enter your order If Maxon receives fabric with incorrect labeling that cannot be linked directly with Maxon Customer Service.Maxon will purchase all COM to an Maxon furniture order,Maxon will hold the fabric for up to fabric directly from the COM suppliers and schedule for production. 7 days,while the COM Expeditor attempts to identify the order. In the event that the Dealer decides to cancel a COM fabric order, After 7 days,Maxon will return the fabric to sender.There are no the Dealer is responsible for the cost of the fabric plus a handling exceptions to this policy. charge that is equal to 10%of the fabric cost. Any canceled orders are subject to cancellation charges up to the Dealer to Supply(DTS): full value of the Maxon product canceled.Maxon will determine the actual cancellation charge at the time the cancellation is requested. 1.Select the fabric you wish to use and check the COM Search 8. For additional details di "Dealer to Supply"fabric refer to your on maxonfurniture.com at:www.maxonfurniture.com/design- w_ resources/textiles-and-finishes/com-search.Or call Maxon Customer Maxon terms and conditions. Cc, Support to see if the fabric you have chosen has already been tested O N and approved on the product you are interested in. w U You will need to have the COM supplier's name,fabric pattern name, Q and color name for this inquiry. x w 0 z 3021 maxon• GSA SIN 711-18 EXHIBIT B Seating z m Additional Policy Information: Previous test results can be obtained by a customer on the COM m Search on maxonfurniture.com or by calling Maxon Customer „� The company assumes no responsibility for the overall appearance, z flammability,normal durability,colorfastness,or any other quality Support. n standards.The Company reserves the right to reject a COM if the All COM fabric will be applied to seating and panel systems Pattern quality of the COM is not satisfactory for the product.Should this Cut unless Railroad Cut is requested and approved on the COM occur,the customer will be notified with an explanation within Test Request.Any fabrics approved as a width pass,the dealer is "' 7 working days of receipt of test materials. responsible for clarifying Railroad Cut on orders containing items 71 that are too large to support the Pattern Cut of a fabric application G) The company is not responsible for fabric that has become obsolete at the COM supplier,that is of poor quality,or that is (any items larger than 48"high or wide). rt' delivered late to the manufacturer from the COM supplier.Excess yardage will be disposed of at Maxon's discretion. FOR SEATING: I FOR PANELS' I FOR TACKBOARDS AND TILES: Railroaded Panem Cut R.N.ded Pattern Cut Railroaded P."—Cut All cancellations or changes to COM orders are subject to Company tt T Fs m approval. Because of the nature of COM,special fabrics,finishes, 3 s P a X and structural modifications,products ordered as specials and then canceled prior to shipment are subject to cancellation costs up to the full value of the product canceled.The company determines Fire Retardant Ln Ln the actual cancellation charge at the time the cancellation is requested.Upon approval,a cancellation number is issued to the The Dealer is responsible for ensuring that the COM fabric is Ln Customer. certified to meet all flame retardant requirements. D n Purchase orders will not be accepted or entered unless the testing For more information,please contact Maxon Customer Support. P process is complete with positive results. If all testing has been previously completed,re-testing is only C: z necessary if fabric is to be used on a different product,or pattern y direction has changed from that previously approved. `^ O Ln Ln C D n m Ln M m D M m --I O D M m D n n m to N O m Lq Z 0 m x maxon• 1303 Seating EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-18 w v W Adept Seating w LL W Adept Standard Controls w O w w Adjustable Arm Fixed Arm(F) Polished Arm(P) Armless(N) X W Adept Synchro-Tilt n- w U Ln F- Q Adjustable Arm Fixed Arm(F) Polished Arm(P) Armless(N) Ln N Adept Synchro-Tilt with Back Angle Adjust V) a V) Ln w U Q W D Adjustable Arm Fixed Arm(F) Polished Arm(P) Armless(N) Y O i�: Guest w ate. w d Fixed Arm(F) Armless(N) w C� Cafe O N Fixed Arm(F) Armless(N) Ln w iY O Ln Ln w U U Q X w 0 Z 3041 maxon• GSA SIN 711-18 EXHIBIT B Seating M m 'n m z 15° I -1 rri I Elbows should be 1 1 between 90°-135' M 1\ � 1\\ Ll 11 \ Wrists flat and straight M 1 \ C — Arms and elbows close to the body 1 m m X I Monitor and keyboard 1 should be centered in front of you 1 Ln 1 1 D 1 � 11 n 1 m Torso/thigh should 11 be between 90°-120° 1 1 f Feet on floor or use foot rest 1 c 1 D L I � Measurements based on BIFMA G1-2013 guidelines. Api ePth ~I Many of the measurements are taken from the I c compressed seat(dotted horizontal line)and the v tangent lumbar apex(dotted vertical line). I m Min Seat I V) Width Min Backrest Seat Width Depth I m I D I z Inward Pivot____ ___ m Outward Pivot I I Backrest I—_Tangent---AHeight Lumbar Apex I Reference I O Seat Depth Overall m Width Between Armrest Height Armrests Depth I Seat Lumbar Angle Armrest Height Height ------ Compressed I ————— ———— — -- Seat — ——————— -- — — -- Reference AL D o n n Un Seat O Height �2 Seat-to-backrest M Angle N Z M m x Overall Width Overall Depth maxon• 1305 Seating EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-18 w U Z ANSI—(American National Standards Institute)ANSI is a private, Memory Foam—Viscoelastic foam developed by NASA that LU owc non-profit organization(501(c)3)that administers and coordinates retains the shape impressed upon it to reduce pressure points and LU U_ the U.S.voluntary standardization and conformity assessment distribute the load on the seat more evenly. Cr system. NFPA261—Method of test for determining resistance of Asynchronous—High-performance seating control system mock-up upholstered furniture material assemblies to ignition by LU with three levers to modify adjustments on the chair for a more a smoldering cigarette.This test is done with a lighted cigarette w customized fit: placed in crevices of mock-up components. 2 • Angle of back relative to seat UJ Tilt(free float or infinite locking) NFPA266—Method of test for fire characteristics of upholstered • Forward tilt of seat furniture exposed to flaming ignition source.This is a full-scale test of mock up.Equivalent to CAL133. ASTM Standards—(American Society for Testing and Materials) X-1 is an international standards group that develops and publishes Pneumatic—Operated by compressed air in a tool or machine. technical standards for may products,materials,and services. Powder Coat—Dry paint electrostatically charged for better BIFMA—(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's adhesion to parts and baked on for a durable finish. Association)Produces voluntary standards for manufacturers u of office furnishings.These standards are intended to provide a Recyclable—Able to be reclaimed and re-used into another N common basis for the evaluation of safety,durability,dimensions, value-added product. ergonomics,and the structural adequacy of the specified furniture. cc Q Recycled—Made from post-industrial or post-consumer waste V2 CALTB117-2013—Method used to test open flame resistance products. of components of upholstered furniture.This test is done with a lighted cigarette placed in crevices of mock-up components. Synchro-Tilt—A seating control where the chair back reclines at N a prescribed ratio in relation to seat angle.Allows user to recline CFC—(Chlorofluorocarbons)CFCs are broken down by strong while keeping seat cushion relatively level to the floor. ultraviolet light in the stratosphere and release chlorine atoms Ln that then deplete the ozone layer.CFCs are commonly used as Urethane—Synthetic plastic;any of a group of thermoplastic refrigerants,solvents,and foam blowing agents. polymers that are used in resins,coatings,insulation,adhesives, Ln W foams,and fibers. U COL—(Customer's Own Leather) z Weight-activated—A seating control that has the recline tension N COM—(Customers Own Material)See pages 302-303. engineered into the chair so that the chair recline tension will z automatically vary depending on the weight of the user reclining 0 CTB133—California Technical Bulletin(California Dept.of the chair. Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation)Full-scale fire test for furniture manufactured for use Wyzenbeck Testing—Method of testing the abrasion resistance LU in public buildings.Industry standard for full burn test. of a fabric utilizing a cotton duck or wire mesh that is rubbed,back a and forth(a double rub),over the fabric. Ergonomic—The coordination of the design of a product with the ° capacities and requirements of the user. HFES—(Human Factors and Ergonomics Society)A membership- u, based organization whose mission is to promote the discovery and Q exchange of knowledge concerning the characteristics of human Cr beings that are applicable to the design of systems and devices of V) all kinds. Knee Tilt—A seating control that pivots about a point underneath the knee(towards the front of the seat)to reduce pressure on the back of the legs when reclining. w CC O Ln w U U Q X w 0 Z 3061 maxon• GSA SIN 711-18 EXHIBIT B Seating M m rl Adept Product Features Adept Cafe Height Stool Features • 60mm dual open wheel casters. Frame-Constructed of 1"diameter round 14 gauge steel tubing z • Five Star Molded Engineered Nylon Base or Polished Aluminum and 3/a"diameter round 14 gauge steel tubing that provides m for Stability. lasting durability. • Pneumatic cylinder for easy height adjustment. Seat-Plastic injection molded seat support with 27/8' • Offers a Standard Control,Synchro Control or a Task Control to polyurethane over molded foam for maximum comfort. m meet all office needs. Back-Plastic injection molded panel with%" polyurethane over K • Synchronous Tilt control includes side mounted tilt tension and molded foam for maximum comfort. Po multi-position tilt lock for maximum ergonomic comfort and Mesh back models-feature a unique woven breathable mesh ,� adjustability. fabric creating a comfort back pocket and a floating lumbar • Construction-Molded engineered ergonomic plywood seat. support. • Upholstered using foam that complies with CAL117. Arms-Reinforced plastic injection molded arm support. • Seat-3"Maximum Resiliency foam for maximum comfort. Feet-Black nylon all surface glide. • Back-Mesh back models feature a unique woven breathable Upholstered using foam that complies with CAL117. M mesh fabric creating a comfort back pocket and a floating Wall Saver Design. X lumbar support. All models meets or exceeds ANSI/BIFMA performance • Upholstered back models feature ergonomically contoured standards. reflex core foam with fiber topper. Ln • Standard adjustable back on all models. > D • Arms-Loop arms models feature a steel reinforced molded urethane that provides comfort and durability.Resilient arm D surface protects arms and desk. m • 2D Adjustable Arm Models feature height and width adjustments. • Fixed Polish Aluminum Arms with urethane arm pad. • 4D Adjustable Arm Models feature height,width,depth and pivot adjustments. N • Steel reinforced molded urethane arm caps provide comfort Ln and durability.Resilient arm surface protects arms and desk. • Meets or exceeds ANSI/BIFMA performance standard. • Certified by SCS-IAQ-01880. o z N C T D Adept Guest Chair Features .` N • Frame-Constructed of 1"diameter round 14 gauge steel tubing and%"diameter round 14 gauge steel tubing that provides lasting durability. • Seat-Plastic injection molded seat support with 27/8" D polyurethane over molded foam for maximum comfort. rn • Back-Plastic injection molded panel with 1/4'polyurethane over molded foam for maximum comfort. • Mesh back models-feature a unique woven breathable mesh T�' fabric creating a comfort back pocket and a floating lumbar r' �a Ln support. 0 • Arms-Reinforced plastic injection molded arm support. • Feet-Black nylon all surface glide or 38mm black open wheeled m all surface casters. • Upholstered using foam that complies with CAL117. • Wall Saver Design. • Armless Glide models stack up to 4 high on the floor. • Meets or exceeds ANSI/BIFMA performance standards. D n n m V) O z m Z M m x maxon* 1307 Seating EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-18 w U W Adept Key Features Ir w UJ w Ir Feature M-SEMUS01 M-SEMUS02 M-SEMUS03 Seat Height Adjustment B B B UJ Back Height Adjustment C C C w Swivel E E E 2 u' Seat slide D D Tilt F Synchro-Tilt G R x a: Tilt Tension J w a Side Tilt Tension L L Tilt Lock K K K w U Ln Ln Pivot F�H ev aa�a �u� +as ,.. sSTa\a�'�w"n if `^ B.Pneumatic seat C.Back height D.Seat glide E.360°Swivel F.Tilt-Pivot point height adjustment- adjustment-Positions mechanism-Seat located directly above v, Regulates height of lumbar support within cushion travels forward center of chair base. UJ chair relative to floor. a fixed range. and back,then locks 11 into position. Ln cr >O 9 w w Pivot__ IVof kkk??d G.Synchro-tilt-Back J.Tilt tension-Controls K.Tilt lock-Locks out L.Side tilt tension- R.Back reclines at a LL, reclines at a 2-to-1 rate and ease of tilt function when chair Controls rate and ease 2 to 1 ratio to seat LD ratio to seat angle. recline. is in upright position. of recline.Conveniently angle.Back angle o¢c Allows user to recline located on the right adjusts independently O0- while keeping seat side. of seat and can be `^ cushion relatively level locked in infinite to floor. number of positions within a fixed range. Ln w O Ln Ln w U U x w 0 Z 3081 maxon• GSA SIN 711-18 EXHIBIT B Seating z m TY Adept Specifications m z Upholstered mr Overall Back Mesh Back Lumbar Seat Armrests m Gl o t m o E 3 r m LL m a` 3 •rya o 1° ¢` m m °0 L L t r L L L Model 5 m on oa m v v a x X Number = 3 0 3 3 = 3 = = ? 3 0 = a LL M-SEMU501 44" 27" 351/2" 300 Ibs 181/2" 21"-24" 19" 211/2"-24" 17-211/2" 20" 1 17 1/8" 25"-321/i' 17"-191/i' 20" M-SEMU502 461/i' 27" 38" 300 Ibs 181/2" 21"-24" 19" 211/2"-24" 6"-9" 171/4"-211/4" 20" 161/4"-181/d' 25"-323/4" 17"-191/2" 20" cn M-SEMU503 44" 27" 39" 300 Ids 181/2" 21"-24" 19" 211/2"-24" 171/4"-213/4" 20" 151/4"-171/4" 25"-321/4" 17"-191/2" 20" D M-SEMU504 331/2" 25" 213/4" 300 Ids 181/4" 181/8" 1 181/4" 181/e 183/e" 183/4" 173/e" 26'/4" 211/z" N M-SEMUSOS 461/2" 25" 1 23" 300lbs 181/4" 18%" 181/4" 181/e" 31" 183/4" 17%" 39" 211/2" D m rn All measurements are per BIfMA procedures Adept Upholstery Options D ry m a ✓1 � 0 0 0 0 o Ln D D D z) D O Grade I v� C Apex T Centurion n m Contourett •* �^ Inertia Grade 2 m m Appoint Seating D Dotty ::o m Seed Spin Seating *Available as seat upholstery only with Mesh back. V) Contourett is unavailable as an upholstered back. O 7o D m m D m m m O 72 A Z m X maxon• 1309 Seating EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-18 See pages 302-309 for the specification guide. w U w ptTM Standard Control w LL w Description Model W D H SH AH Cubes Wt. Grade A Grade B Fabric Fabric Adjustable Arm M-SEMU501 27.5" 26" 43.5" 17.5"-22" 25.5"-33" 11.3 48 1309 1374 LU 2D(A) UJ 4D(V) w 'I X LL w cc w Fixed Arm(F) 1209 1274 U Ln Ln Ln z Q Ln "n Ln d cr- Polished Arm(P) 1409 1474 D Ln N w Ln Q LL Ln ]C K O Armless(N) 1109 1174 w nQ. w CL n. w C7 Q O HOW TO SPECIFY "' Select Model Number Select Arm Select Caster Select Back Select Textile Select Base Ln V) See pages 307-308 See pages 307-308 See pages 307-308 See pages 8-9,309 See pages 307-308 (.n N Armless H Hard U Upholstered SB Standard LU U F Fixed Black S Soft M Mesh PA Polished U Q A Height and Width V All Adjustable P Fixed Polished z m771' ❑' ❑' �' Cam' m 3101 maxon' GSA SIN 711-18 EXHIBIT B Seating See pages 302-309 for the specification guide. z m m AdeptTM Synchro-Tilt m Z n Grade A Grade B ^' Description Model W D H SH AH Cubes Wt• Fabric Fabric Adjustable Arm M-SEMU502 27.5" 26" 43.5" 17.5"-22" 25.5"-33" 11.3 48 1520 1585 m 2D(A) KM m 4D(V) O m v M m r X Fixed Arm(F) 1420 1485 D z Ln vi D n m C Polished Arm(P) 1620 1685 Ln O Ln C D n m Ln Armless(N) 1320 1385 v z m D M m Ln --I O D M m HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Arm Select Caster Select Back Select Textile Select Base m See pages 307-308 See pages 307-308 See pages 307-308 See pages 8-9,309 See pages 307-308 N N Armless H Hard U Upholstered SB Standard 0 F Fixed Black S -Soft M Mesh PA Polished m A Height and Width "' V All Adjustable P Fixed Polished MTV- 0. ❑' m X maxon• 1311 Seating EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-18 See pages 302-309 for the specification guide. w U w AdeptTM Synchro-Tilt with Back Angle Adjust uJ w w w Description Model W D H SH AH Cubes Wt. Grade A Grade B T IFabric Fabric Adjustable Arm M-SEMU503 27.5" 26" 43.5" 17.5"-22" 2S.5"-33" 11.3 48 1678 1743 UJ (D 2D(A) UJ 4D(V) w X w cc n. w Fixed Arm(F) 1578 1643 U d N cc Q V) N N N oQ.. D Polished Arm(P) 1778 1843 to N w U Q W a✓ Ln N Y O Armless(N) 1478 1543 cr- a w o: a w U Q O ul HOW TO SPECIFY W Select Model Number Select Arm Select Caster Select Back Select Textile Select BaseCr � See pages 307-308 See pages 307-308 See pages 307-308 See pages 8-9,309 See pages 307-308 LU V) N Armless H Hard U Upholstered SIB Standard U F Fixed Black S Soft M Mesh PA Polished (J Q A Height and Width V All Adjustable P Fixed Polished LU Z M ❑. ❑. ❑. �. m 3121 maxon• GSA SIN 711-18 EXHIBIT B Seating See pages 302-309 for the specification guide. z m M Adept'" Guest m Z n Grade A Grade B Description Model W D H SH AH Cubes Wt. Fabric Fabric Fixed Arm(F) M-SEMU504 25" 21.75" 33.5" 18.5" 7.5" 15.1 28 784 814 m K m G) m v z m T_ Armless(N) 739 769 x D z v D n m LA C D V cn AdeptTm Ganging Bracket O Includes • 24 Ganging Brackets. m Ln Description Model wt. Cubes List v Armless Glide Guest Chair Ganging Bracket M-SEMUGB 1 0.1 158 v D 70 m Ln ---I O D M m HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Arm Select Caster Select Back Select Textile Select Base m See pages 307-308 See pages 307-308 See pages 307-308 See pages 8-9,309 See pages 307-308 N N Armless A All Surface U Upholstered BLCK Textured Black 0 F Fixed Black, E Glide PR8 Textured Silver M m ❑. El. ❑. I I I I 1. 1117 X maxon• 1313 Seating EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-18 See pages 302-309 for the specification guide. W U W Adept"' Cafe LU w W w Description Model W D H SH AH Cubes Wt. Grade A Grade B Fabric Fabric Fixed Arm(F) M-SEMU505 25" 23" 46.5." 31" 7.5" 21.8" 37 1048 1078 w C7 uj w w X LL LU a Armless(N) 21.25" 23" 46.5" 31" 7.5" 21.8 37 1003 1033 w Ln Q o.. H CC Q V) N d D (n N W U Q W Ln N Y 0 W Q W d W L9 Q O V) HOW TO SPECIFY W Select Model Number Select Arm Select Caster Select Back Select Textile Select Base � See pages 307-308 See pages 307-308 See pages 307-308 See pages 8-9,309 See pages 307-308 w N Armless A All Surface U Upholstered BLCK Textured Black U F Fixed Black E Glide PR8 Textured Silver U Q Z 1M El- 3141 maxon• GSA SIN 711-18 EXHIBIT B Seating MXMO Seating— COMING SOON M m m z m MXMO Mesh Mid-Back-Task Chair M-SEM0201 z n m m K m z rn m Height-Adjustable Arm(H) Fixed Arm(F) Armless(N) MXMO Mid-Back-Task Chair M-SEMX101 m rp X LA D z --i Height-Adjustable Arm(H) Fixed Arm(F) Armless(N) D n m Ln C D cn CN G O .Z7 Ln N C T D M m N M m D M m --I O z D M m D n n m Lo m Ln Z M m x maxon• 1315 Seating EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-18 w w MXMO Product Features LL Casters-50mm dual wheel hooded casters. Arms—Armless LU Base-Five Star Molded Engineered Nylon Base for Stability. Fixed Arm Black plastic injection molded Controls-Pneumatic cylinder for easy height adjustment. Height-Adjustable,steel and plastic injection molded,LU urethane arm pad and built in height adjustment Offers swivel tilt,tilt tension and tilt lock. Adjustable Lumbar for comfort. Seat-1/16"thick,composite wood product,21/2"thick urethane W foam cushion. LU LU Back-Mesh back feature plastic injection molded frame with w mesh fabric. Meets or exceeds ANSI/BIFMA performance standard MXMO x w Feature M-SEMX101 M-SEM0201 ° Seat Height Adjustment B B Swivel E E LL' Tilt F F u a � Tilt Tension 1 J Tilt Lock K K LA Piv Ln IL -m� of U b B.Pneumatic seat E.360'Swivel F.Tilt-Pivot point Y height adjustment- located directly above O Regulates height of center of chair base. chair relative to floor. of w a u; k, i w a l7 or 0 J.Tilt tension-Controls K.Tilt lock-Locks out V' rate and ease of tilt function when chair recline. is in upright position. LU w O Ln V) w v v x w 0 z 3161 maxon• GSA SIN 711-18 EXHIBIT B Seating m n MXMO Specifications m z Seat n m Overall Mesh Back Armrests m O o m 0 E 0 o w 0 DD E K A �- m L Model °° v a v v v v v v v x Number = 3 3 3 = = 3 = 3 M-SEMX101 34"-381/8" 26" 25" 250 Ibs IT/a" 19'/s" 157/a"-20" 18'/2' 171/2" 253/4"-29 7/s" 201/2" M-SEM0201 34"-381/s" 26" 2S" 250 Ibs 175/a" 197/a" 157/e"-20" 181/i' 171/2" 25'/4'-297/a" 20'/2' N D All measurements are per BIFMA procedures � Ln v D n m MXMO Upholstery Options C 0 CD D x O w w cN Vcc1 G G C Grade 1 Upholstery Family 0 Apex chi, C Centurion T Contourett n m Inertia Black Yidertex v Grade 2 Upholstery Family m Appoint Seating D 7D Dotty m Seed Spin Seating O D O m D n n m O m Z m x maxon• 1317 Seating EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-18 See pages 315-317 for the specification guide. w U w Mesh Mid-Back-Task Chair— COMING SOON w w LL w Description Model W D H SH AH Cubes Wt. List Fixed Arm(F) M-SEM0201 26" 25" 34" 638 w U LU w w X LL w Cr Cl- Armless(N) 600 w U Oa. N F- Q V) Height-Adjustable Arm(H) 649 V) V) a D N w U a LL V) N Y OC O w a a w a HOW TO SPECIFY w Select Model Number Select Control Select Arm Select Caster Select Back Cr See page 316 See page 316 - See page 316 See page 316 `n 21 N Armless H Hard Caster M Mesh F Fixed Black H Height-Adjustable "' w Select Seat Fabric Select Lumbar Select Base Select Frame V) See page317 See page 316 See page 316 See page 316 w M-SEM0201 AL Adjustable SB Standard T Black U Black Fabric ACCF10 is the C only available option. LU 3181 maxon' GSA SIN 711-18 EXHIBIT B Seating See pages 315-317 for the specification guide. z m Mesh Mid-Back-Task Chair - COMING SOON m Z Includes m • Select Base Standard(SB)2 boxes. • Available in Black Yidertex m K m Description Model W D H SH AH Cubes Wt. List 7) m Fixed Arm(F) M-SEMX101 26" 25" 34" 528 v M m m X N Armless(N) 490 DLn Ln v D n m Un C D to Ln Height-Adjustable Arm(H) 539 O X V1 C T D n m Ln M m D z m HOW TO SPECIFY N Select Model Number Select Control Select Arm Select Caster Select Back 0 D See page 316 See page 316 See page 316 See page 316 m 21 N Armless H Hard Caster M Mesh F Fixed Black H Height-Adjustable- D Select Seat Fabric Select Lumbar Select Base Select Frame m See page 317 See page 316 See page 316 See page 316 `^„ M-SEMX101 AL Adjustable SB Standard T Black O Black Fabric ACCF10 is the m only available option: �' m' m' X 0 maxon• 1319 Seating EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-18 w U Z w cr w W w w Li w w X LL w n. w U Q a N I— Q Ln N Ln Ln Ln w U L M Y 0 w Q W cr d W Q K 0 Ln N W_ 0 N Ln w U U Q X w 0 Z 3201 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Accessories 70 m 99 m Aj Al Ili m x rid a Ln � e 1 � Ln C Accessories Ln Accessories provide the final touch when specifying new or reconfiguring existing office furniture. Maxon commercial-quality accessories are built to enhance individual workstation efficiency by adding comfort and flexibility,allowing individuals to place their equipment O where it best meets their particular ergonomic needs. Our products support years of use and are backed by our limited lifetime warranty. N c T D n m Ln z m D z m Ln --I O D Gl m N m Z G) a Z M m X maxon• 1321 Accessories EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 W WPower/Data Modules—Clamp On Worksurface Coat Hook w 6'Power cord.UL Listed. Hangs directly into slotted Emerge or Prefix panel frame. w Includes adapters to allow use of commercially 0 o Use for coat or bag. available data terminals or blanks to fill unused O ono Package of six.Available in black only. openings.Many of the AMP,AT&T,Krone,Leviton and most commercial data terminals can be used. Shelf Organizer L Available in Loft. Fits all Universal Overhead Cabinets and • Fits on any worksurface with a 4"overhang. Shelves. LU Not compatible with Overhead Cabinets with Power/Data Modules—Clamp On Worksurface Sliding Doors. • Must be installed at time of initial worksurface installation if installing between a worksurface 1.1 CPU Holder and panel. :' ® Features 360•swivel with 131/2"ball bearing X ° � 6'Power cord. UL Listed. glide track. L The USB hub allows simultaneous powering of 6 Load capacity 55 lbs. 2 USB-A devices.The USB hub is a charger only, Fits CPUs 5"to 20"in overall height and no ability to connect to a PC.The charging 3"to 6"in width. capacity is limited and may not charge all devices. Height adjustable from 16"to 23"below worksurface. Color finishes available:Storm(STRM)and Snow(SNW). No tools required to make adjustments. a Fits on any worksurface with a 4"overhang. Features a textured,silver paint finish. CPU Holders should not be used with Height-Adjustable a Power/Data Modules— Under Worksurface T-Bases and can only be specified for use with 30"D C-Leg � • 6'Power cord. UL Listed. • Height-Adjustable Bases. • Color finishes available:Storm(STRM)and Snow(SNW). o0 o Metal Corner Sleeves cn Works with any top that has a 5"x 5" °� 9 221/2"W leading edge x 18"D. square clearance. Corner sleeves connect intersecting z worksurfaces to create"corner desk"work v=i areas. • All corner sleeves have pre-drilled holes to allow attachment of N Center Drawers articulating keyboard platforms. Black polymer center drawers feature pencil ,Q trays with three compartments for storage. • Center drawers will not fit in center of 24"D �c worksurfaces which are wider than 60"due 0 to location of center support bracket. • Opening Requirements:23"W x 161/4"D x 2"H. • Retracts on 16"ball bearing slides. Can store up to 25 lbs. a a w a W a 0 V) z LL, I X w Z 3221 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Accessories z m Lift and Lock Articulating Arm and Platform Monitor Arms m • Features 21"Glide Track intuitive lift and Versatile adjustability with a refined design and z lock height and tilt mechanism.Provides effortless,pneumatic fingertip adjustment. 7"of height adjustment(21/2 above and Multiple points of adjustment,including 360' M 41/2 below). swivel at two points,21"extension and 13"of • Slim,low-profile design that can be height adjustment,and a 180°lockout feature. positioned flush with the worksurface for Monitor tilts+30°/-25•. `n an extended workspace. Tension adjustment feature at two locations to accommodate z • +157-15°tilt adjustment and 360°rotation provides support monitor weight and desired tilt tension. m of neutral position of shoulders,arms,and wrists while Maximize use of worksurface with ability to retract to minimal accommodating multiple working postures. footprint of 31/2", making them ideal for shallow worksurfaces. • Pairs with a convertible keyboard platform that can be Model includes grommet and worksurface mounting options. positioned in-line,over,or forward of keyboard platform— Integrated cable management. without the need for tools. Desk clamp mounts to surfaces 7/8'to 2"thick;grommet mount m • Includes detachable leatherette-covered gel palm rest, nonslip requires hole diameter of 5/,8'to 2"wide,and accommodates X pad,mouse pad,mouse guard,and cord management clips. surfaces up to 2"thick. • Phenolic material on keyboard platform can be cleaned and Single arm supports 61/2to 18 lbs.;dual arm offers perfect sanitized to maintain a bacteria-free environment;articulating horizontal alignment,and each arm supports 61/2to 18 lbs. arm made of cold-rolled steel is recyclable. VESA 75mm and VESA 100mm compatible. • Recommended for straight-edge worksurfaces. Quick release feature simplifies monitor installation and > • Overall length fully opened is 28". exchanges. Ln • Available only in Silver. D Sit to Stand Articulating Arm and Platform m • Features a 23"glide track,12.7"lift-and-lock Heavy Duty Monitor Arm height adjustment(5.1"above and 7.6"below). M-ACC-FMHD heavy duty arm supports • Positive and negative tilt for the best ergonomic 7.6 to 44 lbs.in total weight. , u: positioning. Single arm features 221/4"extension. p • +10°/-20°tilt adjustment and 360•rotation Height adjustment range of 9"to 23" LA D provides support of neutral position of (14"total). `" shoulders,arms,and wrists while accommodating multiple Features 360°rotation at 3 points. working postures. Integrated cable management.• The 19" platform has non-handed mouse tray can be moved Tension adjustment feature at two locations to accommodate o 0 from right hand to left hand side. monitor weight and desired tilt tension. • Surpasses ANSI/BIFMA standards. Quick release feature simplifies monitor installation and T • Black powder-coat finish. exchanges. • Monitor rotates 180*and tilts+85•/-35•. Un M Twist Lock Articulating Arm and Platform Available only in Silver. • Features as 17"glide track,soft touch knob for simultaneous height and tilt adjustment,spring m assisted 61/4"height adjustment(11/4"above y and 5"below track). 70 • Features soft-touch knob for simultaneous m height and tilt adjustments. • +10°/-15°tilt adjustment and 360°rotation provides support of neutral position of shoulders,arms,and wrists while accommodating multiple working postures. � • Accommodates keyboard and mouse on the same level. • Includes detachable leatherette-covered gel palm rest,nonslip M pad,mouse pad, mouse guard,and cord management clips. • Keyboard platform made of 90%post-consumer recycled materials and completely recyclable. Free of formaldehydes and 1„ carcinogens and emits no VOCs. M z c� • Z M m X maxon• 1323 Accessories EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 W U w Universal Overhead Task Lighting Universal Overhead Task Lighting w Recessed task lights conserve space and Recessed task lights are black with a 9'long ,LL provide an efficient solution for illuminating black cord that is attached to the right rear cc the workplace.All models are equipped corner of the fixture.(Color does not need , with electronic ballast for longer bulb life to be specified.) y — and cooler operating temperature. Bulbs are included. 0 RECOMMENDATION:Provide a separate LU Recessed task light models mount under storage cabinets or circuit for task lights to ensure proper,long-term operation. 2 shelves to provide optimal space utilization. Models are available Includes 4 cord retainer clips. in two styles and four sizes to correspond with the width of the Shorter width models can be used on wider overheads,shelves cabinet or shelf.Task lights with a fused plug are available to meet and hutches. Chicago electrical code. All models are equipped with electronic ballast for longer bulb x life and cooler operating temperature. LL On/Off switch provides individual control of tasklight within the LU Undercabinet LED Light workstation. °- The Undercabinet LED Light is a low-profile, linear solution for overhead cabinets and Undercabinet LED Lights shelves and is an ideal solution for painted Low profile energy-efficient LED task light U wood storage.It utilizes energy-efficient LED for use with overhead storage cabinets a technology which provides a long life.The and shelves. Ln Undercabinet LED Light provides the opportunity to mount the 20W power supply for 1OW 17"unit ¢ — --L fixture where light is needed most. (.166 amps). o L 20W power supply for 20W 31"unit The Undercabinet LED Light features a metal trough reflector with (.166 amps). diffuser lens.The light has a sleek 1/2"thick profile and provides 60W power supply for daisy-chain starter units(.5 amps).Must N two options for mounting,either magnetically or with hardware. order one starter unit for each daisy-chain application. a Undercabinet LED Lights can be daisy-chained. Specify up to 5 additional 17"interconnect units Z) (M-USLED31AUO)to daisy-chain together with 17"daisy-chain Ln Optional undercabinet occupancy sensor is available which will starter fixture(M-USLEDI7A). automatically turn off the fixture after 30 minutes of no detection Example:Daisy-chain 4-17"undercabinet LED lights: Ln w and back on immediately as the user re-enters the detection range Specify:1 M-USLED17A U using Passive Infrared(PR)sensor technology.Unit features 360° Specify:3 M-USLED17AUO with 10"jumper cord �= lens with 90°outward detection angle,providing a 36"coverage Specify up to 2 additional 31"interconnect units Ydiameter at 18".Occupancy sensor comes with connector and is (M-USLED31AUO)with 10"jumper cords to daisy-chain oc required to be connected in the sequence shown below.Connect together with 31"tasklight(M-USLED3IA);or 17"daisy-chain occupancy sensor to a light,or first light in daisy chain to control all starter fixture(M-USLEDI7A). linked lights. 3500K color temperature. LU • 131 footcandles at 18"on M-USLED3IAS;76 footcandles at CONNECTION SEQUENCE* 18"on M-USLEDI7AS. a w Magnetic or screw-mount option—attachment hardware included. • On 20 watt models,power drive is attached to plug:allow 1'/8"D Power—► Sensor —► Connector — . Fixture space at outlet. w *Cannot deviate from this sequence On 60 watt models,power drive brick is in center of cord and can be attached to underside of worksurface with velcro < mount. o Includes 3 cord retainer clips. Task Lighting • Light available in Black finish only. Meets California Title 24 Energy Efficiency Standards. • Mount under Overhead Storage Cabinet or `' "Instant On"switch with infinite dimming cycle from 100%to Shelf. 15%with the last state memory,allowing the user to set their z For Chicago Version with fuse plug,order FP desired level of lighting. p= option. Fixture automatically turns off after 10 hours of use to reduce w 6'Cord. unwanted energy use. Includes Florescent light bulb and hanger bars. Optional occupancy sensor automatically turns off all interlinked fixtures after 30 minutes of no detection and back on immediately when detection is found. x w Z 3241 maxorr GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Accessories z m Articulating LED Desk Lamp LED Desktop Lamp m • Available in Silver.9'4"cord is Silver. Light comes with a 9'4" power cord. z • Full range dimming from 100%— 10%with last Lamp comes in a Silver Finish. state memory. 6 Full-range dimming from 10%to 100%. w r" , • Uses 7.7 watts at highest setting and as low as Designed for 50,000 hours of life. 1 watt at its lowest setting, providing 85 to 12 Lamp is 15.83"tall. footcandles of light,respectively(16"above ( � Desk lamp does not articulate at base.The .I K worksurface). �D pivoting head provides custom positioning,as • 71/2"round swivel base and 161/2"H tilt arm allow it can be twisted 360 degrees. m m versatile positioning of the 13"lampshade. Uses only 5 watts of energy. • Designed for 50,000 hours of life,providing up to 25 years of daily use.Warranty—5 years(fixture);3 years(power supply). • Color Temperature:3500K.Color Rendering Index (CRI):80. m • Materials:aluminum arm and lampshade,steel base. X • Weight:4.4 lbs.97%recyclable,76%post-consumer. • Certifications:UL and CUL.TAA compliant. • Occupancy sensor available with automatic shut-off after L„ 6 minutes if no motion is detected. D Small Desktop Lamp • 7' power cord " • Lamp comes in a Silver Finish. m • Small profile.Base sits on worksurface. • Lightweight Ln • Energy efficient 3W LED lamp c • 11.8"reach v • *Excluded-Not TAA compliant Ln O 7z Ln C m D M m cn v M m D M m Ln O z D M m N m D Z Z M m x maxon• 1325 Accessories EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 See page 327 for the specification guide. w U w Single Flat Screen Monitor Arm with Effortless Adjustment U w W Includes • Monitor Arm.Desk and Grommet mount hardware. w Description Model Wt. Cubes List w 2 Single Flat Screen Monitor Arm with Effortless Adjustment M-ACC-FMED 14 0.8 821 LL w a w U Dual Flat Screen Monitor Arm with Effortless Adjustment a Includes • Monitor Arm.Desk and Grommet mount hardware. N N a Description Model Wt. Cubes List 5 Dual Flat Screen Monitor Arm with Effortless Adjustment M-ACC-FMED2 21 1.2 1364 N w ua. L N Y O w Single Flat Screen Heavy Duty Monitor Arm o: Q Includes o: • Monitor Arm.Desk and Grommet mount hardware. w Description Model Wt. Cubes List C7 Single Heavy Duty Flat Screen Monitor Arm M-ACC-FMHD 4 2.2 985 O H N I l� C7 Z Q w N HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number x w M Z 3261 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Accessories z m MONITOR ARMS Single' Dual' SingleHeavy,Duty m Features: M-ACC-FMED M-ACC-FMED2 M-ACC-FMHD z m m M m M m Monitor rotation 180° 180° 180° Monitor Extension 21" 21" 221/4" Monitor retraction 31/2" 31/2" 31/2 m Monitor tilt adjustment +30°/-25° +30°/-25° +85°/-25° T X Arm Height adjustment 61/2"to 191/2"(13") 61/2"to 191/2"(13") 9"to 23"(14") Monitor Weight capacity 61/2 to 18 lbs. 61/2 to 18 lbs.per arm 171/2 to 44 lbs. (maximum approved weight) Mounting option Desk clamp or grommet included Desk clamp or grommet included Desk clamp or grommet included D 360°lockout feature Yes Yes No D VESA compatibility 75mm and 100mm 75mm and 100mm 75mm and 100mm ram„ Laptop Tray compatible Yes Yes No Tool Tile compatible No No No C Maximum width per monitor N/A 25" 25" D Worksurface requirements— '/s"to 2"thick 7/s"to 2"thick 7/s"to 2"thick Ln Desk Clamp Worksurface requirements— 1/8'to 2"thick;hole diameter 7/s"to 2"thick;hole diameter 1/8"to 2"thick;hole diameter Grommet Mount 1/16"to 2" 5/,6"to 2" 1/16"to 2" 0 Environmental info 99%Recycled content 99%Recycled content 99%Recycled content � m D n m z m v D M m O D G) m cn m Z Gl 0 Z M m X maxon, 1327 Accessories EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 See page 329 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Actual. U w Sit to Stand Articulating Arm and Platform w w Includes • Sit to Stand Articulating Arm and Platform.Keyboard,mouse antislip pads and gel palm rests. w � Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes List w 2 Sit-to-Stand Articulating Arm and Platform M-ACC-SSKT 11/2'. 111/2" 261/2" 17 1.6 766 LU LU "11W w rr a U Lift and Lock Articulating Arm and Platform Ln Includes List and Lock Articulating Arm and Platform.Detachable leatherette wrist support. Ln Lr, F Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes List a Lift-and-Lock Articulating Arm and Platform M-ACC-LLCP 11/2" 111/2" 28" 16 1.6 725 V) Ln w U Y O w Twist-Lock Articulating Arm and Platform a w Includes a. Twist-Lock Articulating Arm and Platform. Detachable leatherette wrist support. w Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes List (D Twist-Lock Articulating Arm and Platform M-ACC-TLBP 11/2" 101/2" 25" 15 1.7 543 O I— Z Q w HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number x w o M Z 3281 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Accessories z m T Articulating Keyboard Supports m Features M-ACC-LLCP M-ACC-SSKT M-ACC-TLBP n m m m z Keyboard Support Platform style Platform Style Platform style rn G) 181/4"W x 111/2"D 19"Wxll"D 25"W x 101/2"D Keyboard Support Material Phenolic Phenolic Polyethylene Made of 90%post-consumer materials and completely o recyclable.Free of formaldehydes rrnn and carcinogens and emit no VOCs. X Suspension •Nylon glides on lubricated slide Lubricated slide track system:spring Nylon glides on lubricated slide track assisted track system—spring assisted •Intuitive lift and lock one touch height adjustment D Platform Rotation 360' 360. 360. N Platform Tilt +/-15 degrees +10/-20 degrees +10/-15 degrees Platform Tilt Adjustment Release handle for independent tilt Convenient tilt wheel assists desired Soft touch knob for simultaneous rn adjustment tilt angle height and tilt adjustment Platform Height Adjustment Range 7"(21/2"above to 41/2"below)Can 121/2"(7"above to 51/2"below) 61/4"(11/4"above to 5"below) C position platform to be flush with worksurface for extended work area N Platform Height Adjustment Lift platform to raise,lift slightly and Lift platform to raise,lift slightly and Turn knob to release platform; tilt back to lower tilt back to lower adjust to desired height and tilt; tighten knob to secure O Palm Rest Detachable leatherette-covered gel Fabric covered gel palm rest Detachable leatherette-covered gel :V palm rest palm rest c Mouse Pad Independent tilt and swivel with Circular,swivel,tilt,LH/RH mount- In-line to accommodate mouse on D reversible design;mouse platform ing,mouse catcher,gel rest same level as keyboard Mn clicks in on left or right side,no `^ tools required Microsoft Natural Compatible No Yes—by removing palm rest Yes—by removing palm rest m Track Depth 21" 23" 17" D Required Mounting Clearance 181/4"W x 21"D+'A"Recess 19"W x 23"D+1/4'Recess 25"W x 17"D+1/4'Recess M Adjustable Wrist Rest No Fixed mounting and height No Ideal For •Multiple users •Corner worksurface applications •Shallow worksurfaces •Straight worksurfaces •Sit to stand applications •Corner worksurface • Extensive adjustability with mouse (17"or 21") D in line,mouse over or mouse •Radius worksurface Gl forward of keyboard (42"or 48") M Additional Information • Leatherette-covered •Track can be cut in the field • Leatherette-covered palm rests are free of to shorten track depth— may palm rests are free of formaldehydes and affect ability to fully recess formaldehydes and `; carcinogens.Can be cleaned platform carcinogens.Can be cleaned and sanitized.Entire palm rest and sanitized.Entire palm rest z m can be removed for thorough can be removed for thorough cleaning of the platform cleaning of the platform • Installer friendly—ship • Installer friendly—ship standard with double-sided standard with double-sided tape to assist with installation tape to assist with installation •Track can be cut in the field •Track can be cut in the field • to shorten track depth—may to shorten track depth— may affect ability to fully recess affect ability to fully recess platform platform z 0 m X maxon• 1329 Accessories EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 See pages 322-325 for the specification guide. LU All Dimensions are Nominal. v w Center Drawer LU w w w Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes List Pre-Formed Low Profile Drawer(Black Plastic) M-CD1 21/e" 191/a" 22" 3 0.5 216 w C7 Uj z w Ago> w a W Worksurface Mounted CPU Holder a Q Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes List V) Worksurface Mounted CPU Holder(Silver Finish) M-ACC-UWCPU 16-22" 12" 3.25-6" 10 1.1 378 V d li l N W U Q w K D V) ]4 K >0 W Q a W CL a W Q 0 Ln N z Q W N HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number LLJ o I '"' I �� z 3301 maxon• GSA SIN 711 2 EXHIBIT B Accessories See pages 322-325 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Actual. 7rn O n Task Lighting m Includes m • Fluorescent light bulb,6 foot cord,4 cord clips,mounting bars. m Description Wattage Model H D W Wt. [Cubes List m __Az Task Light 24W or greater 15 M-USL24 1.425" 6.875" 18.3" 6 0.4 258 M m Task Light 30W or greater 20 M-USL30 1.425" 6.875" 24.3" 7 0.4 291 Task Light 42W or greater 30 M-USL42 1.425" 6.875' 36.3" 9 0.4 324 Task Light 54W or greater 40 M-USL54 1.425" 6.875" 48.3" 11 0.4 379 v M m T / X to Task Light 24W or greater-Fuse Plug 15 M-USL24FP 1.425" 6.875" 18.3" 6 0.4 357 D z Task Light 30W or greater-Fuse Plug 20 M-USL30FP 1.425" 6.875" 243" 7 0.4 392 Task Light 42W or greater-Fuse Plug 30 M-USL42FP 1.425" 6.875" 36.3" 9 0.4 428 D n m Task Light 54W or greater-Fuse Plug 40 M-USL54FP 1.425" 6.875" 48.3" 11 0.4 463 C - D N O 7Z Ln C T D n m N M m D z rn N --I O �7 D rn m m Z HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number • 1 I I m "' M X maxon' 1331 Accessories EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 See pages 322-325 for the specification guide. w All Dimensions are Actual. U W Universal Overhead Task Lighting LU w w Includes • Fluorescent light bulb,9 foot cord,4 cord clips, mounting bars. w w Description Model H D W Wt. Cubes List w T 2 Universal Overhead Task Light 24W M-USL024 1.125" 3.7" 18.375" 5 0.4 214 LU Universal Overhead Task Light 30W M-USL030 1.125" 3.7" 22.875" 7 0.6 235 Universal Overhead Task Light 42W M-USL042 1.125" 3.7" 34.625" 10 0.9 266 Universal Overhead Task Light 60W M-USL060 1.125" 3.7" 46.5" 12 1.1 323 x U- w cr a w U Universal Overhead Task Light 24W-Fuse Plug M-USL024FP 1.125" 3.7" 18.375" 5 0.4 225 Ln Universal Overhead Task Light 30W-Fuse Plug M-USLO30FP 1.125" 3.7" 22.875" 7 0.6 255 Universal Overhead Task Light 42W-Fuse Plug M-USL042FP 1.125" 3.7" 34.625" 10 0.9 281 Universal Overhead Task Light 60W-Fuse Plug M-USL060FP 1.125" 3.7" 46.5" 12 1.1 348 U) Ln Ln Ln vl W U Lal In Y 0 CL d W CL W Q 0 Ln Z Q W HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number LU z I ."' I " 3321 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Accessories See pages 322-32S for the specification guide. z m M LED Undercabinet Task Lights z Includes m • LED light,magnets or adhesive pads for mounting • M-USLEDxxAS and M-USLEDxxA models ship with power supply • M-USLEDxxAUO models ship with 9"daisy chain jumper M • M-USLEDxxAS is single only(not daisy chainable) M m z G') m Description Model Wt. Cubes List 17"LED Light w/Power Supply(single) M-USLED17AS 1 0.05 623 31"LED Light w/Power Supply(single) M-USLED31AS 1.37 0.09 677 m T X N D z 17"LED Light w/Power Supply for Daisy Chain(starter) M-USLED17A 1.19 0.05 643 U) D 31"LED Light w/Power Supply for Daisy Chain(starter) M-USLED3IA 1.54 0.09 697 n m Ln A D Ln 17"LED Light w/8"and 30"Jumper Cord for Daisy Chain(follower) M-USLED17AUO 0.62 0.03 577 31"LED Light w/8"and 30"Jumper Cord for Daisy Chain(follower) M-USLED31AUO 0.88 0.05 631 O z C T D M m N Undercabinet Occupancy Sensor w/1"End to End Connector M-USLEDOSA 0.22 0.01 118 z m D z m Ln O z D M m Ln m Z HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number • —I M T— � m I I O x maxon• 1333 Accessories EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 See pages 322-325 for the specification guide. w U w Small Desktop Lamp LL Includes w LED light. • 7'power cord. w • Lamp comes in a Silver Finish. lD LU w Description Model Wt. Cubes List w *Small Desktop Lamp M-ACC-DTLAMPSM 3 0.6 272 x Ui w *Discontinuing end of year. w U N Articulating LED Desk Lamp Q Includes LED light. • Light comes with a 9'4" power cord. • Lamp comes in a Silver Finish. a Description Model Wt. Cubes List Un Articulating LED Desk Lamp M-ACC-LED1 6.5 1.2 720 Articulating LED Desk Lamp w/OCC Sensor M-ACC-LED10C 6.5 1.2 872 w U aC e Y 0 _._ w W LED Desktop Lamp a Includes • LED light. • Light comes with a 9'4"power cord. L Lamp comes in a Silver Finish. cr 0 Description Model Wt. Cubes List N LED Task Desk Lamp M-ACC-LED2 3 0.7 552 q. (D \\Z � Q w HOW TO SPECIFY .. Select Model Number x LU z l "' I 3341 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Accessories See pages 322-325 for the specification guide. All Dimensions are Nominal. m n Shelf Organizer m List List—] n m Model Wt. Cubes Core Premium Description Paint Paint Shelf Organizer M-PS014 6 0.4 79 86 m K m z M m v M m T X N Corner Sleeve for Worksurfaces > D Includes D • Corner sleeve,hardware and instruction. PH m List List - C Core Premium � Description Model D W Wt. Cubes Paint Paint N Corner Sleeve M-CRNSLV 17.5" 22.5" 10 1.6 180 200 O z C m D n m to v z m D M rn O z D C) m m D Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Paint Color See pages • z X maxorr 1335 Accessories EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 See pages 322-325 for the specification guide. w v W Electrical Accessories LU w w Description Model Wt. Cubes List C-Leg Wire Clip M-WMCLIPSM(4-Pack) 0.1 0.5 85 Lu M-WMCLIPLG(8-Pack) 0.1 0.8 141 LU w 2 w Available in black only X ,y 2 Receptacles 1 USB Under Worksurface Mt(Shown) M-PWRMOD2UWM 2.3 0.2 621 a 3 Receptacles Under Worksurface Mt M-PWRMOD3UWM 2.3 0.2 430 Ln Available in Storm(STRM)or Snow(SNW)paint only cc Q 2 Receptacles 2 Data Accessory M-COMDOME2 2.5 0.2 451 Ln t� a / N Available in Loft paint only u 2 Receptacles 1 USB M-PWRMOD2WC 2.3 0.2 621 5 3 Receptacles(Shown) M-PWRMOD3WC 2.3 0.2 430 cc 0 � 4/ Available in Storm(STRM)or Snow(SNW)paint only w Q a w a w (D a 0 V) 0 z a w HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Paint Color See page 5 X o I M � �, z 3361 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Accessories See pages 322-325 for the specification guide. m -r Panel Accessories m FDescription Model Wt. Cubes List n m Coat Hook(6 pack) M-PMC6 0.3 0.3 45 m m M m Universal Under Worksurface Hook M Description Model Wt. Cubes List Mn x Universal Hook M-GSAUHK 3.0 0.1 96 a a � D v D n m Large Fabric Swatches Description Model H W List D Fabric Swatch M-SYSFS 16 20 136 Ln O Ln C T D n m M m D rn m HOW TO SPECIFY L„ Select Coat and Universal Hook Select Paint Color O Model Number D See page 5 m m D IMI ' Gil HOW TO SPECIFY Select Fabric Swatch Model Number Select Fabric See pages 6-9 �� z "' l x maxon• 1337 Accessories EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 See pages 322-325 for the specification guide. w v w Touch-Up Paint LU W W Uj List list Description Model Core Premium Paint Paint Cw7 Touch-Up Paint 0.6 oz Bottle M-ACC-TUB 93 103 LU Touch-Up Paint 12 oz Spray M-ACC-TUS 93 103 w X U_ w ° Core Paint Code Premium Paint Code Black.................................MPBL Gunmetal......................... MPR3 w Flint...................................MP02 Champagne..................... MPRS Q Loft.................................. MP7B Platinum...........................MPPL Greige...............................MPTS White..............................MPWT Brownstone.....................MP7D Silver................................ MPR6 Q Muslin...............................MPT3 Ln 0. Ln w U Q W Ln Ln of ?O W Q W d W Q 0 H N Z Q W HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Select Paint Color See page 5 LU 3381 maxon• GSA SIN 711-2 EXHIBIT B Accessories M m Laterals,Pedestals and Storage Standard Options Replacing Lock Cores m • Random Keying—The factory will assign key(s)arbitrarily(see Lock must be in the unlocked position. m below chart for key numbers). Insert core removal key and pull core straight out. n (Reach units require rotating key 90•clockwise past unlocked M Key Alike Process position.) • Order standard product which will be shipped with factory Insert new core with core removable key,hold core into lock installed locks and random numbered cores. and withdraw core removal key. K • Order the appropriate quantity of like numbered cores required Retain original core for future use. z for each workstation or keyed area. m • Simply replace the factory installed core with the replacement cores after product has been installed. Random Key Lock Core Master Keying Numbers Kit Key T Include Laterals X 101E-225E M-LC M-MK22 x Include New Low Credenzas,Towers,Pedestals X 101E-225E M-LC1S M-MK22 Universal Laterals X 101E-225E M-LC M-MK22 L Universal Pedestals X 101E-225E M-LC M-MK22 D Storage Cabinets X 101E-225E M-LC M-MK22 �^ D Hutches X 101E-225E M-LC M-MK22 m Overheads(including RTA) X 101E-225E M-LC M-MK22 c D Locking o 0 Includes c • Each Lock Core Kit includes one core and core removal tool,two keys and instructions. m D n m Ln Description Model wt. Cubes List Lock Core Kit M-LC 1 0.1 39 M-LCiS 1 0.1 41 D \ M m Master Key(1) M-MK 1 0.1 25 J N 0 17 D M m m D Z G) HOW TO SPECIFY Select Model Number Lock Number 0 Z M _ o X maxon* 1339 Accessories EXHIBIT B GSA SIN 711-2 W z W W W W W w W W x U- W W U Q d Ln a Ln Ln a Ln W u a V) to Y cc W Q d W a W Q H N z Q W N X W O Z 3401 maxon• EXHIBIT C N'1111111111 Quotation mill{ 4957 Lakemont Blvd SE, Suite C4-7 Date: 3/5/2019 Bellevue, WA 98006 Quotation#: SOE1463 (206) 730-8871 Phone Quotation valid until: 4/5/2019 (206) 260-8969 Fax Salesperson: C. Kelly Quotation For: Contact: City of Kent Nancy Clary 220 Fourth Avenue South (253) 856-5084 Kent, WA 98032 nclarv@KentWA.aov LINE DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT PRICE EXT PRICE ram„ 1 Misc. Maxon Prepare, Surpass, and Storage 1 $20,545.69 $20,545.69 Laminate:Harvest Edge:Harvest Fabric:Appoint-Dune Paint:Muslin Includes(5)72"H 5 shelf bookcases,(1)36"W 3 drawer lateral file w/worktop,(28)desks including B/B/F pedestals with supports/modesty's and 20"H fabric screen,(2)large tables with"T"bases,(2)24"W x 15"H overheads,(12) 30"W x 15"H overheads,(11)36"W x 15"H overheads,and all connectors/trim/hardware. 'Per attached drawing and BOM. 2 Delivery and Installation 1 $5,980.00 $5,980.00 OT Assumes loading dock,elevator,free and clear access. No electrical or low voltage services are provided. SUBTOTAL $26,525.69 FREIGHT $0.00 SALES TAX 10% $2,652.57 TOTAL $29,178.26 Terms and Conditions: Refer to Maxon Contract Terms and Conditions Approval Date EXHIBIT D INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SERVICE CONTRACTS Insurance The Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the Agreement, insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damage to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work hereunder by the Contractor, their agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors. A. Minimum scope of Insurance Contractor shall obtain insurance of the types described below: 1. Commercial General Liability insurance shall be written on ISO occurrence form CG 00 01 and shall cover liability arising from premises, operations, independent contractors, products-completed operations, personal injury and advertising injury, and liability assumed under an insured contract. The City shall be named as an insured under the Contractor's Commercial General Liability insurance policy with respect to the work performed for the City using ISO additional insured endorsement CG 20 10 11 85 or a substitute endorsement providing equivalent coverage. B. Minimum Amounts of Insurance Contractor shall maintain the following insurance limits: 1. Commercial General Liability insurance shall be written with limits no less than $1,000,000 each occurrence, $2,000,000 general aggregate and a $2,000,000 products-completed operations aggregate limit. C. Other Insurance Provisions The insurance policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions for Automobile Liability and Commercial General Liability insurance: 1. The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respect the City. Any Insurance, self-insurance, or insurance pool coverage maintained by the City shall be excess of the Contractor's insurance and shall not contribute with it. 2. The Contractor's insurance shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be cancelled by either party, except after EXHIBIT D (Continued) thirty (30) days prior written notice by certified mail, return receipt requested, has been given to the City. 3. The City of Kent shall be named as an additional insured on all policies (except Professional Liability) as respects work performed by or on behalf of the contractor and a copy of the endorsement naming the City as additional insured shall be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. The City reserves the right to receive a certified copy of all required insurance policies. The Contractor's Commercial General Liability insurance shall also contain a clause stating that coverage shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respects to the limits of the insurer's liability. D. Acceptability of Insurers Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a current A.M. Best rating of not less than ANII. E. Verification of Coverage Contractor shall furnish the City with original certificates and a copy of the amendatory endorsements, including but not necessarily limited to the additional insured endorsement, evidencing the insurance requirements of the Contractor before commencement of the work. F. Subcontractors Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. All coverages for subcontractors shall be subject to all of the same insurance requirements as stated herein for the Contractor. 1 ® DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) ACCW o CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 7/1i2019 6/22/2018 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). CONTACT PRODUCER LOckton Companies NAME: AX 444 W.47th Street,Suite 900 PHONE FAIC No A/C xt Kansas City MO 64112-1906 E-MAIL (816)960-9000 ADDRESS: INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURER A:Arch Insurance Company 11150 INSURED MAXON FURNITURE,INC. INSURER B:Arch Indemnity Insurance Company 30830 1062840 2210 SECOND AVENUE INSURER C:ACE Property&Casualty Insurance Co 20699 MUSCATINE IA 52761 INSURER D INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES HNIC001 CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 14112964 REVISION NUMBER: XXXXXXX THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUER POLICY NUMBER MM/-ICY EFF POLICY EXP DD/YYYY MM DDfYYYY LIMITS LTR A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Y N 41GPPI010200 7/1/2018 7/1/2019 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1 000,000 CLAIMS-MADE FX OCCUR PREMISESUNLN1 mu Ea occurrence $ 1.000.000 X $250,000 DED MED EXP(Any one person) $ 5,000 X CONTRACTUAL LIAB. PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 POLICY❑X jECT N LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $ See Below OTHER: $ A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY Y N 4 1 CAB 10 10500(AOS) 7/1/2018 7/1/2019 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ 2000000 A X ANY AUTO 41 CAB 1010600(MA) 7/1/2018 7/1/2019 Eaacadent O BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ XXXXXXX OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ XXXXXXX AUTOS ONLY AUTOS $ XXXXXXX HIRED NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY Per accident X $500,000 DE $ XXXXXXX C X UMBRELLA LIAB }{ OCCUR Y N G28131161 7/1/2018 7/1/2019 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5 000 000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ S 00O 000 DED I X I RETENTION$ 1,000000 $ XXXXXXX WORKERS COMPENSATION N 41WCI1009900(AOS) 7/1/2018 7/1/2019 X STATUTE EERER H A AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY B ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE Y/N 44WCI1010000 7/1/2018 7/1/2019 E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 B OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? ❑N N/A (CA,KY,MN,MO,NY,OR,TX) 7/1/2018 7/1/2019 (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If as,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 A PRODUCTS&COMP OPS N N 41GPP1010300 7/1/2018 7/1/2019 A:$1,000,000 OCC/$4,000,000 AGG/$2M SIR A 41 WCX101010O 7/1/2018 7/1/2019 EXCESS WORK COMP. B:WC-STATUTORY$1,000,000 SIR DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached If more space is required) CITY OF KENT IS AN ADDITIONAL INSURED WITH RESPECT TO THE GENERAL,AUTO,AND UMBRELLA LIABILITY COVERAGE,ONLY AS REQUIRED BY CONTRACT,SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE POLICY. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION See Attachment 14112964 CITY OF KENT SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE E SOUTH THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN 220 4TH AV KENT,WA SO ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. 032 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIV 1 ©1988CfOl5 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD to LLa1.i 1111 G11 L\.VUE; LJ1/L•t0 I.Gl it it L.aLG 1L. i Y i 1G7VY POLICY NUMBER: 41 G P P 1010 2 0 0 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 20 10 04 13 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED -- OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS -- SCHEDULED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Or Organization(s) Locations Of Covered Operations ALL PARTIES WHERE REQUIRED BY ALL LOCATIONS A WRITTEN CONTRACT . Tnfnrmatinn rewired to complete this Schedule if not shown above will be shown in the Declarations, J A.Section II---Who Is An Insured is amended to B.With respect to the insurance afforded to these include as an additional insured the person(s)or additional insureds, the following additional organization(s)shown in the Schedule,but only exclusions apply: with respect to liability for"bodily injury", "property This insurance does not apply to "bodilyinjury"or damage"or"personal and advertising injury" pp y ry caused,in whole or in part,by: property damage occurring after: 1.Your acts or omissions; or 1.All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such 2.The acts or omissions of those acting on your work,on the project(other than service, behalf, maintenance or repairs)to be performed by or in the performance of your ongoing operations for on behalf of the additional insured(s)at the the additional insured(s) at the location(s) location of the covered operations has been designated above. completed;or However: 2.That portion of"your work"out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its 1.The insurance afforded to such additional intended use by any person or organization insured only applies to the extent permitted by other than another contractor or subcontractor law;and engaged in performing operations for a 2.IIscUQI•rgo Pb64i&idtf8 41@rMRft4I1%PW4Red principal as a part of the same project. insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. CG 20 10 04 13 Insurance Services Office,Inc.,2012 Page 1 of 2 ADVANCECOPY 11 LL0.l.11lllum I.VVu. L1J 1 I L' O l.ul LI 11L.QLu 1". 1`t 11G7V-t C.With respect to the insurance afforded to these 2.Available under the applicable Limits of additional insureds,the following is added to Insurance shown in the Declarations; Section III--Limits Of Insurance: whichever is less. If coverage provided to the additional insured is This endorsement shall not increase the required by a contract or agreement,the most we applicable Limits of Insurance shown in the will pay on behalf of the additional insured is the Declarations. 'mR44hM Sbntract or agreement;or Page 2 of 2 Insurance Services Office,Inc.,2012 CG 20 10 04 13 ADVANCECOPY A�� DATE(MMIDD/YYYY) CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 03/20/2019 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Heather Hanson NE Northwest Insurance Group Inc. A,'N EXt. 2069322500 FAX Na:2069332006 5431 B California Ave SW ADDRESS: heather@nwinsgroup.com Seattle,WA 98136 INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC M INSURERA: Ohio Casualty Ins Co 24082 INSURED INSURER B: Ohio Casualty Ins Co 24074 Smart Office Environments,LLC INSURER C: 4957 Lakemont Blvd SE#C4-7 INSURER D: Bellevue,WA 98006 INSURERE: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 00000000-0 REVISION NUMBER: 4 THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUER POLPOLICY NUMBER MM CY DI LTR DIYYYY MMIDDIYYYY LIMITS A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Y BLS57014461 11/16/2018 11/16/2019 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE DAMAGE TO RENTED �OCCUR PREMISES Ea o.ence $ 11000,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $ 15,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 11000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 X POLICY PRO- LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 OTHER: $ A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY BAS57014461 11/16/2018 11/16/2019 EO a.'d.n SINGLE LIMIT $ 1.000000 ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ X AUTOS ONLY X AUTOS ONLY Per accident B X UMBRELLA LIAB OCCUR US057014461 11/16/2018 11/16/2019 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000 EXCESS LIAR Hx CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ 6,000,000 DED I I RETENTION$ $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION BLS57014461 11/16/2018 11/16/2019 X STATUTE ER PER H AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTNE Y❑ N/A E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 yes, esc(Dbe u der ESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) Certificate holder is named as additional insured with respects to operations of the named insured. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN City of Kent ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. 220 4th Ave South Kent,WA 98032 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE HLH ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD Printed by HLH on March 20,2019 at 08:29AM Smart Office Environments LLC COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CCU 8810 0413 THIS IaNDORSEMENT CHANGES THS POLICY.PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY, COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EXTENSION This endorsement modMes Insurance provided under thefolloWng: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART i1V. I��7C SUBJECT ?AQE NON-OWNSD AIRCRAFT 2 NON-OWNED WATERCRAFT 2 PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY--ELEVATORS l 2 EXTENDED DAMAGE TO PROPERTY RENTED TO YOU`Tenant's Property Damage) i 2 MEDICAL PAYMENTS EXTENSION 3 EXTENSION OF SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS—COVERAGES A AND B 3 ADDITIONAL INSUREDS—BY CONTRACT,AGREEMENT OR PERMIT 3 PRIMARYAND NON-CONTRMUTORY—ADDITIONAL INSURED F.JC gN$ION 6 ADDI•r1ONAL INSUREDS--E?CTENDI"D PROTECTION OF YOUR"LIMITS OP INSURANCE', 9 WHO 1S AN INSURED--INCIDENTAL MEDICAL ERRORSIMALPRACTICI;AND WHO IS.AN INSURED— 6 FELLOW EMPLOYEE EXTENSION—MANAGEMENT EMPLOYEES NEWLY FORMED OR ADDT71ONALLY ACQUIRED ENTITIES 7 FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS AND PRIOR OCCURRENCES T 7 KNOWLEDGE OF OCCURRENCE,OFPLN8E,CLAIM OR SUIT 7 LIBERALIZATION CLAUSE 7 BODILY INJURY REDEFINE© 7 EXTENDED PROPERTY DAMAGE 8 WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US— 8 WHEN REQUIRED IN A CONTRACT ORAGREEMENT WITH YOU ! 0;2012 Llbwty MuWal tnstnnm CCU 8810 0413 Includes oopyrto Med n6ter at at QIRM tna,with its permission. Page 4 of 8 a94.1076 1 s6311.00. 116✓i7 mutt= I rv%ly AeaClay I */ia/sola at.1620 w(sue.) I raga D or is Smart Office Environments LLC With M$pact to coverage afforded byihra-endorsement;the•pravtsror Ofthe po(Icy apply.unless modIffed by the endorsinept , A. NON--OWNED AIRCRAFT Udder Parsgrapl5 ItdEusi'ons rif 6eciJorr(-. over S&A-Bodily Injury Ag$Paoperty Damags Liabl(Ity, exciusibn•g,Airara€;1;,AW-b f W-Wl craft.does not•apply Eb an aln;raft presvidod. ' 4. it is not owned by any f6sured; 2. Ills hired,chartered or'loaned with a trairied'patd crazy; ; '1"11e pitot:In command holds aawonfly4ffefcfiue,codiffeate,:issue'd ty khe daty oor►stituted'authority of the tlnited States offkrnerica oratlada;destgba(inc�her or him a.tmrr�lria[ctai;or amine pilaf;and: It Is not being used to tarry persons Qr propsttyfor a charge. However tYie jnsurance afforded Icy thisiirtr�ision,does notappty Ji tare b-'available to the insured ather'valtd and cotlectibte:insurarice,aaihetharprlrrialy,. ca�s(atttettharrTn§urance,r i(ian 'applyepOoictityinaxc `oftkiv p8(10y),c0dngentorohartyo#tiarbssts;.thatvuoa{dalso apply toi3re;Ecsss covered tmdar hls;pmuisiAn. NVR-OWNSD-WATERcRAFF Under Paragraph 2.Exclusions of.Section I--Coverage A-Bodily Injury And.Property Damage Liabmty, Subpeir'agrnph(2)of exctusron.g.Alrcraft,Auto•OrWatomrai9C19 replaced by the following: This exciysiol does not apply.W. (2) •A watercraft ynu-cro not awn that Is:' (a) Less-than 52teetiong;and {b) Not.baing used to carty persons or properly for a.eharge. t C. DROP.ERtTY DAMA09•UABEL(TY-•E1,EVAT0RS i. 'UndarP�ragrapit�.Pacoiup€pnsof�eotlonl -C,�ue a �-t3aclT1 rah y IruryAgd P�operty#]abiad�e Lialattf[y�Subparagrd fjls(3),'4)�dr1d(s)ofexctustonj,(7arriageTo(7rcpet(ydoenFapplyifsuch "Prc►pertY damage"reau(ts fpam the ass afaiavators. For the porpose ofthts pm siari,etelators dp not irictudeuehtnie Vahlciel3tfiearr'ilftsorhdis€sdnseil"frtautotrobllsssrvlroripalropel�ttons. Z. -The:V(owipgis added to-section IV-Corntperctal Gonera!Liability Conditions,Condltton 4.Other Insurance,Paragraph b.IrxcossinsaMttcer' 'The trtsurancea>drddd by:thls Omvlstbn uf•this end$mainent.ls.exces$.overarry property insurance, tfseti er frrlm0ry,excess;coptlrtgohtpr:an achy other basis D. EXTENDED DA►YIA0S TO PROPERTY RENTED'l'b'lroil(T.enant's Property-Dainago) If Damage To Premises Rented Te Ydu is not citherwise excluded'frbni ails Coverage Park; 4. Linder Paragraph 2.amiusions of;Section I-Coverage A-Bodily lnjuro and Property Damage "Lat�tlfty; a. The fow*. from the last paragraph of exciuslon 1 Damge To Property Is replaced by the iolimft P;a agc rapha fi),(3)and(4)oft llb:exciRcslr n.do riot:apply to:7'piroparty damage"(cthes thsn damage byffre,rllgtitritnc�, Spiosioq;smoke,or leakage from zRaut0=t(c$re protection system) (() Premises rented to you fora period af7 or.feuwefconsecutive days;or ((i) Contents:that you rant or Tease as part of a premises rental.or lease agreement fora PO`d of more than 7 days. Paragraphs(1),(3)anrt:(4);of this exctusbri,do-notapply'to'proper(y damage"to contents of pmmises rented to you fors perlod of 77 ort4ec cansenufiyc,days:: A separate€lmil of Insurance applies to this coverage.as•descriM1jn Section I[I--Limits of Insurance- CCi$8 76 0413 d�2o73 tlkrOW Mtutua!Insurance Inclades copy4ohiou materfal of lowmnce-ssmk s t]Ro%Ina.xRAIle parminlon. Page 2 of G og�ys¢7e }„cstssan 1 xea�macer eexetd3eitre�ueaiy Aearapy!�/a5/foie as7.e,:o,sx trnxl I enge an x ae .. Smart Office Environments LLC h. The lastparagraph of oubsectlbn 2.Eacciusionsas replaced by therTollowing: ftWeldns.c.through n.do not applyto damage by fire;Ilghtning,exploslon,smoke orleakage from aptomt tlafire piote�:tfon RYSterns to+prr�misestuhits rented:#a:Yon octet yoccupied by yptix-azvlth:permissfari of tt�,ao�ritar~R�epafafe Ifinit;�f.(nsdrancea}�ltes to Darna�e 7o:Pceratses RonIled'Ca`lou as.descrSbadkr 5eot3cyn UI=LWts Of Insurance. 2. Paragraph 6.underSectloty III—UmIW Oflnsurance4a replaced bythe following: 6. Subject to Paragraph 6.abcve,the.Damage To Premises,Rented,To You Umlt is the mast vie VAI pay under Coverage.A'for damages;because of"pmperty d'an a96?'do. a. AnyonepreMlse: (1) While rentedto.you;,or (2) Lprohflct�ecxtlennW;sdyfstoeyrtorsu,.ortemporaiily= .upledby you vhpermissionofthe owner for da;aebtcrflng, taet o p e a from>automatic ar b.• Contentsthat you rent or lease as partof a premises rents)or lease agreement. •3. ,Asaegardacoverage provided 4sythN ptrsvtslon D.MMI DEDD-AMAC31~10 PROPERTY R1 WED TO Y06 ggtranfs:Property Pam y-F'aregraph 9:a'of:Wl itio)Is is replaced with the following: 9.9. A coriftctfora tease or`pretnlses.HoweverNthat pdrilon of the contractfora lease of premises that Injdemnifles arty;person ororgarlmaUan'faT damage,bytira,, ohtrdng,e*psion,smoks,or laakago from.:autsrnlatic fire proteatlon sysi ms to jireiA whilirentad to you ortemporadly 'occupled'byyoiz vftths perrdfaslan ofthe.owner•,otfor time,to contetits of sttch premises That are fndfC ed inyour premises rentat or lease e9reemerit Is rrotan"insured contract". >=. MEDICAL PAYMENTS WENMON- IfCoverage•C Medical Paymehta Is not otherwise eXcluded,the Medical Payments provided bythis pollcyare amended,as folbws: Under Payments, :Saab"ragminfr(b).of Peragraptito.Wreplaced bytltefolf0wir g:. ;{I* The expenses are incurred=4 reported within three yeara of tha.dats of the accident;and l~. f`F1rNS1OH OF-SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS—COVERAbE9 A AND 13 1. Under.Suppfementary Payments-Coverages Rand B,Paragraph).b.is replaced by the following: b. Up to$3,00(1 for cost of bail bonds raqukad,beoause ofecctdent�ortrW4-raw vlojatfons a►isrn9 out of the use ofarip vbhtcia to which the Soddy.Injury Llahillty:CoveMge applies Wdr do not have to furnish theseboftds., 2. Paraggraph-i.d.-Isreplaced bythefollowing: d. All reasortab{eexpenses inctrrred°by.the Inpuied at pur request to assist us In the investigation or defense of the cfafrr+of Nslrii?''lncfu0,ing aotual loss of'earnings up to$600 a day because of time off from work. td, ADDTTIQNAL INSUREDS-I3Y COWIF ACT,AGREEMENT-OR PERMIT 1. Paragraph-2.underSectlon 11—Mho Is-An Insured is amended t'a•Includeras an Insured any person or •orgaribation whom ypu hava.agreerl'to add ets an,sdditionai insured l a Wrlttaen contract.written ,agreemenT or permtG. Such person ororgan�etlon Cs err addlflonaJ int�trred bu#�nlYuultl�respsctta gabltky for"bodltyInipy","'peopejiydamagiePcr"personafariladvertisingInjury"'.cause?' fnwhols.drinpa by: a. T'otrrAots or arratssjonsx or ilia acjs or or VNl Ions:pf those agting on Our-Behalf;In the perf tmanc:e ofjruur on goln6 operationi.fort€aaddltlbnaNwred tttatare:the subject of the wrifl en contract pr Wrltterr or"property-Marriage occurs, or'the"persuxatand.advertfsl`rfg fnjuty"3s comrtiiRted,:subsequerrt tattre sfgr+ing af:stiohwciEieii cc+otractPrw>t#an agraerhanb of �241s':[.IbertyMutuarinsuranc� ' CQ 8$1i)0�413 (>>ctudea eopyrigtltectmat�rial of Insurance 3ervlcesOriics,lno„wlih ttspettritssSon. Page 3 of a as��Ants I scsasdsa (j6.Sa Ha��az'•Cenat[Sntsa;(T(oA3Y 8Wb1eYid'f1Q/nose tt•ite,xo rri 1swr� I race ss os.ze Smart Office Environments LLC b. Prerrifses orfacilftfes rented by you or used.by you;or• The maintenance,operation gr�Use byyou of equipmentrenfed orl�awe4l to you bysuch person or organfzatfon;or d, Operatlons perrornied byybu pr on your behalfforwhIch the state or political subdivision has Isksd a pan'n1t subjectta ft followving E rddjtlorral yrq #sCons; ; (1) This lnsu>ant a does nofappiy(q"badpyinJury`,°prpperty damage",ar personal and adverf}s ng injury'arising Dot of#tte:�pora'a1� perkrrned,,for the state orpblitleal sut�diuSsian; (2)- Thls7itsurarice does not applyto%odlly injury'or°property-damage included wfthfn The "completed operations.hazard". I (3) Insuiartpeappil'esto.premises you own,rant,orcontrolbul„onlywith respect tothe following hazgrc a) The exlstenee,maintenance,repair,construction,erection„or removal of advertlsirig signs..awnings,,canopies,cellar entrances,coat holes,driveways, manacles,rnq�uees�,holst away openings,sidewalk vaults,street banners,or decCrallGns at J,-nl ar exposures;or (b) The construction,.orpotton„orremoval-ofelevatoMor (a) The ownership,maintenance,or use of any elevators covered by this insurance. Ncrarever; 1. The insurance afforded to such additioral Insured only app�fes tothe•extent pemil[ied by lawv;and ,2. if coyerage ptovir ed to the additional Inbred Is requlred by a•contr4ppbr•agreement,the insurance afforded to such'addidonaftnvured w111 not be i roaderthmn:that whlch.yw. am toqulred by tiis ccntrmct or agreement 6 providaiors uch'addirmnal insures J With respect to Paragraph U.aboys,a person's ororganization's status as,an additional Insured under this endorsement ends when: (1) Ail worts;tnoluding matisdals,.parts or equipment furnished In connection wdh suih work, onthe project'(ogier titan setvioe,maintenance or repairs)to be performed by or on behalf ofthe''addMonal irisured(s)at the location of tha covered operations has been completed;-or (2) Th6t portion of"yoUrw rk"putof which the Injury or damage arlsez has been put to its intended usoby anyperson ororgan€zaban otherthan another contractor or subcontractor engaged in,performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project. With respect to 13aragraph 1.b.above,a person's or organization's status—ns an additional Insured under this endorsement ends when thetrwtitlen contract or written agreement with you for such premises or facUlges ends, Willi respecfis,'to paragraph Cc.above,this 3nsuranra does notapply tq anp,occurrence'which takes place after the equipmertt:rental orl'sase agreementhas expired oryou have;returnedsuch equfptrmenttothe lessor. The insurance prgvlded by this endomlement'apprtes only if the written contract cr written agreement Is signed pri6rto the"bodily m1pty"cr°property damage' Wa hava ngOutyto defend an addrtlattal lnsttrdd underthis on dorsernent uptitwo rocelve Written notice of a"suft" ,'byAheacldtttortai Instilredns requfred In Paragraph b.of Gonta ion 2.Du aiinfFte,5vent Of Occurrence, •.Offetus%Claim-Cr Suit under Section IV—Comm erclal,Ceneral'f fabli lty ondittons. C 2013 Ubery Mutuarins:lrance 00 88 9"0'04.13 lndudes oepyrighted mat�ael cf Imumerc9 services orfioe.ine„with fW permisalon, Page 4 of 8 A9474JId 1 66.-Uf9 $ 1 10-17 NdatW C=tdUUaU0 J Y011y ZtMWAy I e/16/2016 12e18,�Qa Dtt rear J-sag4'12 2e 26 e Smart Office Environments LLC •2: With Cas act#a#hearJJsuranQe proufda� bythIs endartoment;thd�oliom4ng are.added to Paragraph 2. Exelusfvns tMgsr$ect1on I-CwveragsA-Bodliy:injury AndPrope4 Clanmge Lia6i1 ty: ThIsr1nourance does not opplylo-. a. "Bodily injury'or'property,damage arising from the sole negligence ofihe additlonat Insured. b. "Bodily Injury°or'property prlarto,YoVg6mr6dncing operations at the to�affonwhrsresucii'bedllylnfury*'ar'.propert�r'dam"a'{�A'nCaurs. � c. "Bbdilylnjpry"I"praperty.damagd'or"personal and-advertlsln59n]ury'arising out of the randering of,orthe,Wurato render,any professional architectural,.engineering orsuJveyfng sepAces, Including: (1) The.p nparinq,aapproving,;arfaflTngto prepare or pprove,,(n aps,shop drawings, opiti€ons,reports;survey's,tield•orders,changebrd'em ordrawings and specifications;or (2) 'Supervisory,inspection,arohTtecturai or engineering eotivitles. This excluslon.appliesgven if the claims againstany Insured allege negligence or other wrongdoing In-the supervislon,hiring,emplbyment,imining or monitoring of others bythatlnsdred,if that'mcurrence"which ,caused the"bodily tC4juiy"Ur°proper damage, or the.offensewhich caused the"personal and ndvsrtlsli g., Injury~',jnvofvedfhdsehderfng of;ar lie failure to rentter,any professional arc!itfectural,englnesNng or suNeyln�j servTcec d. 'Bodily injury"or"property damage"occurring after: (1} All;work,; cludlrig tYrakerieis,parta:prI uIpmentfurntshW In connccUon with such work, - - on the project(other thanservIcei malnzenance or'repairs) to be, performed by or on ,behalf of the additional.insured(s).ast the loos#lon of then covered operations has been completed;or (?} That portion of'your wW.out of which the}njury or damaga arises has been putto:ds lntended uses byany persptr,or org nTzatiori otherthan an&ercontractar or subcontractor erigaged In poiforinjpg.cpeWont1or.apdncipal as a palfofthe same project. :e. Any person or organfkation specifically des[gnated,as an additional Insured for ongoing operations by.a separate,ADtSrt16NAL,JN$REr)--'OVtiillrmS,I"ES.SEES-QticoNTRAC`CORS endorsement lssued.by us and rnade.e part pf'this policy. . 3.. With reppecftd tho htsuranbe afforded to these additional Insureds,th'o following is added.to Section III-- Llmfis•Oi'insurance: If coverage provided to the additional insured is required bye contrast oregreement,the most we will pay on behalf ofthe addltlonal insured fs'the amountof Insurance; a. Required•bythe contVtct or agreement;or K Av0abla under•the.applfcable Limits of insurance sh&m In thetleciaratlons; whlchr Is less.. This endorsement shall not•increase.the appllcabla l lmlts oP'ingurance.silawn In the Declarations. H. Pk1MA1kYAND NQWCONTRIBUTORY ADDITIONAL INSURED i:XrMSION � ,T'hIWpmMsTbn.applies fo any person or.organizatlon who quallfles asan ad04Tonal•insured under any form or endorsement under-thts policy. Condltlon 4.Other Inspramp of SECTION IV—COMMERCIAL WNERA1.1.1AWIATY CONDITIONS Is m aended as follows: a. The following Is,added to Paragraph.o.Primary insurance: If an additional lneurad'spollcyhas,an 0 t?erinsuMnce provtsTon making Its policy excess,and you hava agreed Ina written contrast or wrftten agreemeint to prbMde the additional Insured aoVerage on a p rimary and riancantrlb'utory bases,thls)a allcy.sttatl Sr's primary and via wwJl not seek obntrbt tian from the addifiaj fnsured`s polioyfor drainages we cover: W2013 Ubwly)oUwal insurance < CC3 8S 1D 04�3 Includes ocovigbted maferrsroF[nsurance.Sstvicas orfice;Ina,wlih Its permieston. Pago S of a I TH9T09?0 J SGS:R6do r 10-19 HatteT CMtiff tka( TWAY 4mc1ey I.4/75/2%0%291,0 lD rA•l=%.Y I ;,SJq 3a of X6 ' Smart Office Environments LLC b, The Milowing Is added;to Aaragrgh b.E�ccass Insurance: g r Wlaerz auriltsn contractirsrwrltten;asr.►ant,g gret 'otherthan a premises[ease,facillties rental Gonfl'dCt•flr Et reement an,:e u�pmerr�reratsl e?rEease.caniracG;�r'a� ment'r orpermrt is.9crect by a sEatb orAotiiioaJ slpdiVisiori Bshy,@bit tau encia�add(fonaf Iri,�ured does notrequlma.thlsinsc�rance fo be.P4y orpx€mary and r�on contributory=lhls fnsur.nca tseorcess over any"[her insurance ' - f�evltEtictr"f�ieaddh'anai tnsured€s designated ss a Named li7egt�d�� Regardibss-of the written you andan additional insured,this insurance Is excess aver any ather insurance,.vhether prtrCtary,exc6se,contl%lent or on arty otherbasls for wiilch the addifiorial Ensured.has betap addi%asap a4ditionai es. 1. AQDITIONAL iHSUREDS-WrNDED-PROTECTION-OF YOUR-LIMITS OF INSURANCE- Ti Is prrnifs on oppiles to ar y person or organization who qualifies ab an ftltlot-1 Ensured uhder anyform or gn4brsetrtent qt►d rth[s:pol€cys. Z, ThvibdowingIsadddd to Canditlon 2,Defies In The Event Of Occurmnce,Offense,Claim or Snit: • •An addifional tnsared•.underthis andarsamehfwlli assbbn as practicabie; � 8. elve written notice Af an"occurrence"or an offense,that may resu[t'in a dairn or"suit'under this insurance to us, b, Tender the•defensa andjndemnity of any clam or'suie°tc all Insurers whom also have Insurance avaliabte•io:the addlfjanat insured;and I C. Agree-to makb available any'other insurance which the additlonai-Insured has for a foss vie cover undarthis Coverage Pad. A. V41v h 1w du�r to deknd or bdOmnifyan additlonlal Insured under this endorsement until we teoelve written notia of a"sulk by the additiot�aE ifzstvred. ! ,2, or men-agreeinerlt br tits�in:s+af insuraneeas sftedInta;IJee[atticns:af this pdi[cy entE deflneti in Sebtion lil-LlrttitsoflnaaYBttrr of t€iis policy,tiiiEiicheverare Iess..These I[mlTs are Encluslve"Pend not in addition•tathe•Gmits•of•lrrsuCance avaAabEe undertltis poflcy. , J. WHO[$AN INSURED-,tNGID!_urAL MEDICAL,ERROPW I MALPRACTIQ.E I WHO IS AN INSURED-F" LLOW EMPLOYEE!rX ENWON•MANAGEMENT.1E.MPLOYE:L's Paragraph 2.a:(1)of Sectlon 11-.Who Is An•insured is replaced with the following:� (4) "Bodily lNurf or"persenaF avid advertloing in)ue: {ar Tb yau,.to.your partners ormeiabats,(IE you are�partnership orjdmt venture),to your,members (Epyou are a Rrniteri tlaEalbty ooKrlpanys;fo a og-,efnpkiyee" thils'iri the course t3is or her enipioynserit Ar<psrfornriri�duties.riaiated�o'tt�condilct tlf your bus[ness ortayvarbtE►er' 'Wuntw*o>kgWl whbi perfonnlag dQ4ee jelated1oSte.conduct ofyour busirtass., 4b) Tgtbe-spouso„011d,p0ent btofteorslsterofthdtco:"employee"!or"volunteer worker"asa oansequence of FaragrapEi�t}ta)akruve,• (r:) Forvthtch there,Is&V obllgatldn to share demageswah or'repay;someone else who must pay damages because of the€cijurydescribad Jrr Pamj graphs I�}•(a)or(b)abova,or .(d) Atisi"ng out of his arhorpTI.Widing r3ru'ling,to provide professional health ogre services.however, if jwu,ars not in the business of providing professional healthcare services or providing professional'hea[th care perionnal to others,orif coveraoefcrprovUng professlonal health care sences.lsnototh"se•eoccludedbysepangte•endarsement,this provision(Paragraph(d))does notapply- �120'r3•L]'berry brvltrarits�urance � CO 88 io-)4 43 matM41'o insum'Ci Servkes Offrte,1f;a,y t h Its pSu i(sslorr. Page 6 of 8 ?Dt74D76 r 66b.7D6b9 r SO-a7 NaagnY cesei.'.Sansa r 8ouy a9asagy,l 4I�1B/]a10]]�Sa iRq Dt!.tse+a) 14sga 1¢,05�e Smart Office Environments LLC ;Paragraphs{a}end,fb}gbave do rib#oppfyt6,"bodlly rnJur/or"personal gird aoVorf)s1no injury'caused by on etr+piot+eaa?uhtr.ts oct g ht asCipervisory eapacfty for yom'Supetviso cfiy rya as used herein means the :`ert3pioye '&"jDbtasponsibilitiesasslgrtcd.b yoxi,fnatlrnmsithz direttsi�p tvistongfbther".J nmploynee:of'y qrs, Notivover,non :af 4hese"egiployoes"are Ins reo for:16a4y,�jvey'or'$ewbndl aind advert ing'Injury"adsing out 4their'011MI con uc whic7':i�.datined asthe pu;piksefill rantfllifttf intarrt tsrcr�trse"bsrdffy injuri{'ar`persarral and' adrierfis(j�g fijUty',ar ttrsed fri wliafenr`iri pfir!by thairintnxicafion by.lfquororcantrolled substances. :The coverage provided by.provision-J,is excess over anyother valid and•collectable insurance available to your `eopioyse K. NEWLY'1*t.712 91)AR T3.101T10NALLYAcquREn ENTI'ffl s Paragraph 3.of-Sectfori Ii•-Who-ls'An Insured is repfaoed byfhefdllowfng: l Z. Any oq�an'katlori-ybil newly aquire deform and ovk�whicfi you mair$aln ownership or majority Interest. ANquaitfl n a Nemed'lnsured ffthere to no%tttgt simflar insurance avdhhlo to that organization, •Fiovd®ver. :a. CovoraoVndee this provisipp fs.affaWad opty uriti11he.e4jratton of the policy period in which the entitywas•actiuleed or formed byyou; b. CovwaorA does not apptytt"Wdlf Jpjqry"or"pmperty-darnage"that ocourred before yott actlulmd orformed tho argafftWorr;acid. a, Qbverage.13 does not:apply'fQ"personal and adsrerflslfsg;?Injury"'arJs)ng out of an off�nee :commiffed Before you acgytied&Iorrned the;brg dnn,. ' d.. Records.and.devorlptiono of oparations'.must be maintained by-the first foamed Insured, No.parson,or organketion is an Insured with respect to therandtict of wycurrent orpast partnership,Joint venture or limited iiability company that.is not-shown as g Named Insured In the taeciarations or qualil`m as an insured underihls provision, L. TAIf X.JRE'TO D•ISCLOSi^HAZARDS AND PRIOR OCCURReNCES ! Under S'ection.IV—gommeicWGeneral Wadlllty., added to Condition 6, Represehtatiorrs,- Gayrfallfrl�tq dlsofiasa ail hazOrtfs be pttdr'oodurrertCes"existinb:a$•ofthb Inceptforl date of the pailay shall hbtprM]uc tcs the cover age affoFttRet)sy#his policy provided auchi`aitrsre to disclose'afl hazards or • prior"Qccirrrences"Is no€•dn�ridonal. ' m. KNOWLEDGeoF oCcuw.emCE,o�FLN8la,mAim old suiT .Under Sao6onTV.,Corrrnterofil Gonerall!_fablHEV Condlitfons,'the•foltouring•is added to Condition 2.Duties in Tho Ewdrit of c=r" ..ClNns:e,:C 6h or suit: i iCftOlR+iBdga than'"t}CGGirA9I?CGpy off9Fi50r clairn or°stilt'by on,agent,•servari#'or"employee"of any Insured at an riot irr'itseIf constitiAe knozvledc�a.of the itisureri unless an insured•ilsted under Paragraph�l.of Se�dn 11—Who is.An(nspred ors,persdnvvha has i5aen desig'n teti.fiy+ti�ern to receive reports of "acerjrrnces;offenses,ciatrri�arFsait shalthave:receied soot'npficeirnCn it?e agents servant ar employee.. N, LISSRALI ATION CLAUSE- If u+ revise:this Commercial General Lfal�fiity edanslon&iabrs mantto'provide mgro coverage vMirtitout.additional premlum-charga,your�pollcy wiltvalomafic,*provide the coverage as of:'tne-c*'file ri msion is motive in your A, BODILY 1NJURY'REDEFlNEP: Urrcler$*gtlpn V—Def$r(tionb,DeValffon$..le replaced Whefotlowtgg; 3: "Bodily.,injury'means,physical injury,sickness or::disease suste irerf hya parson.This Includes mental 'anguish,mental-Injory,shook;'fr(ght or-death ttfatriisraitsfrom Ouch piiy064injury,afokness ordlsftm 0201aLibeq.Molualtmmmm i CM 88 10 04 43 Includes conyttg)ttod material of:lnsursnm 5ervlcas Ma,•fn(.wM its yermissfon, Page 7 of 8 394'l497� 158517BSb l.SE-S?�iL7Et1:CC7��SCAY,O'l-eA�Sy�'eattay l ah�/:oix Yt,ie,ss t,S lr�ri ! Idea x5 ct 1a Smart Office Environments LLC P. MENDED PROPERTY DAMAGE Exclusion a.of COVERAGE A.BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGI;LIABILITY Is replaced by the following: a. Expected Or Intended Injury 1 "Bodily injury°or"property damage"expected or intended from the ptandpolnt of the Insured.This exclusion does not apply to"bodily Injury"or"properly damage"resulting from the use of reasonable force to protect persons or property. Q. WAIVER OF TRAN$FER OF RfGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US—WHEN REQUIRED IN A CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT WITH YOU 1 Under Section IV—Commercial Gonerel Liability Conditions,the following Is added to Condition S.Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us We wawa any dght ofrecoverywe,may have againsta person or organFzatiorr:because of payments we make inr injuryor damage ad sing out of your ongoing operations or"yourwprft"done.under a contmet whit that Berson or organization and included inure"prodacts-calnpleled operatldns hdnrd"prov(ded. 1. You and that person or orgonlzation hAve.agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that you waive,such rights egalnst thmt,person or orgontevon;and 2. The Injury or damage occurs subsequent to the execution of the written contract or written agreement 02013 t.iberty Mutual Imurame CG 88 10 0413 Includes ccpyrtyhted rnw�naf of Insurance Servim Offlce,Ina,with Ks perrnfssron. Page S of 8 A06-7nA7b I s6sa96ga P 16.Z7 riceeer Ceztrtianry I Nolly 9xa1nY I a/7.s/a016 SIIii�,aa 8!7 Ida) I pnga s.e of�a Smart Office Environments LLC COMMERCIAL AUTO THIS ENDORSMENT CHANGES THE.POLICY.PLEASE R AD-IT CAREFULLY. BUSINESS A(.JTO COVERAGE ENHANCEMENT.ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance pravfded under the-fbiloWng: E3USlNES8,4U7lJ Q*V.EMGE FORM With re$Peet to coverage affortled.t y this endorsemsnt,the pnMstons-of the Im1lc r apply unless modified by the endorson.�en�. , COVERAGt~INDEX St] CT ! PROVISION NUMBER. ADJOI'TIONAL INSURED'BY CONTRACT,AGREEMENrlOR PERMIT 3 f1CG1DEt�iTli,Aif36p, DEPLC}Yglifi �' 12 AND£I}DUTIE&11+1 tHEEV .F JqT C? AGG![3r=tT,Gt.;RIM 8U1TR'i.OSS 18 AMENDED-FELLOW EMP46?*EXCLUSION ` ti AubiO;VISt7ALANb'i�ATA,:ELEM' Nlr,r 2UIPM5NT'0OV;RAGE 13 BROAD FORM JNSURED � 1 BODILY INJURY RebEmNED ( 21 EMPLOYEES AS INSUREDS(Including empioyee.bired auto) 2 EXTENDED,CANCELLATION pp1 D1'1'I6N" 22 EX7!�AL3fP] NSIr 'BI CTAT}1~Wiz COVE"�lw � 10 GLASS REPAIR«-WAIVER 0F.DEDUCTIBLE, 15 141REDAUTOPHYs1CAL'D"%GE(#!oI 4In§employee hired alto) e IzAWIDE GAP 14 PARKED AUTO COLLISIDN CC7VERAJE+(WAIVER OF bEDt 1 C7laLp i 1S P9�SONAI.EFFEGTS COV4RAC 11 PHYSICAL DAM IAGE-ADPI'TIONAi--TRANSP6f tTArn .80-1�1.S1 COVERAGE S Rt WT-AL.REIMBt1F'�,sWr Olt.. 1 - g SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS I 4 TOWN ASOR 7 UNINTFhtT NAL FAILURE TO WSCLosE ml l RDS i 17 WAIVER E FTJ" ANSFEI: 0 0 6HTS OF-AECbVi5RY AGAINSTMERS M-US •l 19 SECTION li-LIASit,1TY COVERA-GE is amended as follows. 1. BROAD FORM INWRED SECTION.i1-LtAk1t.I'7'Y COVEIRAGE;•paragraph A.1.WHO J3 AN INSURED Is amended to include the fbilowtfig as an'Insured_ d• Any legtmy IricvrpeMed en(*dwhlch yo[r own more-Won 80 pefcenf df the voting stock during the policypedorL 1,46wevsr'intme'cloesnot{rictudeany6irganrrzatibnthat: ' 'S'if) 1s a partnarshTg,or Jotn#•v�nture;bn .4�) t$an Ir�ured under eny tither acttotrtobe policy;(3) HWeWlausted ifs LWtofinsurance unde.rmy,otkroreroutomoboa,poftoy, Paragraph d.(2)oflhts provrslon does not apply to a policy written to apply specifically In excess of _tills porrcy. e Any,organlza#ton-ynu,n9%vi,,acgvtrs or fnrm�other titan a parfierehtp,(xr joint venture,of WhIch':you ov+m;trlat�therrl5d'peecetttcfthevotlisg'stock. Ttzis.autamaticcoVQragei:iseffotdgdoniyi'or'CBiS;days: fro''rimthd clatooi$cqu sitian.ortormoom However,oovara9auns3er.thts rovlsiosi'doe$riotapplSr .0)•It-there Is similar hsurance ora seff-lnsured retentlon.plan avaTlaeta to thatorganlzatlon; CA88100110 lgC10 iopy[ bfsd�m ctofiritkuanca�n o{>�vifttjRsperriylSaton, Page 1of7 sp+raeva t senFdlia !36--t7 tfasaer emt!lSepCe t No%xJ-*"Ur 1 V/1s/.2M 32110444 vr! taus} 1 pane 2 of la Smart Office Environments LLC •(2) Ythe•Umitwof Insurance of'any other IRpmnce•polioyhave been exhausted;or (I) To `bodily:Injury"' or ".prb,perty damage" that ocoum- d before you acquired or formed the organization, 2. FAPLOYEESAS:INS'U1MDS SECTION If—LIASIpTir COVERAGE,patagrph A.1.,-WN0 la AN Itd$UAIM is amended to include the Ynliowing as an insured: t: ny'omployee'pf yours whlia#tsing:a t vered."auto"you da not own,ft1 alor borrow,but only foracts itbin the$*er..of helr employment byyou, inruranae p'rovitled by#i7is.endorserru`ntis:e teas over : • any tither�surance avellabiato-may aem(,ioyee•. A*"employee.of yours whIW opetatlrig an�aotif hired or:.borrow d vitder s vi tten contract or egreeme[tit in that°employee's".narije,with your permission;WhRe perforraing suites"related to the :conduct of ycar.bnsfness and'withfi the scope of them ermID ent, tn$uranGe provided by thls :,endorsaml�ntis;'excas'¢opter'anyc�ther.insutahcgavaTlab6atr� 'e rnl�iRyea"• ADDITi.ONAL INSUf�ED•SY CONTRACT AakEEMENT OR ERMIT SECTION'II—LIABILITY COVERAGE,pgregraph•A:i.._W40 iS AN INSURED Is amended to Include the following as an Insured: h. Any pecan or organiza n witty raspect:to the.opetaftri,maintenance..or use%of a caveMtl°auto provided ibat.y p.;6nd such peftn:.tir argpr*,aijoh have atgresd In irWilden coroact,alreem64,or permit'iswecl to you by.govemmentot or putsilo siithhor$X,br,add.$uctt rsari, or or entzat#on.z}r. gownrnetltat or public autltritl+ta ibis poii'W as an`inqur6X: t Mowever,such-person pr orgapization is ad"Insured°: {� Qrily with respect tts tine gperatlon,ma[nterrasice or usaz�fa cwvered°auto"; :{ Y7rtly r`hQdiiy Ih]ury"or'pmpe ty,damage"cailsa¢ty arr'`accldetie Which tata;!s place,zAer you eocecuted thewxttlen contmdcaragreemKk,or the O&M tiastieen fsstaedtoytru;.and :{3}O,nty3orlha.dur�iorzgftiratcon�cF.agc reementorlierrsiii 4, SUPPLEMENTARY WfAtNTS BtrCTION ti.—LIABILITY CQVP,RAG'E,C00rage Extensions, :a,,Ssipr iemerimry payments,paragraphs (2)•and(4),ere repi;cerf liy the followlV (23'Up to T3,00D for.cost•of ball bonds(jhChadirag bonds for related hall c vb ttons}to ireti beCaus of aki!! Cw Idebt!we,cpVl�k Wo dol iot�1tiv to ftirnl_sh these bondsS t4).A I reasobable expenses iheutr6d lay iheirisured toss.of earnings up to$50 a d4 becaase•6ttime 60fro7nwok 5. AMM13ED'FsLLONP.EMRI.OY ')EXCLUS101�1 Ian iliose Jutisdtctlons where,by(i�w;feifow drriployess:are not sirtrtled t0;he pMtectton afforded to the employer by the workers,c6r rpensatbry exclusivity,rule;or atmllar protoolioni the fnlio0ng pt0ision Is added: SECTi4N;Ir-LIAB(U7Y; FELLOW EMPLOYEE does•nIYtappl ilf the'bodily Injury'results from the use-of a coyerePautci`you own jai'him. � SECTION Ill-PHYSICAL I)AMAdi5 COVARAGLg l.z amended as•follows: I 6. H19ED AUTO pHYsiGAL,DAMAGE. Paraghaptr A.4.Covermga Extensions.of SE-=0N III-•I?HXSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE,is amended by adding tits fdllowingz If hilred d Autos!'are covered"as}to'0 for`LTab)Hty Covoraga and•it<Camprelronslvo,Speciftad Carries of Losg:!or Coillstoh dav�rage ale.prov(ried untterthe t3Ctsir7ess Auto Coverage Fr1rrn for any"auto°you oven, ren3ii Ft�Ystcal't?arnsge°sbirer a `prQvided.ars extended-to`autos": i a. You hire;rentor•bormyr,or ol C4zOTp;llt�nclylNuwallnsuranGprYagY;Ni,r�g}Yt5(eStveci ' CA,88!10 0110 Page 2 of 7 sacvaM t MUM I i¢-yr,•tsasrex eerectiaaLe'i tSo7ly�sarseY r 4/i6/�0�6 iaixolBO PN {zvr) 1 v6ge s oe ni Smart Office Environments LLC b. 7'4vC`ernpioyss"h1r orra sunder iwritte�x co nfmdbragreeme,rit:Inthat"employseW name,but only if the darrlage atx}urs wfi(la the viaicl Is being used 3tr the cdrtduct:of your business, subject to the Wtowlrig limit and deductible:, A. 'The most wovwDfPsy for"loss'In any one°accident°or"loss'1s the smallest of- (2) The actusi,cashvalua.of the damaged or stolen property as of1he timb ofthe"loss";or -(3) The crest ofrapairing or mpiacing'thadamaged or stolen:property with other property of like kind and quality4 minus::a!o.edl4ble. B• 'The-:deductible .will be equa;I to the largest,deductible appllcable:to any owned "auto' for that :coverage. C. SuEa,(e(#,to the limn!; dedu#,$la;and.sxte" provisions cti3�Wimi In t�rietprovlston, we will provide coverage equal to the broadest couerade applfcaliisfo any rouered'"ants you ovm. 0, r8ubject to a tna)dmprn of T"(50 per•°amldsn";we will also rravet the actual foss of use of the hired "ante"if ft resutts from an paccl6enf', you arb i�pliy ilable and the lem'r Incurs an actual ffnas clal loss. E. This coverage eAensf.on does not applyto: (1) Any"auto"that is hlred,,rented or borrowed with a driver;or (2) Any"auto"that is hired,ranted or bormwad-frdm your^employee', , Por the purposes of this provision,•SECTION V—DEFINiTiONS'is amended b}.adding the following: "Total loss"means a"los?-111 which•the.�osf-of repairs plus the salvage value exceeds the actual cash value. 7. TO,'WING AND WDR- S�_=CTl014Ili--PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE,.paragraph A,2.Towing,Ivamended by the addition of tl�foll(yMng: We Wfil'paY tmWrig.andi,tabor,casts theucrod, up to the limits shown below, each tlrne a oaysred 'auto' clase4ed and rated as a prlvale passengel`tyP*%"lighttroclt'or"medium trocejs dlsab[ed: a. For pftta passenger type vehioles,we.will pay up•to$50 per d2ablomentl b. For'light trucks",we will pay,tip to$60 per disablement, "Ught trucks'are trucks that haves gross vehicle weight(Gvq'of I Opal pounds or rasa. c. For°medlurn trucks°,waw)Ihpay up to�$i-0 per disablement,'*Medium#rucks"are trucks that have a gross vahlelawalgiA¢GV\M of 44,abl—20,000 pounds. HoWaver;the labor-must be perfornmed at the plats of disablement. S. PHYSiCAL r]AMA(4E.ADDITIONA:LT'2ANSP.ARTAT16N EXPSNSP COVERAGE Paragraph A;.4.a„Covelag&EKtartslon of Si~OTION Ill,—Pt-3VSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE,is amended to provide.a Ifmit oft5a par day and a'rr Wmum i rWt cxf$1,500 CARS 100110 lncrudss co2Crr0 LibertyMtttstai rasvren aompuriy Alt im. feservad> i tryr]gh#cd.rrLtitc�lia9oflnsurortceSerircesLftJir�.wftl$apennission. P2tg0 3 of 7 1941014 16682865* i U-17 Wow Coubf ivaca.l Na11Y bxng3EY l :�salnq�p zz,awo tv rrdx} I ehg4 4%k u Smart Office Environments LLC .9,1 AXWAL REIMBURSEMENT SECTION 01 OHYSICAi.:DAMXGE COVERAGE,A.COVERAGE,is amended by adding the following: a. YtIQ?N1i1.{day-•up'to175 per day for rental rr l»tibursemenk expensasincured by you lbetl� t;bfae� `auEo" bec4usr� of cTctonC' 4r "i6ss td an ""auto" or,Which vre•?also pay a lose undef Cbrripiaherteiv6; ;8pec}fled Causes.of�t dso it 0001sl4rr Givdrag"se. Wo will pay;only'for thoe$ :expenses'Thoafred efbsrftie first to the covered`auto,.` 6. Rental Relipbursomentvvlk ba based on lire rental of A eompwvd to vefiioletwhich In many cams may be sUl fal�tlally lase fharf 7b ppr days aril w€II+xtI' he allmyec tqr ate period gftfinelt should ts�kr:t r i�epalrorreplacs the veh isle wikh r sonable.speed ands7mllar quality,up#a :nv6d=m of 30 clays. .c.. Va will asu pay-up to$�Co for-reasonable and necessary expenses Incurred by you to remove and replace your toots and,94vIpr6.antfroni the covered'"sate. d. Thls coverage does not apply unless you have a busihess necessity that,other"autos'avalWa for your use-and operation cannot fill e, :1f°loss"'}iesuite-fr-rnt{efates fillet[afaeovcrreti"au; "t�f tPie;prlvate A sssngortype,waw�i pay imclet. fhis cpVerags only tliatarnpnnt of your rental reien ttjsenjent eXpegseswhleh:is not already provided underF2iragraph�.'Govei�ge Eiitetistvn_ . Na rJedyct€bte applies to•this coverage. l^cr tits ago of this endgmoreient provision, materials and equipments do not include "personal ,. e[foefs"'•asdeflned tnpnivislcrn 11. 10.EXTRA EXPENSE•BROADENED COVERAOR, r�rider S CT10N ll!W F' 1'i'S(CA E)AMAGE COV.ERAGIEi:A.C0VERA' .JE,-V a Wtfl pay for the expense of tetumthg istolon pavarQd*auto":ta au 'fk+o a?dmum argotm va*111 pay€s$1,000; 11_PERSONAL EFFECTS•COVERN,;E A; SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAW COVERAGE. A. COVERAGE, •1s amended by adding) the following: If-you have purchased Ogmprehensivo Govern 4,on th€s,,,policylbr;an"Autrx you awn and#hat'autd! Is stolen,me vr"Iltpay,wittio atspplictitibri of a deduetlble,up to$8f10 for personal effects"stolenwlih ibe"auto.." The Insurance provided under.this provlslon•19 exam over any other collectible insurance. a. SECTION V—DEFINITIONS Is amended by adding the followng; Fprthe purposes of the provtslon,,"personal effects"rrlaan-tangib€eprapkriy thatls wom or carried by an Insured." `Personal effects"'•does not Include tools,equiprnen�,:j4wo ry„azoney or securitle% .12,ACCIDE#AL.At1 AG DEPLOYMENT SECTION III--PHY&ICAL:DAMAGE COVERAGE;B.iMXCLUSIONS Is arhandad by adding thefollowing; If you have purchased Complehdn5ive of Coljlfiton,Coverage:unosr ihls pott'�y,:the exaluslon for"loss" xalating�to mechanical hroakdawrcdoestrotapply,to tt a•.aco(dintai 60'htv9e of arl alrtrag:. Any insurance We,provide shall.bs ems.over en}r other cottactihle insurance or reimbursement by manurAddrees,waiartty. However,w"Oae to payany de-.dlt bie aagpll6abl0 to the outer eovorags or warranty» 13.AUDIO,VJSUALANDDATA ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COVERAGE 5EC110N lit -- PHIWSICAL. DAMA9E COVERAGE, B_ EXCLUSIONS, pxoeption paragraph a, to exolasfons.4.c,abd 4:d:ls:dol6teti:2utd replaced wittr,the followtrtgs: �ZdloLitfet�r.Muruat.lnsvronceGompany.RlrrrghtsYesenisd: � CA 88 IQ 0110 Page 4 of7 ae��aa76 t seses,6se 18-3t'/htcek d=t"i:vC* I rour.rentity i 41i6/20x6=,16t1b Hf =y I a°4° of 16 Smart Office Environments LLC Exclusfon 4.Q and.4,d;do not apply to: a. E(scVonla quipmehltf�at t cety.3 br,#artsrftAudfo,visual or•dataaibnats,whether or not designed solely for theregroductranafsouotl,:ifthe;egtflorftentistrarmax�entlylri atfedTnthecovered°auto""at thet3rrreofthg."Bars'andsGto utpmen#isriestgnedtopasaleiy.gperaladbyuseo�fthepater-frond the'auto°s"alectr oal system; in or upon the covered "auka"•and,physical damage coverages:ske ptouided for#�a ca�rered"au ;ror . "loss"'tipcuts 9010r t©audio,00af or data eiectronfo equipment or accessories used w4h this Mylpment;then Our ablfgatfon to pay,f6r., repdr, ratum or replace damaged,ar`Sidlert property will be reduced•bya:&140 de&otlbla td. LOAN l LBASE.GAP COVSRE iGR •A. 'aregmpb C„ WIT aF;IWURMCE of SECTION Al — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE Is zmended,by adding tide following., The most-we wig pq for a`"tofal loss"to a coveted "auto"owned by ortleased to you In any one aco(dshr Is the greater ofittls. I. 8afance due tir derthe terms of the Iciarl:or tease.to which,the damaged covered"auto'is subject at$tie time oftho"'los•S'!Ti;SS�IiT�;$TnoUnt OF l a: t)vetdue;pattartCs and#(rtatcal perfial#[es assncia#ed v�!lth tFivseayrisnts:as oPttte s3ate:zif • the:"fans', b. Financial penalties Imposed'under,a lease Aue to high rntleage,vxcesstve use or abnormal wear and tear; c. Gosts far ekbuided.warrantfes,Credt.Ltfe Insurtnce,Health,Accident or Disability Insurance puro3las�t with the lvari.or lease, d. Tiiadrafer6r tllbwrbalstoes':fmrn.previous:-faansslrleases. t e. Filial payment due updora°Balloon L o . f TflQ ttdllar:gnhount;:of any unre afred damage whlch op,dwTed prior to the `total loss of a covered"acrto"; . g Seaurlty depostis notrefunded by a lessor, Jt. A1l:refund$pays le-njrpatd Ito yOti.as'a,rs'sult ofthe early termination of a lease agreement or as a.rastrlt-of ttle;early termination-of i�fiy tivarraOty or i4t apbd'ed service agreement on a t.vered*aorta, i, A0a ...onfritrepresent(ngitays, 1 j loarsor. e tsrrr�iRetlotrfees:ar 2. -The actual Cash value or the damage or stolen property as of iha tlrne ortha°loss`. Aq adjustment for.depr+eciation and physloal condition w111;lae TnAde1h datermining the actual Cash value at-the tfine Ofiho"foss",'This a gstrnent fe'not;appifcabTa inTeas.. B. AD131T.16NAL'PONDI7IONS This coverage applies only to the orlg?nal login for which the eQveted¢auto'that Incurred the loss serves as collateral;or lease,**non the covered''euFn"that lnatrrrfv d fhg Iota C. SEalON V—DEFINTIONS is changed by adding the 1bl(owfng:. As used In thle andorse!nent.pravfsion,the following deflnfflons apply. "Total lass" means a"loss"In whloh the,cast of repalre•plus the salvage value exceeds the actual cash value. A"balloon Wan'!Is orto vAh'pariod!4.pay_mogfo that are(nspftfolent.,to repay the baipnoe over the terra of the loan,therebyTequlring;ziarbe f6611rayrnerit CA 8$1001 1f} �z0iatl�QrtyMutual•rn9L�ryoaCompmiy:rAtll►r�hlGCtts4nrad (artnites cap�ryfgtita material of 4nsur+accSvrvlcas Ofl7ce.wilft icc pennlssFon. Fig@ S Or7 ��+�+soa � aas2A59s.t 36.17 Ha�oz L�cStSoltn t TIa91y Bm,E2CY�L�as/fRYB tII,lniao sn ter} r r,ye a o2 se . Smart Office Environments LLC 16,.GLASS REPAJ`R-WAIVER OF DEDUCTIl3LE Paragraph 1). Deductible of SECTION ,IIi — PHYS[CAL.DAMAGE COVERAGE is amended by the addilioti'of thefollowing: •Nade4uctib;9 sppllea to glass:dartiage V..'the glass is repalred Tattier than replaced. 16. FARK03 AUTO•COLUSION COVERAGE(WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLO i Paragraph D. D6ductlble of SEGTION 111 — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE is amended by the add[gbn•bf the follov4rlg; The dedu'ct9nle'does. not apply.to "Joss' oausad I)TfiWllfsTPrl to such povpred "auto" of the:private .passenger•tyke or light'weighttruok h,a gross Venlcle:welght of 1'b;000 lbs.or less as defined by the mar ulacturer as maximum loaded wa[ght the"auto"ls,deslgnad',to carry wh'l[i3 It Is: a. Jr!the charge of.an'lnsuree; b. Legally parked;and C. Unoccupied. Tha,'loss"must,be reported to the police-authodtles wlthln?A hours,of know damage. , The total amount of the damage to the covered "auto•" must exceed the' deductible shown in the •�®claratiorrs: `(his'-prcrvislon does not apply-to-any "loss' if the covered 'auto" is in thel charge of any person or brgan(Za,lvn'engaqo in ttte automoba le business, SECTION'IVJ-BUSINESS AUTO'C©NDiTIONS Is amended as follows: i 1Y. UNIRTENTIONAL FAiLURE`TO piSCLOSE'HA2A.RDS -SECTION IV-SUS.INESS.AUTO CONDITIONS,Paragraph S.2 is amended'by adding the following_ If you unintentionally'.fall t94 solps"nyr hazards,exposures or,t�ternal faate;e sting s of the inception Mate orrenetval data of the RuslnessAt to Covbraga poTm<thp:coverage affardad'by this poilo3l will not be prejudiced. Ho4veyer,you must repoit�tita-undisclosed hazard of exposure;as,;aoort a%p.r>ioflbdLble after its discovery, �anrl ive,have tfi e nght to-WI1ect addtt{onal prernlurn for any such'hazard or^exposure. is.ANIENDE0 DUTIES iN THE EVENT'OF ACCIDENT,;,CLAlM,'.SUIT,.OR LOSS, .SECTION [V— 13PSIMESS AUTO CONDITIONS, paragraph A.2.a.'is replaced In Its entirety by the following: a. In the event ofaccidentr,claim,"suli"or'loss', you must promptly notify us when It Is known to. 1,. You;lryoq are an individual; 2. A partner,if.yow area partnership; Z. Member,If you are a Itmited liability company; 4 An executive officer or the'"employes°designated by-the Named Insured to give such notice, If you are a corporatlon. 'To the extent possible,notice to us should lncNde. (1) How,vrhen and v�hera the'adaident'or°lass"Took place; .(2) The"Insureds"name and address;and (3) The names and addresses of arty injured persons and.witnesses; I 19_WAAJVEft'OF"YRAISFER OF RI,GHTS.OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US MEG 1ON tV—SUSiNESSAUTO CONDITIONS,paragraph AS.,Transfer of Rights pfRecovery Against Othersto Us,is amendedby'the add1tion of.thefiaI1ow[nw i Iftha.person arorgan[zatlon hes.waived those rights before an'accidenf'oir "loss",our rights are waived also, 92Lt7A liAariy i'Rutual Inscu&rtce Gamr�nY•�.ri9his re�aru�n-. CA,0810 0110 in*dee•cop}r;plitau rr�aie o)oflnswnoose vices t;7MU *oth its nezir,fsslnn. Page 6 of 7 zss�as7s 1 ssszesse 1 aA-Yt aaaner Caso�Clcoee i se�l`�arncaar 1 aJlbl�ars.uela,se zet teary l p?5m�of xe Smart Office Environments LLC 20. HIREDAUTO COVERAGETERRITORY I SECTION IV--BUSNNESS AUTO CONDITIONS, paragraph B.T., Policy Period, Coverage Territory,is amended by the addition of the fotlowing: f. For"aufcs° hired SO days or less,the Coverage territory. Is anywhere in the world, provided that the Insured's responsibility to pay for damages is determined in a"suit; on true merits, in-the United States,the#errltories and possessions orthe United States of America,Puerto RICO or Canada or In a settlement we agrea to. This extension of coverage does not apply to an "auto" hired, leased, rented or borrowed with a driver. SECTION V—DEFINMONS Is amended as follows: 21. BODILY INJURY REDEFINED Under SECTION V DEFINTIONS,definition C.is replaced by the following: 'Sodlty injury means physical injury, *Rnass or dieeasa sustained by a-person, Including mental anguish,mental injury,shock,fright ordeath resulting from any of these at anytime. COMMMON POLICY CONDITIONS 1 22. 1XMDED CANOELLAtTION CONDITION COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS,paragraph A—CANCELLATION condition applies except as follows: If we cancel for any reason other than nonpayment of premium,we will mall to the first Named Insured written notico of cancellation at toast 60 clays before 1tie effective.date of cancellation. This provislon does not apply in those states which,requirr3 mom than 84 daya prior noarce of cailcoilagon. *;W10Llber MUIUal oompsny.Mifnhmre d t CA$$10 0110 indades oopyrtghted rratelal lie permtssson. Page 7 of 7 29474976 [ scs:*So8 1 1041 Vwftr 0"4i4:odto 2011y Dmclvy 14090t5o FN 101r) i 9D90 0 01 18 City of Kent Business License SMART OFFICE ENVIROMENTS 4957 LAKEMONT BLVD SE S E C4-7" BELLEVUE,V4'A 98006 r Please tear at perforation -------------------------------------- BUSINESS LICENSE Per RCW 82.14local sales LICENSE MUST BE PAID ANNUALLY BY and use tax must coded No:1715 for all quu coded JANUARY 1st TO AVOID PENALTY sales within the city of Issuance of License Does Not Imply Licensee's Kent. Compliance with State and Local Laws THIS LICENSE MUST BE POSTED IN A CONSPICUOUS �� PLACE.NOT TRANSFERABLE OR ASSIGNABLE NAME AND ADDRESS OF BUSINESS BLOC-2170341 CJ1 lty SMART OFFICE ENVIROMENTS 4957 LAKE-MONT BLVD SE STE C4-7 MAYOR BELLEVUE,WA 98006 Tax Registration The City of Kent Endorsement At 2204THAVE SO KENT.WASIINGTON 98032 Request for Mayor's Signature KENT Complete this form and route to the Office of the City Attorney W ASH I NGTON (Print on cherry-colored paper) Approved by Director C>w 'J0 Originator: Nate Harper Phone (Originator):x5082 Date sent:04/01 /2019 Date Required:04/05/2019 Returned Signed Documentto: Nancy Clary 8 Contract Coversheet Attached YES Has this Document been Specifically Authorized Vendor Name: Maxon FUrnitUre, �r1C. in the Budget? Yes BNo Date of Council Approval: N/A Account Number: D20095.63500.330 Brief Explanation of Document: To purchase and install office cubicle furniture in the new modular building to be placed at the PW Operations site. Due to increasing need for space at the Operations facility, PWO is placing a modular building that will add 1440 square feet of office space to house the Sewer and Storm divisions. This Agreement with Maxon Furniture, Inc. provides office workstations for the 28 workspaces to be installed within this modular building. Funded through the Public Works Operations, Storm division budget. RECEIVED DENT LAW DEPT. Date Received by City Attorn : //Comments: U� RECEIVED Date Routed to the M or' ffice: AA City of Kent Date Routed to the City Clerk: y 5 (6( Office of the Mayor Date Returned to Originator: adc(W19756 418